You are on page 1of 462

INDEX

1 GRILLES

2 DIFFUSERS

3 SWIRL DIFFUSERS

4 SLOT DIFFUSERS

5 LOUVRES

6 TERMINAL BOXES

7 JET DIFFUSERS

8 MISCELLANEOUS

9 CHILLED BEAMS
INTERNATIONAL
PRODUCTEN TYPES BLZ
PRODUITS PAGES
PRODUCTS

1
Roosters
Grilles
Grilles

Instelbaar wandrooster A-100 • G-100 1 010


Grille à ailettes réglables A-110 • G-110 1 020
Grille with adjustable vanes A-120 • G-120 1 030
A-130 • G-130 1 040
Vast wandrooster afvoer A-710 • G-710 1 060
Grille d’évacuation à ailettes fixes
Exhaust grille with fixed vanes
Rasterrooster A-770/780 1 080
Grille à grillage fixe
Grid core grille
Afvoerrooster met filterframe AH710/770/780 1 100
Grille d’évacuation à logement pour filtres FH101/201/371/711/771/781 1 102
Exhaust grille with filterframe
Doorgangsrooster A-250 1 110
Grille de transfert AF980 1 120
Transfer grille
Kanaalrooster AS • GS 120/130 1 140
Grille pour conduits circulaires
Grille for circular ducts
Roosterkern AC300/400/500 1 170
Noyau de grille
Core grill
Staafrooster A-300 1 180
Grille à barres
Bar grille
Tabletrooster Z-300 1 185
Grille pour tablette
Window sill grille
Vloerrooster AG300 1 190
Grille de sol
Floor grille
Staafrooster A-400/500 1 200
Grille à barres
Bar grille
Computervloerrooster AV500 1 202
Grille de sol pour salle ordinateur
Computer floor grille
Wand - sportrooster AF800 1 210
Grille murale salle de sports
Gymnasium wall grille
Vloer - sportrooster AG800 1 220
Grille de sol salle de sports
Gymnasium floor grille
Rond staafrooster CB400 1 234
Grille à barres circulaires
Round bar grille
Rond rasterrooster CB780 1 236
Grille à grillage fixe circulaire
Round grid core grille
Wandafvoerrooster GK150 1 240
Grille murale d’évacuation
Exhaust grille
Wandtoevoerrooster GF161 1 250
Grille murale d’alimentation
Air supply grille
Alle wand- en plafondroosters worden geproduceerd volgens DIN7168 nauwkeurigheidsklasse “middel”. Details kunt u steeds opvragen via info@grada.be
Nos grilles et diffuseurs sont fabriqués selon le DIN7168, classe de précision“moyen”. Pour plus d’informations, nous vous invitons à nous contacter sur info@grada.be
All wall and ceiling grilles are produced according to DIN7168, permissible deviations according to tolerance class “medium”. For more details please contact us at info@grada.be
INTERNATIONAL
PRODUCTEN TYPES BLZ
PRODUITS PAGES
PRODUCTS
Vloerrooster GD200 1 270
Grille de sol GD241 1 280
Floor grille
Volumeregelklep GT007 1 290
Registre
Damper
Veiligheidsrooster GD203T 1 300
Grille de sécurité GP360 1 310
Safety grille
Vloerrooster VM011 1 320
Grille de sol
Floor grille

Plafondornamenten

2 Diffuseurs
Diffusers
Instelbare plafondroosters CE100 • DE100 2 010
Diffuseurs circulaires à diffusion d’air réglable
Circular diffuser with adjustable air pattern
Vast rond plafondrooster DR160 2 030
Diffuseur circulaire fixe
Fixed circular diffuser
Multidirectioneel plafondornament EG400 • EH400 2 050
Diffuseur multidirectionnel
Multidirectional diffuser
Multidirectioneel plafondornament EE100 2 070
Diffuseur multidirectionnel EE200 2 090
Multidirectional diffuser EE300 2 110
ED400 • EE400 2 130
Instelbaar multidirectioneel plafondrooster BE • BF100/200/300/400 2 150
Diffuseur multidirectionnel
Adjustable multidirectional diffuser
Vast plafondafvoerrooster BC100 2 162
Diffuseur fixe pour extraction
Fixed exhaust diffuser
Plafondrooster met geperforeerde plaat DA340T • DA360T 2 170
voor toevoer DA360S 2 171
Diffuseur à tôle perforée pour alimentation
Air supply diffuser with perforated plate
Plafondrooster met geperforeerde plaat DA350/370T • DA350/370S 2 180
voor afvoer
Diffuseur à tôle perforée pour extraction
Exhaust diffuser with perforated plate
Geperforeerd instelbaar plafondrooster DC560S 2 190
voor toevoer DC560T 2 200
Difusseur à tôle perforée à difusion d’air
reglable pour alimentation
Adjustable perforated air supply diffuser
Geperforeerd plafondrooster voor afvoer DC570T 2 205
Diffuseur à tôle perforée pour reprise DC570S 2 207
Perforated diffuser for exhaust
Instelbaar vierkant plafondrooster CS500 • CS600 2 210
Diffuseur carré à diffusion d’air réglable
Square diffuser with adjustable air pattern
Instelbaar rond plafondrooster CC600 2 230
Diffuseur circulaire à diffusion d’air réglable
Circular diffuser with adjustable air pattern
Plafondpanelen 2 500
Diffuseurs pour faux plafond
False ceiling diffusers
Alle wand- en plafondroosters worden geproduceerd volgens DIN7168 nauwkeurigheidsklasse “middel”. Details kunt u steeds opvragen via info@grada.be
Nos grilles et diffuseurs sont fabriqués selon le DIN7168, classe de précision“moyen”. Pour plus d’informations, nous vous invitons à nous contacter sur info@grada.be
All wall and ceiling grilles are produced according to DIN7168, permissible deviations according to tolerance class “medium”. For more details please contact us at info@grada.be
INTERNATIONAL
PRODUCTEN TYPES BLZ
PRODUITS PAGES
PRODUCTS

3
Wervelroosters
Diffuseurs à jet hélicoïdal
Swirl diffusers
Wervelrooster met instelbaar luchtpatroon WT100S 3 010
Diffuseur à jet hélicoïdal WT100T 3 020
Swirl diffuser with adjustable air pattern WT500S 3 025
Rond wervelrooster WR200 3 040
Diffuseur circulaire à jet hélicoïdal WR250 3 041
Circular swirl diffuser
Rond wervelrooster met verloopstuk WR230 • WP270T 3 045
Diffuseur circulaire à jet hélicoïdal avec
pièce transition
Circular swirl diffusser with transition piece
Vierkant wervelrooster WS200 3 050
Diffuseur carré à jet hélicoïdal
Square swirl diffuser
Variabel wervelrooster WR300 3 080
Diffuseur à jet hélicoïdal variable
Variable swirl diffuser
Vast wervelrooster WS400 3 100
Diffuseur à jet hélicoïdal fixe WR400 3 101
Fixed swirl diffuser
Geperforeerd plafondrooster met WS360 3 120
werveleffect
Diffuseur à tôle perforée avec effet à jet
hélicoïdal
Perforated swirl diffuser

4
Spleetroosters
Bouches à fentes
Slot diffusers
Instelbaar spleetrooster SE600/SB600 4 010/bis
Bouche à fentes ajustables SE800/SB800 4 014/bis
Adjustable slot diffuser
Plenum voor instelbaar spleetrooster SP100 4 011
Plénum pour bouche à fentes ajustables SP800 4 015
Plenum for slot diffuser
Trommelspleetrooster RT150 4 022
Bouche à rotules réglables RT350 4 025
Drum slot diffuser RT500 4 028
Vast spleetrooster TE600/700 4 030
Bouche à fentes fixes
Fixed slot diffuser
Plenum voor vast spleetrooster TP100/TP700 4 031
Plénum pour bouche à fentes fixes
Plenum for fixed slot diffuser
Tweezijdig uitblazend spleetrooster TE370 4 045
met centraal afvoersysteem
Bouche à fentes à jet bilatéral avec grille
d’ extraction centrale
Double-sided pulse slot diffuser with central
extraction grille
Vierzijdig uitblazend spleetrooster TS600/700 4 047
Bouche à fentes quadrilatéral
Square slot diffuser
Licht-spleetrooster QA • QT 4 050
Bouche à fentes pour luminaires
Slot diffuser for light fixtures
Alle wand- en plafondroosters worden geproduceerd volgens DIN7168 nauwkeurigheidsklasse “middel”. Details kunt u steeds opvragen via info@grada.be
Nos grilles et diffuseurs sont fabriqués selon le DIN7168, classe de précision“moyen”. Pour plus d’informations, nous vous invitons à nous contacter sur info@grada.be
All wall and ceiling grilles are produced according to DIN7168, permissible deviations according to tolerance class “medium”. For more details please contact us at info@grada.be
INTERNATIONAL
PRODUCTEN TYPES BLZ
PRODUITS PAGES
PRODUCTS

5
Buitenmuurroosters
Grilles extérieures
Louvres

Buitenmuurrooster voor inbouw W-331 5 021


Grille extérieure
External louvre
Buitenmuurrooster voor opbouw WO331 5 023
Grille extérieure pour contruction
Surface mounted external louvre
Stalen buitenmuurrooster G-801 5 030
Grille extérieure en acier
Steel external louvre
Aluminium buitenmuurrooster W-801 5 040
Grille extérieure en aluminium
Aluminium external louvre
Dakkap WBP 5 060
Grille de toiture
Penthouse
Zandopvangrooster GB900 • IB900 • WB900 5 080
Grille-récupérateur de sable
Sand trap louvre

6
Ontspankasten
Boîtes de détente
Terminal boxes
Variabel volumekasten BA • BT 6 010
Boîtes à débits variables BR 6 030
VAV terminal boxes

7
Jet-roosters
Diffuseurs à jet d’air
Jet diffusers
Jet-roosters JD 7 010
Diffuseurs à jet d’air JD210 • JD310 7 020
Jet diffusers

8
Diversen
Divers
Miscellaneous
Aansluitplenum DP100S • DP100T 8 010
Plénum de raccordement
Plenum box
Aansluitplenum voor CE100 • DE100 DP150S 8 020
Plénum de raccordement
pour CE100 • DE100
Plenum box for CE100 • DE100
Kanaalklep KF100 8 029
Registre KO100 8 030
Damper
Aluminium overdrukrooster VF045 8 049
Volet de surpression en aluminium
Pressure relief damper
Over- en onderdrukkleppen -F750 • -U750 8 050
Volets de surpression ou de dépression
Pressure relief damper
Luchtventielen V-061 8 092
Ventouses d’aération
Valves

Alle wand- en plafondroosters worden geproduceerd volgens DIN7168 nauwkeurigheidsklasse “middel”. Details kunt u steeds opvragen via info@grada.be
Nos grilles et diffuseurs sont fabriqués selon le DIN7168, classe de précision“moyen”. Pour plus d’informations, nous vous invitons à nous contacter sur info@grada.be
All wall and ceiling grilles are produced according to DIN7168, permissible deviations according to tolerance class “medium”. For more details please contact us at info@grada.be
INTERNATIONAL

PRODUCTEN TYPES BLZ


PRODUITS PAGES
PRODUCTS

IRIS kanaalklep IRIS 8 100


IRIS registre
IRIS duct damper
Zelfregelende debietklep HNDRD 8 120
Régulateur de débit
Automatic flow control valve
Constant volumeregelaar RVC 8 135
Régulateur de débit SVC 8 140
Volume flow controller

9 Koelbalken
Poutres froids
Chilled beams
Koelbalk K-30 9 010
Poutre active fermée
Chilled beam
Koelbalk K-60 9 025
Poutre active fermée
Chilled beam

Alle wand- en plafondroosters worden geproduceerd volgens DIN7168 nauwkeurigheidsklasse “middel”. Details kunt u steeds opvragen via info@grada.be
Nos grilles et diffuseurs sont fabriqués selon le DIN7168, classe de précision“moyen”. Pour plus d’informations, nous vous invitons à nous contacter sur info@grada.be
All wall and ceiling grilles are produced according to DIN7168, permissible deviations according to tolerance class “medium”. For more details please contact us at info@grada.be
1
INTERNATIONAL

GRILLE WITH ADJUSTABLE VANES


A-100 • G-100

Installation dimensions
A-100/G-100 A-107/G-107
1
Application
The grilles type A-100/G-100 are
used for the supply and exhaust of
cooled and heated air in facilities
such as offices, shopping centres,
workshops, ...
The grille can be used for wall or
exposed duct mounting.
It is also possible to mount the grille
in the ceiling in order to create e.g.
an air curtain (only with AE/GE and
AF/GF).
The horizontal vanes can be adjus-
ted manually and individually to
obtain an optimal air distribution.

L = nominal length (mm) Technical information


H = nominal height (mm) Characteristics:
All dimensions in mm
• single row of vanes
Fast selection diagram • free passage ca. 70 % (depen-
ding on the position of the vanes)
• Available in multiples of 25 mm, in
length as well as in height
G-100:
Dimension
L x H (mm)
min L = 75 mm, max L = 2000 mm
20 30 40 50 NR
min H = 75 mm, max H = 1200 mm
8 11 14 19
1000 x 200
7 10 13 17
A-100:
800 x 200
6 9 12 16 min L = 100 mm, max L = 2000 mm
600 x 200
min L = 75 mm, max H = 2000 mm
6 8 11 15
400x 200
• linear grilles (= grilles consisting of
400 x 150 5 7 9 12 intermediate and end pieces),
300 x 150 5 6 8 11 available in heights from 75 mm
4 6 7 10
250 x 150 till 525 mm and in steps of 25 mm.
Length from 100 mm till 1000 mm
3 4 6 7
and in steps of 50 mm.
200 x 100 Throw LT (m)
• also available with 35 mm frame
width (only in aluminium con-
struction)
100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 2000 3000 5000 m3/h
Construction:
Valid for supply only. See diagram p. 1 050 for exhaust.
Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone. • A-100: frame in extruded alumini-
See p. 1 050 for a detailed selection and other dimensions. um; aluminium roll-formed sheet;
vanes both satin anodised
• G-100: roll-formed steel sheet
and painted white (RAL 9010)

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 010


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories


Example: • GT003: perforated steel sheet, 35 %
passage, painted black (RAL 9005)
Steel supply grille with horizontal, indi-
vidually adjustable vanes for wall or • GT007: damper with vertical, oppo-
exposed duct mounting, equipped sed blades.
with a damper. Constructed in galvanised steel
The grille is painted white (RAL 9010). sheet, painted black.
(For further details, see p. 1 290)
Type: GF100 + GT007
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm • GR001: mounting frame in roll-for-
med, galvanised steel sheet (only for
AD/GD and AE/GE)

How to order
GE100, dimension 600 x 200 mm, with damper GT007 and mounting frame
GR001

a) Grille

G E 1 0 7 - - 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 0

L H
- : grille in one piece
E: end piece (linear grille)
M:intermediate piece (linear grille)

0: without damper
3: with perforated sheet 35 % passage
7: with damper GT007
0: horizontal vanes
4: with perforated sheet
(instead of vanes, only for a G-grille)
D: frame width 25mm, friction springs
E: frame width 25 mm, concealed screw fixing
F: frame width 25 mm, screw fixing
M:frame width 35 mm, screw fixing
N: frame width 35 mm, friction springs
V: frame width 35 mm, concealed screw fixing
X: frame width 25 mm, without fixing
A: aluminium construction (frame width 25 and 35 mm)
G: steel construction (frame width 25 mm only)

b) Mounting frame

G R 0 0 1 - - 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 0
L H
- : in one piece
E: end piece
M:intermediate piece

E 1 010 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Fixing methods

AF100/GF100 AE100/GE100 + GR001 AD100/GD100 + GR001

Grille with visible screw fixing Grille with concealed screw fixing Grille with friction springs and
and mounting frame mounting frame

Delivery possibilities
Grille with single row of horizontal vanes

Aluminium Steel Construction

AD100 GD100 friction springs (not available for linear grilles)


AE100 GE100 concealed screw fixing
AF100 GF100 visible screw fixing
A-103 G-103 with perforated sheet GT003 35 % passage
A-107 G-107 with damper GT007

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 011


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

GRILLE WITH ADJUSTABLE VANES


A-110 • G-110

Installation dimensions
A-110/G-110 A-117/G-117
1
Application
The grilles type A-110/G-110 are
used for the supply and exhaust of
cooled and heated air in facilities
such as offices, shopping centres,
workshops, ....
The grille can be used for wall or
exposed duct mounting.
It is also possible to mount the grille
in the ceiling in order to create e.g.
an air curtain (only with AE/GE and
AF/GF).
The horizontal and vertical vanes
can be adjusted manually and in-
dividually to obtain an optimal air
L = nominal length (mm) distribution.
H = nominal height (mm)
All dimensions in mm
Technical information
Characteristics:
Fast selection diagram
• double row of vanes
• free passage ca. 70 % (depen-
ding on the position of the vanes)
• available in multiples of 25 mm, in
length as well as in height
Dimension
L x H (mm) 20 30 40 50 NR G-110:
8 11 14 19 min L = 75 mm, max L = 2000 mm
1000 x 200
800 x 200
7 10 13 17 min H = 75 mm, max H = 1200 mm
600 x 200
6 9 12 16 A-110:
6 8 11 15 min L = 100 mm, max L = 2000 mm
400x 200
min H = 75 mm, max H = 2000 mm
5 7 9 12
400 x 150 • linear grilles (= grilles consisting of
5 6 8 11
300 x 150
4 6 7 10
intermediate and end pieces),
250 x 150
available in heights from 75 mm
till 525 mm and in steps of 25 mm.
200 x 100
3 4 6 7
Throw LT (m)
Length from 100 mm till 1000 mm
and in steps of 50 mm.
• also available with 35 mm frame
width (only in aluminium con-
100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 2000 3000 5000 m3/h struction)

Valid for supply only. See diagram p. 1 050 for exhaust. Construction:
Throw factor is based on vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone.
See p. 1 050 for a detailed selection and other dimensions. • A-110: frame in extruded alumini-
um; aluminium roll-formed sheet;
vanes both satin anodised
• G-110: roll-formed steel sheet
painted white (RAL 9010)

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 020


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories


Example: • GT003: perforated steel sheet, 35 %
passage, painted black (RAL 9005)
Steel supply grille with horizontal and
vertical, individually adjustable vanes • GT007: damper with vertical, op-
for wall or exposed duct mounting, posed blades, constructed in gal-
equipped with a damper. vanised steel sheet, painted black.
The grille is painted white (RAL 9010) (For futher details see p. 1 290)

Type: GF110 + GT007 • GR001: mounting frame of roll-for-


nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ...mm med galvanised steel sheet (only for
AD/GD and AE/GE)

How to order
GE110, dimension 600 x 200 mm, with damper GT007 and mounting frame
GR001

a) Grille

G E 1 1 7 - - 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 0

L H
- : grille in one piece
E: end piece (linear grille)
M: intermediate piece (linear grille)

0: without damper
3: with perforated sheet 35 % passage
7: with damper GT007
D: frame width 25 mm, friction springs
E: frame width 25 mm, concealed screw fixing
F: frame width 25 mm, screw fixing
M:frame width 35 mm, screw fixing
N: frame width 35 mm, friction springs
V: frame width 35 mm, concealed screw fixing
X: frame width 25 mm, without fixing
A: aluminium construction (frame width 25 and 35 mm)
G: steel construction (frame width 25 mm only)

b) Mounting frame

G R 0 0 1 - - 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 0

L H
- : in one piece
E : end piece
M: intermediate piece

E 1 020 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Fixing methods

AF110/GF110 AE110/GE110 + GR001 AD110/GD110 + GR001

Grille with visible screw fixing Grille with concealed screw fixing Grille with friction springs and
and mounting frame mounting frame

Delivery possibilities
Grille with double row of horizontal front and vertical back vanes

Aluminium Steel Construction

AD110 GD110 friction springs (not available for linear grilles)


AE110 GE110 concealed screw fixing
AF110 GF110 visible screw fixing
A-113 G-113 with perforated sheet GT003 35 % passage
A-117 G-117 with damper GT007

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 021


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

GRILLE WITH ADJUSTABLE VANES


A-120 • G-120

Installation dimensions
A-120/G-120 A-127/G-127
1
Application
The grilles type A-120/G-120 are
used for the supply and exhaust of
cooled and heated air in facilities
such as offices, shopping centres,
workshops, ...
The grille can be used for wall or
exposed duct mounting.
It is also possible to mount the grille
in the ceiling in order to create e.g.
an air curtain (only with AE/GE and
AF/GF).
The vertical vanes can be adjusted
manually and individually to obtain
an optimal air distribution.
L = nominal length (mm)
H = nominal height (mm)
All dimensions in mm
Technical information
Characteristics:

• single row of vanes


Fast selection diagram • free passage ca. 70 % (depending
on the position of the vanes)
• available in multiples of 25 mm, in
length as well as in height
G-120:
Dimension
L x H (mm) 20 30 40 50 NR min L = 75 mm, max L = 2000 mm
8 11 14 19 min H = 75 mm, max H = 1200 mm
1000 x 200
800 x 200
7 10 13 17 A-120:
600 x 200
6 9 12 16 min L = 100 mm, max L = 2000 mm
6 8 11 15 min H = 75 mm, max H = 2000 mm
400x 200
• linear grilles (= grilles consisting of
5 7 9 12
400 x 150 intermediate and end pieces),
5 6 8 11
300 x 150
4 6 7 10
available in heights from 75 mm till
250 x 150
525 mm and in steps of 25 mm.
Length from 100 mm till 1000 mm
3 4 6 7 and in steps of 50 mm.
200 x 100 Throw LT (m)
• also available with 35 mm frame
width (only in aluminium construc-
tion)
100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 2000 3000 5000 m3/h
Construction:
Valid for supply only. See diagram p. 1 050 for exhaust.
Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone. • A-120: frame in extruded alumini-
See p. 1 050 for a detailed selection and other dimensions. um; aluminium roll-formed sheet;
vanes both satin anodised
• G-120: roll-formed steel sheet
painted white (RAL 9010)

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 030


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories


Example: • GT003: perforated steel sheet, 35 %
passage, painted black (RAL 9005)
Steel supply grille with vertical, indivi-
dually adjustable vanes for wall or • GT007: damper with vertical oppo-
exposed duct mounting, equipped sed blades.
with a damper. Constructed in galvanised steel
The grille is painted white (RAL 9010). sheet painted black.
(For further details, see p. 1 290)
Type: GF120 + GT007
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm • GR001: mounting frame: roll-formed,
galvanised steel sheet (only for
AD/GD and AE/GE)

How to order
GE120, dimension 600 x 200 mm, with damper GT007 and mounting frame
GR001

a) Grille

G E 1 2 7 - - 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 0

L H

- : grille in one piece


E: end piece (linear grille)
M: intermediate piece (linear grille)

0: without damper
3: with perforated sheet 35 % passage
7: with damper GT007

D: frame width 25 mm, friction springs


E: frame width 25 mm, concealed screw fixing
F: frame width 25 mm, screw fixing
M:frame width 35 mm, screw fixing
N: frame width 35 mm, friction springs
V: frame width 35 mm, concealed screw fixing
X: frame width 25 mm, without fixing

A: aluminium construction (frame width 25 and 35 mm)


G: steel construction (frame width 25 mm only)

b) Mounting frame

G R 0 0 1 - - 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 0

L H
- : in one piece
E: end piece
M: intermediate piece

E 1 030 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Fixing methods

AF120/GF120 AE120/GE120 + GR001 AD120/GD120 + GR001

Grille with visible screw fixing Grille with concealed screw fixing Grille with friction springs and
and mounting frame mounting frame

Delivery possibilities
Grille with single row of vertical vanes

Aluminium Steel Construction

AD120 GD120 friction springs (not available for linear grilles)


AE120 GE120 concealed screw fixing
AF120 GF120 visible screw fixing
A-123 G-123 with perforated sheet GT003 35 % passage
A-127 G-127 with damper GT007

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 031


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

GRILLE WITH ADJUSTABLE VANES


A-130 • G-130

Installation dimensions
A-130/G-130 A-137/G-137
1
Application
The grilles type A-130/G-130 are
used for the supply and exhaust of
cooled and heated air in facilities
such as offices, shopping centres,
workshops, ...
The grille can be used for wall or
exposed duct mounting.
It is also possible to mount the grille
in the ceiling in order to create e.g.
an air curtain (only with AE/GE and
AF/GF).
The vertical and horizontal vanes
can be adjusted manually and
individually to obtain an optimal air
distribution.
L = nominal length (mm)
H = nominal height (mm) Technical information
All dimensions in mm
Characteristics:

• double row of vanes


Fast selection diagram • free passage ca. 70 % (depen-
ding on the position of the vanes)
• available in multiples of 25 mm, in
length as well as in height
Dimension G-130:
L x H (mm) 20 30 40 50 NR min L = 75 mm, max L = 2000 mm
1000 x 200
8 11 14 19 min H = 75 mm, max H = 1200 mm
800 x 200
7 10 13 17 A-130:
600 x 200
6 9 12 16 min L = 100 mm, max L = 2000 mm
400x 200
6 8 11 15 min H = 75 mm, max H = 2000 mm
• linear grilles (= grilles consisting of
400 x 150 5 7 9 12
intermediate and end pieces),
300 x 150 5 6 8 11
4 6 7 10 available in heights from 75 mm
250 x 150
till 525 mm and in steps of 25 mm.
Length from 100 mm till 1000 mm
thrown LT (m)
200 x 100
3 4 6 7 and in steps of 50 mm.
• also available with 35 mm frame
width (only in aluminium construc-
tion)
100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 2000 3000 5000 m3/h

Construction:
Valid for supply only. See diagram p. 1 050 for exhaust. • A-130: frame in extruded alumini-
Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone. um; aluminium roll-formed sheet;
See p. 1 050 for a detailed selection and other dimensions. vanes both satin anodised
• G-130: roll-formed steel sheet
painted white (RAL 9010)

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 040


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories


Example: • GT003: perforated steel sheet 35 %
passage, painted black (RAL 9005)
Steel supply grille with vertical and ho-
rizontal, individually adjustable vanes • GT007: damper with vertical, opposed
for wall or exposed duct mounting, blades, constructed in galvanised
equipped with a damper. steel sheet, painted black.
The grille is painted white (RAL 9010) (For further details, see p. 1 290)

Type: GF130 + GT007 • GR001: mounting frame: roll-formed,


nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm galvanised steel sheet
(only for AD/GD and AE/GE)

How to order
GE130, dimension 600 x 200 mm, with damper GT007 and mounting frame
GR001

a) Grille

G E 1 3 7 - - 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 0

L H
- : grille in one piece
E: end piece (linear grille)
M: intermediate piece (linear grille)

0: without damper
3: with perforated sheet 35% passage
7: with damper GT007
D: frame width 25 mm, friction springs
E: frame width 25 mm, concealed screw fixing
F: frame width 25 mm, screw fixing
M:frame width 35 mm, screw fixing
N: frame width 35 mm, friction springs
V: frame width 35 mm, concealed screw fixing
X: frame width 25 mm, without fixing
A: aluminium construction (frame width 25 and 35 mm)
G: steel construction (frame width 25 mm only)

b) Mounting frame

G R 0 0 1 - - 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 0

L H
- : in one piece
E: end piece
M: intermediate piece

E 1 040 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Fixing methods

AF130/GF130 AE130/GE130 + GR001 AD130/GD130 + GR001

Grille with visible screw fixing Grille with concealed screw fixing Grille with friction springs and
and mounting frame mounting frame

Delivery possibilities
Grille with double row of vertical front and horizontal back vanes :

Aluminium Steel Construction

AD130 GD130 friction springs (not available for linear grilles)


AE130 GE130 concealed screw fixing
AF130 GF130 visible screw fixing
A-133 G-133 with perforated sheet GT003 35 % passage
A-137 G-137 with damper GT007

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 041


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

G-100, 110, 120, 130 • A-100, 110, 120, 130

Selection diagram - supply


- Deflection 0°
- with ceiling effect
- damper completely open
1
50
NR 45
NR 40
N R
35
NR
3 0
NR
2 5
NR
2 0
NR

200 300 500 800 1200


100 250 400 600 1000
200 300 500 800 1200
150 250 400 600 1000
200 300 500 800 1200
200 250 400 600 1000
300 500 800 1200
300 400 600 1000
400 600 1000
400 500 800 1200
500 500 800 1200
600 1000

Air flow rate measurement- Ak-values (m2)


supply L (mm)
H
(mm) 200 250 300 400 500 600 800 1000 1200

100 0,010 0,013 0,016 0,023 0,029 0,039 0,060 0,071 0,084
150 0,016 0,023 0,029 0,039 0,051 0,060 0,084 0,113 0,133
200 0,023 0,029 0,039 0,060 0,071 0,084 0,113 0,145 0,179
300 - - 0,060 0,084 0,113 0,133 0,179 0,225 0,270
400 - - - 0,113 0,145 0,179 0,225 0,301 0,367
500 - - - - 0,179 0,225 0,301 0,367 0,448

Correction factors
- Correction of the throw LT without ceiling effect
Distance between ceiling and supply grille (m) Correction

≥ 0,9 m LT x 0,75
- Correction factor according to the deflection of the vertical vanes
Velometer jet: 2220A or 6070 (see p. 1 051 verso)

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 050


INTERNATIONAL

Selection diagram - exhaust

0%

%
%
25
50
10 0
+ 1

8
+ 1
NR

NR
NR 50

NR 45

NR 40
NR 35

NR 30

NR 25

NR 20

200 300 500


100 250 400
150 250 400 600 800
300 500
500 800
200 400 600 1000
500 800
300 600 1000

Air flow rate measurement-


exhaust
Ak-values (m2)
L (mm)
H
(mm) 200 250 300 400 500 600 800 1000
100 0,008 0,010 0,012 0,016 0,020 - - -
150 - 0,016 0,020 0,026 0,033 0,037 0,054 -
200 - - - 0,037 0,045 0,054 0,071 0,092
300 - - - - 0,071 0,084 0,114 0,143

Velometer jet: 2220A or 6070

E 1 050 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Pressure loss Example


with damper type ...7

0,3 m max vT
qv tL
ts
25% 50% D 10°

100%
tR
LT
0
+2

0
NR

+1
NR

20° LS

LS

LT

with perforated sheet type ... 3

200 SUPPLY: EXHAUST:


180
p 160
t 140 Selection data: Selection data:
Pa 120

100 - Airflow rate qv = 0,16 m3/s - Airflow rate qv = 0,4 m3/s


80 - Throw LT =12 m at vT = 0,25 m/s
0

Solution:
+1
NR

60 Solution:
50 - Grille 800 x 200 mm
40 - Grilles 400 x 100 or 250 x 150 mm - Supply air velocity vk= 5,5 m/s
- Supply air velocity vk= 7 m/s - Noise level NR 45
30 - Noise level NR 45 - Total pressure loss with damper
- Total pressure loss with damper type 100 % open: ∆ pt = 4,5 Pa.
20 type 50 % open: ∆ pt = 90 Pa.
18 - Noise level correction NR 45 + 10 =
16
14 NR 55
2 2,5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
v (m/s)
k

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 051


INTERNATIONAL

Induction and temperature quotient with ceiling effect


Induction Temperature quotient

0, 07

0, 5
0, 8

0, 2
0, 14
0, 16

0, 5
0, 18

02

0, 3
01
00

01

03

0, 0, 4
02
0

0
0
0
0

0
06 05
0,

0,
0,
20 0,4
18 tL 0,35
Ak
tS m 2

08
16

0,
0,3
i

5 ,4 ,3 ,3 ,2 0,20,1 0,1 ,14 0,1 0,1


14 0,5

2
0,25
12 0,4

0
8 6
0,35
0,2 0,3
10
0,18 0,25

5
9 0,2

0, 0 0 0 0
0,16 0,18
8

5
0,16
0,14 0,14
7 0,12
0,12 0,10
6 Ak
0,10 0,08
2
m 0,07
5 0,09 0,06
4,5 0,05
0,08
4 0,04
0,07
3,5 0,03
0,06 0,025
3 0,055
0,02
0,05
2,5 0,045 0,015

0,04 0,01
2 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 6 7 8
0,008
2,5 3
12 13 14 15
3,5 4 4,5 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
LT (m) 0,007

LT (m)

Deflection 40° Deflection 20°

Deflection 0°

Correction factors ∆ tL
Deflection Ak vk LT NR i
Correction for vertical vane ∆ tS
deflection

20° x 0,87 x 1,15 x 0,85 +3 x 1,4 x 1,4

40° x 0,80 x 1,25 x 0,75 +5 x2 x2

E 1 051 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Drop requirements

LDS (m)

5
2,

4
5
2

10 9 8 7
3
0,2 0,25 0,3 0,35 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1 1,2 1,4 1,6
0,3

0,25
LD
T

)
K m/s
0,2

V (
m/K 0,18
0,16

0,14
0,12

0,1
0,09
0,08
0,07

0,06

0,05

0,04

0,03
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 6 7 8 9 10

LT (m)

Drop requirements
The total drop is the maximum vertical distance between the
center of a grille core and the lower point of a specified enve-
lope, determined by the envelope velocity vT. H
D

The total drop consists of two elements:


B
LD = LDS + LDT
1) The isothermal drop LDS is the distance between the center of
an air current and the lowest point of the envelope.
2) The non-isothermal drop LDT is the distance between the cen-
ter of the grille core and the air current centerline, at the place L
D
T
of measurement. L
A C D

Drop correction LD L
D
S
Drop correction is possible by projecting the air current upward,
with supply grilles having adjustable horizontal bars.
The drop effect can be significantly corrected if the air is project- A) Envelope of a non- Drop correction diagram
ed upward 15° to 20°, as shown in the drop correction diagram. isothermal air current
The correction factors “C” in the diagram are only valid if the min- without drop correc-
imum distance Hd between the center of the grille and the ceil- tion.
ing is maintained. B) Envelope of a non-
isothermal air current
with drop correction.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 052


INTERNATIONAL

Selection diagram - supply

- 0°deflection
- with ceiling effect
- damper completely open

50
NR
45
NR
40
NR
35
NR
30
NR
25
NR

20
NR

75 100 150 200 300


H

Air flow rate measurement-supply


Correction factors (supply)
Ak-values (m2/m) Throw correction factor LT without ceiling effect
H(mm) Ak Distance between ceiling and supply grille (m) Correction
75 0,044 ≥ 0,9 m LT X 0,75
100 0,064 Correction factors for large linear grilles
150 0,107 Grille length (m) Throw Noise level
correction correction (NR)
200 0,147
1-2 LT x1,00 + 0 NR
300 0,229
2 - 6,5 LT x 1,10 + 5 NR

Velometer jet: 2220A or 6070

E 1 052 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Selection diagram - exhaust

qv
m3/h.m 300 400 500 600 800 1000 2000 3000 4000 6000 8000 10000 D

25%
100
m3/s.m

50
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 2
14

10
13

18
12

NR

+
NR
11
10
9
8 NR 50

7
NR 45

6
NR 40

5 NR 35

NR 30
vK 4
NR 25

m/s NR 20
3

2 3 4 6 8 10 15 20 40 60 100
H 75 100 150 200 300
pt (pa)

Air flow rate measurement-


exhaust
Ak-values (m2/m)
H(mm) Ak

75 0,029
100 0,042
150 0,068
200 0,094
300 0,146

Velometer jet 2220 A of 6070

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 053


INTERNATIONAL

Example

SUPPLY:
Selection data:
- Airflow rate qv = 0,22 m3/s
- Throw LT = 10 m at vT = 0,25 m/s
0,3 m max vT
qv tL
Solution:
- Grille height H = 100mm
ts - Supply air velocity vk = 3,4 m/s
10°
- Noise level NR 27
- Total pressure loss with damper
100 % open: ∆ pt = 9 Pa.
tR
LT
EXHAUST:
- Exhaust air flow rate qv = 0,2 m3/s
- Grille height H = 75 mm
- Air velocity vk = 7m/s
- Noise level NR 39
- Total pressure loss with damper 50 %
open: ∆ pt = 15 Pa.
- Noise level correction NR 39 + 8 =
NR 47

Pressure loss
with damper type ..7 with perforated sheet type ..3

25% 50% D
200
100% 180
p 160
t 140
Pa 120
0

100
+2

0
NR

+1

80
10
NR

+
NR

60
50

40

30

20
18
16
14
2 2,5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
v (m/s)
k

E 1 053 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Screw hole location in the frame

Fixing method concealed screw fixing Mullion location A-100, 110 • G-100, 110

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 054


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

EXHAUST GRILLE WITH FIXED VANES


A-710 • G-710

Installation dimensions
A-710/G-710 A-717/G-717
1
Application
The grille type A-710/G-710 is used
for the exhaust of air or as a transfer
grille in facilities such as offices,
warehouses, shopping centres, ...
The grille can be mounted in the
wall or on a door.

Technical information
Characteristics:

• fixed horizontal vanes with 40°


deflection
• free passage ca. 60 %
• available in multiples of 25 mm,
L = nominal length (mm)
in height as well as in length
H = nominal height (mm) G-710:
All dimensions in mm min L = 75 mm, max L = 1200 mm
min H = 75 mm, max H = 900 mm
Fast selection diagram A-710:
min L = 100 mm, max L = 2000 mm
min H = 75 mm, max H = 1000 mm
Dimension • also available with 35 mm frame
L x H (mm)
20 30 40 50 NR
width (only in aluminium construc-
1000 X 300 tion)
800 X 300

Construction:
800 X 200
600 X 200 • A-710: frame in extruded alumini-
500 X 200 um; aluminium roll-formed sheet;
400 X 200
both vanes satin anodised
400 X 150 • G-710: roll-formed steel sheet
300 X 150
painted white (RAL 9010)
250 X 150

250 X 100 Throw LT (m)


200 X 100

3
100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 2000 3000 5000 m /h

See p. 1 070 for a detailed selection and other dimensions.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 060


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories


Example • GT003: perforated steel sheet 35 %
passage, painted black (RAL 9005)
Steel exhaust grille with fixed horizontal
vanes with 40° deflection. • GT007: damper with vertical, oppo-
The grille is painted white (RAL 9010) sed blades; galvanised steel sheet,
painted black
Type: GF710 (For further details, see p. 1 290)
nom. dim. (L x H) … x … mm
• GR001: mounting frame: roll-formed,
galvanised steel sheet
(only for AD/GD and AE/GE)

How to order
GF710, dimension 600 x 200 mm, with damper GT007 and mounting frame
GR001

a) Grille

G F 7 1 7 - - 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 0
L H

0: without damper
3: with perforated sheet 35 % passage
7: with damper GT007

D: frame width 25mm, friction springs


E: frame width 25mm, concealed screw fixing
F: frame width 25mm, screw fixing
M:frame width 35mm, screw fixing
N: frame width 35mm, friction springs
V: frame width 35mm, concealed screw fixing
X: frame width 25 mm, without fixing

A: aluminium construction (frame width 25 and 35 mm)


G: steel construction (frame width 25mm only)

b) Mounting frame

G R 0 0 1 - - 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 0

L H

E 1 060 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Fixing methods

AD710/GD710 + GR001 AE710/GE710 + GR001 AF710/GF710

Grille with friction springs and Grille with concealed screw fixing Grille with visible screw fixing
mounting frame and mounting frame

Delivery possibilities
Grille with single row of horizontal vanes

Aluminium Steel Construction

AD710 GD710 friction spring fixing


AE710 GE710 concealed screw fixing
AF710 GF710 visible screw fixing
A-713 G-713 with perforated sheet GT003 35 % passage
A-717 G-717 with damper GT007

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 061


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

EXHAUST GRILLE WITH FIXED VANES


A-710 • G-710

Selection diagram - exhaust

D
1
qv

%
m3/h 60 80 100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 2000 3000 4000

%
100

50
m3/s 0,02 0,03 0,04 0,03 0,08 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 1,2
14
13
12

25%
11
10
9

+9
NR
NR 50
8
7 NR 45

18
+
NR
NR 40
6

NR 35
5
NR 30
vK 4 NR 25

m/s
NR 20
3
4 5 6 8 10 15 20 40 60 80 100
100 200 300 500
250 400 pt (pa)
150 250 400 600
300 500 800
200 400 600 1000
500 800
300 500 800
600 1000

Air flow rate measurement-


Ak-values (m2)
exhaust
L (mm)

H (mm) 200 250 300 400 500 600 800 1000

100 0,006 0,007 0,010 0,012 0,015 — — —


150 — 0,012 0,015 0,020 0,025 0,029 0,041 —
200 — — — 0,029 0,035 0,041 0,055 0,071
300 — — — — 0,055 0,065 0,087 0,110

Example
- Exhaust air flow rate qv = 0,12 m3/s
- Grille 400 x 150 mm
- Air velocity vk = 6 m/s
- Noise level = NR 32
- Total pressure loss with damper 50 % open: ∆ pt = 40 Pa
- Noise level correction NR 32 + 9 = NR 41

Velometer jet: 2220 A of 6070

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 070


INTERNATIONAL

Screw hole location in the frame

Fixing method concealed screw fixing Mullion location A-710 • G-710

E 1 070 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

GRID CORE GRILLE


A-770/A-780

Installation dimensions
A-780 A-787
1
Application
The grille type A-770/A-780 is used
for the exhaust of large quantities
of air with minimal pressure loss in
facilities such as offices, warehous-
AD/AF770 es, shopping centres, ...
The grille can be mounted in the
25

wall or the ceiling (only AE and AF).


( H + 30 ) x ( L + 30 )
( H - 20 ) x ( L - 20 )

Technical information
45°
H x L

Characteristics:
12,5

• grid core with square mesh or mesh


with 45° deflection
• links: 12,5 x 12,5 mm
• free passage ca. 85 %
Nominal dimensions: • available in multiples of 1 mm, in
L = nominal length (mm) height as well as in length
29 6 min L = 100 mm, max L = 600 mm
H = nominal height (mm)
All dimensions in mm min H = 100 mm, max H = 1200 mm
(A-770) and max L = 1200 mm (A-
Fast selection diagram 780)
• GT007 only available in multiples of
25 mm in height as well as in length
Dimension
L x H (mm)
Construction:
20 30 40 50 NR
1000 x 500
• extruded aluminium frame, natural
800x 400 tone anodised
600 x 400 • mill finish aluminium grid core

500 x 300

500 x 200
400 x 200
300 x 200 Throw LT (m)
300 x 150
250 x 150

200 x 100

10 200 300 400 500600 800 1000 2000 3000 5000 7000 10000 m3/h

For a detailed selection and other dimensions, see next page.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 080


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories


Example: • GT007: damper with vertical opposed
blades. Constructed in galvanised
Aluminium exhaust grille with fixed grid steel sheet painted black.
core (square mesh of 12,5 x 12,5 mm), (For further details, see p. 1 290)
equipped with a damper. The frame is
natural tone anodised. • GR001: mounting frame: roll-formed,
galvanised steel sheet
Type: AF780 + GT007 (only for AD and AE)
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm

Fixing methods
AD770/AD780 + GR001 AE780 + GR001 AF770/AF780
Friction spring fixing and mounting Concealed screw fixing and mount- Visible screw fixing
frame ing frame

How to order
AE780, dimension 300 x 300 mm, with damper GT007 and mounting frame
GR001

a) Grille

A E 7 8 7 - - 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0

L H

0: without damper
7: with damper
7: mesh with 45° deflection
8: square mesh

D: frame width 25 mm, friction spring fixing


E: frame width 25 mm, concealed screw fixing (only for A-780)
F: frame width 25 mm, screw fixing
U: false ceiling sheet out of aluminium U-frame (see p. 2 501)

b) Mounting frame
G R 0 0 1 - - 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0
L H

E 1 080 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

GRID CORE GRILLE


A-770/A-780

Selection diagram - exhaust

QV
1
3
m /h 100 200 300 400 500 600 1000 2000 3000 5000 7000 10000 14000

0%

%
3

50
m /s

10
0,03 0,04 0,06 0,08 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1,2 1,6 2 3
14

%
13

25
12
11
10
9
vk 8
NR 5
5

8
NR 5
(m/s) 7 0

0
NR

+2
NR 4
6 5

NR
NR 4
0
5
NR 3
5
NR 3
4 0
NR 2
5
NR 2
3 0
1,5 3 5 8 15 30 60 100
2 4 6 10 20 40 80
100 200 300
250
p (Pa)
150 150
200
250
300
400
500 t
200 200 300 500
250 400 600

300 300 500 800


400 600 1000

400 400 800


600 1000

500 600 1000


800

Air flow rate measurement- Ak- values (m2)


exhaust H L (mm)
(mm) 200 250 300 400 500 600 800 1000

100 0,009 0,011 0,013 - - - - -


150 0,013 0,018 0,021 0,029 0,038 - - -
200 0,018 0,024 0,029 0,038 0,050 0,061 - -
300 - - 0,045 0,061 0,078 0,094 0,127 0,160
400 - - - 0,084 - 0,127 0,172 0,216
500 - - - - - 0,160 0,216 0,275

Example
- Exhaust air flow rate qv = 0,5 m3/s
- Grille: 500 x 300 mm
- Air velocity vk = 6,5 m/s
- Noise level NR 40
Velometer jet: 2220 A or 6070 - Total pressure loss with damper 50 % open: ∆ pt = 15 Pa
- Noise level correction: NR 40 + 8 = NR 48

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 090


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

EXHAUST GRILLE WITH FILTER FRAME


AH710/770/780

Installation dimensions
AH710 AH780
1
(H-5) x (L-5)
(H-5) x (L-5)

Application
The grille type AH710/770/780 is
used for the exhaust of air in facili-
ties such as offices, warehouses,
workshops, ...
The grille can be used for wall or
duct mounting in situations where
the surroundings have to be safe-
guarded against pollution.

AH770 Technical information


Characteristics:

AH710:
• fixed horizontal vanes with 40°
deflection
( H + 30 ) x ( L + 30 )

( H + 40 ) x ( L + 40 )
(H+5) x (L+5)

• free passage ca. 60 %


(H-5)x(L-5)

• the grille is hinged to the filter


frame enabling 25 mm thick filter
45°
HxL

cartridges
• available in multiples of 25 mm,
as well in length as in height
• min L = 100 mm, max L = 2000 mm
min H = 75 mm, max H = 1000 mm

AH770/AH780:
57 • grid core with square mesh (AH
780) or with mesh of 45° deflec-
66
tion (AH770)
• links: 12,5 x 12,5 mm
• free passage ca. 85 %
• the grille is hinged to the filter
Nominal dimensions
frame enabling 25 mm thick filter
L = nominal length (mm)
cartridges
H = nominal height (mm)
• available in multiples of 1 mm, as
All dimensions in mm
well in length as in height
• min L = 100 mm, max L = 600 mm
min H = 100 mm, max H = 1200
mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 100


INTERNATIONAL

Construction: Accessories Fixing


AH710: A filter cartridge DUST STOP 25 mm can concealed screw fixing in filter
• extruded aluminium frame
• aluminium sheet vanes be delivered upon request. frame
• both satin anodised (standard without filter cartridge).
• filter frame in extruded mill finish Delivery possibilities
aluminium
• AH710: aluminium grille with fixed
AH770/AH780: vanes with 40° deflection
• extruded aluminium frame, satin a-
nodised • AH770: aluminium grille with mill
• mill finish aluminium grid core with finish aluminium grid core with
links of 12,5 x 12,5 mm (straight links: links of 45° deflection mesh of
AH780, links 45° deflection: AH770) 12,5 x 12,5 mm
• filter frame in extruded mill finish
aluminium • AH780: aluminium grille with mill
finish aluminium grid core with
square mesh of 12,5 x 12,5 mm

Specifications description
Example:

Aluminium exhaust grille with fixed fil-


ter frame and grid core. Natural tone
anodised frame and mill finish alu-
minium grid core

Type: AH780
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm

How to order
AH710, dimension 625 x 400 mm with fixed filterframe

a) Grille

A H 7 1 0 - - 0 6 2 5 0 4 0 0
L H
710: with fixed blades (deflection 40°)
770: with grid core (45° deflection mesh of 12,5 x 12,5 mm)
780: with grid core (square mesh of 12,5 x 12,5 mm)
H: grille with fixed filterframe and concealed screw fixing

b) Filter cartridge
F I 3 2 5 - - 0 6 2 0 0 3 9 5
L H
FI225: class G2
FI325: class G3
FI425: class G4
Remark: nom.dimension of the filter = nom.dimension of the grille -5 mm
(see drawing)

E 1 100 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

EXHAUST GRILLE WITH FILTER FRAME


AH710/770/780 • FH101/201/711/771/781

Selection diagram - exhaust

AH710/FH101/FH201/FH711 AH770/AH780/FH771/FH781
1
700 800 900 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2500 3000
700 800 900 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2500 3000 m3/h
qv qv
0,2 0,25 0,3 0,35 0,4 0,45 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 m3/s
0,2 0,25 0,3 0,35 0,4 0,45 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 m3/s
8 5 3,5

8
3
7 4,5
7
NR 45 2,5 NR 30
6
4 pt (pa)
5 2
6 NR 40
4,5 NR 25
vk 3,5
1,8
1,6
4
m/s vk
5 3,5 NR 35 m/s 1,4
NR 20
3 3
1,2
4,5 2,8
2,5 NR 30
1
4 pt 2,6
0,9
(pa)
2 2,4 0,8
1,8 NR 25
3,5 2,2 0,7
1,6
1,4 0,6
NR 20 2
3
400 500 625
400 500 625 500 500 625
500 500

Note: for selection diagram of FH371, see p. 2 181

Air flow rate measurements-


exhaust
Ak- values (m2)
H L
500 625
A-710 400 0,073 0,092
500 0,092 0,116

A-780 400 0,106 0,133


500 0,133 0,168

Velometer jet 2220 A or 6070

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 101


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

EXHAUST GRILLE WITH FILTER FRAME


FH101/201/371/711/771/781

Installation dimensions
FH101
C

B
1
F

27
14,5
4.7

35
Application
The grille type FH101/201/371/711/
18 25 25 771/781 is used for the exhaust of air in
facilities such as offices, warehouses,
A work-shops, ...
The grille can be used for wall or duct
mounting where the surroundings
FH201 have to be safeguarded against pol-
C lution

B Technical information
F Characteristics:

FH101:
27

• adjustable curved vanes, 1 direction


14,5
4.7

• free passage ca. 60 %


• the grille is hinged to the filter frame
35

enabling all 25 mm thick filter car-


tridges

18 25 25 FH201:
• adjustable curved vanes, 2 direc-
tions
A • free passage ca. 60 %
• the grille is hinged to the filter frame
enabling all 25 mm thick filter car-
FH371 tridges
C
FH371:
B
• perforated sheet
• free passage ca. 50 %
F
• the grille is hinged to the filter frame
enabling all 25 mm thick filter car-
tridges
27

14,5
4.7

FH711:
35

• fixed horizontal vanes


• free passage ca. 60 %
• the grille is hinged to the filter frame
enabling all 25 mm thick filter car-
18 25
tridges

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 102


INTERNATIONAL

FH771:
FH711
C • grid core with mesh 45° deflection,
12,5 x 12,5 mm
B • free passage ca. 85 %
• the grille is hinged to the filter
F frame enabling all 25 mm thick fil-
ter cartridges

27
14,5 FH781:
4.7

• grid core with square mesh 12,5 x


12,5 mm

35
• free passage ca. 85 %
• the grille is hinged to the filter
frame enabling all 25 mm thick fil-
18 16,7 25 ter cartridges

A
Plenum DP100S
FH771 C

T
F

H1
27

14,5
4.7

35

C + 26

18 25

A Plenum DP100T

ø D2
FH781 C

B H2

F
27

14,5 C
4.7

C + 26
35

18 25

Nom. Dim. A B C Filter

594 x 294 594 x 294 505 x 205 535 x 235 500 x 200
594 x 594 594 x 594 505 x 505 535 x 535 500 x 500
669 x 669 669 x 669 580 x 580 610 x 610 575 x 575

E 1 102 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories Fixing


Example: A filter cartridge DUST STOP 25 mm can concealed screw fixing in filter-
be delivered upon request. (standard frame
Aluminium exhaust grille with fixed fil- without filter cartridge).
ter frame and grid core. Standard
painted white (RAL 9010). Delivery possibilities
Type: FH781 • FH101: aluminium grille with filter
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm cartridge and curved vanes, 1
direction, painted RAL 9010

• FH201: aluminium grille with filter


cartridge and curved vanes, 2
directions, painted RAL 9010

• FH371: aluminium grille with filter


cartridge and perforated sheet,
painted RAL 9010

• FH711: aluminium grille with filter


cartridge and fixed horizontal
vanes, painted RAL 9010
How to order
• FH771: aluminium grille with grid
FH771, dimensions 594 x 594 mm with filter cartridge, painted white core and mesh of 12,5 x 12,5 mm,
(RAL 9010). 45° deflection, painted RAL 9010

• FH781: aluminium grille with grid


a) Grille
core and square mesh of 12,5 x
F H 7 7 1 - - 0 5 9 4 0 5 9 4 12,5 mm, painted RAL 9010

L H
101: with curved vanes, 1 direction
201: with curved vanes, 2 directions
371: with perforated steel sheet
711: with fixed horizontal vanes
771: with grid core (links 45° deflection,
12,5 x 12,5 mm)
781: with grid core (straight links 12,5 x 12,5 mm)
H: grille with fixed filterframe and concealed screw fixing

b) Filter Cartridge
F I 3 2 5 - - 0 5 0 0 0 5 0 0
L H
FI225: class G2
FI325: class G3
FI425: class G4

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 103


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

TRANSFER GRILLE WITH FIXED VANES WITH 45°DEFLECTION


A-250

Installation dimensions

AD250 AE250
1
20
20

( H + 30 ) x ( L + 30 )

( H - 20 ) x ( L - 20 )
( H + 30 ) x ( L + 30 )

( H - 20 ) x ( L - 20 )

HxL
HxL

Application
The transfer grille type A-250 is used
for wall mounting.
The grille can be used for supply or
exhaust of small air volumes in
heating, ventilating or air treatment
systems.

34 44
Technical information
Characteristics:
AF250
• horizontal vanes with 45° deflec-
tion
• distance of the blades = 20 mm
• can be used as supply, exhaust
and transfer grille
• available in multiples of 25 mm in
length and 25 mm in height
20

min L = 100 mm, max L = 1575 mm


( H + 30 ) x ( L + 30 )

( H - 20 ) x ( L - 20 )

min H = 75 mm, max H = 800 mm


• GT007: only available in multiples
HxL

of 25 mm as well in length as in
height

Construction:

extruded aluminium frame and


vanes, naturel tone anodised

29

L = nominal length (mm)


H = nominal height (mm)
All dimensions in mm
For a detailed selection see p. 1 111

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 110


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories


Example: • GR001: mounting frame in roll-
formed galvanised steel sheet (only
Aluminium transfer grille with fixed hori- for AD and AE)
zontal vanes for transfer of small air vol-
umes, standard natural tone anodised. • GT007: damper with vertical op-
posed blades. Galvanised steel
Type: AF250 sheet painted black (for further
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm details see p. 1 290).

How to order
AD257, dimension 500 x 300 mm with mounting frame GR001

a) Grille

A D 2 5 7 - - 0 5 0 0 0 3 0 0

L H
0: without damper
7: with damper

D: frame 25 mm, fixation with friction springs


E: frame 25 mm, concealed screw fixing
F: frame 25 mm, visible screw fixing

b) Mounting frame

G R 0 0 1 - - 0 5 0 0 0 3 0 0

L H

E 1 110 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

TRANSFER GRILLE WITH FIXED VANES WITH 45° DEFLECTION


A-250

Selection diagram - exhaust

100 200 300 400 500 600


qV
1000 2000 3000 5000 7000 m /h
3 D
1

0%

%
3

50
m /s

10
0,03 0,04 0,06 0,08 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1,2 1,6 2
14
13
12

%
11

25
10
9
vk 8
NR 50

NR 45

9
(m/s) 7

18
NR
NR 40

+
6

NR
NR 35
5
NR 30

4 NR 25

NR 20
3
5 8 15 30 60 100 200
6 10 20 40 80 150
200 300 400 600 800 1000
200 500 700 900
300 400 500 700 900 p (Pa)
300 600 800 t
400 600 800 1000
400 500 700 900
500 700 900
500 600 800 1000

Air flow rate measurements-


exhaust
Ak- values (m2)
H L (mm)
(mm) 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000

200 0,012 0,019 0,026 0,031 0,04 0,046 0,052 0,058 0,064
300 - 0,031 0,04 0,052 0,064 0,073 0,086 0,095 0,105
400 - - 0,058 0,073 0,086 0,105 0,116 0,132 0,15
500 - - - 0,095 0,116 0,132 0,15 0,17 0,189

Example: - Exhaust air flow rate qv = 0,24 m3/s


- Grille : 500 x 300 mm
- Supply air velocity vk = 4,5 m/s
- Noise level NR 25
- Total pressure loss with damper 100 % open: ∆ pt = 8 Pa

Velometer jet: 2220 A of 6070

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 111


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

TRANSFER GRILLE
AF980

Installation dimensions
AF980 AF981
1

25
( H + 41 ) x ( L + 41 )

( H + 30 ) x ( L + 30 )
( H - 20 ) x ( L - 20 )
H x L

16,7

Application
The grille type AF980 is used as a transfer
grille in facilities such as offices, hospitals,
schools, ...
The grille can be used for wall or door
mounting and is recommended for the
min 30 6
max 58
transfer of air from one room to another.
The sight-proof design (1 grille) is espe-
Nominal dimensions cially used for dressing rooms, lavatories
L = Nominal length (mm) and laundries.
H = Nominal height (mm) A light-tight grille is obtained by installing
All dimensions in mm 2 grilles back to back and painting them
black, especially suited for dark rooms or
cinemas.
Fast selection diagram

Dimension Technical information


LxH (mm)
20 30 40 50 NR
600 x 400 Characteristics:
600 x 300
• blades with inverted Y profile (sight-
600 x 200 proof)
500 x 200 • free passage ca. 38 %
400 x 200 • used for door thicknesses between 30
and 58 mm
400 x 150
• available in multiples of 25 mm, in
300 x 150 length as well as in height
min L = 100 mm; max L = 1000 mm
300 x 100 min H = 75 mm; max H = 1000 mm
Throw LT (m)
200 x 100 Construction:

extruded aluminium, natural tone ano-


30 40 50 60 70 80 100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000
m3/h
dised

For a detailed selection and other dimensions, see next page.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 120


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Fixing Delivery possibilities


Example: visible screw fixing • AF980: transfer grille without coun-
terframe
Aluminium sight-proof grille with invert-
ed Y-profile blades for door or wall • AF981: transfer grille with counter-
mounting, equipped with a counter- frame
frame.
Natural tone anodised grille and
counterframe.

Type: AF981
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm

How to order

AF980, dimension 400 x 150 mm

A F 9 8 0 - - 0 4 0 0 0 1 5 0
L H

0: without counterframe
1: with counterframe

E 1 120 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

TRANSFER GRILLE
AF980

Selection diagram
1
NR 55

NR 50

NR 45

NR 40

NR 35
NR 30

NR 25

NR 20

Air flow rate measurement-


exhaust
Ak- values (m2)
H L (mm)
(mm) 200 300 400 500 600

100 0,005 0,008 - - -


150 - 0,012 0,016 0,020 0,023
200 - 0,016 0,023 0,027 0,033
300 - - 0,033 0,041 0,049
400 - - - - 0,065

Example: - Exhaust air flow rate qv = 0,02 m3/s


- Grille: 200 x 100 mm
- Air velocity vk = 4 m/s
- Noise level NR 41
Velometer jet: 2220 A or 6070 - Total pressure loss ∆ pt = 30 Pa

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 130


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

GRILLE FOR CIRCULAR DUCTS


AS/GS120 • AS/GS130

Installation dimensions
AS/GS120 AS/GS130
1
Application
The grille type AS/GS is used for the
supply and exhaust of cooled or
heated air in facilities such as ware-
houses, workshops, commercial
centres, ...
The grille can be direct mounted
on a circular duct.
The vanes can be adjusted manu-
ally and individually to obtain an
optimal air distribution.

Nominal dimensions: Technical information


L = nominal length (mm)
H = nominal height (mm) Characteristics:
All dimensions in mm
• free passage ca. 70 % (depen-
ding on the position of the vanes)
• AS/GS 120: exhaust grille
Fast selection diagram • AS/GS 130: supply grille
• nom. L = 225, 325, 425, 525, 625,
825, 1025, 1225 mm
nom. H = 75, 125, 225, 325 mm
Dimension
20 30 40 50 NR
L x H (mm)
8 11 14 19
Construction:
625 x 225
7 10 13 18
525 x 225 • AS: roll-formed aluminium sheet
7 9 12 16
425 x 225 • GS: roll-formed steel sheet
625 x 125
6 7 10 14 Both phosphated and painted
5 7 9 13 white (RAL 9010)
525 x 125

5 6 8 12
425 x 125 Throw LT (m)

4 6 8 11
625 x 75

525 x 75 4 5 7 10

425 x 75 4 5 7 9

100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 2000 3000 5000 m3/h

Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone.


See p. 1 160 for a detailed selection.
Only for supply. For exhaust, see p. 1 160

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 140


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories Fixing


Example: • GT005: steel sheet inclined hit-and- Visible screw fixing
miss damper, painted black
Steel supply and exhaust grille with
individually adjustable vanes for circu- • GT006: steel sheet hit-and-miss dam-
lar duct mounting, equipped with an per, painted black
inclined damper.
The grille is painted white (RAL 9010) • GT007: damper with vertical op-
posed blades. Galvanised steel sheet
Type: GS130 + GT005 painted black
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm

Fixing dimensions

Nominal dimensions Dimensions Duct Diam. (mm)


L x H (mm) A B C min. max.

425 x 75 35 65 99 160 400


525 x 75 35 65 108 160 400
625 x 75 35 65 116 160 400

425 x 125 41 71 105 315 900


525 x 125 41 71 114 315 900
625 x 125 41 71 122 315 900

425 x 225 50 80 114 630 1400


525 x 225 50 80 123 630 1400
625 x 225 50 80 131 630 1400

425 x 325 55 85 120 900 2400


525 x 325 55 85 129 900 2400
625 x 325 55 85 137 900 2400

How to order

GS130, dimension 625 x 125 mm, with hit-and-miss damper GT005

G S 1 3 5 - - 0 6 2 5 0 1 2 5

L H

5: inclined hit-and-miss damper GT005


6: hit-and-miss damper GT006
7: damper GT007
8: damper GT008
0: single row of horizontal vanes (max. nominal length 525 mm)
1: front row of horizontal vanes and back row of vertical vanes
(max. nominal length 525 mm)
2: single row of vertical vanes
3: front row of vertical vanes and back row of horizontal vanes
(max. nominal length 525 mm)
G: steel
A: aluminium
Characteristics:
nominal length: 225 - 325 - 425 - 525 - 625 - 825 - 1025 - 1225 mm
nominal height: 75 - 125 - 225 - 325 mm

E 1 140 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Delivery possibilities

AS/GS120 AS/GS130

AS/GS126 AS/GS135

Aluminium Steel Construction

AS120 GS120 Exhaust grille with single row of vertical vanes


AS126 GS126 AS/GS120 with hit-and-miss damper GT006
AS130 GS130 Supply grille with front row of vertical vanes and back row of horizontal vanes
AS135 GS135 AS/GS130 with inclined hit-and-miss damper GT005

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 150


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

GRILLE FOR CIRCULAR DUCTS


AS/GS120 • AS/GS130

Selection diagram - supply

LT (m)
m3/h
4000
5000
m3/s
q
v
- 0°deflection
- With ceiling effect
- Without damper
1
3500 1,4 10 vk
20 30 40 3000 1,2 9
2500 1 m/s
18 35 0,9 8
25 2000 0,8 50
16 30
1800 0,7 7 NR
1600 0,6
14 1400 45
20 0,5 6 NR
1200
25 1000 0,4 40
12 18
900 5 NR
0,35
16 800 0,3 35
10 20 700 NR
14 600 0,25
9 18 4 30
500 0,2 NR
8 12 16 0,18
0,16 25
14 NR
7 400 3
10 0,14 20
12 NR
6 9 350 0,12 2,5
8
5 10 300
0,10
7 2
9 250 0,09
4 6 8
0,08
3,5 7 200 0,07
5
180
3 6 0,06
160
4
2,5 5 140 0,05
3,5
120
2 3 4 0,04
3,5 100 0,035
2,5
3 0,03
1,5
75 425 625
vT 0,50 0,33 0,25 m/s 525
vR 0,25 0,17 0,12 m/s 125 425 625
525
225 425 625
525
425 625 NOTE: noise level correction with
325
525 damper: see pressure loss
diagram

Air flow rate measurement Ak - values supply (m2)


supply-exhaust
L (mm)

H (mm) 425 525 625

75 0,015 0,020 0,024


125 0,034 0,044 0,053
225 0,069 0,086 0,102
325 0,102 0,130 0,148

Correction factors
Throw correction factor LT without ceiling effect
Distance between ceiling and supply grille Correction
M 0,9 m LT x 0,75

Velometer jet 2220 A or 6070

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 160


INTERNATIONAL

Selection diagram - exhaust

11

18
+
NR

+
NR
NR 50

NR 45

NR 40

NR 35

NR 30

NR 25

NR 20

Pressure loss - supply


Ak - values exhaust (m2)
135

L (mm)
GS

D
%
%

H (mm) 425 525 625


100
25

50

Pt (Pa)
200 75 0,012 0,014 0,017
125 0,023 0,029 0,034
150
225 0,044 0,055 0,066
130

325 0,066 0,086 0,096


GS
5

100
+3
NR

80
5

Example - exhaust
+2
NR

5
+1

60
NR

- Exhaust air flow rate qv = 0,14 m3/s


+0

50
NR

- Grille: GS126 625 x 125 mm


40
- Air velocity vk = 4 m/s
30 - Noise level NR 20
- Total pressure loss with damper 100 % open: ∆ pt = 6,5 Pa
20 - Correction on noise level: NR 20 + 11 = NR 31
15

10

5
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

vK (m/s)

vD

vk pt

E 1 160 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

CORE GRILLE
AC300/400/500

Installation dimensions
AC300 AC400/500
1
Application
Bar grille type AC300 /400/500 is
used for the supply and exhaust of
cooled or heated air in facilities
L: nominal length (mm)
such as offices, shopping centres, ...
H: nominal height (mm)
The grille consists of a core without
All dimensions in mm
flanges or system fixation.
The AC300/400 construction cannot
be used for floor mounting; AC500
can.

Technical information
Characteristics:

• straight bars or with 15° deflection


• bars on 12,5 mm to centre
• available in multiples of 1 mm, in
height as well as in length
AC300:
min L = 100 mm, max L = 2000 mm
min H = 37,5 mm, max H = 600
mm
AC400/500:
min L = 100 mm, max L = 1500 mm
min H = 37,5 mm, max H = 450
mm
• without frame or fixation system

Construction:

• extruded aluminium bars


• AC300: standard construction,
sa-tin anodised
AC400: robust construction, satin
anodised
AC500: robust construction for
floor mounting, satin anodised

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 170


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Type of bars AC400/500


Deflection 0°
Example: AC300
Deflection 0°
Aluminium grille without flanges with
fixed horizontal extruded bars. Robust
construction for floor mounting.

Type: AC500
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm
AC420/520
Deflection 15°
AC320
Deflection 15°

Accessories
• cannot be delivered with flow
equalizer or damper
• acces door: see p. 1 181 and 1 201

Corner sections

The corner sections are being manufactured in two pieces in an


inner dimension of 300 x 300 mm nominal (see drawing).
The corner sections are standard 90°.

How to order:
AC300 corner section, height = 200 mm

A C 3 0 0 C - 0 3 0 0 0 2 0 0

3, 4 or 5 Size L x H H

C: Corner section 0° deflection or 15° inwards


0: 0° deflection D: Corner section 0° deflection or 15°
2: 15° deflection outwards

How to order
AC300, dimension 600 x 200 mm

A C 3 0 0 - - 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 0

L H

0: bar grille
2: bar grille, 15° deflection

3: standard construction type 300


4: standard construction type 400
5: floor use reinforcement
C: core without frame

E 1 170 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

BAR GRILLE
A-300

Installation dimensions
AA/AB300
20 ( H - 20 ) x ( L - 20 )

( H + 20 ) x ( L + 20 ) AD/AE/AF300
1
H x L

Application
The bar grille type A-300 is used for
29 6
the supply and exhaust of cooled or
heated air in facilities such as offices,
shopping centres,...
L: nominal length (mm) The grille can be used for wall or win-
H: nominal height (mm) dow sill mounting where strict aes-
All dimensions in mm thetic construction is desired.
The grilles cannot be used for floor
mounting.
Fast selection diagram
Technical information
Characteristics:

Dimension
20 30 40 NR
• straight bars or with 15° deflection
L x H (mm)
5,5 9 15
• bars on 12,5 or 162/3 mm to centre
1000 x 300
5 9 14 • available in multiples of 1 mm in
800 x 300
length and 12,5 mm in height
4,5 8 12
800 x 200 min L = 100 mm, max L = 2000 mm
600 x 200
4 7 11 min H = 37,5 mm, max H = 600 mm
4 7 11
500 x 200
4 6 10 Throw LT (m)
• GT007 only available in multiples of
400 x 200
3,5 6 9,5
25 mm as well in length as in height
400 x 150 • linear grilles (= grilles consisting of
3 5 8 intermediate and end pieces) only
400 x 100
available in heights 75, 100, 150,
3 4,5 7
300 x 100 2,5 4 7 200, 300 mm
250 x 100
2,5 4 6,5
200 x 100
Construction:

100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 1200 3000 4000 m3/h • extruded aluminium frame and
bars
• in case of construction with flow
Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone. equalizer, the adjustable vanes are
For a detailed selection and other dimensions, see p. 1 230. integrated in the frame and form a
Valid only for supply, see diagram p. 1 230 for exhaust. whole with the grille. Aluminium
sheet vanes (max H = 525 mm).
• finish satin anodised

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 180


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories Bar types


Example: • GT007: damper with vertical opposed Deflection 0°
blades, galvanised steel sheet,
Aluminium grille with fixed horizontal pain-ted black.
straight bars for wall or window sill (for details, see p. 1 290)
mounting, equipped with a damper.
The grille is satin anodised. • GR001: mounting frame: roll-formed,
galvanised steel sheet.
Type: AA307 (Only for AA/AB/AD/AE300)
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm
• flow equalizer with aluminium sheet, Deflection 15°
satin anodised vanes

How to order
AA300, dimension 600 x 200 mm, with damper GT007 and mounting frame
GR001
a) Grille Delivery possibilities
A A 3 0 7 - - 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 0
• A-300, 320, 340, 360
L H
Grille with front bars only.
-: grille in one piece
E: end piece
M: intermediate piece
L: left end piece (for 15° deflection)*
R: right end piece (for 15° deflection)*
• A-307, 327, 347, 367
0: without damper
7: with damper Grille with front bars and
0: bar grille only, on 12,5 mm to centre opposed blade damper.
1: bar grille and flow equalizer, on 12,5 mm to centre
2: bar grille, 15° deflection, on 12,5 mm to centre
3: bar grille, 15° deflection, on 12,5 mm to centre and flow equalizer
4: bar grille, on 162/3 mm to centre
5: bar grille, on 162/3 mm to centre and flow equalizer
6: bar grille, 15° deflection, on 162/3 mm to centre
7: bar grille, 15° deflection, on 162/3 mm to centre and flow equalizer
A:frame width 20 mm, friction spring fixing • A-310, 330, 350, 370
B: frame width 20 mm, concealed screw fixing
D:frame width 25 mm, friction spring fixing Grille with front bars and flow
E: frame width 25 mm, concealed screw fixing equalizer.
F: frame width 25 mm, screw fixing

b) Mounting frame

G R 0 0 1 - - 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 0
• A-317, 337, 357, 377
L H
- : grille in one piece Grille with front bars, flow equal-
E: end piece izer and opposed blade dam-
M: intermediate piece per.

* NOTE: L (left) and R (right) are being determined by looking at the face of
the bar grille having a downward deflection.

E 1 180 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Access Doors

The A-300 grilles series can be provided with a left or right access
door as of a H = 100 mm nominal.
LEFT RIGHT

B = H-20 How to order:


^
DEFLECTION
v A D 3 0 4 - - 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 0
DOWN

L H
4: with access door on the right*
5: with access door on the left*
A, B, C, D, E or F
* Note: L(left) and R (right) are being determined by looking at the face
of the grille with the bars having a downward deflection.

Corner Sections
The corner sections are being manufactured in one piece with an
inner dimension of 300 x 300 mm nominal (see drawing).
The corner sections are standard 90°

How to order:
AA300 corner section, H = 200 mm

A A 3 0 0 C - 0 3 0 0 0 2 0 0

inner dimension H
0: 0° defl.
C: corner section 0° deflection or 15°
2: 15° defl.
inwards
A, B, D, E or F D: corner section 0° deflection or 15°
outwards

Fixing methods
AA/AD300 + GR001 AB/AE300 + GR001 AF300
Grille with friction springs and Grille with concealed screw Grille with visible screw fixing
mounting frame fixing and mounting frame

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 181


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

WINDOW SILL GRILLE


Z-300

Installation dimensions

Z-300 ( H + 18 ) x ( L + 18 )
1
15 12.5
2

23
( H - 22 ) x ( L - 22 )

HxL Application
The grille type Z-300 is used for the
supply and exhaust of cooled or
L: nominal length (mm) heated air in facilities such as
H: nominal height (mm) offices, shops, ...
All dimensions in mm The grille can be mounted in a win-
dow sill where strict aesthetic con-
struction is desired.
Fast selection diagram This grille can not be used for floor
mounting.

Dimension
Technical information
20 30 40 NR
L x H (mm)
5,5 9 15
1000 x 300
5 9 14
Characteristics :
800 x 300

800 x 200
4,5 8 12
• straight bars or 15° deflection
600 x 200
4 7 11 • frame = 15 mm
4 7 11
500 x 200 • bars on 12,5 mm or 162/3 mm to
4 6 10 Throw LT (m)
400 x 200 centre
3,5 6 9,5
400 x 150 • available in multiples of 1 mm in
3 5 8
length and 12,5 mm in height
400 x 100 min L = 100 mm, max L = 2000 mm
3 4,5 7
300 x 100 2,5 4 7
min H = 50 mm, max H = 300 mm
250 x 100
2,5 4 6,5 • linear grilles (= grille consisting of
200 x 100
intermediate and end pieces)
• ZA300: removable core
100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 1200 3000 4000 m3/h • ZB300: fixed core

Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone. Construction:


For a detailed selection and other dimensions, see p. 1 230.
Valid only for supply, see diagram p. 1 230 for exhaust. • extruded aluminium frame and
bars
• finish satin anodised

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 185


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Fixing Bar types


Example: ceiling inlay Deflection 0°

Aluminium grille with fixed horizontal


straight bars for window sill mounting.
Standard natural tone anodised.

Type : ZA300
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm

Deflection 15°

How to order
ZA300, dimension 600 x 200 mm

Z A 3 0 0 - - 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 0

L H

0: bar grille on 12,5 mm to centre


2: bar grille, deflection 15° and 12,5 mm to centre
4: bar grille on 162/3 to centre
6: bar grille, deflection 15° and bars on 162/3 to centre

A: frame 15 mm, removable core


B: frame 15 mm, fixed core

E 1 185 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

FLOOR GRILLE
AG300

Installation dimensions
AG300
( H+30 ) x ( L+30 )
1
5,5 12,5
24

46
Application
HxL The grille type AG300 is used for the
supply and exhaust of cooled and
heated air in comfort installations.
The grille can be mounted in the
L: nominal length (mm) floor to give a linear appearance.
H: nominal height (mm)
All dimensions in mm
Technical information
Characteristics:

• straight bars or with 15° deflection


• bars on 12,5 mm to centre
• available in multiples of 1 mm in
length and 12,5 mm in height
min L = 100 mm, max L = 1500 mm
min H = 50 mm, max H = 450 mm
• GT007 only available in multiples
of 25 mm as well in length as in
height
• linear grilles (= grilles consisting of
intermediate and end pieces)
only available in heights 75, 100,
150, 200, 300 mm
• the diffuser core can be
removed and is fixed into the
frame by special springs
• Succesfully tested to comply with
specifications and structural inte-
grity requirements of European
test standard EN13264 - medium
structural classification (with a
load of 3 kN over 25 x 25 mm2
area)

Construction:

extruded aluminium, satin ano-


dised frame and bars

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 190


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories Fixing


Example: • GT007: damper with vertical oppo- the grille is anchored in the floor by
sed blades, galvanised steel sheet, means of straps on the frame.
Aluminium floor grille with removable painted black
core and a special frame construction (for details see p. 1 290) Bar types
for floor mounting. Complete with
damper. • flow equalizer with aluminium sheet, Deflection 0°
Standard construction, satin anodised. satin anodised vanes

Type: AG307
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm

Deflection 15°

Corner sections

The corner sections are being manufactured in one piece with a


nominal inner dimension of 300 x 300 mm (see drawing).
The corner sections are standard 90°.

How to order:
AG300 corner section, height = 200 mm

A G 3 0 0 C - 0 3 0 0 0 2 0 0

inner dimension H
C: Corner section: 0° deflection or 15° inwards
D: Corner section: 0° deflection or 15° out-
wards

0: 0° deflection
2: 15° deflection

How to order Delivery possibilities


AG300
AG300, size 600 x 200 mm, with damper GT007 Grille with front bars.

AG310
Grille with front bars and flow e-
qualizer.
A G 3 0 7 - - 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 0

L H

- : grille in one piece


E: end piece
M:intermediate piece AG307
L: left end piece (for 15° deflection)* Grille with front bars and opposed
R: right end piece (for 15° deflection)* blade damper.
0: without damper
7: with damper AG317
0: with bars only Grille with front bars, flow equalizer
1: with flow equalizer and opposed blade damper.
2: 15° deflection
3: 15° deflection and flow equalizer

* NOTE: L (left) and R (right) are being determined by looking at the face
of the grille with the bars having a downward deflection.

E 1 190 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

BAR GRILLE
A-400/500

Installation dimensions
AA400/AA500 AD400/AF400/AD500/AF500
1
Application
The bar grille type A-400/500 is used for
the supply and exhaust of cooled or
L = nominal length heated air in facilities such as offices,
H = nominal height shopping centres, ...
All dimensions in mm The grille can be used for wall or win-
dow sill mounting (A-400) or floor
mounting (A-500) to give a linear ap-
Fast selection diagram pearance.

Technical information
Dimension
L x H (mm)
20 30 40 NR Characteristics:
5,5 9 15
1000 x 300
800 x 300
5 9 14 • straight bars or with 15° deflection
4,5 8 12 • bars on12,5 mm to centre
800 x 200
• available in multiples of 1 mm in
4 7 11
600 x 200
4 7 11 length and 12,5 mm in height
500 x 200
400 x 200
4 6 10 Throw LT (m) min L = 100 mm, max L = 1500 mm
400 x 150
3,5 6 9,5 min H = 37,5 mm, max H = 450 mm
• GT007 only available in multiples of
3 5 8
400 x 100 25 mm as well in length as in height
300 x 100
3 4,5 7 • linear grilles (= grilles consisting of
2,5 4 7
250 x 100
2,5 4 6,5
intermediate and end pieces) only
200 x 100
available in heights of 75, 100, 150,
200, 300 mm
• A-500: identical to A-400 but with
100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 1200 3000 4000 m3/h
special reinforcement for floor
mounting
Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone. • A-500: Succesfully tested to comply
For a detailed selection and other dimensions, see p. 1 230. with the specifications and structural
Valid for supply only, see diagram p. 1 230 for exhaust. integrity requirements of European
test standard EN 13264 - “medium”
structural classification (with a load
of 3 kN over 25 x 25 mm2 area)

Construction:

extruded aluminium, satin anodised


frame and bars

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 200


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories Bar types


Example: • GT007: damper with vertical A-400/500
opposed blades, galvanised steel
Aluminium grille with fixed horizontal sheet, painted black Deflection 0°
straight bars as supply or exhaust grille (for details, see p. 1 290)
for wall or window sill mounting,
equipped with a damper. The grille is • flow equalizer with aluminium sheet,
satin anodised. satin anodised vanes

Type: AA400 + GT007 • Damper type: ..9 A-420/520


nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm Only available for the nominal
heights 38, 50 and 63 mm. Deflection 15°
NOT AVAILABLE SEPARATELY.

Delivery possibilities
• A-400/420/500/520
Supply and exhaust grille with fix-
ed horizontal bars.

H D P
38 31 74
50 44 87
• A-410/430/510/530
63 57 100 Supply grille with fixed horizontal
How to order bars complete with flow equaliz-
er with adjustable vertical bars.
AA400, dimension 600 x 200 mm, with damper GT007

A A 4 0 7 - - 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 0
• A-407/427/507/527
L H Supply and exhaust grille same
-: grille in one piece as A-400/420/500/520 complete
E: end piece with opposed blade damper.
M: intermediate piece
L: left end piece (for deflection15°)*
R: right end piece(for deflection15°)*

0: without damper
7: with damper
9: with damper for heights 38, 50 and 63mm

0: bar grille only • A-417/437/517/537


1: bar grille and flow equalizer Supply grille same as A-410/430/
2: bar grille only and 15° deflection 510/530 complete with opposed
3: bar grille, 15° deflection and flow equalizer blade damper.

4: standard construction
5: floor use reinforcement

A: frame width 20 mm, friction spring fixing


D: frame width 25 mm, friction spring fixing
F: frame width 25 mm, screw fixing

* NOTE: L (left) and R (right) are being determined by looking at the


face of the bar grille having a downward deflection.

E 1 200 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Access doors

The A-400 grilles series can be provided with a left or right access
door as of a H = 100 mm nominal.
Left Right
B = H-20
How to order:
Deflection
A D 4 0 4 - - 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 0
down
L H
4: With access door on the right*
5: With access door on the left*
A, C, D, or F
* Note: L (left) and R (right) are being determined by looking at the face
of the bar grille having a downward deflection.

Corner sections
The corner sections are being manufactured in one piece with an inner
dimension of 300 x 300 mm nominal (see drawing). The corner sections
are standard 90°.
How to order:
AD400 corner section, height = 200 mm

A D 4 0 0 C - 0 3 0 0 0 2 0 0

inner dimension H
C: Corner section 0° deflection
or 15° inwards
0: 0° deflection D: Corner section 0° deflection
2: 15° deflection or 15° outwards
A, D or F

Fixing methods

AA400/500 AD400/500 AF400/500


Grille with friction springs Grille with friction springs Grille with visible screw fixing

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 201


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

COMPUTER FLOOR GRILLE


AV500

Installation dimensions

AV500
599
1
2,5 5

18
20
35
50

Application
The grille type AV500 is designed for
the supply and exhaust of cooled
507 and heated air in technical or
computer rooms. The grille is used
with raised 600 x 600 mm modular
floor systems and underfloor air dis-
Selection table tribution network.

Supply
Technical information
Air Volume Air velocity Pressure drop Throw Noise level Characteristics :
3
qv (m /h) vk (m/s) ∆ pt (Pa) LT (m) (NR) • overall size 599 x 599 mm
• straight bars 18 x 5 mm fixed on 5
325 0,67 1 1,8 < 20 support bars 25 x 3 mm
• bars on 12,5 mm to centre
650 1,35 3 2,4 < 20
• the grille core can be removed
720 1,50 4 2,5 < 20 • standard depth = 20 mm (steel
supports or adjustable screws
975 2,03 5 3,6 23 can be delivered to suit request-
1300 2,70 8 5,0 26 ed depth)
• Succesfully tested to comply with
1625 3,38 13 6,4 28 the specifications and structural
integrity requirements of Euro-
1950 4,05 19 7,8 30
pean test standard EN13264 -
2275 4,73 25 9,0 31 heavy structural classification
2600 32 34 (with a load of 4,5 kN over 25 x 25
5,40 11,0
mm2 area)

Exhaust Construction:
Air Volume Pressure drop Noise level
• steel frame (2,5 mm thickness)
qv (m3/h) ∆ pt (Pa) (NR)
painted black (RAL 9005)
650 2 25 • extruded aluminium, satin anodi-
sed core
1300 6 27 • upon request, both frame and
core are available in a black
1950 13 31
nylon coating to give full electri-
2600 22 34 cal isolation where required.
3250 32 36
3900 43 42
4550 51 44

5200 66 47

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 202


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories Fixing


Example: • GT007: damper with vertical op- Supplied without fixings for lay in
posed blades, galvanised steel application.
Floor grille with steel frame and remov- sheet, painted black
able aluminium core for use in com- (for details see catalogue p. 1 290)
puter floors. Complete with damper.
The core is satin anodised. • For depths over 20 mm: steel sup-
The steel frame is painted black (RAL ports or adjustable screws are avail-
9005). able to suit required depth to cus-
tomer specification
Type: AV500 + GT007
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm

AV510 with steel supports AV520 with adjustable screws


-1
-1 +0
599 x 599 +0 599

20
20

50
H

50

M12
46 46

5 40

18,25
5

3
40

18,25

Delivery possibilities
How to order
• AV500
Floor grille with straight front bars
AV500, dimension 600 x 600 mm with damper GT007
• AV507
AV500 with damper GT007

• AV510
A V 5 0 7 - - 0 6 0 0 0 6 0 0 Floor grille with straight front bars
like AV500 only provided with
L H steel supports according to the
requi-red depth

0: with bars only • AV517


7: with damper AV510, with damper GT007
3: with perforated sheet, 40% passage
• AV520
0: standard depth 20 mm Floor grille with straight front bars
1: depth > 20 mm, with steel supports like AV500 only provided with
2: depth > 20 mm, with adjustable screws adjustable screws according to
the required depth

• AV527
* NOTE: if height is > 20 mm, please mention size H AV520 with damper GT007

E 1 202 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

GYMNASIUM WALL GRILLE


AF800

Installation dimensions
AF800
1
Application
A robust constructed grille type AF800
is used for the supply and exhaust of
cooled or heated air in rooms requiring
a robust construction, such as sports
centres, industrial halls, ...
The grille can be used for wall or duct
mounting.

L: nominal length (mm)


H: nominal height (mm) Technical information
All dimensions in mm
Characteristics:

• special, robust construction with


fixed horizontal straight bars
• trimmed edges
• bars on 162/3 mm to centre
• available in multiples of 1 mm in
length and 25 mm in height
min L = 100 mm, max L = 1500 mm
min H = 50 mm, max H = 450 mm
• linear grilles (= grilles consisting of
intermediate and end pieces) only
available in heights 100, 150, 200, 300
mm

Construction:

extruded aluminium, satin anodi-sed


frame and bars

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 210


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories Fixing


Example: • GT007: Damper with vertical oppo- always with visible screw fixing
sed blades. Construction out of gal-
Robust constructed aluminium grille vanised steel sheet, painted black.
with trimmed edges, horizontal bars (for details, see p. 1 290)
and complete with a second row of
flow vanes. • flow equalizer consisting of vanes in
Standard construction, satin anodised. aluminium sheet, satin anodised

Type: AF810
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm

Corner sections

The corner sections are being manufactured in one piece with a


nominal inner dimension of 300 x 300 mm (see drawing).
The corner sections are standard 90°.

How to order:
AF800 corner section, height = 200 mm

A F 8 0 0 C - 0 3 0 0 0 2 0 0

inner dimension H

Delivery possibilities
• AF800 • AF810 • AF807
Grille with horizontal front bars. Grille with front bars and flow equal- Grille with front bars and opposed
izer. blade damper.

How to order

AF800, dimension 600 x 200 mm, with damper GT007

• AF817
Grille with front bars, flow equalizer
and opposed blade damper.
A F 8 0 7 - - 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 0

L H

- : grille in one piece


E: end piece
M:intermediate piece

0: without damper
7: with damper

0: with bars only


1: with flow equalizer

E 1 210 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

GYMNASIUM FLOOR GRILLE


AG800

Installation dimensions
AG800
1
Application
The floor grille type AG800 is used for
the supply and exhaust of cooled or
heated air in rooms requiring a robust
construction, such as sports centres,
industrial halls, ...
The grille is purpose-made for integrated
L: nominal length (mm) floor mounting.
H: nominal height (mm)
All dimensions in mm
Technical information
Characteristics:

• special robust construction for floor


mounting, with fixed horizontal
straight bars
• trimmed edges
• bars on 162/3 to centre
• available in multiples of 1 mm in
length and 25 mm in height
min L = 100 mm, max L = 1500 mm
min H = 50 mm, max H = 450 mm
• linear grilles (= grilles consisting of
intermediate and end pieces) only
available in heights 100, 150, 200, 300
mm
• Succesfully tested to comply with
the specification and structural
integrity requirements of European
test standard EN13264 - medium
structural classification (with a load
of 3 kN over 25 x 25 mm2 area)

Construction:

extruded aluminium, satin anodi-sed


frame and bars

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 220


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories Fixing


Example: • GT007: Damper with vertical oppo- the grille is anchored in the floor by
sed blades, galvanised steel sheet, means of straps on the flange.
Robust constructed aluminium floor painted black
grille with trimmed edges and remov- (for details, see p. 1 290)
able core.
Frame for floor integration. • flow equalizer with aluminium sheet,
Standard construction, satin anodised. satin anodised vanes

Type: AG800
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... (mm)

Corner sections

The corner sections are being manufactured in one piece in an inner


dimension of 300 x 300 mm nominal (see drawing). The corner sec-
tions are standard 90°.

How to order:
AG800 corner section, height = 200 mm

A G 8 0 0 C - 0 3 0 0 0 2 0 0

Inner dimension H

How to order Delivery possibilities


AG800
AG800, dimension 600 x 200 mm, with damper GT007 Grille with front bars.
AG810
Grille with front bars and flow e-
qualizer.
A G 8 0 7 - - 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 0

L H

- : grille in one piece AG807


E: end piece Grille with front bars and opposed
M:intermediate piece blade damper.
0: without damper
7: with damper
AG817
0: with bars only Grille with front bars, flow equalizer
1: with flow equalizer and opposed blade damper.

E 1 220 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

BAR GRILLE
A-300/400/500/800

Selection diagram - supply


0° deflection - with ceiling effect
- damper completely open
1
45
NR Sill mounted
40
NR

35
NR

30
NR

25
NR

20
NR

Wall mounted

200 300 400 600 1000


75 250 500
200 300 500
100 250 400 600
250 400 600 1000
150 300 500 800
400 600 1000
200 500 800
500 800
300
600 1000

Air flow rate measurement-


supply Ak-values (m2)
L (mm)
H (mm) 200 250 300 400 500 600 800 1000

75 0,006 0,008 0,009 0,013 0,016 0,019 0,027 0,031


100 0,009 0,011 0,013 0,019 0,023 0,027 0,038 0,047
150 — 0,019 0,023 0,031 0,038 0,047 0,063 0,078
200 — — — 0,042 0,053 0,063 0,084 0,108
300 — — — — 0,084 0,099 0,133 0,167

Correction factors:
- Throw correction factor without ceiling effect

Distance between ceiling and supply grille Correction


≥ 0,9 m LT X 0,75

Velometer jet 2220 A or 6070 - Correction factors for vertical vane deflection of flow equalizer
(see p. 1 231 verso)

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 230


INTERNATIONAL

Selection diagram - exhaust

0%

%
D

50
10

%
25
NR 55

NR 50

NR 45

NR 40

NR 35

NR 30

NR 25

NR 20

200 300 500 800


75 250 400 600 1000
200 300 500 800
100 250 400 600
250 400 600
150 300 500 800
400 600 1000 When 15° deflected bars are
200 500 800 used, air flow rate will be
500 800
300 reduced by 5% at listed ∆ pt and
600 1000
NR values.

Air flow rate measurement -


exhaust Ak-values (m2)
L (mm)
H (mm) 200 250 300 400 500 600 800 1000

75 0,005 0,006 0,007 0,010 0,012 0,014 0,020 0,023


100 0,007 0,008 0,008 0,014 0,017 0,020 0,028 0,035
150 — 0,014 0,017 0,023 0,028 0,035 0,047 0,058
200 — — — 0,031 0,039 0,047 0,063 0,080
300 — — — — 0,063 0,074 0,099 0,125

Velometer jet 2220 A or 6070

E 1 230 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Pressure loss - supply Example

with damper type .. 7

0,3 m max vT
qv tL
ts
25% 50% D 10°

100%
tR
LT
0
+2

0
NR

+1
NR

20° LS

LS

LT

with perforated sheet type .. 3

200 SUPPLY EXHAUST


180
p 160
t 140 Selection data: Selection data:
Pa 120

100
Air flow rate qv = 0,09 m3/s Exhaust air flow rate qv = 0,16 m3/s
Throw LT = 7 m at vT = 0,25 m/s.
80 Solution:
0
+1

Solution:
NR

60
Grille 1000 x 100 mm.
50
Grille 500 x 100 or 300 x 150 mm. Air velocity vk = 3,9 m/s.
40 Supply air velocity vk = 3,9 m/s. Noise level NR 25
Noise level NR 29 Total pressure loss with damper
30
Total pressure loss with perforated 100 % open: ∆ pt = 3,2 Pa
sheet: ∆ pt = 59 Pa.
20 Noise level correction NR
18 29 + 10 = NR 39
16
14
2 2,5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
v (m/s)
k

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 231


INTERNATIONAL

Induction and temperature quotient with ceiling effect (also valid for lineair grilles)

Induction Temperature quotient

0 , 07

0, 5
0, 8

0, 2
0, 14
0, 16

0, 35
0, 18

02

0, 3
01
00

01

0, 0, 4
02
0

0
0
0

0
0

0
06 05
0,

0,
0,

08
0,
5 0,4 0,3 0,3 0,2 0,20,1 0,1 ,14 0,1 0,1
2
0
5 5 8 6
0,
Ak
m2

40° deflection 20° deflection

0° deflection

Correction factors ∆ tL
Type Deflection Ak vk LT NR i
∆ tS
Correction factors for vertical
vane deflection of flow equalizer
300, 400 20° x 0,87 x 1,15 x 0,85 +3 x 1,4 x 0,7

40° x 0,80 x 1,25 x 0,75 +5 x2 x 0,5

E 1 231 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Drop requirements

LDS (m)

5
2,

4
5
2

10 9 8 7
3
0,2 0,25 0,3 0,35 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1 1,2 1,4 1,6
0,3

0,25
LD
T

)
K m/s
0,2

V (
m/K 0,18
0,16

0,14
0,12

0,1
0,09
0,08
0,07

0,06

0,05

0,04

0,03
1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5 6 7 8 9 10

LT (m)

Drop requirements

The total drop is the maximum vertical distance between


the center of a grille core and the lower point of a speci- H
D

fied envelope, determined by the envelope velocity vT.


B

The total drop consists of two elements: LD = LDS + LDT

1) The isothermal drop LDS is the distance between the L


D
T
center of an air current and the lowest point of the A L
C D
envelope.
L
D
S
2) The non-isothermal drop LDT is the distance between
the center of the grille core and the air current center-
line, at the place of measurement.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 232


INTERNATIONAL

Selection diagram - supply

0° deflection

- with ceiling effect


- damper completely open

50
Sill mounted NR

45
NR

40
NR

35
NR

30
NR

Wall mounted 25
NR

20
NR

H 38 50 63 75 100 150 200 300

Air flow rate measurement -


supply
Ak-values (m2/m)
H (mm) Ak H (mm) Ak
38* 0,012 100 0,049
50* 0,019 150 0,079
63* 0,027 200 0,110
75 0,034 300 0,171

* A-400/500 only

Velometer jet 2220 A or 6070

E 1 232 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Selection diagram - exhaust

50%
100
D

25%
0
+1
NR
NR 55

0
+2
NR
NR 50

NR 45

NR 40

NR 35

NR 30

NR 25

NR 20

H 38 50 63 75 100 150 200 250 300

When 15° deflected bars are used, air flow rate will be reduced by 5 % at
listed ∆ pt and NR values.

Air flow rate measurement-exhaust


Ak-values (m2/m)
H (mm) Ak H (mm) Ak
38* 0,008 125 0,048
50* 0,013 150 0,059
63* 0,019 200 0,082
75 0,025 250 0,105
100 0,036 300 0,127

* A-400/500 only

Velometer jet 2220 A or 6070

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 233


INTERNATIONAL

Pressure loss - supply Example

with damper type .. 7

0,3 m max vT
D
25% 50% qv tL
100%
ts
10°
0
+2

tR
0
NR

LT
+1
NR

Correction factors - supply:

- Throw correction factor without ceiling effect

Distance between ceiling and supply grilles Correction


≥ 0,9 m LT X 0,75

- Correction factors for linear grilles

Grill length Throw Noise level


(m) correction correction (NR)

with perforated sheet type .. 3 1-2 LT x 1,00 + 0 NR

2 - 6,5 LT x 1,10 + 5 NR
200
180
p 160 SUPPLY: EXHAUST:
t 140
Pa 120
Selection data:
Selection data:
100

80 Air flow rate qv = 0,065 m3/s Air flow rate qv = 0,1 m3/s.m
0

Throw LT = 4,5 m at vT = 0,30 m/s


+1

Solution:
NR

60
50 Solution:
Size H = 75 mm
40
Size H = 63 mm Air velocity vk = 4 m/s
30
Supply air velocity vk = 2,4 m/s Noise level NR 20
Noise level NR 21 Total pressure loss with damper
Total pressure with damper 100 % 100 % open: ∆ pt = 2,5 Pa
20 open: ∆ pt = 10 Pa
18
16
Correction on noise level
14 NR 21 + 10 = NR 31
2 2,5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
v (m/s)
k

E 1 233 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

ROUND BAR GRILLE


CB400

Installation dimensions

CB400
52 25
1
øA
øN

Application
The circular grille type CB400 is used
for the supply and exhaust of
cooled and heated air, particularly
in smaller spaces such as wash-
77 rooms, toilets, bathrooms or kitchen
within housing, restaurants, retail or
commercial uses.
The grille can be direct mounted
Size ØN ØA on a circular duct or fixed to the
wall with screws.
100 100 160

125 125 160


Technical information
160 160 200
Characteristics:

• straight bars (CB400) or with 15° de-


flection (CB420)
• the grille core can be rotated to
provide directional control of the
air flow (CB420)
• bars on 12,5 mm to centre
• available in 3 sizes: 100, 125 and 160
mm diameter

Construction:

• extruded aluminium bar, satin ano-


dised
• mill finish aluminium grille housing
• painted RAL colour on request
• foam sealing strip

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 234


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Fixing Delivery possibilities


Example: The grille will push-fit into circular CB400
ducts. The grille can be secured to Supply and exhaust grille with fixed
Aluminium circular bar grille at 15° the wall by screw fixing at the back straight bars.
deflection for direct mounting on a cir- of the grille housing after removing
cular duct with screw fixing to the wall. the push-fit core retaining bezel. CB420
The grille is satin anodised. Supply and exhaust bar grille with
15° deflection
Type : CB420
size ... mm

How to order
CB420, size 125 mm with a deflection of 15°

C B 4 2 0 - - 0 1 2 5 0 0 0 0

size

0: grille with straight bars


2: bar grille 15° deflection

E 1 234 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

ROUND BAR GRILLE


CB400
Selection Table
SUPPLY
Air Velocity

vk (m/s)
EXHAUST

vk (m/s)
1
qv (m3/h) 100 125 160 qv (m3/h) 100 125 160

30 2,2 1,4 30 2,5 1,9


60 4,5 2,8 60 4,9 3,8
75 5,6 3,5 75 6,1 4,7
90 6,8 4,2 90 7,4 5,7
130 6,0 3,3 130 8,2 3,9
160 7,4 4,1 160 10,1 4,8
210 5,4 210 6,3
250 6,4 250 7,5

Pressure loss

∆ pt(Pa) ∆ pt(Pa)

100 125 160 qv (m3/h) 100 125 160


qv (m3/h)

30 2 1 30 2 1
60 9 3 60 6 3
75 14 5 75 10 4
90 21 8 90 14 6
130 16 5 130 12 5
160 25 8 160 19 8
210 13 210 12
250 19 250 18

Sound power level

Lw (NR) Lw (NR)

qv (m3/h) 100 125 160 qv (m3/h) 100 125 160

30 14 14 30 14 14
60 18 17 60 16 15
75 24 18 75 24 18
90 31 24 90 31 24
130 32 23 130 33 23
160 35 26 160 36 28
210 33 210 37
250 36 250 42

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 235


INTERNATIONAL

SUPPLY
Throw

LT (m)
3
qv (m /h) 100 125 160

30 1,6 1,3

60 3,3 2,6

75 4,1 3,2
90 4,9 3,9

130 5,6 4,1

160 6,8 5,1

210 6,7

250 8

E 1 235 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

ROUND GRID CORE GRILLE


CB780

Installation dimensions

CB780
52 14
1
Dia. A
Dia. N

Application
The circular grille with grid core
type CB780 is used for the exhaust
of smaller air volumes, particularly
66
in smaller spaces such as wash-
rooms, toilets, bathrooms or
kitchens within housing, restaurants,
Size ØN ØA retail or commercial uses.
The grille can be direct mounted
100 100 160 on a circular duct or fixed to the
wall with screws. The grid core can
125 125 160 easily be removed for cleaning.
160 160 200
Technical information
Characteristics:

• grid core with mesh of 12,5 x 12,5 mm


• free passage ca. 85 %
• available in 3 sizes: diameter 100,
125 and 160 mm

Construction:

• mill finish aluminium frame and grid


core
• painted in RAL colour upon request
• foam sealing strip

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 236


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Fixing


Example: The grille will push-fit into circular
ducts. The grille can be secured to
Circular exhaust grille mesh with grid the wall by screw fixing through the
core 12,5 x 12,5 mm for direct mount- back of the grille housing, after
ing on a circular duct with screw fixing removing the push-fit core retaining
to the wall. Standard mill finish alumini- bezel.
um.

Type : CB780
size ..... mm

Selection table

∆ pt Comfort air
Size
flow (m3/h)
(Pa)

100 8 80
125 6 160
160 7 250

Air volume corresponding to Lw < NR30

How to order

CB780, size 125 mm

C B 7 8 0 - - 0 1 2 5 0 0 0 0

size

E 1 236 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

EXHAUST GRILLE
GK150

Installation dimensions
GK150
1
Application
The grille type GK150 is used for air
exhaust or as a transfer grille in
facilities such as offices, workshops,
warehouses, shopping centres, ...
The grille can be used for wall or
duct mounting.

Technical information
Characteristics:

• fixed stamp-formed blades, 20°


deflection
• free passage ca. 75 %
• GK150:standarddimension: stamp-
formed in one piece

Construction:

Fast selection diagram steel, painted white (RAL 9010)

Dimension
LxH (mm)
Specifications description
508 x 508
Example:
762 x 305

457 x 457
610 x 305 Steel wall grille with fixed stamp-
406 x 406 formed horizontal blades with 20°
457 x 305
deflection.
406 x 305

610 x 203
The grille is painted white (RAL 9010)
762 x 152

508 x 203
Type: GK150
406 x 203
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm
356 x 203

305 x 203

356 x 152

305 x 152
Fixing
254 x 152

203 x 152
visible screw fixing
254 x 102

203 x 102

3
100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 2000 3000 4000 m /h

The selection is based on a vf between 2 and 5 m/s.


See next page for a detailed selection.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 240


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

EXHAUST GRILLE
GK150

Selection table GK150

LxH
(mm)
Af
(m2)
vf (m/s) = 2

i pt(Pa) = 5
2,5

8
3

11 20
4 5

30
LxH
(mm)
Af
(m2)
vf (m/s) = 2

i pt(Pa) = 5
2,5

8
3

11
4

20
5

30
1
qv (m3/s) qv qv qv qv qv (m3/s) qv qv qv qv

203 x 102 0,014 0,028 0,035 0,042 0,056 0,070 406 x 305 0,094 0,188 0,235 0,282 0,376 0,470

254 x 102 0,208


0,034 0,043 0,051 0,068 0,085 457 x 305 0,104 0,260 0,312 0,416 0,520
152 x 152 0,017

508 x 305 0,124 0,248 0,310 0,372 0,496 0,620


305 x 102
203 x 152 0,022 0,044 0,055 0,066 0,088 0,110
406 x 406 0,135 0,270 0,338 0,405 0,540 0,675
356 x 102
254 x 152 0,027 0,054 0,068 0,081 0,108 0,135 610 x 305 0,138 0,276 0,345 0,414 0,552 0,690
203 x 203
457 x 457 0,158 0,316 0,395 0,474 0,632 0,790
305 x 152 0,034 0,068 0,085 0,102 0,136 0,170
762 x 305 0,173 0,346 0,433 0,519 0,692 0,865
356 x 152 0,039 0,078 0,098 0,117 0,156 0,195
508 x 508 0,204 0,408 0,510 0,612 0,816 1,020
406 x 152
305 x 203 0,046 0,092 0,115 0,138 0,184 0,230
254 x 254

508 x 152 0,104 0,130 0,156 0,208 0,260


0,052
356 x 203

406 x 203 0,062 0,124 0,155 0,186 0,248 0,310

508 x 203 0,071 0,142 0,178 0,213 0,284 0,355


305 x 305

762 x 152 0,083 0,166 0,208 0,249 0,332 0,415

610 x 203 0,087 0,174 0,218 0,261 0,348 0,435

L = nominal length (mm)


H = nominal height (mm)

How to order
GK150 dimension 406 x 203 mm

G K 1 5 0 - - 0 4 0 6 0 2 0 3

L H

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 241


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

AIR SUPPLY GRILLE


GF161

Installation dimensions
GF161

42
1
Application
( H + 32 ) x ( L + 32 )
( H - 13 ) x ( L - 13 )

The grille type GF161 is used for the


H x L

supply of cooled and heated air in


facilities such as offices, shopping
centres, ... The grille can be used
for wall or duct mounting.
The grille is equipped with a steel
damper front operated.

Technical information
Characteristics :

• fixed stamp-formed blades, 20°


deflection both to the left and
the right
• free passage ca. 60 % (damper
completely open)
• damper equipped with parallel
leafs front operated.
• available dimensions:
L = 203, 254, 305 ,356, 406, 508
Fast selection diagram and 610 mm
H = 102, 152 and 203 mm

Construction :
Dimension
25 35 45
L x H (mm)
6 8,4 12 steel, painted white (RAL 9010).
610 x 203
5,2 7,8 10,1
508 x 203

5 7 9,4
406 x 203
356 x 203
4,8 6,8 9
Specifications description
4,4 6,1 8,5
406 x 152 Example:
4,2 6 8
356 x 152
4,1 5,8 7,7
305 x 152 Steel supply grille with stamp-
4 5,4 7,4
254 x 152
3,8 5 6,6
formed vertical blades, 20° deflec-
356 x 102 tion both to the left and the right
3,7 4,9 6,4
305 x 102
and equipped with a damper,
254 x 102
3,4 4,5 6,1 painted white (RAL 9010).
Throw LT (m)
3,1 4 5,8
203 x 102 Type: GF161
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm
100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 2000 m3/h

Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone. Fixing


See next page for a detailed selection. visible screw fixing

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 250


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

AIR SUPPLY GRILLE


GF161

Selection table

LxH
(mm)
Ak
(m2)
vk (m/s)
∆ pt(Pa)
2
4
2,5
6
3
8
4
15
5
23
1
203 x 102 0,012 qv (m3/s) 0,024 0,030 0,036 0,048 0,060
LT (m) 1,8 2,2 2,6 3,5 4,4
254 x 102 0,015 qv (m /s) 3
0,030 0,038 0,045 0,060 0,075
LT (m) 1,9 2,4 2,9 3,9 4,8
305 x 102 qv (m3/s) 0,038 0,048 0,057 0,076 0,095
0,019
203 x 152 LT (m) 2,2 2,7 3,3 4,3 5,4
356 x 102 0,022 qv (m /s) 3
0,044 0,050 0,066 0,088 0,110
LT (m) 2,4 3,0 3,6 4,7 6,0
254 x 152 0,026 qv (m3/s) 0,052 0,065 0,078 0,104 0,130
LT (m) 2,5 3,1 3,7 5,0 6,3
305 x 152 0,030 qv (m /s) 3
0,060 0,075 0,090 0,120 0,150
LT (m) 2,7 3,4 4,1 5,4 6,8
356 x 152 0,035 qv (m3/s) 0,070 0,088 0,105 0,140 0,175
LT (m) 2,9 3,7 4,4 5,8 7,3
406 x 152 0,041 qv (m /s) 3
0,082 0,103 0,123 0,164 0,205
LT (m) 3,2 3,9 4,7 6,3 7,9
356 x 203 0,047 qv (m3/s) 0,094 0,118 0,141 0,188 0,235
LT (m) 3,7 4,2 5,0 6,7 8,4
406 x 203 0,053 qv (m /s) 3
0,106 0,133 0,159 0,212 0,265
LT (m) 3,6 4,5 5,4 7,2 9,0
508 x 203 0,069 qv (m3/s) 0,138 0,173 0,207 0,276 0,345
LT (m) 4,1 5,1 6,1 8,1 10,2
610 x 203 0,083 qv (m /s) 3
0,166 0,208 0,249 0,332 0,415
LT (m) 4,5 5,6 6,7 8,9 11,1

L: nominal length (mm) LT for vT = 0,375 m/s


H: nominal height (mm)

How to order

GF161 dimension 356 x 203 mm

G F 1 6 1 - - 0 3 5 6 0 2 0 3

L H

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 251


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

FLOOR GRILLE
GD200

Installation dimensions
GD207
1
Application
The grille type GD200 is used for the
supply and exhaust of air in facilities
such as workshops, sports halls, shop-
ping centres, ...
The grille can be used for floor
mounting.

Technical information
Characteristics:

• constructed of heavy steel sheet


and mechanically assembled grid
core
Fast selection diagram • grid core meshes 50 x 12,5 mm
• free passage ca. 75 %
• available in multiples of 25 mm in
Dimension
L x H (mm) height as well as in length
min L = 100 mm, max L = 800 mm
750 x 500

750 x 400 min H = 100 mm, max H = 800 mm


500 x 500

600 x 400

406 x 400
Construction:
750 x 300

750 x 250

600 x 300
steel, painted white (RAL 9010)
400 x 400

500 x 300

500 x 250

700 x 150
Specifications description
500 x 200

300 x 300 Example:


600 x 150

400 x 200

300 x 250
Steel floor grille with fixed core (mesh
300 x 200 50 x 12,5 mm) for floor mounting.
350 x 150

250 x 200
The grille is painted white (RAL 9010)
300 x 150

200 x 200
Type: GD200
3
100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 2000 3000 4000 6000 m /h nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm

The selection area is based on a vf between 2 and 5m/s.


Accessories
GT007: opposed blade damper,
Delivery possibilities galvanised steel sheet, painted
black
GD200 GD207 (for details, see p. 1 290)

Fixing
h

Grille with fixed core floor mounting


H ≤ 400 mm: h=20 mm
H > 400 mm: h=35 mm
Grille with fixed core and opposed
blade damper.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 270


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

FLOOR GRILLE
GD200

Selection table

LxH
(mm)
Af
(m2)
vf (m/s) = 2

∆ pt(Pa) = 2
2,5

4
3

5
4

10
5

15
LxH
(mm)
Af
(m2)
vf (m/s) = 2

∆ pt(Pa) = 2
2,5

4
3

5
4

10
5

15
1
qv (m3/s) qv qv qv qv qv (m3/s) qv qv qv qv

200 x 200 0,028 0,056 0,070 0,084 0,112 0,140 750 x 150 0,084 0,168 0,210 0,252 0,336 0,420

300 x 150 0,032 0,064 0,080 0,096 0,128 0,160 500 x 250 0,096 0,192 0,240 0,288 0,384 0,480

250 x 200 0,036 0,072 0,090 0,108 0,144 0,180 750 x 200
600 x 250 0,116 0,232 0,290 0,348 0,464 0,580
350 x 150 0,039 0,078 0,098 0,117 0,156 0,195 500 x 300

300 x 200 0,044 0,088 0,110 0,132 0,176 0,220 400 x 400 0,125 0,250 0,313 0,375 0,500 0,625

400 x 150 0,046 0,092 0,115 0,138 0,184 0,230 600 x 300 0,141 0,282 0,353 0,423 0,564 0,705
250 x 250
750 x 250 0,146 0,292 0,365 0,438 0,584 0,730
300 x 250 0,056 0,112 0,140 0,168 0,224 0,280
750 x 300 0,177 0,354 0,443 0,531 0,708 0,885
400 x 200 0,060 0,120 0,150 0,180 0,240 0,300
600 x 400 0,190 0,380 0,475 0,570 0,760 0,950
600 x 150 0,066 0,132 0,165 0,198 0,264 0,330
500 x 500 0,199 0,398 0,498 0,597 0,796 0,995
300 x 300 0,068 0,136 0,170 0,204 0,272 0,340
750 x 400 0,240 0,480 0,600 0,720 0,960 1,200
500 x 200
400 x 250 0,076 0,152 0,190 0,228 0,304 0,380 750 x 500 0,302 0,604 0,755 0,906 1,208 1,510

L: nominal length (mm)


H: nominal height (mm)

How to order

GD200 dimension 300 x 300 mm with damper GT007

G D 2 0 7 - - 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0

L H

0: without damper
7: with damper

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 271


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

FLOOR GRILLE
GD241

Installation dimensions
GD241
1
Application
The grille type GD241 is used for the
supply of cooled or heated air in
facilities such as private houses,
shopping centres, ...
The grille can be mounted in the
floor and is walkable.

Technical information
Characteristics:

• fixed stamped-formed blades,


30° deflection both to the left
and the right
• free passage ca. 75 % (damper
completely open)
• damper equipped with parallel
leafs, with foot-operated dial.
• available in dimensions:
nom.H = 57, 102 and 150 mm
nom.L = 254, 305 and 356 mm
(254 x 57 mm not possible)

Construction:

steel, painted white (RAL 9010)

Fast selection diagram


Specifications description
Dimension Example:
L x H (mm) 25 35 45 NR

356 x 102
2 2,7 3,3
Steel floor grille with stamp-formed
blades, 30° deflection both to the
1,9 2,6 3,2
left and the right and equipped
305 x 102 with a damper, painted white (RAL
9010)
1,8 2,5 3,1
254 x 102 Type: GD241
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm

Fixing
1,7 2,4 2,9
356 x 57
floor mounting
Throw LT (m)
1,6 2,3 2,8
305 x 57

100 200 300 400 500 600 m3/h

Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,12 m/s in the occupied zone.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 280


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

FLOOR GRILLE
GD241

Selection table

LxH
(mm)
L1 x H1 L2 x H2 Ak
(m2)
vk (m/s)
∆ pt(Pa)
2
4
2,5
6
3
8
4
14
5
22
1
qv (m3/s) 0,023 0,029 0,035 0,046 0,058
305 x 57 334 x 86 297 x 49 0,012
LT (m) 1,7 1,9 2,0 2,2 2,5

qv (m3/s) 0,036 0,045 0,054 0,072 0,090


254 x 102 283 x131 246 x 93 0,018
LT (m) 1,4 1,7 2,0 2,5 3,1

qv (m3/s) 0,044 0,055 0,066 0,088 0,110


305 x 102 334 x 131 297 x 93 0,022
LT (m) 1,5 1,8 2,1 2,7 3,4

qv (m3/s) 0,052 0,065 0,077 0,103 0,129


356 x 102 385 x 131 347 x 93 0,025
LT (m) 1,6 1,9 2,2 2,9 3,5

qv (m3/s) 0,053 0,066 0,079 0,106 0,132


254 x 150 287 x 187 230 x 130 0,026
LT (m) 1,7 2,1 2,4 3,1 3,8

qv (m3/s) 0,065 0,081 0,097 0,129 0,161


305 x 150 337 x 187 280 x 130 0,032
LT (m) 1,9 2,3 2,6 3,3 4,0

qv (m3/s) 0,076 0,095 0,114 0,152 0,190


356 x 150 387 x 187 330 x 130 0,038
LT (m) 1,9 2,3 2,7 3,5 4,3

L: nominal length (mm) LT for vT = 0,25 m/s


H: nominal height (mm)

How to order

GD241 dimension 305 x 102 mm

G D 2 4 1 - - 0 3 0 5 0 1 0 2

L H

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 281


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

DAMPER
GT007

Installation dimensions
GT007
1
Application
The GT007 is a damper that can be
mounted on most of A- and G-
grilles. This damper allows an
adjustment of the air flow rate.

Technical information
Characteristics:

• vertical, opposed blade damper


• adjustable with a screw driver
• grille mounting with “S” clips (sup-
plied with each damper)
• available in mulitiples of 25 mm in
height as well as in length
min L = 100 mm, max L = 625 mm
min H = 75 mm, max H = 600 mm
Operating instruction damper Construction:

galvanised steel sheet, painted


black (RAL 9005)

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 290


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description
Example:

Opposed blade damper adjustable


with a screw driver, galvanised steel
sheet, painted black.

Type: GT007
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm

How to order

GT007, dimension 500 x 200 mm

G T 0 0 7 - - 0 5 0 0 0 2 0 0

nom. size of the


grille (Lx H)

E 1 290 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

SAFETY GRILLE
GD203T

Installation dimensions
GD203T 1
Application
The grille type GD203T is used for
(L-20) x (H-20) the supply and exhaust of air in
prison cells. The fixation is especially
(L+39) x (H+39) designed to make removal from
the inside of the cell impossible.

Technical information
Characteristics:
(L+39) x (H+39)
(L-20) x (H-20)

• available in 4 nominal dimensions


L x H:
LxH

125 x 100 (dia. A = 80 mm)


Ø A

200 x 100 (dia. A = 80 mm)


200 x 150 (dia. A = 125 mm)
200 x 200 (dia. A = 160 mm)
• impossible to remove from the
front
• grille complete with plenum and
circular spigot; depth of plenum
adapted to wall thickness
• constructed of heavy steel sheet
150 and grid core (mesh 50 x 12,5 mm)
mechanically assembled; e-
quipped with perforated sheet of
51 % passage
• perforated sheet and plenum
welded to grille

Construction:

steel construction, painted white


(RAL 9010)
11
0

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 300


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Fixing


Example: The fixation and locking is secured
at the back side of the wall by
Prison grille with specific back side fixa- means of 4 L-shaped profiles fixed
tion. It is impossible to remove the grille to the corners of the plenum by
from inside a prison cell. Grille with screws.
fixed core (50 x 12,5 mm mesh) com-
plete with perforated sheet and ple-
num with top entry (all welded).
constructed in steel, painted white
(RAL 9010).

Type: GD203T
nom. dim. (L x H) .... x ... mm

How to order

GD203T, dimension 200 x 100 mm.

G D 2 0 3 T - 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 0

L H

E 1 300 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

CIRCULAR SAFETY GRILLE


GP360

Installation dimensions
GP360 15
1
øB

øC
øA

25

5
180
Application
The circular grille type GP360 is used for
Size ØA ØB ØC the supply and the exhaust of air in pri-
son cells. The fixation is especially desig-
100 140 90 98 ned to make removal from the inside of
the cell impossible.
125 165 115 123

160 200 150 158


Technical information
200 240 190 198
Characteristics:

• avialable in 4 dimensions: 100, 125,


160 and 200 mm
• impossible to remove from the front
• connection piece welded to the front
• front in perforated sheet 51 % passage
• for wall thickness of maximum 150 mm

Construction:

• steel construction
• painted white (RAL 9010)

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 310


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Fixing


Example: The fixation and locking is secured
at the back side of the wall by
Circular prison grille with specific back means of a ring that can be fixed
side attachment. It’s impossible to re- to the connection piece with rivets
move the grille from inside a prison or screws.
cell, steel, painted white (RAL 9010).

Type: GP360
size ..... mm

How to order

GP360, size 125 mm

G P 3 6 0 - - 0 1 2 5 0 0 0 0

size

E 1 310 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

FLOOR GRILLE
VM

Installation dimensions
1
Application

øA
The grille type VM is used for supply
and exhaust of cooled and heated
air in facilities such as offices, meet-
ing rooms, auditoria, concert halls, ....
The grille can be mounted in the floor
where an strict aesthetic construction
is desired.
Suitable for mounting in system floors.

Technical Information
Characteristics:
øA
• floor grille combined with a swirl dif-
øB 25 fuser
• horizontal or vertical swirl-form air
4

pattern
• removable grille tile
• available with dust basket that can
E

be used as damper
• available with outer ring
• Succesfully tested to comply with
the specification and structural
2

integrity requirements of Euro-pean


135

test standard EN13264 - medium


4 structural classification (with a load
of 3 kN over 25 x 25 mm2 area)
60

Construction:

• floor grille and outer ring are made


out of aluminium
øC • finish: aluminium glass shot blasted
• painted in a RAL-colour upon re-
quest
• swirl diffuser in galvanised steel,
Size øA øB øC E painted black
• dirt basket in galvanised steel
150 190 140 124 14
200 236 190 160 19

All dimensions in mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 320


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Fixing


Example: Outer ring is fixed to the floor with 3
mounting straps
Floor grille with horizontal swirl air pat-
tern, used for mounting in system
floors. Floor grille and outer ring out of
aluminium (glass shot blasted) and
with removable grille tile. Equipped
with a dust basket that can be used as
damper.

Type: VM011
size ... mm

How to order

VM011 size 200 mm

V M 0 1 1 - - 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0

Size

M : grille + outer ring


T : grille

E 1 320 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

FLOOR GRILLE
VM

Selection diagram - supply

Vertical air pattern Valid for cooling up to ∆ ts = -10 K


Valid for heating up to ∆ ts = +20 K
1
qV )
3
m /h 200 /s
LT ( m ) (m
m / s v k R 35
3
150
N
1,6 2,4 3,2 120 0,05
100
90 0,04 4,
5 30
1,4
2
2,8
80 NR
4
1,2 1,8 2,4 0,03
70
0,025 3,
5 25
1,6 NR
1 2 60
0,9 1,4 1,8 0,02 20
50 0,018 5 NR
0,8 1,2 1,6 2,
0,016 15
0,7
1
1,4
40 NR
0,014
0,6 0,9 1,2 8
1,
0,012 6
0,8 1,
0,5 1 30
0,7 0,9 0,01 1,
4
25 0,009
0,4 0,6 0,8
0,008
0,35 0,7 VT
0,5 20
0,007
0,3 0,6

v T 0,75 0,50 0,37 m / s ø 150 ø 200


Correction factor LT:
LT

∆t 0° -4° -6° -8° -10°


x1 x 0,7 x 0,6 x 0,5 x 0,45

Correction factor according to the position of the dust basket:

% open ø 150 ø 200


VK
100 % NR + 0 NR + 0
50 % NR + 2 NR + 5
25 % NR + 5 NR + 11

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 321


INTERNATIONAL

Selection diagram - supply


Valid for cooling up to ∆ ts = -10 K
Horizontal air pattern
Valid for heating up to ∆ ts = +20 K

3
qV )
m /h 200
/s
(m
3
LT ( m ) 150 m /s
120
v k 40
0,05
1,2 1,8 2,4 100 5 NR
90 0,04 4,
80 35
1 1,5 2 0,03
4
5
NR
70 3,
0,9 1,8 0,025 30
0,8 1,2 1,6 60 NR
0,7 1,4 0,02 25
1 50 0,018
2,
5 NR
0,6 0,9 1,2 0,016 20
0,8 40 NR
0,5 1 0,014
0,7 1,
8 15
0,9 0,012 6 NR
1,
0,4 0,6 0,8 30
0,01 4
1,
0,35 0,7
0,5 25 0,009
0,3 0,6 0,008
0,4 20
0,25 0,5 0,007
0,35

0,2 0,3 0,4


v T 0,75 0,50 0,37 m / s ø 150 ø 200

Correction factor according to the position of the dust basket:

% open ø 150 ø 200


100 % NR + 0 NR + 0
50 % NR + 2 NR + 2 LT
25 % NR + 5 NR + 8 VT
VK

E 1 321 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Pressure loss

1
Size 150 mm Size 200 mm
horizontal air pattern, VM011 horizontal air pattern, VM011

D D

0% % %

%
%
10 50 25
100

25
50
90 100

0%
80 90

10
70 80
60 70
Pt 50 60
Pt 50
( Pa ) 40
35 ( Pa ) 40
30 35
30
25
25
20
20
15
15

10
15 20 30 40 50 3
(m /h) 10
40 60 80 100 120 3
(m /h)
qv qv
0,006 0,01 0,015 0,01 0,015 0,025 0,035
3
0,005 0,008 0,012 (m /s) 0,02 0,03 3
(m /s)

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 1 322


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


2
INTERNATIONAL

CIRCULAR DIFFUSER WITH ADJUSTABLE AIR PATTERN


CE100 • DE100

Installation dimensions
CE100 • DE100

2
Application
The diffuser type CE100/DE100 is
used for the supply and exhaust of
cooled or heated air in facilities
CE100 DE100 ØN ØA ØB C D F G such as offices, shopping centres,
workshops, factory halls, ...
160 160 160 279 323 12 35 85 46
The diffuser can be used for ceiling
200 200 200 375 428 10 51 101 55
or exposed duct mounting, espe-
250 250 250 467 538 14 67 117 68
cially in installations where an
315 315 315 557 635 10 85 135 80
adjustable pattern is required (hori-
- 355 355 648 743 18 96 146 86
zontally-vertically).
- 400 400 740 856 14 116 166 92 Suitable for mounting at higher alti-
- 450 450 832 970 14 135 185 110 tudes because of its adjustable
- 500 500 924 1081 17 149 199 116 pattern.
- 630 630 1103 1286 18 182 232 116

G = Clearance for removal of centre core.


N = Nominal size = duct size.
All dimensions in mm.
Same dimensions for CE120/DE120, except dimension G.

Vertical air pattern


Fast selection diagram

Size
(mm) 20 30 40 50 NR

2,1 3,0 4,7 6,8


630
Horizontal air pattern
1,9 ,8 4,2 6
500
1,8 2,7 4 5,9
450

400

1,5
1,7

2,3
2,5

,3
3,8

5
5,4
Technical information
355

315
1,4 2 3 4,3 Characteristics:
1,1 1,6 2,5 3,8
250
• CE100/DE100:
Throw LT (m)
200 1 1,4 2 3
- air pattern adjustable in 5 posi-
tions (vertically-horizontally)
- removable centre core
0,7 ,1 1,6 2,4
160

• DE120:
- effortlessly adjustable (vertically-
100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 2000 3000 5000 7000 m3/h
horizontally)
- fixed centre core
- available up to size 315 mm
Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17m/s in the occupied zone.
See page 2 020 for a detailed selection.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 010


INTERNATIONAL

• diffuser with several inner cones: Fixing


Size ØN B
- up to size 400: 2 inner rings
- from size 450: 3 inner rings 160 160 130 • Mount damper in duct or diffuser
• available dimensions: 160, 200, 250, 200 200 150 neck
315, 355, 400, 450 and 500 mm. 250 250 175 • Take out inner rings by pushing
(DE100: also available in 630 mm, 315 315 207 the rings inwards, turn around
DE120: 355, 400, 450 and 500 mm not and pull down.
available) Damper Type DT003 for mounting with • Mount external cone by means
DE100: of screws through diffuser neck.
Specifications description • Push inner rings again in external
Radial, opposed blade damper. cone in one of the 5 possible posi-
Example: Adjustable through the diffuser face. tions
Steel sheet, painted black (RAL 9005).
Circular steel diffuser with adjustable
air pattern for ceiling mounting, com-
plete with a damper, painted white
(RAL 9010)

Type: DE100 + DT003


size .... mm

Accessories
Size ØN H
Damper Type DT112 for mounting with 160 160 55
DE120: 200 200 69
250 250 89
V-shaped damper steel sheet, painted 315 315 109
black (RAL 9005) 355 355 124
400 400 139
450 450 157
500 500 175 Delivery possibilities
630 630 221
• CE100: aluminium construction,
B

N = duct size painted white (RAL 9010)


H = expected height in duct
62

• DE100: steel construction, paint-


ed white (RAL 9010)
øN
• CE100P: aluminium construction,
CE100 integrated in false ceiling
How to order plate 594 x 594 mm. (For further
information, see p. 2 500) (RAL
DE100 size 250 mm with damper Type DT003 size 250 mm 9010)

a) Diffuser • DE100P: steel construction, DE100


integrated in false ceiling plate
D E 1 0 0 - - 0 2 5 0 0 0 0 0 594 x 594 mm. (For further informa-
tion, see p. 2 500) (RAL 9010)
size
0: without mounting straps • DE120: effortlessly adjustable.
1: mounting with 3 mounting straps and Steel construction, painted white
3 screws (up to 315mm) (RAL 9010)

0: gradually adjustable • DE120P: See DE120, integrated in


2: effortlessly adjustable false ceiling plate 594 x 594 mm
(For further information, see p. 2
CE: aluminium construction (only CE100)
500) (RAL9010)
DE: steel construction
b) Damper

D T 0 0 3 - - 0 2 5 0 0 0 0 0

size
* REMARK: plenum box DP150S see p. 8 020

E 2 010 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

CIRCULAR DIFFUSER WITH ADJUSTABLE AIR PATTERN


CE100 • DE100

Selection diagram - supply


Type CE100 Valid for cooling up to ∆ tS = - 16 K
DE100 Valid for heating up to ∆ tS = + 30 K

2
- with ceiling effect
V
- damper completely open
T Vk

V
R

NR 50

NR 45

NR 40

NR 35

NR 30

NR 25

NR 20

160 200 250 315 400 500 630


355 450

Throw correction factor for exposed duct mounting: LT x 0,7

Air flow rate measurement -


supply
Ak - and An - values (m2)

Size 160 200 250 315 355 400 450 500 630
Ak hor. 0,014 0,026 0,042 0,062 0,085 0,112 0,143 0,177 0,257
Ak vert. 0,011 0,019 0,027 0,043 0,058 0,080 0,087 0,112 0,158
An 0,020 0,031 0,049 0,078 0,099 0,126 0,159 0,196 0,312

Velometer jet: 2220 A or 6070

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 020


INTERNATIONAL

Example

Selection data:

- Air flow rate qv = 0,25 m3/s


- Throw LT = 2,5 m at
vT = 0,50 m/s

Solution:

- Size 315 mm
- Supply air velocity vk = 4 m/s
- Noise level NR 35
- Total pressure loss with damper
DT003 100 % open: ∆ pt = 14 Pa

Pressure loss Induction and temperature quotient with ceiling effect


with damper type DT003 Induction Temperature quotient

D
25% 50% 100%
160 200 250

315

355
400
5

630
+1

450
7

500
NR

+
NR

500
630 450
400

355

315

250

200

160

E 2 020 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

FIXED CIRCULAR DIFFUSER


DR160

Installation dimensions
DR160

Application
2
The diffuser type DR160 is used for
DR170 the supply and exhaust of cooled
or heated air in facilities such as
offices, shopping centres,…
The diffuser can be used for ceiling
or exposed duct mounting and has
a fixed horizontal air pattern.

Technical information
Characteristics:

• fixed horizontal air pattern, flat


mounted rings
• available with side entry plenum,
DR170S with or without damper in side
entry

Construction:

• steel; painted white (RAL 9010)


• plenum galvanised steel sheet,
optionally insulated

Size ØA ØB C ØD E F G H ØN
160 248 190 36 123 345 216 185 305 158
200 298 230 36 158 395 234 220 340 198
250 363 280 36 198 470 264 270 390 248
315 448 350 36 248 520 289 310 440 313

All dimensions in mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 030


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories Fixing


Example: • GR003: steel mounting support with • DR160: 3 screws in the outer ring
central screw fixing; only for DR170 of the diffuser
Steel circular diffuser with flat mounted
rings. Central screw fixing with steel • DT012: V-shaped damper steel • DR170: central screw fixing
mounting support GR003. sheet, painted black (RAL 9005). The (screws delivered together with
damper can be mounted on the dif- diffuser) and steel mounting sup-
Type: DR170 + GR003 fuser and can be adjusted through port GR003.
size ... mm the diffuser ront (central hole).
Only with DR160.
Delivery possibilities
• DR160: circular diffuser with screw
holes in mounting frame

• DR160S: DR160 with plenum with


side entry

• DR161S: DR160 with plenum with


damper in side entry
Size ØN B
• DR160SG/DR161SG: DR160S/DR
160 160 106 161S with insulated plenum
200 200 126
250 250 151 • DR170: circular diffuser with cen-
315 315 183 tral screw fixing
All dimensions in mm • DR170S: DR170 with plenum with
N= nominal size = duct size side entry
How to order • DR171S: DR170 with plenum with
damper in side entry
DR160 size 250 mm with insulated plenum DP170SG
• DR170SG/DR171SG: DR170S/DR
171S with insulated plenum
a) Diffuser
• DS170P: DR170 integrated in false
D R 1 6 0 S G 0 2 5 0 0 0 0 0 ceiling plate 594 x 594 mm.
For further information, see p. 2
size 500
- : non insulated plenum
G: insulated plenum
- : without plenum
S: plenum with side entry

0: without damper
1: damper in inlet spigot
6: fixing with screws in outer ring
7: central screw fixing
S: square flange (ceiling plate)
R: round flange with a stand-up edge
b) Plenum box(when separately)
D P 1 7 0 S G 0 2 5 0 0 0 0 0
- :non insulated plenum
G:insulated plenum
0: without damper in inlet spigot
1: with damper in inlet spigot

7: plenum for diffuser DR160 and DR170, with


c) Damper mounting support GR003

D T 0 1 2 - - 0 2 5 0 0 0 0 0

E 2 030 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

FIXED CIRCULAR DIFFUSER


DR160

Selection diagram - supply


Type DR160 - with ceiling effect Valid for cooling up to ∆ ts = -12 K
- with damper completely open Valid for heating up to ∆ ts = +15 K

V
T V
K

V
R

50
2
NR
45
NR
40
NR
35
NR
30
NR
25
NR
20
NR

160 200 250 315


With side entry: NR+2 Size
Correction factor without ceiling effect: LT x 0,7

Air flow rate measurement - supply


Ak - values (m2)

Size 160 200 250 315


Ak(m ) 2
0,0190 0,0277 0,0403 0,0570

Anemometer TESTO 452 with probe ø16

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 040


INTERNATIONAL

Example

Selection data:

- Air flow rate qv = 0,16 m3/s


- Throw LT = 1,7 m at vT = 0,50 m/s

Solution:

- Size = 315 mm
- Supply air velocity vk= 2,8 m/s
- Noise level NR 25
- Total pressure loss with damper
DT012 100 % open: ∆ Pt = 15 Pa

Pressure loss Induction and temperature quotient with ceiling effect


Induction Temperature quotient
with damper DT012

D 160 200 250 315


%
100
25%

50%

60
50
5

40
+1
NR

+6

30
NR

25
315
p (Pa) 20
t
250
15
200

160
10

8
2 2,5 3 4 5 6 7
v (m/s)
k

E 2 040 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

MULTIDIRECTIONAL DIFFUSER
EG400 • EH400

Installation dimensions

EG400 / EH400

2
B
N
43
48

24
Application
37,5
5

The diffuser type EG400/EH400 is


A
used for the supply and exhaust of
EG400 / EH400 + DT008 + GR002 cooled or heated air in facilities
such as offices, shopping centres,
B
conference rooms, ...
N The diffuser can be mounted in the
ceiling and has a fixed 4-way hori-
zontal air pattern.
50
98

43
48

24

Technical information
37,5
5

A Characteristics:

• Square diffuser with fixed 4-way ho-


rizontal air pattern
• Available with multiples of 75 mm
from 150 up to 450 mm.
Size A B N DP100S • Removable core, standard provid-
ed with a safety cord
150 294 225 150 Ø 125 • Fixation with blade damper possible
225 369 300 225 Ø 200 • Mounting in a false ceiling plate is
300 444 375 300 Ø 200 possible
• Plenum: DP100 (see 8 010)
375 519 450 375 Ø 315
450 594 525 450 Ø 315
470 614 545 470 Ø 315 Construction:
All dimensions in mm
extruded aluminium, painted white
B: min. ceiling opening
(RAL 9010)

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 050


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories Fixing


Example: • DT008: • EG400: the diffuser is mounted
Opposed blade damper for EG400/ with an invisible central screw
Square aluminium diffuser with central EH400. (delivered), with mounting sup-
screw fixing (invisible screw) and remo- Galvanised steel sheet, painted port GR002 (to order separately)
vable core. black. and can also be used for mount-
Fixed 4 way blading. Operated by a key through the dif- ing on T-bars.
The diffuser is painted white (RAL 9010) fuser core. Central screw fixing at the back of
and complete with damper. the central core.
• GR002:
Type: EG408 Steel mounting support for EG400/ • EH400: same as EG400 mounting,
size (N x N): ... x ... mm EH400 but also possible with 4 visible
screws in the frame

Delivery possibilities
• EG400: removable core with invisi-
ble central screw fixing, without
How to order screws in the frame

• EH400: removable core with invisi-


a) Diffuser ble central screw fixing, with
screws in the frame
EH400 size 225 x 225 mm without damper.
• EG408/EH408: EG400/EH400 with
E H 4 0 0 - - 0 2 2 5 0 2 2 5 opposed blade damper
N N
• EG400P: EG400 mounted on a
false ceiling plate, dimensions to
- : without false ceiling plate be specified

0: without damper
8: with damper (DT008)

G : invisible central screw fixing and removable core


H: execution G + screws in the frame

b) Diffuser mounted on a false ceiling plate


EG400 size 225 x 225 mm, without damper, mounted on a false ceiling plate
size 594 x 594 mm.

E G 4 0 0 P - 0 2 2 5 0 5 9 4

Size diffuser External dimensions


of false ceiling plate
P: mounted on a false ceiling plate

0: without damper
8: with damper (DT008)

G : invisible central screw fixing and removable core

c) Mounting support

G R 0 0 2 - - 0 4 5 0 0 4 5 0

For EG400/EH400 Size Size

Note: plenum see DP100 (p. 8 010)

E 2 050 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

MULTIDIRECTIONAL DIFFUSER
EG400 • EH400

Selection diagram - supply

- measurements executed in lab circumstances


with plenum with side entry

2
- with ceiling effect
- damper completely open
- Valid for cooling up to ∆ ts = -12 K
- Valid for heating up to ∆ ts = +15 K

)
/s
3
v (m
LT(m)

)
/h

/s
3

f (m
q

v (m
0.61

v
6 9 12

q
0.55

6
0.5 2200
8 0.4 2000 NR50
5 10 0.39 1800
160

5
0.33
0.31 1400
0.28 1200
4 6 8 0.25 1100 NR40

4
0.22 100
900
0.19 800
5 0.17 700
3 6 0.14 600 NR30

3
4 0.11 50
2.5 5

5
2.
400

0.08
2 3 4 2 NR20
0.07 300
2.5
5

1. 3 250
1.

0.06
2
2.5
200

0.04
1 1.5 2
150

0.7 1.5
0.02
1
100

0.5 0.75 1

VT 0.75 0.5 0.37 m/s 150 225 300 375 450/470


V 0.25 0.17 0.12 m/s
Size

Af-values (m2)

Size 150 225 300 375 450 470

Af 0,017 0,035 0,057 0,083 0,115 0,123

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 060


INTERNATIONAL

Example

Selection data:
- Air flow rate qv = 1000 m3/h
- Noise level: maximum NR 30

Solution:
- EG400 size 450 mm
- Supply air velocity vf = 2,5 m/s
- Noise level NR = 24
- Total pressure loss (without damper):
∆ Pt = 12 Pa
- Lt = 3,5 m at vt = 0,5 m/s

Pressure loss

Size
150 225 300 375 450/470
100
90
80
70
60

50

40

30

Pt (Pa) 20

10
9
8
7
6

5
100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 2000 3000
q (m3/h)
v

E 2 060 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

MULTIDIRECTIONAL DIFFUSER
EE100

Installation dimensions

EE100 + ET010 + GT007

Application
The diffuser type EE100 is used for
2
the supply and exhaust of cooled
or heated air in facilities such as
offices, shopping centres, confe-
rence rooms, ...
The diffuser can be mounted in the
ceiling and has a fixed 1-way hori-
zontal air pattern.
H (mm) 150 225 300 375 450 525 600
150 - - - - - -
225 225 - - - - - Technical information
300 300 300 - - - -
L (mm) 375 375 375 375 - - - Characteristics:
450 450 450 450 450 - -
525 525 525 525 525 525 - • Square or rectangular diffuser
600 600 600 600 600 600 600 available with multiples of 75 mm
in length and 37,5 mm in height
Dimensions L x H: L= nominal length, H = nominal height min L = 150 mm, max L = 1200 mm
All dimensions in mm min H = 75 mm, max H = 600 mm
• Fixed 1-way horizontal air pattern
• Removable core with several air
Dimension A distribution elements.
It is possible to exchange the cores
of the EE200, EE300 and EE400, in
With flow equalizer ET010 76 accordance with the desired air
With damper GT007 82 pattern.
With flow equalizer 114
and damper ET010 + GT007 Construction:

extruded aluminium; natural tone,


satin anodised

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 070


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories Fixing


Example: • GT007: Opposed blade damper. with screws in the diffuser neck.
Galvanised steel sheet, painted
Square or rectangular aluminium dif- black.
fuser with fixed inner blading (one- For further information, see p. 1 290
way), complete with a damper.
Delivery possibilities
The diffuser is natural tone anodised. • ET010: Flow equalizer in mill finish alu-
minium
Type: EE100 + GT007
size (L x H): ... x ... mm

Square diffuser EE100 with flow


equalizer EE110

Rectangular diffuser EE100 with


flow equalizer EE110

Rectangular diffuser EE120 with


flow equalizer EE130

How to order

EE100 size 375 x 375 mm with flow equalizer ET010 and damper GT007

E E 1 1 7 - - 0 3 7 5 0 3 7 5

L H

0: without damper
7: with damper

type of diffuser: see ‘Delivery possibilities’

E 2 070 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

MULTIDIRECTIONAL DIFFUSER
EE100

Selection diagram - supply


Type EE100 - with ceiling effect
- damper completely open

qv
2

Air flow rate measurement-


supply
Ak - values (m2)
L (mm)
H (mm) 150 225 300 375 450 525

150 0,008 0,012 0,017 0,020 - -


225 - 0,017 0,024 0,031 0,036 0,040
300 - - 0,031 0,040 0,048 -
Velometer jet: 2220 A of 6070
375 - - - 0,048 - -
450 - - - - 0,071 -
525 - - - - - 0,097

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 080


INTERNATIONAL

Example

Selection data:
- Air flow rate qv = 300 m3/h
- Throw LT = 4,6 m at vT = 0,33 m/s

Solution:
- EE100 size 300 x 225 mm
- Supply air velocity vk = 3,6 m/s
- Noise level NR 27
- Total pressure loss with damper
100 % open: ∆ pt = 7,4 Pa.

Pressure loss Induction and temperature quotient with ceiling effect


with damper type ..7 Induction Temperature quotient

D
25% 50% 100%
5
+1
+6
NR
NR

Correction: i x 0,5; ∆tL x 2


∆tS

E 2 080 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

MULTIDIRECTIONAL DIFFUSER
EE200

Installation dimensions

EE200 + ET010 + GT007

Application
The diffuser type EE200 is used for
2
the supply and exhaust of cooled
or heated air in facilities such as
offices, shopping centres, confe-
rence rooms, ...
The diffuser can be mounted in the
ceiling and has a fixed 2-way hori-
zontal air pattern.
H (mm) 150 225 300 375 450 525 600
150 - - - - - -
225 225 - - - - - Technical information
300 300 300 - - - - Characteristics:
L (mm) 375 375 375 375 - - -
450 450 450 450 450 - - • Square or rectangular diffuser
525 525 525 525 525 525 - available with multiples of 75 mm
600 600 600 600 600 600 600 in length and 37,5 mm in height
min L = 150 mm, max L = 1200 mm
Dimensions L x H: L = nominal length, H = nominal height min H = 75 mm, max H = 600 mm
All dimensions in mm • Fixed 2-way horizontal air pattern.
• Removable core with several air
distribution elements.
Dimension A It is possible to exchange the co-
res of the EE100, EE300 and EE400,
With flow equalizer ET010 76 in accordance with the desired air
pattern.
With damper GT007 82
With flow equalizer and 114 Construction:
damper ET010 + GT007
extruded aluminium; natural tone,
satin anodised.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 090


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories Fixing


Example: • GT007: Opposed blade damper. with screws in the diffuser neck.
Galvanised steel sheet, painted
Square or rectangular aluminium dif- black.
fuser with fixed inner blading (2-way), For further details, see p. 1 290
complete with a damper.
Delivery possibilities
The diffuser is natural tone anodised . • ET010: Flow equalizer in mill finish alu-
minium
Type: EE200 + GT007
size (L x H): ... x ... mm

Square diffuser EE200 with flow


equalizer EE210

Rectangular diffuser EE200 with


flow equalizer EE210

Rectangular diffuser EE220 with


flow equalizer EE230

How to order

EE200 size 375 x 375 mm with flow equalizer ET010 and damper GT007 Square diffuser EE240 with flow
equalizer EE250

E E 2 1 7 - - 0 3 7 5 0 3 7 5

L H

Rectangular diffuser EE240 with


flow equalizer EE250
0: without damper
7: with damper

type of diffuser: see ‘Delivery possibilities’

Rectangular diffuser EE260 with


flow equalizer EE270

E 2 090 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

MULTIDIRECTIONAL DIFFUSER
EE200

Selection diagram- supply


Type EE240 (square)
- with ceiling effect
- damper completely open

2
qv

150 225 300 375 450 525

Air flow rate measurement-supply


Ak-values (m2)

Size 150 225 300 375 450 525


Ak 0,008 0,018 0,032 0,050 0,071 0,097

Velometer jet: 2220 A or 6070

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 100


INTERNATIONAL

Selection diagram - supply


Type EE240 and EE260 (rectangular) - with ceiling effect
- damper completely open

qv

Air flow rate measurement - supply


Ak-values (m2)

L (mm)

H (mm) 225 300 375 450

150 0,012 0,016 — —


225 — 0,024 0,030 0,036
300 — — 0,039 0,047
Velometer jet: 2220 A or 6070

E 2 100 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Selection diagram - supply


Type EE220 and EE200 - with ceiling effect
- damper completely open

qv

Air flow rate measurement-supply Ak - values (m2)


L (mm)
H (mm) 150 225 300 375 450 525

150 0,008 0,012 0,016 0,020 - -


225 - 0,018 0,024 0,030 0,036 0,041
300 - - 0,032 0,039 0,047 -
375 - - - 0,049 - -
Velometer jet: 2220 A or 6070
450 - - - - 0,071 -
525 - - - - - 0,097

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 101


INTERNATIONAL

Example

Selection data: Selection data:


- Air flow rate qv = 400 - Air flow rate qv = 380 m3/h
m3/h - Throw LT = 2,5 m
- Throw LT = 4 m at vT = (in X direction)
0,33 m/s LT = 4,3 m
(in Y direction)
Solution: at vT = 0,33 m/s
- EE240 (square) size
300 x 300 mm Solution:
- Supply air velocity - EE240 (rectangular)
vk = 3,5 m/s 450 x 225 mm (L x H)
- Noise level NR 28 - Supply air velocity
- Total pressure loss with vk = 3 m/s
damper 100 % open: - Noise level NR 25
∆ pt = 7,2 Pa. - Total pressure loss with
damper 100 % open:
∆ pt = 5,3 Pa.

Pressure loss Induction and temperature quotient with ceiling effect


with damper type ..7 Induction Temperature quotient

25% 50% 100%


15
+
NR

6+
NR

Correction: i x 0,5; ∆tL x 2


∆tS

E 2 101 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

MULTIDIRECTIONAL DIFFUSER
EE300

Installation dimensions

EE300 + ET010 + GT007

2
Application
The diffuser type EE300 is used for
the supply and exhaust of cooled
or heated air in facilities such as
H (mm) 150 225 300 375 450 525 600 offices, shopping centres, confe-
rence rooms, ...
150 - - - - - - The diffuser can be mounted in the
225 225 - - - - - ceiling and has a fixed 3-way hori-
300 300 300 - - - - zontal air pattern.
L (mm) 375 375 375 375 - - -
450 450 450 450 450 - -
525 525 525 525 525 525 - Technical information
600 600 600 600 600 600 600 Characteristics:

Dimensions L x H: L = nominal length, H = nominal height. • Square or rectangular diffuser


All dimensions in mm. available with multiples of 75 mm
as well in height as in length
min L = 150 mm, max L = 900 mm
Dimension A
min H = 150 mm, max H = 600 mm
• Fixed 3-way horizontal air pattern.
With flow equalizer ET010 76 • Removable core with several air
With damper GT007 82 distribution elements.
With flow equalizer and 114 It is possible to exchange the co-
res of the EE100, EE200 and EE400,
damper ET010 + GT007
in accordance with the desired
air pattern.

Construction:

extruded aluminium; natural tone


anodised

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 110


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories Fixing


Example: • GT007: Opposed blade damper. with screws in the diffuser neck.
Galvanised steel sheet, painted
Square or rectangular aluminium dif- black.
fuser with fixed inner blading (3-way), For further details, see p. 1 290
complete with a damper. Delivery possibilities
The diffuser is natural tone anodised. • ET010: Flow equalizer in mill finish alu-
minium
Type: EE300 + GT007
size (L x H): ... x ... mm

Square diffuser EE300 with flow


equalizer EE310

Rectangular diffuser EE300


with flow equalizer EE310

Rectangular diffuser EE320


with flow equalizer EE330

Rectangular (or square) diffuser


EE340
with flow equalizer EE350

How to order
EE300 size 375 x 375 mm with flow equalizer ET010 and damper GT007

E E 3 1 7 - - 0 3 7 5 0 3 7 5
L H

0: without damper
7: with damper

type of diffuser: see “Delivery possibilities”

E 2 110 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

MULTIDIRECTIONAL DIFFUSER
EE300

Selection diagram - supply


Type EE300 and EE320 - with ceiling effect
- damper completely open

qv
2

Air flow rate measurement-supply Ak-values (m2)

L (mm)

H (mm) 150 225 300 375 450 525

150 0,009 0,014 0,018 — — —


225 — 0,020 0,027 0,034 — —
300 — — 0,036 0,045 0,054 —
375 — — — 0,056 0,068 —
450 — — — — 0,081 —
525 — — — — — 0,110
Velometer jet: 2220 A or 6070

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 120


INTERNATIONAL

Selection diagram - supply


- with ceiling effect
Type EE300 - damper completely open

qv

Air flow rate measurement-supply Ak -values (m2)

L (mm)

H (mm) 225 300 375 450 525


150 0,014 0,018 — — —
225 — 0,027 0,034 0,041 0,046
300 — — 0,046 0,054 —
375 — — — 0,068 —
450 — — — — 0,095
Velometer jet: 2220 A or 6070

E 2 120 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Selection diagram - supply


- with ceiling effect
Type EE340 - damper completely open

qv

Air flow rate measurement-supply Ak -values (m2)

L (mm)

H (mm) 225 300 375 450 525

150 0,014 — — — —
225 0,020 0,027 — — —
300 — 0,036 0,045 — —
375 — — 0,056 0,068 —
450 — — — 0,081 0,095
525 — — — — 0,110
Velometer jet: 2220 A or 6070

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 121


INTERNATIONAL

Example

Selection data:
- Air flow rate qv = 600 m3/h
- Throw LT = 3 m (in X direction)
LT = 2,7 m (in Y direction)
at vT = 0,5 m/s

Solution:
- EE300 size 450 x 300 mm (LxH)
- Supply air velocity vk = 3 m/s
- Noise level NR 27
- Total pressure loss with damper 100 %
open: ∆ pt = 5,3 Pa.

Pressure loss Induction and temperature quotient with ceiling effect


with damper type ..7 Induction Temperature quotient

25% 50% 100%


15
+
NR

6+
NR

E 2 121 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

MULTIDIRECTIONAL DIFFUSER
ED400 • EE400

Installation dimensions

EE400 + ET010 + GT007

Application
2
The diffuser type ED400/EE400 is
used for the supply and exhaust of
cooled or heated air in facilities
such as offices, shopping centres,
conference rooms, ...
The diffuser can be mounted in the
ED400 + ET008 + GR002 ceiling and has a fixed 4-way hori-
zontal air pattern.

Technical information
Characteristics:

ED400:
• Square diffuser with fixed 4-way
horizontal air pattern
• Fixed core

EE400:
• Square or rectangular diffuser
available with multiples of 75 mm,
in height as well as length
Fast selection diagram min L = 150 mm, max L = 900 mm
min H = 150 mm, max H = 600 mm
• Fixed 4-way horizontal air pattern.
Size • Removable core with several air
(mm) 20 30 40 50 NR distribution elements.
2,4 3,8 5,8 9,3 It is possible to exchange the core
525
2,2 3,3 5,1 8,5 of the EE100, EE200 and EE300, in
450
accordance with the desired air
1,8 2,9 ,2 7,2 pattern.
375

300 1,6 3,7 4 6,3


Construction:
1,3 2 3,3 5,3 Throw LT (m)
225 extruded aluminium; natural tone,
satin anodised or painted white (RAL
9010).
1,1 1,6 2,7 4,3
150

100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 2000 3000 4000 m3/h

Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone.


See next page for a detailed selection and other dimensions.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 130


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories Fixing


Example: • GT007: opposed blade damper for • EE400: with screws in the diffuser
EE400. neck.
Square or rectangular aluminium dif- Galvanised steel sheet, painted
fuser with fixed inner blading (4-way), black (RAL 9005). • ED400: central screw fixing with
complete with a damper. Operated directly at the damper mounting support GR002
The diffuser is natural tone anodised. after removing the core.
For further information, see p.1 290.
Type: EE400 + GT007 Delivery possibilities
size (L x H): ... x ... mm • ET008: opposed blade damper for
ED400.
Galvanised steel sheet, painted
Dimension A black (RAL 9005).
Operated by a key through the dif-
With flow equalizer ET010 76 fuser core
With damper GT007 82
• ET010: flow equalizer in mill finish alu-
With flow equalizer and minium Square diffuser ED/EE400 with flow
damper ET010+GT007 114 equalizer ED/EE410
• GR002: steel mounting support (only
for ED400).

H (mm) 150 225 300 375 450 525 600


150 - - - - - -
225 225 - - - - -
300 300 300 - - - - Rectangular diffuser EE400 with flow
L (mm) 375 375 375 375 - - - equalizer EE410
450 450 450 450 450 - -
525 525 525 525 525 525 - EE400P: EE400 (square only) integrat-
600 600 600 600 600 600 600 ed in false ceiling plate
(For further information, see p. 2 500)
Dimensions L x H: L = nominal length, H = nominal height.
All dimensions in mm.

How to order

a) Diffuser

E E 4 1 7 - - 0 3 7 5 0 3 7 5

L H
0: without damper
7: with damper GT007 for EE400
8: with damper ET008 for ED400
0: without flow equalizer
1: with flow equalizer
D : fixed core with central screw
E: removable core with screws
b) Mounting support

G R 0 0 2 - - 0 3 7 5 0 3 7 5

for ED400 Size

E 2 130 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

MULTIDIRECTIONAL DIFFUSER
ED400 • EE400

Selection frame - supply


Type EE400 (square) - with ceiling effect
- damper completely open

2
qv

Air flow rate measurement-supply Ak-values (m2)

Size 150 225 300 375 450 525 600

Ak 0,009 0,020 0,036 0,056 0,081 0,110 0,144

Velometer jet: 2220 A or 6070

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


E 2 140
INTERNATIONAL

Selection diagram - supply

Type EE400 (rectangular) - with ceiling effect


- damper completely open

qv
LT

Air flow rate measurement-supply Ak-values (m2)


L (mm)
H (mm) 225 300 375 450 525

150 0,014 0,018 — — —


225 — 0,027 0,034 0,041 0,047
300 — — 0,045 0,054 0,063
375 — — — 0,068 0,079
450 — — — — 0,095

Velometer jet: 2220 A or 6070

E 2 140 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Example

Selection data: Selection data:


- Air flow rate qv = 600 m3/h - Air flow rate qv = 700 m3/h
- Throw LT = 2,1 m - Throw LT = 1,7 m
at vT = 0,5 m/s (in X direction)
LT = 2,7 m
Solution: (in Y direction)
- EE400 (square) size 375 at vT = 0,5 m/s
mm
- Supply air velocity vk = 3 Solution:
m/s - EE400 (rectangular)
- Noise level NR 27 size 525 x 300 mm (L x H)
- Total pressure loss with - Supply air velocity vk = 3
damper 100 % open: m/s
∆ pt = 5,3 Pa. - Noise level NR 28
- Total pressure loss with
damper 100 % open:
∆ pt = 5,3 Pa.

Pressure loss Induction and temperature quotient with ceiling effect


with damper type.. 7 Induction Temperature quotient

25% 50% 100%


15
+
NR

6+
NR

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 141


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

ADJUSTABLE MULTIDIRECTIONAL DIFFUSER


BE•BF100/200/300/400

Installation dimensions
BF100

Application
The diffuser type B-100/200/300/400
is used for the supply and exhaust
2
of cooled or heated air in facilities
such as offices, shopping centres, ...
BE200+GR001 (2-way air pattern) The diffuser can be used for ceiling
mounting. A horizontal or vertical
air pattern can be obtained by
adjusting the blades.

BF300/400+GT007 (3-way or 4-way air pattern)

Technical information
Characteristics:
Type BE•BF 100/200/300/400
H (mm) 100 150 200 300 400 500 600
• blades on 25 mm to centre
- 150 - - - - - • diffusers are equipped with ad-
200 200 200 - - - - justable curved blades.
250 250 250 - - - - • available with multiples of 25 mm
L (mm) 300 300 300 300 - - - in length as well as in height
400 400 400 400 400 - - B-100/200:
500 500 500 500 - 500 - min L = 100 mm, max L = 2000 mm
600 600 600 600 - - 600 min H = 75 mm, max H = 1200 mm
B-300/400:
min L = 200 mm, max L = 1200 mm
Dimensions L x H: L = nominal length, H = nominal height min H = 100 mm, max H = 625 mm
All dimensions in mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 150


INTERNATIONAL

Construction: Accessories Fixing


• frame and blades in extruded alu- • GT007: vertical, opposed blade • BE: with concealed screw fixing
minium, natural tone anodised damper. Galvanised steel sheet, and mounting frame (GR001)
• painted construction not available painted black
For further details, see p. 1 290. • BF: with screws

Specifications description • GR001: mounting frame of roll-formed,


galvanised steel sheet (only for BE)
Blade adjusting for horizon-
Square or rectangular aluminium dif- tal air pattern:
fuser with blades adjustable in 2 direc-
tions, complete with a damper.
The diffuser is natural tone anodised.

Type: BE200 + GT007


size (L x H) ... x ... mm

Delivery possibilities
• B-100: 1-way exhaust pattern

• B-200: 2-way exhaust pattern

• B-300: 3-way exhaust pattern

• B-400: 4-way exhaust pattern

How to order

BE200 size 400 x 200 mm with damper GT007 and mounting frame GR001.

a) Diffuser
B E 2 0 7 - - 0 4 0 0 0 2 0 0

L H
0: without damper
7: with damper
number of air supply directions
E: frame width 25 mm, concealed screw
fixing
F: frame width 25 mm, visible screw fixing

b) Mounting frame

G R 0 0 1 - - 0 4 0 0 0 2 0 0

for BE L H

E 2 150 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

ADJUSTABLE MULTIDIRECTIONAL DIFFUSER


BE•BF100/200/300/400

Selection diagram - supply


Type BE•BF100/200

qv

VT
VK

VR
2

BE•BF100
BE•BF200

Air flow rate measurement - Ak-values (m2)


supply L (mm)
H (mm)
150 200 250 300 400 500 600
100 — 0,007 0,009 0,011 0,014 0,018 0,021
150 0,008 0,011 0,014 0,016 0,021 0,027 0,032
200 — 0,014 0,018 0,021 0,027 0,035 0,042
300 — — — 0,032 0,042 0,054 0,063
400 — — — — 0,054 — —
Velometer jet 2220 A or 6070 500 — — — — — 0,088 —
600 — — — — — — 0,126

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 160


INTERNATIONAL

Selection diagram - supply


Type BE•BF300

qv

VT
VK

VR

BE•BF300

Air flow rate measurement -


Ak-values (m2)
supply
L (mm)
H (mm)
250 300 400 500 600
100 0,009 0,011 0,014 0,018 0,021
150 0,014 0,016 0,021 0,027 0,032
200 0,018 0,021 0,027 0,035 0,042
300 — 0,032 0,042 0,054 0,063
400 — — 0,054 — —
Velometer jet 2220 A or 6070
500 — — — 0,088 —
600 — — — — 0,126

E 2 160 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Selection diagram - supply


Type BE•BF400

qv

BE•BF400

Air flow rate measurement - supply Ak-values (m2)


L (mm)
H (mm)
250 300 400 500 600
100 0,009 0,011 0,014 0,018 0,021
150 0,014 0,016 0,021 0,027 0,032
200 0,018 0,021 0,027 0,035 0,042
300 — 0,032 0,042 0,054 0,063
400 — — 0,054 — —
Velometer jet 2220 A or 6070
500 — — — 0,088 —
600 — — — — 0,126

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 161


INTERNATIONAL

Example

Selection data:
- Air flow rate qv = 0,14 m3/s
- Throw LT = 6 m at vT = 0,33 m/s

Solution:
- BE107 size 600 X 200 mm
- Supply air velocity vk = 3,5 m/s
- Noise level NR 28
- Total pressure loss with damper
100 % open: ∆ pt = 7 Pa.

Pressure loss Induction and temperature quotient with ceiling effect


with damper …7 Induction Temperature quotient

25% 50% 100%


15
+
NR

6+
NR

Correction: For one or two-way exhaust: - i x 0,5


- ∆ tL x 2
∆ tS

E 2 161 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

FIXED EXHAUST DIFFUSER


BC100

Installation dimensions

25

594 x 594
2
25

Application
5 The grille type BC100 is used for air
594 supply and exhaust for all ventila-
tion, smoke exhaust and aircondi-
tioning installations in facilities such
as offices, shopping centres, ...
Selection table The grille is especially designed to
Airflow rate Noise level Air velocity be use in suspended ceilings.

qv (m3/h) (NR) vk (m/s)


Technical information
800 18 1,8 Characteristics:
1000 22 2,2
• o/all dimension 594 x 594 mm
1200 27 2,6 • construction with fixed curved
1400 31 3,1 blades without frame
• blades on 25 mm centre
1600 34 3,5 • available with multiples of 25 mm
1800 37 3,9 in height, only available in 294,
594 and 665 mm in length
2000 40 4,4
• light construction
2200 42 4,8 • elevated free passage
• sight proof
2400 44 5,3

Ak value = 0,126 m2 Construction:


Pressure loss see p 2.161 Verso
• blades in extruded aluminium,
natural tone anodised
• painted RAL-colour upon request

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 162


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Fixing


Example: Suspended mounting in ceilings

Exhaust grille with fixed curved blades


without frame. The grille is designed for
replacing a suspended ceiling tile of
600 x 600 mm.
Extruded aluminium, natural tone ano-
dised.

Type: BC100
nom. dim. (L x H) 594 x 594 mm

How to order

BC100 size 594 x 594 mm

B C 1 0 0 - - 0 5 9 4 0 5 9 4

L H

E 2 162 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

FIXED EXHAUST DIFFUSER


BC100

Selection diagram

m3/s
0,7

2
0,6 m3/h
v m/s
0,5 2500 10 k
9
0,4 2000 8 NR50
1800 7
0,3 1600
1400 6
1200 5
0,2 1000 NR40
900
0,15 800
700 4
600
0,1 500
0,09
3 NR30
0,08 400
0,07
0,06 300 2,5
250
0,05
2 NR20
200
0,04

150
0,03

100

200 250 400 600


100
300 500
150 250 400 600
150
200 300 500
200 300 500
200
250 400 600
300 500
300
400 600
400
400

500
500

600
600

Ak-values (m2)
L (mm)
H (mm)
150 200 250 300 400 500 600
100 — 0,007 0,009 0,011 0,014 0,018 0,021
150 0,008 0,011 0,014 0,016 0,021 0,027 0,032
200 — 0,014 0,018 0,021 0,027 0,035 0,042
300 — — — 0,032 0,042 0,054 0,063
400 — — — — 0,054 — —
500 — — — — — 0,088 —
600 — — — — — — 0,126

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 163


INTERNATIONAL

Pressure loss

Pt (pa)
60
50
40

30
25
20

15

10
8

6
5
4

3
2,5
2
2 2,5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
VK (m/s)

E 2 163 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

AIR SUPPLY DIFFUSER WITH PERFORATED PLATE


DA340T • DA360T

Installation dimensions
DA360T
C
N

2
50
Application

H
The diffuser type DA340/360 is used
6

for the supply of cooled or heated


air in facilities such as offices, shop-
B
ping centres where simple adjust-
A ing of the air pattern is required
without influencing air quantity or
pressure loss.
DA360 T The diffuser can be mounted in the
ceiling and has an adjustable air
Size ØN A B C H pattern in 1, 2, 3 or 4 directions.

160 158 294 244 255 x 248 80


200 198 394 344 355 x 348 80 Adjusting possibilities:
250 248 494 444 455 x 448 80
315 313 594 544 555 x 548 80

All dimensions in mm.

DA340T
C 4-way 3-way 2-way

ØN
50

2-way 1-way

Technical information
200

Characteristics:
6

• Available with push-pull lock or


A clips lock
B • The perforated plate is mounted
in the frame with hinges for easy
access
• Standard 4-way air pattern. By
DA 340 T changing the deflector plates,
an air pattern in 1, 2 or 3 direc-
Size ØN A B C D tions can be obtained.
160 158 244 294 266 x 248 230 x 230 x 22 Construction:
200 198 344 394 366 x 348 330 x 330 x 22 • diffuser: steel, painted white (RAL
250 248 444 494 466 x 448 430 x 430 x 22 9010)
315 313 544 594 566 x 548 530 x 530 x 22 • deflector plates: steel, painted
All dimensions in mm black (RAL 9005)
• plenum: galvanised steel sheet

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 170


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories Fixing


Example: DT003: damper with several radial DA340/360T:
opposed segments. Adjustable Concealed fixing with screws in the
Square steel supply diffuser with clips after opening the hinged perforated top collar. Ceiling mounting in a T-
lock and with 4 adjustable deflector plate. profile is also possible.
plates and circular top entry spigot. Steel sheet and painted black (RAL
The diffuser is painted white (RAL 9010) 9005).
Delivery possibilities
Type: DA360T
size ... mm • DA340: diffuser with push-pull lock

• DA360: diffuser with clips lock

• DA340T: diffuser with push-pull lock


and top entry, with filterframe

• DA360T: diffuser with clips lock and


top entry

Size ØN H • DA340P: Steel modular plate for


false ceiling mounting with push-
160 158 55
pull lock: dimensions 594 x 594 mm
200 198 69
Painted white (RAL 9010)
250 248 89 For further information, see p. 2 501
315 313 109
• DA360P: Steel modular plate for
All dimensions in mm false ceiling mounting: dimensions
594 x 594 mm
Painted white (RAL 9010)
For further information, see p. 2 501

• DA340TG: DA340T with insulated


plenum

• DA360TG: DA360T with insulated


plenum
How to order
DA360T size 315 x 594 mm with damper type DT003 size 315 mm.

a) Diffuser

D A 3 6 0 T - 0 3 1 5 0 5 9 4
Size Dimension A
- : non insulated plenum
G: insulated plenum

- : diffuser only without plenum


T: diffuser and plenum with top entry

DA340: diffuser with push-pull lock


DA360: diffuser with clips lock

b) Damper

D T 0 0 3 - - 0 3 1 5 0 0 0 0

Size

E 2 170 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

AIR SUPPLY DIFFUSER WITH PERFORATED PLATE


DA360S

Installation dimensions
DA360S C 50

2
13
øN
H

Application
The diffuser type DA360 is used for

6
36
the supply of cooled or heated air
in facilities such as offices, shopping
B
centres where simple adjusting of
A the air pattern is required without
influencing air quantity or pressure
loss.
The diffuser can be mounted in the
DA360 S
ceiling and has an adjustable air
Size ØN A B C H pattern in 1, 2, 3 or 4 directions.

160 158 294 244 190 x 222 270


200 198 394 344 230 x 262 310 Adjusting possibilities:
250 248 494 444 280 x 312 360
315 313 594 544 345 x 377 425

All dimensions in mm

4-way 3-way 2-way

2-way 1-way

Technical information
Characteristics:

• The perforated plate is mounted


in the frame with hinges for easy
access
• Standard 4-way air pattern. By
changing the deflector plates,
an air pattern in 1,2 or 3 directions
can be obtained.

Construction:
• diffuser: steel, painted white (RAL
9010)
• deflector plates: steel, painted
black (RAL 9005)
• plenum: galvanised steel sheet

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 171


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories Delivery possibilities


Example: DT003: Damper with several radial • DA360: diffuser with clips lock
opposed segments. Adjustable
Square steel supply diffuser with clips after opening the hinged perforated • DA360S: diffuser with clips lock
lock and with 4 adjustable deflector plate. and side entry
plates and circular side entry spigot. Steel sheet and painted black (RAL
The diffuser is painted white (RAL 9010) 9005). • DA361S: like DA360S, but with
damper in side entry
Type: DA360S
size ... mm • DA360SG: DA360S with insulated
plenum

• DA361SG: DA361S with insulated


plenum

• DA360P: Steel modular plate for


false ceiling mounting: dimensions
594 x 594 mm, painted white (RAL
9010)
Size ØN H For further information, see p. 2
501
160 158 55
200 198 69
250 248 89
315 313 109

All dimensions in mm

How to order
DA360S size 315 x 594 mm with damper type DT003 size 315 mm.

a) Diffuser

D A 3 6 0 S - 0 3 1 5 0 5 9 4
Size Dimension A
-: non insulated plenum
G: insulated plenum

-: diffuser only without plenum


S: diffuser and plenum with side entry

0: without damper in the inlet spigot


1: with damper in the inlet spigot

b) Damper

D T 0 0 3 - - 0 3 1 5 0 0 0 0

Size

E 2 171 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

AIR SUPPLY DIFFUSER WITH PERFORATED PLATE


DA340 • DA360

Selection diagram - supply


DA340T/360T with 4-way exhaust • With ceiling effect
• Damper completely open

qv
2
4-way

160 200 250 315

With side entry (DA360S): NR + 4

Air flow rate measurement -


supply
Ak-values (m2)

Size 160 200 250 315


2
Ak(m ) 0,019 0,032 0,046 0,063

The air velocity vk (m/s) is measured by means of a velometer and special col-
lector. The supply air velocity is measured on the diagonals and then the average
of those 4 values is taken (see sketch).

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 172


INTERNATIONAL

Selection diagram - supply


DA340T/360T with 3-way exhaust • With ceiling effect
• Damper completely open

qv

3-way

160 200 250 315

With side entry (DA360S): NR + 4

Air flow rate measurement-


supply
Ak-values (m2)

Size 160 200 250 315


2
Ak(m ) 0,019 0,032 0,046 0,063

The air velocity vk (m/s) is measured by means of a velometer and special col-
lector. The supply air velocity is measured on the diagonals and then the average
of those 4 values is taken (see sketch).

E 2 172 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Selection diagram - supply


DA340T/360T with 1 and 2-way exhaust • With ceiling effect
• Damper completely open

qv

160 200 250 315

2-way 1-way
2-way
in corner

With side entry (DA360S): NR + 4

Air flow rate measurement -


supply
Ak-values (m2)

Size 160 200 250 315


2
Ak(m ) 0,019 0,032 0,046 0,063

The air velocity vk (m/s) is measured by means of a velometer and special col-
lector. The supply air velocity is measured on the diagonals and then the average
of those 4 values is taken (see sketch).

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 173


INTERNATIONAL

Example

Selection data:
- Air flow rate qv = 500 m3/h
- Throw LT = 1,4 m at vT = 0,5 m/s

Solution:
- DA360 size 250 x 494 mm (4-way
exhaust)
- Supply air velocity vk = 3 m/s
- Noise level NR 29
- Total pressure loss with damper
100 % open: ∆ pt = 14 Pa.

Pressure loss Induction and temperature quotient with ceiling effect


with damper DT003
Induction Temperature quotient

D
%
%

0%
50
25

10
15
+

7
NR

+
NR

Correction:
For one or two-way exhaust: i x 0,5; ∆tL x 2
∆tS

E 2 173 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

EXHAUST DIFFUSER WITH PERFORATED PLATE


DA350T • DA350S • DA370T • DA370S

Installation dimensions
DA350T (with filterframe)
C

2
øN

50
D
200

B Application
DA370T (without filterframe) The diffuser type DA350/370 is used for
ØN
the exhaust of air in facilities such as
offices, shopping centres, ...
The diffuser can be mounted in the
50

ceiling.
6
37

A
B Technical information
Characteristics:
DA350T • DA370T
• available with clips lock and push-
Size ØN A B pull lock
160 158 244 294 • free passage ca. 50 %
200 198 344 394 • the perforated plate is mounted in
250 248 444 494 the frame with hinges for easy
315 313 544 594 access.

Construction:

DA350S (with filterframe) • DA370S (without filterframe) • diffuser: steel, painted white (RAL
C 9010)
• plenum: galvanised steel sheet
øN

50
h
6

A
B

DA350S • DA370S
Size øN A B C D H h
160 158 244 294 266 x 248 230 x 230 x 22 310 110
200 198 344 394 366 x 348 330 x 330 x 22 350 110
250 248 444 494 466 x 448 430 x 430 x 22 400 135
315 313 544 594 566 x 548 530 x 530 x 22 460 135

All dimensions in mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 180


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories Fixing


Example: DT003: Damper for DA370T with several DA350T/370T: Concealed fixing by
radial, opposed segments. means of screws in the diffuser
Square steel exhaust diffuser with clips Adjustable after opening the hinged neck, ceiling mounting in T-profile
lock and complete with a plenum with perforated plate. also possible.
circular top entry and damper. Steel sheet and painted black (RAL
The diffuser is painted white (RAL 9010). 9005).
Delivery possibilities
Type: DA370T + DT003
size ... mm • DA350: diffuser with push-pull lock
DT003
• DA370: diffuser with clips lock

• DA350S: diffuser with push-pull


lock and side entry, with filter-
frame

• DA350SG: DA350S with insulated


plenum
Size ØN H
• DA370S: diffuser with clips lock
160 158 55 and side entry
200 198 69
250 248 89 • DA370SG: DA370S with insulated
315 313 109 plenum

N = duct size • DA351S: DA350S with damper in


H = expected height in duct side entry
All dimensions in mm
• DA351SG: DA350S with insulated
plenum
How to order • DA371S: DA370S with damper in-
side entry
DA 370T size 315 x 594 mm with damper type DT003 size 315 mm
• DA371SG: DA371S with insulated
a) Diffuser plenum

D A 3 7 0 T - 0 3 1 5 0 5 9 4 • DA350T: diffuser with push-pull-


lock and top entry, with filter-
size dimension B frame

- : plenum • DA370T: diffuser with clips lock


G: insulated plenum (for side entry) and top entry
- : diffuser • DA350P: Steel modular plate for
S: diffuser and plenum with side entry false ceiling mounting with push-
T: diffuser and plenum with top entry pull lock , 594 x 594 mm, painted
white (RAL9010)
0: without damper (DA350/370S)
(for furthe information, see p. 2
1: with damper (DA351/371S)
501)
DA350: diffuser with push-pull lock
DA370: diffuser with clips lock • DA370P: Steel modular plate for
false ceiling mounting with clips
b) Damper lock 594 x 594 mm, painted white
(RAL 9010)
D T 0 0 3 - - 0 3 1 5 0 0 0 0 (for further information, see p. 2
501)
size

E 2 180 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

EXHAUST DIFFUSER WITH PERFORATED PLATE


DA350T • DA350S • DA370T • DA370S

Selection diagram- exhaust

Type DA350/370 - damper completely open

qv
2
7

6,5

5,5

vk (m/s) 5
∆Pt (Pa)
4,5

4
3,5
3
2,5
2

160 200 250 315

With side entry (DA350S/DA370S): NR + 2

Air flow rate measurement -


exhaust
Ak-values (m2)

Size 160 200 250 315


2
Ak(m ) 0,02 0,033 0,051 0,08

Velometer jet 2220 A or 6070

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 181


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

ADJUSTABLE PERFORATED AIR SUPPLY DIFFUSER


DC560S

Installation dimensions
DC560S

AxB

2
øD
H

Application

C
16

The perforated diffuser type DC-


560S is used for the supply of
cooled or heated air with a vast
temperature difference in respect
594 x 594 to the room temperature.
This high inducing diffuser can be
mounted in the ceiling and is used
in facilities such as offices, shopping
centres where simple adjustment of
the air pattern is required.

AxB Adjusting possibilities:

Because of the separate deflector


plates it is possible to have an
adjustable air pattern in 1, 2, 3 or 4
direction(s).
øD
H

Technical information
C
16

Characteristics:

• high induction level


• flat, stable and equally divided,
horizontal air pattern
594 x 594 • adjustable air pattern in 4, 3, 2 or
1 direction(s)
• side plenum available
• insulated or non-insulated
NOM AxB H oD C plenum available
125 241 x 266 226 125 150
160 307 x 336 260 160 166
200 383 x 414 305 200 191
250 377 x 400 405 250 266
315 474 x 451 508 315 338
All dimensions in mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 190


INTERNATIONAL

Construction: Delivery possibilities Adjusting possibilities


• diffuser: steel, painted white (RAL
9010) • DC560SG: diffuser with insulated side
• deflector plate: steel painted black plenum
(RAL 9005)
4 way air pattern
• plenum: galvanised steel sheet with • DC560S: diffuser with non-insulated
side entry, insulated or non-insulated side plenum
• only suitable for mounting in false
ceilings

Specifications
Example: 3 way air pattern

Perforated adjustable diffuser with


adjustable air pattern in 1, 2, 3 or 4
direction(s). Steel diffuser is painted
white (RAL 9010). The insulated plenum
has a side entry spigot.
2 way air pattern
Type: DC560SG (corner)
size … mm

2 way air pattern


How to order (opposite sides)

DC560SG (RAL 9010): diffuser + plenum box

D C 5 6 0 S G 0 3 1 5 0 5 9 4

size
1 way air pattern
- : non-insulated
G: insulated

Legend:
DC560F (other RAL) + plenum box (to order sererately)
air pattern open
a) Diffuser
air pattern closed
D C 5 6 0 - F 0 3 1 5 0 5 9 4

size

-: standard RAL 9010


F: other RAL
b) Plenum box

D P 5 1 0 S G 0 3 1 5 0 0 0 0

size

- : non-insulated
G: insulated

S: diffuser with side-inlet

E 2 190 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

ADJUSTABLE PERFORATED AIR SUPPLY DIFFUSER


DC560S

DC560S - size 125 mm


• with insulated plenum
• isotherm measured and with ceiling effect

2
1 way 3 way
3 3
Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
90 1,08 12 20 26 130 0,6 11 20 25,8
115 1,38 20 30 33,9 170 0,79 18 30 34,5
140 1,68 31 40 42,4 215 1 30 40 42,4
200 2,4 64 50 53,1 290 1,35 56 50 52,2

2 way(corner) 4 way
3 3
Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
120 0,86 11 20 26,1 145 0,62 12 20 26,4
150 1,07 18 30 34 190 0,81 20 30 33,9
190 1,36 29 40 42,1 230 0,98 31 40 41,9
260 1,86 56 50 52,3 310 1,32 57 50 51,9

2 way(opposite)
3
Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
120 0,86 8 20 26,2
150 1,07 19 30 34,3
190 1,36 33 40 42,3
260 1,86 66 50 52,6

Selection diagram 4 way:


NR 20 NR 30 NR 40 NR 50
2,8 1,4 60

2,4 1,2
50

2,0 1
40

1,6 0,8
∆ Ps [Pa]

LT [m] 30
1,2 LT
0,6

20
0,8 0,4

∆Ps 10
0,4 0,2

0 0 0
100 150 200 250 300 350
vT [m/s] 0,25 0,50
Qv [m3/h]

Correction factor LT for cooling (∆ T = -10 K): LT x 0,9

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 191


INTERNATIONAL

DC560S - size 160 mm


• with insulated plenum
• isotherm measured and with ceiling effect

1 way 3 way
3 3
Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
140 2,29 12 20 27,7 185 0,91 8 20 25,7
160 2,62 16 30 33,6 265 1,31 17 30 35,4
200 3,27 25 40 41,4 325 1,61 26 40 42,4
275 4,5 46 50 51 435 2,15 46 50 51,5

2 way(corner) 4 way
3 3
Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
170 1,43 10 20 26,2 190 0,85 8 20 26,0
225 1,89 17 30 34,2 275 1,23 18 30 35,0
275 2,31 25 40 41,9 345 1,54 28 40 42,5
375 3,15 46 50 51,5 465 2,08 47 50 51,7

2 way(opposite)
3
Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
170 1,43 10 20 25,7
225 1,89 17 30 34,2
275 2,31 25 40 42,0
375 3,15 46 50 51,7

Selection diagram 4 way:

NR20 NR 30 NR 40 NR 50
5,0 2,5 50

45

4,0 2,0 40

35

3,0 1,5 30

LT [m] 25
LT
2,0 1,0 20

15
∆Ps
1,0 0,5 10

0 0,0 0
150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
v T [m/s] 0,25 0,50
Qv [m3/h]

Correction factor LT for cooling (∆ T = -10 K): LT x 0,9

E 2 191 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

DC560S - size 200 mm


• with insulated plenum
• isotherm measured and with ceiling effect

1 way 3 way
3 3
Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
180 2,67 12 20 26,6 285 1,27 12 20 26,9
220 3,26 19 30 34,3 345 1,54 18 30 33,6
270 4 28 40 41,6 420 1,87 27 40 41,8
355 5,26 50 50 51,0 545 2,43 46 50 51

2 way(corner) 4 way
3 3
Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
200 1,37 9 20 26,5 310 1,16 12,5 20 27,2
275 1,89 16 30 34,9 380 1,43 19 30 33,9
335 2,3 25 40 42,5 470 1,77 29 40 41,9
435 2,98 46 50 51,4 615 2,31 51 50 51,3

2 way(opposite)
3
Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
200 1,37 9 20 26,8
275 1,89 16 30 35,2
335 2,3 25 40 42,3
435 2,98 46 50 51,4

Selection diagram 4 way:

NR 20 NR 30 NR 40 NR 50
5,0 2,5 60

50
4,0 2

40
3,0 1,5
∆ Ps [Pa]
LT [m]
LT 30

2,0 1
20

∆ Ps
1,0 0,5
10

0 0 0
250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650
vT [m/s] 0,25 0,50 Qv [m3/h]

Correction factor LT for cooling (∆ T = -10 K): LT x 0,9

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 192


INTERNATIONAL

DC560S - size 250 mm


• with insulated plenum
• isotherm measured and with ceiling effect

1 way 3 way
3 3
Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
240 2,35 7 20 24,5 365 0,85 7 20 25
280 2,74 13 30 33,5 465 1,09 13 30 33,6
365 3,57 27 40 42,4 625 1,46 24 40 43,3
540 5,29 58 50 53,0 885 2,07 44 50 53,5

2 way(corner) 4 way
3 3
Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
300 1,3 7 20 25,2 420 1,21 6 20 25,1
390 1,7 14 30 34,1 540 1,56 13 30 34
530 2,3 25 40 43,7 730 2,11 24 40 43,3
770 3,35 48 50 53,8 1015 2,94 42 50 53,3

2 way(opposite)
3
Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
300 1,3 7 20 25,0
390 1,7 14 30 33,6
530 2,3 25 40 43,3
770 3,35 48 50 53,5

Selection diagram 4 way:

NR 20 NR 30 NR 40 NR 50
7,0 3,5 45

40
6,0 3,0
35
5,0 2,5
30

4,0 2,0 25
LT [m]
3,0 1,5 20
LT
15
2,0 1,0
∆Ps 10
1,0 0,5
5

0,0 0,0 0
400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
v T [m/s] 0,25 0,50
Qv [m3/h]

Correction factor LT for cooling (∆ T = -10 K): LT x 0,9

E 2 192 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

DC560S - size 315 mm


• with insulated plenum
• isotherm measured and with ceiling effect

1 way 3 way
3 3
Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
295 2,2 8,9 20 24,8 567 1,19 9 20 27,2
367 2,74 13,5 30 33,2 759 1,6 16 30 34,8
520 3,88 27,3 40 42,5 1008 2,12 28,6 40 43,7
728 5,43 53 50 52,3 1378 2,9 54,2 50 52,5

2 way(corner) 4 way
3 3
Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
443 1,45 8,4 20 25,6 595 0,89 7,5 20 27,5
536 1,75 12,3 30 33,3 854 1,27 15,5 30 36,4
771 2,52 25 40 42,7 1147 1,71 28,5 40 44,4
1093 3,58 51 50 52,2 1584 2,36 54 50 53,1

2 way(opposite)
3
Qv [m /h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
443 1,45 8,4 20 25,1
536 1,75 12,3 30 32,6
771 2,52 25 40 42,7
1093 3,58 51 50 52,2

Selection diagram 4 way:

NR 20 NR 30 NR 40 NR 50
5,0 2,5 60

50
4,0 2

40
3,0 1,5

LT [m] 30

2,0 1 LT
20

1,0 0,5
10
∆Ps

0 0 0
500 700 900 1100 1300 1500
v T [m/s] 0,25 0,50 Qv [m3/h]

Correction factor LT for cooling (∆ T = -10 K): LT x 0,9

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 193


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

ADJUSTABLE PERFORATED AIR SUPPLY DIFFUSER


DC560T

Installation dimensions
DC560T

2
AxB
ØD
D
16
H

Application
594 x 594 The perforated diffuser type
DC560T is used for the supply of
cooled or heated air with a vast
Nom AxB H ØD temperature difference in respect
to the room temperature.
125 240 x 240 55 125
This high inducing diffuser can be
160 305 x 305 55 160 mounted in the ceiling and is used
200 381 x 381 60 200 in facilities such as offices, shopping
centres where simple adjustment of
250 548 x 548 90 250 the air pattern is required.
315 548 x 548 90 315
Adjusting possibilities:
All dimensions in mm
Because of the separate deflector
plates it is possible to have an
adjustable air pattern in 1, 2, 3 or 4
direction(s).

Technical information
Characteristics:

• high induction level


• flat, stable and equally divided,
horizontal air pattern
• adjustable air pattern in 4, 3, 2 or
1 direction(s)
• top inlet integrated in diffuser (no
plenum required)
• available insulated or non-insulat-
ed

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 200


INTERNATIONAL

Construction: Delivery possibilities Adjusting possibilities


• diffuser: steel, painted white (RAL • DC560TG: diffuser with insulated top
9010) inlet
• deflector plate: steel painted black
4 way air pattern
(RAL 9005) • DC560T: diffuser with non-insulated
• available insulated or non-insulated top inlet
• only suitable for mounting in false
ceilings

Specifications
Example: 3 way air pattern

Perforated adjustable diffuser with ad-


justable air pattern in 1, 2, 3 or 4 direc-
tion(s). Steel diffuser is painted white
(RAL 9010). Non-insulated and an inte-
grated round top inlet.
2 way air pattern
Type: DC560T (corner)
size … mm

2 way air pattern


How to order (opposite sides)

DC560T size 250 mm

D C 5 6 0 T - 0 2 5 0 0 5 9 4 1 way air pattern


size
- : non-insulated
G: insulated
Legend:
S: diffuser with top inlet air pattern open

Exhaust: see DC360 air pattern closed

E 2 200 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

ADJUSTABLE PERFORATED AIR SUPPLY DIFFUSER


DC560T

DC560T - size 125 mm


• non-insulated execution
• isotherm measured and with ceiling effect

2
1 way 3 way

Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
65 1,12 13,6 20 25,3 125 0,7 8,5 20 24,9
80 1,38 20,5 30 33,1 160 0,9 14 30 33,2
110 1,9 36,2 40 42,7 210 1,18 24,5 40 42,9
140 2,41 57,3 50 50,8 265 1,5 38,4 50 51,3

2 way(corner) 4 way

Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
100 0,96 10,5 20 24,9 140 0,5 6,2 20 24,9
125 1,2 17,3 30 32,8 185 0,65 11 30 33,6
160 1,54 28,7 40 42,6 240 0,85 18,6 40 42,8
205 1,97 48 50 51,1 310 1,1 30,2 50 51,5

2 way(opposite)

Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]


100 0,84 10,5 20 25,7
130 1,1 17,7 30 33,2
170 1,43 32 40 43,3
205 1,73 48 50 51

Selection diagram 4 way:

NR 20 NR 30 NR 40 NR 50
2,4 1,2 35

30
2,0 1

25
1,6 0,8

LT [m] 20
1,2 0,6 LT
15

0,8 0,4
10
∆Ps
0,4 0,2 5

0 0 0
100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325
v T [m/s] 0,25 0,50 Qv [m3/h]

Correction factor LT for cooling (∆ T = -10 K): LT x 0,9

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 201


INTERNATIONAL

DC560T - size 160 mm


• non-insulated execution
• isotherm measured and with ceiling effect

1 way 3 way

Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
85 1,12 11 20 24,2 140 0,79 6 20 24,5
115 1,52 21 30 33,8 195 1,1 12 30 34,1
145 1,92 35 40 42,6 255 1,44 20 40 42,3
190 2,51 63 50 52,3 345 1,95 38 50 52

2 way(corner) 4 way

Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
120 1,14 9 20 24,3 150 0,54 4 20 24,1
155 1,54 16 30 33,4 215 0,77 8,5 30 33,7
195 1,94 26 40 42,3 285 1,03 16 40 42,6
260 2,58 47 50 52 390 1,4 30 50 52,9

2 way(opposite)

Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]


120 1,26 9 20 24,6
160 1,68 16,5 30 33,5
205 2,15 28 40 42,7
275 2,89 50 50 52,4

Selection diagram 4 way:

NR 20 NR 30 NR 40 NR 50
3,2 1,6 35

2,8 1,4 30

2,4 1,2
25

2,0 1
LT [m] 20
1,6 0,8
15
LT
1,2 0,6

10
0,8 0,4
∆Ps
0,4 0,2 5

0 0 0
100 150 200 250 300 350 400
v T [m/s] 0,25 0,50 Qv [m3 /h]

Correction factor LT for cooling (∆ T = -10 K): LT x 0,9

E 2 201 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

DC560T - size 200 mm


• non-insulated execution
• isotherm measured and with ceiling effect

1 way 3 way

Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
120 1,67 20 20 25,2 210 1,04 12 20 25,1
150 2,09 30,5 30 33,3 280 1,38 21 30 33,6
190 2,65 48 40 42,5 350 1,73 32,7 40 41,3
260 3,62 88 50 52,5 480 2,37 62 50 52,9

2 way(corner) 4 way

Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
170 1,14 15 20 24,9 240 0,73 8,2 20 24,6
220 1,47 25,5 30 33,2 335 1,02 16 30 34,4
280 1,88 40,3 40 42,2 420 1,27 25 40 42,6
385 2,58 74 50 53 575 1,75 48 50 52,8

2 way(opposite)

Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]


165 1,56 14,2 20 24,9
215 2,03 24 30 33,6
280 2,64 41 40 42,6
385 3,68 79 50 53,5

Selection diagram 4 way:

NR 20 NR 30 NR 40 NR 50
3,6 1,8 60

3,2 1,6
50
2,8 1,4

2,4 1,2 40

2,0 1
LT [m] LT
30
1,6 0,8

1,2 0,6 20

0,8 0,4 ∆Ps


10
0,4 0,2

0 0 0
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
v T [m/s] 0,25 0,50 Qv [m3/h]
Correction factor LT for cooling (∆ T = -10 K): LT x 0,9

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 202


INTERNATIONAL

DC560T - size 250 mm


• non-insulated execution
• isotherm measured and with ceiling effect

1 way 3 way

Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
150 1,57 13,5 20 25 300 0,98 10 20 25,3
180 1,87 19 30 33,2 375 1,23 15,5 30 33,5
225 2,35 29,5 40 41,8 465 1,53 24 40 41,8
325 3,4 62 50 52,5 655 2,15 49 50 52,7

2 way(corner) 4 way

Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
230 1,11 11,5 20 25,3 365 0,76 7,6 20 25,3
295 1,41 18,5 30 34 470 0,98 12,2 30 34,2
370 1,77 30 40 42,1 590 1,23 19,2 40 42,1
515 2,48 60 50 52,6 850 1,77 39,5 50 53,3

2 way(opposite)

Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]


215 1,55 13 20 25,4
270 1,95 20,5 30 34
335 2,42 31,5 40 42,1
465 3,36 60 50 52,4

Selection diagram 4 way:

NR 20 NR 30 NR 40 NR 50
4,0 2 45

3,6 1,8 40

3,2 1,6 35

2,8 1,4
30
2,4 1,2
LT [m] 25
2,0 1
LT 20
1,6 0,8
15
1,2 0,6
∆Ps 10
0,8 0,4

0,4 0,2 5

0 0 0
350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900
v T [m/s] 0,25 0,50 Qv [m3/h]
Correction factor LT for cooling (∆ T = -10 K): LT x 0,9

E 2 202 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

DC560T - size 315 mm


• non-insulated execution
• isotherm measured and with ceiling effect

1 way 3 way

Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
250 2,55 11 20 24,9 495 1,47 9,2 20 25,5
305 3,11 17,5 30 33,4 585 1,74 12,8 30 32,4
360 3,68 24,2 40 41 725 2,16 19,7 40 41,4
515 5,26 47,2 50 51,2 945 2,81 34,4 50 51

2 way(corner) 4 way

Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]
375 2,21 9,6 20 25,4 560 1,25 6,7 20 25,3
445 2,62 14 30 32,3 755 1,69 11,9 30 33,1
540 3,18 20,9 40 41,4 925 2,06 18,1 40 41,4
725 4,26 37,8 50 51,1 1220 2,72 31,1 50 51,1

2 way(opposite)

Qv [m3/h] LT (0,5m/s)[m] ∆ PS [Pa] LW [NR] LW [dB(A)]


350 1,99 9,2 20 25,4
425 2,41 13,5 30 33,1
515 2,92 19,7 40 41,7
655 3,72 32 50 51,1

Selection diagram 4 way:

NR 20 NR 30 NR 40 NR 50
5,0 2,5 35

30
4,0 2

25

3,0 1,5
20
LT [m]
LT
15
2,0 1

10
∆Ps
1,0 0,5
5

0 0 0
550 650 750 850 950 1050 1150 1250
v T [m/s] 0,25 0,50 Qv [m3/h]

Correction factor LT for cooling (∆ T = -10 K): LT x 0,9

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 203


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

PERFORATED DIFFUSER FOR EXHAUST


DC570T

Installation dimensions
DC570T
AxB

2
ØD
H

Application
594 x 594
The perforated diffuser type DC570T
is used for exhaust. This diffuser can
be mounted in the ceiling and is
Nom AxB H ØD
used in facilities such as offices,
125 240 x 240 16 125 shopping centres, ...
160 305 x 305 16 160 This diffuser is visually identical to the
supply type DC560.
200 381 x 381 16 200
250 548 x 548 16 250
315 548 x 548 16 315 Technical information
All dimensions in mm Characteristics:

• top-inlet integrated in diffuser (no


plenum required)
• available insulated or non-insulat-
ed
• visually identical to DC560
(adjustable perforated diffuser for
supply)

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 205


INTERNATIONAL

Construction: Possible deliveries


• diffuser: steel, painted white (RAL 9010)
• DC570TG: diffuser with insulated top-
• available insulated or non-insulated
inlet
• only suitable for mounting in false ceil-
ings
• DC570T: diffuser with non-insulated
top-inlet

Specifications
Example:

Perforated diffuser for exhaust. Steel dif-


fuser is painted in white (RAL 9010), non-
insulated with top-inlet.

Type: DC570T
size … mm

How to order

DC570T size 250 mm

D C 5 7 0 T - 0 2 5 0 0 5 9 4
size
- : non-insulated
G: insulated

T: diffuser with top-inlet

E 2 205 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

PERFORATED DIFFUSER FOR EXHAUST


DC570T

DC570T
• non-insulated execution

2
size 125 mm size 250 mm
Qv [m3/h] ∆ Ps [Pa] Lw [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m3/h] ∆ Ps [Pa] Lw [NR] LW [dB(A)]
165 22 20 25,2 375 13,7 20 26,2
245 49 30 35,3 560 30 30 35,5
325 88 40 43,3 795 60 40 44,7

size 160 mm size 315 mm


Qv [m3/h] ∆ Ps [Pa] Lw [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m3/h] ∆ Ps [Pa] Lw [NR] LW [dB(A)]
225 16,5 20 23,6 420 4 20 25,6
345 40 30 33,6 700 10,7 30 36
450 70 40 42,4 1000 22,5 40 45,2
size 200 mm
Qv [m3/h] ∆ Ps [Pa] Lw [NR] LW [dB(A)]
365 20,5 20 25,8
515 41 30 34,8
700 78 40 43,9

Noise curves:

40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
Lw [NR]

32
31
30
29
28 grootte 125
size 125
27 grootte 160
size 160
26
25 grootte 200
size 200

24 grootte 250
size 250
23 grootte 315
size 315
22
21
20
150 250 350 450 550 650 750 850 950 1050
3
Qv [m /h]

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 206


INTERNATIONAL

DC570T

Pressure loss:

100

90 grootte 125
size 125

80 grootte 160
size 160
grootte 200
size 200
70 grootte 250
size 250

60 grootte 315
size 315
∆ Ps [Pa]

50

40

30

20

10

0
150 250 350 450 550 650 750 850 950 1050
3
Qv [m /h]

E 2 206 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

PERFORATED DIFFUSER FOR EXHAUST


DC570S

Installation dimensions
DC570S
AxB

2
ØD
H

Application

C
16

The perforated diffuser type DC570S


is used for exhaust. This diffuser can
be mounted in the ceiling and is
594 x 594 used in facilities such as offices,
shopping centres, ...
This diffuser is visually identical to the
Nom AxB H ØD C supply type DC560.
125 241 x 266 165 125 91
160 307 x 331 200 160 108
200 383 x 408 240 200 128
Technical information
250 548 x 573 288 250 151 Characteristics:
315 548 x 573 348 315 179
• plenum available with side-inlet
All dimensions in mm • available insulated or non-insulat-
ed
• visually identical to DC560
(adjustable perforated diffuser for
supply)

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 207


INTERNATIONAL

Construction: Possible deliveries


• diffuser: steel, painted white (RAL 9010)
• DC570SG: diffuser with insulated top-
• available insulated or non-insulated
inlet
• only suitable for mounting in false ceil-
ings
• DC570S: diffuser with non-insulated
top-inlet

Specifications
Example:

Perforated diffuser for exhaust. Steel dif-


fuser is painted in white (RAL 9010), non-
insulated with round side-inlet.

Type: DC570S
size … mm

How to order
DC570SG (RAL 9010): diffuser + plenum box

D C 5 7 0 S G 0 3 1 5 0 5 9 4

size

- : non-insulated
G: insulated

DC570F (other RAL-color) + plenum box (to order seperately)

a) Diffuser

D C 5 7 0 - F 0 3 1 5 0 5 9 4

size

-: standard RAL 9010


F: other RAL-color
b) Plenum box

D P 5 7 0 S G 0 3 1 5 0 0 0 0

size

- : non-insulated
G: insulated

S: plenum box with side-inlet

E 2 207 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

PERFORATED DIFFUSER FOR EXHAUST


DC570S

DC570S
• non-insulated execution

2
size 125 mm size 250 mm
Qv [m3/h] ∆ Ps [Pa] Lw [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m3/h] ∆ Ps [Pa] Lw [NR] LW [dB(A)]
145 10 20 24,2 325 3,3 20 23
260 32 30 35,1 810 21 30 34,3
390 72 40 44,9 1285 52 40 44,5

size 160 mm size 315 mm


Qv [m3/h] ∆ Ps [Pa] Lw [NR] LW [dB(A)] Qv [m3/h] ∆ Ps [Pa] Lw [NR] LW [dB(A)]
220 8,5 20 23,6 500 5,5 20 26
425 34 30 35,2 860 16 30 35,3
600 69 40 44,9 1300 36 40 44,2
size 200 mm
Qv [m3/h] ∆ Ps [Pa] Lw [NR] LW [dB(A)]
300 7,4 20 23,4
660 35 30 35
980 78 40 45,5

Noise curves:

40

35
Lw [NR]

30

grootte 125
size 125
grootte 160
size 160

25 grootte 200
size 200
grootte 250
size 250
grootte 315
size 315

20
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400
3
Qv [m /h]

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 208


INTERNATIONAL

DC570S

Pressure loss:

80
grootte 125
size 125
grootte160
size 160
70
size 200
grootte 200
size 250
grootte 250
60 size 315
grootte 315

50
∆ Ps [Pa]

40

30

20

10

0
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400
Qv [m3/h]

E 2 208 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

SQUARE DIFFUSER WITH ADJUSTABLE AIR PATTERN


CS500 • CS600

Installation dimensions
CS600 surface mounting CS500 mounting in false ceilings

2
Application
The diffuser type CS500/CS600 is
used for the supply and exhaust of
cooled or heated air in facilities
Size ØN A B E F Size ØN A B F
such as offices, shopping centres,
100 100 190 215 51 58 100 100 294 300 75 ... The diffuser can be mounted in
125 125 215 240 51 58 125 125 294 300 75 the ceiling where high aesthetic
160 160 305 330 71 93 160 160 294 300 95 standards are required. Adjustable
200 200 345 370 71 93 200 200 594 600 110 air pattern (horizontally - vertically).
250 250 395 420 71 93 250 250 594 600 110 Due to its stable air distribution, it
315 315 460 485 71 93 315 315 594 600 110 can also be used for VAV terminal
boxes.
All dimensions in mm
Adjusting possibilities:

Fast selection diagram

Size
(mm)
20 30 40 50 NR Vertical air pattern
1,2 1,7 2,5 3,2
315

1,1 1,6 2 3
250

1 1,4 1,8 2,5


200

0,9 1,2 1,6 2,2 Horizontal air pattern


150

125
0,8 1 1,5 2 Technical information
0,7 0,9 1,3 1,7 Characteristics:
100 Throw LT (m)

• air pattern adjustable in 5 posi-


50 60 80 100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 2000 m3/h tions (horizontally - vertically)
• removable deflector plate

Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone. Construction:


See next page for a detailed selection.
painted white (RAL 9010)

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 210


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Fixing Delivery possibilities


Example: • CS500, for false ceiling mounting • CS500: for mounting in false ceil-
ings
Square diffuser with adjustable air pat- • CS600, by means of 3 mounting
tern and circular top entry, complete brackets, or screws in the diffuser • CS501: for mounting in false ceil-
with a telescopic damper in the collar. neck. ings with telescopic damper
The diffuser is painted white (RAL 9010).
• CS600: square diffuser for surface
Type: CS501 mounting
size ... mm
• CS601: square diffuser with tele-
scopic damper for surface mount-
ing

• CS500P: only false ceiling plate


594 x 594 mm for diffuser up to and
including size 160 mm (diffuser to
be ordered separately)
For more information, see p. 2 500

How to order

CS500 size 315 mm without damper

C S 5 0 0 - - 0 3 1 5 0 0 0 0

Size

0: without damper
1: with damper

Frame type: 5: false ceiling mounting


6: surface mounting

E 2 210 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

SQUARE DIFFUSER WITH ADJUSTABLE AIR PATTERN


CS500 • CS600

Selection diagram - supply


Type CS500 - with ceiling effect Valid for cooling up to ∆ tS = - 14 K
CS600 - damper completely open Valid for heating up to ∆ tS = + 30 K

V
R
V
K
V
T

Throw correction factor for mounting without ceiling effect : LT x 0,7

Air flow rate measurement -


supply
Ak- and An-values (m2)

Size 100 125 160 200 250 315


Ak 0,0044 0,0066 0,0110 0,0171 0,0270 0,0429
An 0,0079 0,0123 0,0201 0,0314 0,0491 0,0779

Velometer jet 2220 A or 6070

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 220


INTERNATIONAL

Example

Selection data:

- Air flow rate qv = 0,07 m3/s


- Throw LT = 1 m at vT = 0,50 m/s

Solution:

- Size 200 mm
- Supply air velocity vk = 4,1 m/s
- Noise level NR 22
- Total pressure loss with damper
100 % open: ∆ Pt = 8,5 Pa

Pressure loss

with damper

50 % 100 %

D
0
+1
NR

E 2 220 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

CIRCULAR DIFFUSER WITH ADJUSTABLE AIR PATTERN


CC600

Installation dimensions

Application
2
The diffuser type CC600 is used for
the supply and exhaust of cooled
or heated air in facilities such as
offices, shopping centres, ... The dif-
fuser can be mounted in the ceiling
where high aesthetic standards are
required. Adjustable air pattern
Size ØA ØB C F ØN E G (horizontally - vertically). Due to its
stable air distribution, it can also be
100 207 230 22 56 100 51 15 used for VAV terminal boxes.
125 242 265 22 53 125 51 15
160 287 310 25 93 160 71 15 Adjusting possibilities:
200 338 365 25 93 200 71 15
250 397 430 25 93 250 71 15
315 476 515 30 88 315 71 15

All dimensions in mm.

Fast selection diagram Vertical air pattern

Size
(mm) 20 30 40 50 NR Horizontal air pattern
1,3 1,7 2,3 3,2
315

250
1,1 1,5 2 3 Technical information
1 1,4 1,8 2,7
Characteristics:
200

0,9 1,2 1,7 2,3


• air pattern adjustable in 5 posi-
150
tions (horizontally - vertically)
• removable deflector plate
0,8 1 1,5 2
125

0,7 0,9 1,3 1,8 Throw LT (m)


100 Construction:

70 80 100 200 300 400 500 700 1000 2000 3000 m3/h
painted white (RAL 9010)

Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone.


See next page for a detailed selection.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 230


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Fixing Delivery possibilities


Example: • with 3 mounting brackets • CC600: circular diffuser
Circular diffuser with adjustable air • with screws in the diffuser neck • CC601: circular diffuser with tele-
pattern and circular top entry, com- scopic damper
plete with a telescopic damper in the
diffuser neck.
The diffuser is painted white (RAL 9010)

Type: CC601
size ... mm

How to order

CC600 size 250 mm with damper

C C 6 0 1 - - 0 2 5 0 0 0 0 0

Size

0: without damper
1: with damper

E 2 230 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

CIRCULAR DIFFUSER WITH ADJUSTABLE AIR PATTERN


CC600

Selection diagram - supply


Type CC600 - with ceiling effect Valid for cooling up to ∆ tS = - 14 K
- damper completely open Valid for heating up to ∆ t S = + 30 K

NR
50
45
V
K
V
T 2
NR V
40
R

NR
35
NR
30
NR
2 5
NR
20
NR

100 125 160 200 250 315

Size

Throw correction for mounting without ceiling effect : LT x 0,7

Air flow rate measurement -


supply
Ak- and An-values (m2)

Size 100 125 160 200 250 315


Ak 0,0044 0,0066 0,0110 0,0171 0,0270 0,0429
An 0,0079 0,0123 0,0201 0,0314 0,0491 0,0779

Velometer jet 2220 A or 6070

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 240


INTERNATIONAL

Example

Selection data:

- Air flow rate qv = 0,07 m3/s


- Throw LT = 1 m at vT = 0,50 m/s

Solution:

- Size 200 mm
- Supply air velocity vk = 3,9 m/s
- Noise level NR 20
- Total pressure loss with damper
100 % open: ∆ pt = 8 Pa.

Pressure loss
with damper

50 % 100 %

D
0
+1
NR

E 2 240 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

FALSE CEILING DIFFUSERS

AU770 • AU780
• plafondornament meestal toegepast als afvoerrooster
• blank aluminium raster in aluminium U-kader, beide in
RAL 9010
• ornament met paneelmaat 594 x 594 mm
• AU770: mazen met 45° afbuiging
• AU780: rechte mazen

CE100P • DE100P
• rond plafondornament met instelbaar luchtpatroon
• Uitneembaar binnenwerk met 2 luchtspreidingsringen in
5 standen instelbaar
• volumeregelklep mogelijk als toebehoren
• afmetingen en selectie zie p. 2 010
• CE100P: aluminium / DE100P: staal
ornament t.e.m. grootte 315 mm met paneelmaat 594 x
594 mm; wit gemoffeld (RAL 9010)

DS170P
• rond plafondornament met vast uitblaaspatroon
• uitvoering in staal, wit gemoffeld (RAL 9010)
• volumeregelklep mogelijk als toebehoren
• afmetingen en selectie zie p. 2 030
• DS170P: ornament t.e.m. grootte 315 mm met paneel-
maat 594 x 594 mm
• plenum afzonderlijk bij te bestellen

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 501


INTERNATIONAL

EG400
• Square diffuser with fixed 4-way air pattern
• Steel construction (RAL 9010)
• Damper and plenum as possible accessory
• Dimensions and selection, see p. 2 050
• EG400: diffuser size 450 mm, with ceiling plate
size 594 x 594 mm
• EG400: diffuser up to and including size 375,
integrated in a false ceiling plate 594 x 594 mm
plenum to be ordered separately

EE400 • ED400
• Square diffuser with fixed 4-way air pattern
• In extruded aluminium. Removable core and
RAL 9010, false ceiling plate in steel
• Possible accessories: damper and flow equalizer
• Dimensions and selection, see p. 2 130
• ED/EE400: diffuser size 450 mm with ceiling plate
size 594 x 594 mm
ED/EE400P : diffuser up to and including size 375
mm, integrated in a false ceiling plate 594 x 594
mm
• plenum to be ordered separately

DA340P • DA350P • DA360P • DA370P


• Diffuser with deflector plates, resulting in a 1, 2,
3, or 4-way air pattern
• Perforated steel sheet (RAL 9010)
• Can also be used as exhaust diffuser
(= DA370P)
• Damper as possible accessory
• Dimensions and selection, see p. 2 170
• DA360: diffuser size 315/594 mm
DA360P: only false ceiling plate
594 x 594 mm for diffuser up to and including
size 250 mm, diffuser to be ordered separately
• Plenum to be ordered separately

E 2 500 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

DC340 • DC360
• Perforated diffuser with 15 mm frame
• DC340: Ceiling diffuser with 40 % perforation, ceiling
plate size 594 x 594 mm, full frame
DC360: Ceiling diffuser with perforation of 51%, ceil-
ing plate size 594 x 594 mm
• Painted white (RAL 9010)

D C 3 4 0 - F 0 5 9 4 0 5 9 4

L H
- : standard RAL 9010
F: no RAL 9010

DC340: perforation of 40%


DC360: perforation of 51%

CS500P
• Diffuser with air pattern adjustable in 5 positions
• Painted white (RAL 9010)
• Damper as possible accessory
• Dimensions and selection, see p. 2 210
• CS500: diffuser size 200, 250 and 315 mm with ceiling
plate size 594 x 594 mm
CS500P: only false ceiling plate 594 x 594 mm for dif-
fuser up to and including size 160 mm (diffuser to be
ordered separately)

WT100P
• Diffuser with 1 or 2 rows of adjustable deflector plates,
resulting in an unlimited number of arrangements
and an excellent swirl effect (RAL 9010)
• Construction with side and top entry possible
• Can be used as exhaust grille (= WA100P)
• Dimensions and selection, see p. 3 010
• WT100/WT120: diffuser size 250/594mm or 250/619 mm
WT100P/WT120P: diffuser up to and including size 200
mm, integrated in a false ceiling plate 594 x 594 mm
• plenum to be ordered separately

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 501


INTERNATIONAL

WS200 • WS220
• Circular swirl diffuser with fixed vanes (RAL 9010)
• Dimensions and selection, see p. 3 040
• WS200/WS220: diffuser size 400 mm with ceiling plate
size 594 x 594 mm
WS200P/WS220P: diffuser up to and including size 315
mm, integrated in a false ceiling plate 594 x 594 mm
• plenum to be ordered separately

WS400 P
• Swirl diffuser with fixed vanes
• steel, painted white (RAL 9010)
• Dimensions and selection see p. 3 100
• WS400: diffuser size 250/594 mm or 315/594 mm
• WS400P: diffuser size 200 mm with false ceiling
plate 594 x 594 mm
• Plenum to be ordered separately

E 2 501 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

How to order

E E 4 0 0 P - 0 3 0 0 0 5 9 4

size
diffuser External dimensions
of false ceiling
AU770/780
plate
DC340/360
EG400
EE400
ED400 False ceiling plate, diffuser included
CE100/CE120 Plenum and damper to be ordered separately
DE100/DE120
DS170
WT100
WS200/220
WS400

D A 3 6 0 P - 0 1 6 0 0 5 9 4

size
diffuser External dimensions
of false ceiling
plate
DA340/350/360/370 Only false ceiling plate,
CS500 diffuser to be ordered separately

* REMARK: All false ceiling plates are painted white (RAL 9010)

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 2 502


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


3
INTERNATIONAL

SWIRL DIFFUSER WITH ADJUSTABLE AIR PATTERN


WT100S

Installation dimensions
Size 125 & 200 mm
50 B
øD

Application
90

The swirl diffuser type WT100S is used


for the supply of cooled or heated

3
11

air in facilities such as offices, shop-


Size 250 mm ping centres, schools, ...
Diffusers for ceiling or exposed duct
50 B mounting.
The diffuser is equipped with ad-
justable deflectors creating the
possibility to obtain an external or
internal swirl.
A high induction is obtained by the
øD

exceptional swirl discharge, which


H

makes them extremely suitable for


VAV terminal boxes.
90

Technical information
11

Characteristics:
Size 315 mm
• adjustable horizontal and vertical
50 B air pattern

• 2,5 < mounting height < 4 m

• size 125 & 200 mm:


Single row of deflectors
øD

• size 250 mm:


Because of the unique position of
90

the 2 rows of outlet deflectors, an


unlimited number of possibilities
can be obtained.
11

For example a vertical air dis-


charge through the inner deflec-
tors in combination with an exter-
nal swirl through the outer deflec-
Size ØN A B H ØD
tors, ...
125 125 294 270 230 123
• size 315 mm:
160 160 394 355 265 158
An adjustable deflector sheet is
200 200 394 355 305 198
mounted in the centre allowing
200 200 494 355 305 198
you to handle 25 % more air vol-
250 250 594 555 355 248
ume compared to size 250 mm,
250 250 619 555 355 248
without any increase in noise
315 315 819 780 420 313

All dimensions in mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 3 010


INTERNATIONAL

Construction: Specifications description Fixing


• steel; painted white (RAL 9010) Example: • provided with mounting eyes
• deflectors in black or white extruded (ø 7 mm), mounting straps avail-
pvc Square steel diffuser with adjustable air able upon request
• optional insulation plenum; galvani- pattern, complete with a plenum box
sed steel sheet with side entry and damper. • modular ceiling mounting
The diffuser is painted white (RAL 9010)

Type: WT101S
size ... / ... mm Delivery possibilities
• WT100S/WT120S: swirl diffuser with
Fast selection diagram plenum and side entry

• WT101S/WT121S: WT100S/WT120S
with damper in side entry
Size
(mm) 20 30 40 NR • WT100P/WT120P: swirl diffuser inte-
315
0,6 1 1,6 grated in a false ceiling plate
0,5 0,9 1,5
(see p. 2 500)
250

• WA100S: WT100S as exhaust dif-


fuser without deflectors

• WA101S: WT101S as exhaust dif-


fuser without deflectors and with
0,4 0,7 1,2
200 damper in side entry
LT = Throw (m)

0,3 0,6 1,0


125 • WA100P: WT100P as exhaust dif-
fuser without deflectors
(see p. 2 500)
100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 2000 m3/h

Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone.


See p. 3 030 for a detailed selection.

How to order

WT100S, diameter 250 mm, size 94 mm, with plenum

W T 1 0 1 S - 0 2 5 0 0 5 9 4
Size Dimension A

- : non insulated plenum


G: insulated plenum
- : without plenum
S: plenum with side entry
0: without damper
1: with damper in the inlet collar
0: deflectors in black extruded pvc
2: deflectors in white extruded pvc
T: supply with deflectors
A: exhaust without deflectors

E 3 010 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

SWIRL DIFFUSER WITH ADJUSTABLE PATTERN


WT100T

Installation dimensions
Size 125,200 mm Size 250 mm
B
B
øD

50
øD
50

H
11
H
11

A Application

3
A
The diffuser type WT100T is used for
the supply of cooled or heated air
in facilities such as offices, shopping
centres, schools, ...
Diffusers for ceiling or exposed duct
A

A
mounting.
The diffuser is equipped with adjus-
table deflectors creating the possi-
bility to obtain an external or inter-
nal swirl.
A high induction is obtained by the
exceptional swirl discharge, which
makes them extremely suitable for
VAV terminal boxes.
Size ØN A B H ØD

125 125 294 290 155 123 Technical information


200 200 394 375 205 198 Characteristics:
200 200 494 375 205 198
250 250 594 575 205 248 • adjustable horizontal and vertical
250 250 619 575 205 248 air pattern
315 315 819 800 255 313

All dimensions in mm • 2,5 < mounting height < 4 m

• size 125, 200 mm:


Fast selection diagram Single row of deflectors

• size 250 mm:


Size Because of the unique position of
(mm)
20 30 40 NR
the 2 rows of outlet deflectors, an
0,6 1 1,6
315 unlimited number of possibilities
250 0,5 0,9 1,5 can be obtained. For ex-ample a
vertical air discharge through the
inner deflectors in combination
with an external swirl through the
outer deflectors.

200 • size 315 mm:


0,4 0,7 1,2 An adjustable deflector sheet is
125
LT = Throw (m)
mounted in the central part al-
0,3 0,6 1,0
lowing you to handle 25 % more
air volume compared to size 250
mm, without any increase in
100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 2000 m3/h
noise

Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone.


See p. 3 030 for a detailed selection.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 3 020


INTERNATIONAL

Construction: Specifications description Fixing


• steel; painted white (RAL 9010) Example: • provided with mounting eyes
(ø 7 mm), mounting straps avail-
• deflectors in black or white ex- Square steel diffuser with adjustable air able upon request
truded pvc pattern, complete with a plenum box
with top entry and damper. • modular ceiling mounting
• optional insulation plenum; gal- The diffuser is painted white (RAL 9010)
vanised steel sheet
Type: WT101T Delivery possibilities
size ... / ... mm
• WT100T/WT120T: swirl diffuser with
plenum and top entry

• WT101T/WT121T: WT100T, with


dam-per in top entry

• WA100T: WT100T, as exhaust dif-


fuser without deflectors

• WA101T: WT101T, as exhaust dif-


fuser without deflectors and with
damper in top entry

How to order

WT100T, diameter 250 mm, size 594 mm, with plenum

W T 1 0 1 T - 0 2 5 0 0 5 9 4
Size Dimension A
- : non insulated plenum
G: insulated plenum
- : without plenum
T: plenum with top entry
0: without damper
1: with damper in the inlet collar
0: deflectors in black extruded pvc
2: deflectors in white extruded pvc

T: supply with deflectors


A: exhaust without deflectors

E 3 020 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

CIRCULAR SWIRL DIFFUSER WITH ADJUSTABLE AIR PATTERN


WT500S

Installation dimensions

Size 200 mm Ø 310

Application

Size 250 mm
Ø 530
Ø 448
The swirl diffuser type WT500S is
used for the supply of cooled or
heated air in facilities such as
offices,
schools,...
shopping centres,

Diffusers for ceiling or exposed duct


mounting.
3
The diffuser is equipped with adjust-
able deflectors creating the possi-
bility to obtain an external or inter-
nal swirl.
A high induction is obtained by the
exceptional swirl discharge which
makes them extremely suitable for
VAV application.
Technical information
Characteristics:
Ø 600
• Adjustable horizontal and vertical
WT500S air pattern
W 50

• 2,5 < mounting height < 4 m

• size 200 mm:


Single row of deflectors
ØD
H

• size 250 mm:


Because of the unique position of
the 2 rows of outlet deflectors, an
ØJ unlimited number of possibilities
95

can be obtained.
ØA For example a vertical air dis-
charge through the inner deflec-
tors in combination with an exter-
nal swirl through the outer deflec-
Size ØA W H ØD ØJ tors, ...

200 448 450 x 476 365 198 320

250 600 600 x 626 405 248 555

All dimensions in mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 3 025


INTERNATIONAL

Construction: Specifications description Fixing


• steel; painted white (RAL 9010) Example: provided with mounting eyes
(ø 7 mm), mounting straps avail-
• deflectors in black or white extruded Circular steel diffuser with adjustable able on demand
pvc air pattern, complete with a plenum
box with side entry and damper.
• optional insulation plenum; galva- The diffuser is painted white (RAL9010). Possible deliveries
nised steel sheet
Type: WT501S
size ... / ... mm • WT500S/WT520S: swirl diffuser with
plenum and side entry

• WT501S/WT521S: WT500S/WT520S
with damper in side entry
Fast selection diagram
• WA500S: WT500S as exhaust dif-
fuser without deflectors
Size
(mm) 20 30 40 NR • WA501S: WT501S as exhaust dif-
0,6 1 1,6
315
fuser without deflectors and with
250 0,5 0,9 1,5
damper in side entry

200
0,4 0,7 1,2

125
LT = Throw (m)
0,3 0,6 1,0

100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 2000 m3/h

Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone.


See next page for a detailed selection.

How to order
WT500S, diameter 250 mm, size 600 mm with plenum

W T 5 0 0 S - 0 2 5 0 0 6 0 0
Size Dimension A

- : non-insulated plenum
G: insulated plenum
- : without plenum
S: plenum with side entry
0: without damper
1: with damper in the inlet collar
0: deflectors in black extruded pvc
2: deflectors in white extruded pvc
T: supply with deflectors
A: exhaust without deflectors

E 3 025 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

SWIRL DIFFUSER WITH ADJUSTABLE AIR PATTERN


WT100S • WT100T • WT500S

Selection diagram supply

Type WT100 • WT500 - with ceiling effect


- damper completely open
VT
VK

VR

NR 4

NR 4

NR 3
NR 3
5

5
0

0
NR

NR

NR
45

40

35
3
30
5 NR
NR 2
25
0 NR
NR 2
20
NR

ø 125 ø 160/200 ø 250


SIZE ø 315
GROOTTE
SIZE

With side entry (WT100S/WT500S): NR + 2


Correction factor: without ceiling effect: LT x 0,7

size 125 160/200 250 315


2
Ak (m ) 0,0105 0,0140 0,0396 0,05

Air flow rate measurement- Example


supply
- Air flow rate: qv = 0,17 m3/s
- Size 250 mm
- Supply air velocity vk = 4,2
m/s
- Throw LT = 0,9 m at vT = 0,50
m/s
- Noise level NR 31
- Total pressure loss with dam-
per 100 % open: ∆ pt = 22Pa

Velometer jet 2220 A or 6070

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 3 030


INTERNATIONAL

Installation possibilities
External swirl Internal swirl

Example of deflectors set for Examples of deflectors set for one or two discharge pattern
external swirl

Pressure loss Temperature quotient with ceiling effect

with damper

D
°
°
45
90

25
12

0
4

5
+

/2
NR

+
NR

00

E 3 030 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

CIRCULAR SWIRL DIFFUSER


WR200

Installation dimensions
WR210 WR230
Ø N

Z
Ø P
Ø B

Application
The swirl diffuser type WR200 is used

3
for the supply of cooled and heat-
ed air in facilities such as offices,
shopping centres, schools, ...
Diffuser for ceiling or exposed duct
mounting. The diffuser is equipped
with fixed vanes in a round
frontsheet. A high induction is ob-
tained by the exceptional swirl dis-
charge, which makes them very
suitable for VAV application from
100 % down to 25 %. A downwards
inclined swirl is obtained in the flat
Size ØN ØA ØB M ØP Z version WR200, when fitted with the
diffusion collar WR220 a horizontal
100 98 138 160 15 135 50
swirl is obtained.
125 123 178 200 25 180 50
160 158 195 250 25 215 50
200 198 248 300 25 255 50
Technical information
250 248 296 350 25 305 50 Characteristics:
315 313 363 450 35 395 50
400 398 600 570 60 535 65 • available with the dimensions
500 498 700 700 70 620 50 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 315, 400
and 500 mm
∆ P = minimal ceiling opening.
• 2,4 < installation height < 4 m
All dimensions in mm.
• diffuser with central screw fixing
that can be dismantled from ple-
Fast selection diagram num or transition piece.
• diffuser without central screw fix-
ed to plenum or transition piece.
Size
(mm) 20 30 40 NR
Construction:
0,5 0,9 1,4
315

• diffuser; steel, painted white (RAL


0,45 0,8 1,3
9010)
250 • optional insulated plenum; gal-
vanised steel sheet
0,4 0,7 1,2 • provided with mounting eyes (ø 7
200
mm), mounting straps available
upon request
0,35 0,6 1,1
160

LT = Throw (m)

0,3 0,55 0,9


125

50 60 80 100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000m3/h

Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone.


See p. 3 070 following pages for a detailed selection.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 3 040


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Delivery possibilities • WR220T: Swirl diffuser with diffu-


sion collar and transition piece,
Example: • WR200: Flat swirl diffuser top entry

Circular steel swirl diffuser with fixed • WR200S: Flat swirl diffuser and ple- • WR230: Swirl diffuser with diffusion
vanes in a round frontsheet and diffu- num with side entry collar and central screw fixing
sion collar. Complete with side entry
plenum and damper. • WR200T: Flat swirl diffuser with transi- • WR230T: Swirl diffuser with diffu-
The diffuser is painted white (RAL 9010) tion piece, top entry sion collar, with central screw fix-
ing and transition piece, top
Type: WR231S • WR210: Flat swirl diffuser with central entry
size ... mm screw fixing
• WR230S: Swirl diffuser with diffu-
• WR210T: Flat swirl diffuser with central sion collar, central screw fixing
Accessories screw fixing and transition piece, top and plenum with side entry
entry
GR003: mounting support for central • WR231S: Swirl diffuser with diffu-
screw fixing (only for WR210 and WR • WR210S: Flat swirl diffuser with central sion collar, central screw fixing
230) screw fixing and plenum with side and damper in inlet spigot
entry

• WR211S: Flat swirl diffuser with central


screw fixing, plenum with side entry
and damper

• WR220: Swirl diffuser with diffusion


collar

• WR220S: Swirl diffuser with diffusion


collar and plenum with side entry

Installation dimensions

WR210T

Size C øD E F G H øJ W K Q
100 172 78 195 140 250 235 102 200 120 135
125 192 98 217 160 280 255 127 275 126 155
160 205 123 230 185 305 280 162 325 131 160
200 223 158 248 220 340 315 202 375 131 165
K

250 243 198 268 260 380 355 252 450 136 165
315 264 248 299 310 440 405 317 500 144 185
400 291 313 351 375 530 470 402 600 177 240
500 344 398 404 460 615 555 502 800 - -

WR230T WR210S WR231S


øD
40

10

E 3 040 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

CIRCULAR SWIRL DIFFUSER


WR250
Installation dimensions

ØD

3
ØP
Application
The swirl diffuser type WR250 is used
ØA
for the supply of cooled and heat-
ed air in facilities such as offices,
shopping centres, schools, ...
Diffuser especially designed for sys-
tem ceiling mounting. The friction
springs and the small overall
Size ØA ØD ØP B C dimension (∆A) offer extremely
63 98 61 91 15 40 easy mounting and a perfect inte-
gration in system ceilings. Suitable
80 140 78 115 17 50
for ceiling sheets with thickness
100 160 98 130 17 50
between 1,5 and 20 mm. Fixed hor-
125 200 123 170 25 30
izontal air pattern.
∆ P = minimal ceiling opening. All dimensions in mm.

Technical information
Selection table - supply Construction:
• steel, painted white (RAL 9010)
Size qv (m3/h) ∆pt (Pa) Lw (NR) LT (m)
• available with 4 dimensions 63,
80, 100 and 125 mm
63 25 63 35 0,80

80 25 29 28 0,45

80 35 41 32 0,60

100 50 24 28 0,75

100 75 60 35 1,15

125 90 28 30 0,55
125 120 40 35 0,75

Throw factor is based on a vT of 0,5 m/s

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 3 041


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Delivery possibilities Fixing


Example: WR250: circular swirl diffuser with fric- • diameter 63, 80 and 100 mm: fixing
tion springs with 2 friction springs
Circular swirl diffuser for small air volumes
with a horizontal air flow pattern, com- • diameter 125 mm fixing with 3 fric-
plete with friction springs. tion springs
The diffuser is painted white (RAL 9010).

Type: WR250
size ... mm

How to order
WR250 size 100 mm.

W R 2 5 0 - - 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

size

E 3 041 Specifications subject to change © 2009


INTERNATIONAL

ROUND SWIRL DIFFUSER WITH TRANSITION PIECE


WR230 • WP270T

Installation dimensions
WR230 + WP270T - size 100 mm

ø80 of ø100

40

140

3
20
15

M6

Application
40

ø101

ø132

ø140 of ø160
The swirl diffuser type WR230 is used
for the supply of cooled and heat-
ed air in facilities such as offices,
WR230 with outside dimension 140 or 160 mm shopping centres, schools, ...
WP270T with connection diameter 80 or 100 mm
Diffuser for ceiling or exposed duct
WR230 + WP270T - size 125 mm mounting. The diffuser is equipped
with fixed vanes in a round front
ø98 of ø123
sheet. A high induction is obtained
because of the exceptional swirl
discharge, which makes them very
42

suitable for VAV applications from


100 % down to 25 %.
148

The swirl diffusers are universally


applicable. Thanks to the simple as-
sembly to the transition piece and
the restricted outer dimensions, this
34
25

M6
grating is ideal for the supply of
40

fresh air in cooling ceilings.


1

ø126

ø176
ø200
Technical information
WR230 with outside dimension 200 mm
WP270T with connection diameter 100 or 125 mm Characteristics:

WR230 + WP270T - size 160 mm • available with outer dimensions


100, 125 and 160 mm (see draw-
ø123 ings)
• transition piece available with 3
connection diameters: 80, 100
42

and 125 mm
• 2,4 m < installation height < 4 m
• diffuser with central screw fixing
154

which can be dismantled from


plenum or transition piece
• suitable for ceilings of 1 to 20 mm
thick
36
25

M
40

Construction:
ø161

ø211
ø250 WR230:
steel painted white RAL 9010

WR230 with outside dimension 215 or 250 mm


WP270T:
WP270T with connection diameter 125 mm
galvanised unpainted steel
Alle dimensions in mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 3 045


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Delivery possibilities Fixing


Example: WR230: Easy fixing using the central screw
round swirl diffuser with central screw on the transition piece WP270T.
Circular steel swirl diffuser with fixed and cap.
vanes for small air volumes. Provided The ceiling can be clasped
with central screw with cap and transi- WP270T: between the grill and the transition
tion piece. transition piece piece.

The diffuser is painted white (RAL 9010)

Type: WR230 + WP270T


Size … mm

Selection table - supply


Size qv (m3/h) ∆pt (Pa) Lw (NR) LT (m)
100 40 15 23 0,4
100 50 24 28 0,75
100 75 60 33 1,15
125 70 14 23 0,4
125 90 20 28 0,5
125 115 28 33 0,65
160 100 10 23 0,45
160 130 18 28 0,55
160 160 28 33 0,75

LT current for vT = 0,5 m/s

How to order

WR230, size 100 mm, outside dimension 140 mm

W R 2 3 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 4 0
size outside dimension
Executions: - WR230 size 100 mm, outside dimension 140 or 160 mm
- WR230 size 125 mm, outside dimension 200 mm
- WR230 size 160 mm, outside dimension 215 or 250 mm

WP270T, size 100 mm with connection diameter 80 mm

W P 2 7 0 T - 0 1 0 0 0 0 8 0
size connection diameter
Executions: - WP270T size 100 mm with connection diameter 80 or 100 mm
- WP270T size 125 mm with connection diameter 100 or 125 mm
- WP270T size 160 mm with connection diameter 125 mm

E 3 042 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

SQUARE SWIRL DIFFUSER


WS200

Installation dimensions
WS210 WS230 øN

40
Z
M
8
øP

Application

3
The swirl diffuser type WS200 is used
for the supply of cooled and heat-
ed air in facilities such as offices,
shopping centres, schools, ...
Diffuser for ceiling or exposed duct
mounting. The diffuser is equipped
with fixed vanes in a square
frontsheet. A high induction is ob-
tained by the exceptional swirl dis-
charge, which makes them very
suitable for VAV application from
Size ØN A B M ØP 100 % down to 25 %.
A downwards inclined swirl is ob-
100 98 138 158 12 120 tained in the flush version WS200,
125 123 178 198 17 180 when fitted with the diffusion collar
160 158 198 248 17 190
WS220, a horizontal swirl is obtained.
200 198 248 248 17 230
250 248 298 298 17 280
315 313 398 398 27 350
400 398 594 598 52 570 Technical information
500 498 700 700 52 620
Characteristics:
Ø P = min. ceiling opening. • 2,4 < installation height < 4 m
All dimensions in mm. • diffuser with central screw fixing
that can be disconnected from
plenum or transition piece.
Fast selection diagram • diffuser without central screw, fix-
ed to plenum or transition piece.

Size
Construction:
(mm) 20 30 40 NR
0,5 0,9 1,4
315 • diffuser; steel, painted white (RAL
9010)
• optional insulated plenum; gal-
0,45 0,8 1,3
250 vanised steel sheet
• provided with mounting eyes (ø 7
0,4 0,7 1,2 mm), mounting straps available
200
upon request

0,35 0,6 1,1


160

LT = Throw (m)

0,3 0,55 0,9


125

50 60 80 100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000m3/h

Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone.


See following pages for a detailed selection.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 3 050


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Delivery possibilities • WS220T: Swirl diffuser with diffu-


sion collar and transition piece,
Example: top entry
• WS200: Flat swirl diffuser
Square steel swirl diffuser with fixed • WS230: Swirl diffuser with diffusion
• WS200S: Flat swirl diffuser and
vanes in a square frontsheet and diffu- collar and central screw fixing
plenum with side entry
sion collar. Complete with mounted
plenum with side entry and damper. • WS230T: Swirl diffuser with diffu-
• WS200T: Flat swirl diffuser with transi-
The diffuser is painted white (RAL 9010) sion collar, with central screw fix-
tion piece, top entry
ing and transition piece, top
Type: WS231S entry
• WS210: Flat swirl diffuser with central
size ... mm
screw fixing
• WS230S: Swirl diffuser with diffu-
• WS210T: Flat swirl diffuser with central sion collar, central screw fixing
Accessories screw fixing and transition piece, top and plenum with side entry
entry
GR003: mounting support for central • WS231S: Swirl diffuser with diffu-
screw fixing; only for WS210/WS230 • WS210S: Flat swirl diffuser with central sion collar, central screw fixing
screw fixing and plenum with side and damper in inlet spigot
entry

• WS211S: Flat swirl diffuser with central


screw fixing, plenum with side entry
and damper in inlet spigot

• WS220: Swirl diffuser with diffusion


collar

• WS220S: Swirl diffuser with diffusion


collar and plenum with side entry

Installation dimensions

WS210T
Size C øD E F G H øJ W K Q
100 172 78 195 140 250 235 102 200 120 135
125 192 98 217 160 280 255 127 275 126 155
160 205 123 230 185 305 280 162 325 131 160
200 223 158 248 220 340 315 202 375 131 165
K

250 253 198 278 260 390 365 252 450 136 165
315 264 248 299 310 440 405 317 500 144 185
400 236 313 351 375 530 470 402 600 177 240
500 278 398 404 460 615 555 502 800 - -

WS230T WS210S WS231S


Q

E 3 050 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Installation possibilities

Direct mounting Mounting with transition piece, top entry

Mounting with transition piece, top entry Mounting with plenum box with side entry

How to order
WR210 size 200 mm with non insulated plenum with side entry, without damper.

W R 2 1 0 S - 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0

size

- : non insulated plenum


G: insulated plenum (only with side entry)
- : diffuser only
S: plenum with side entry
T: transition piece, top entry
0: without damper
1: with damper in inlet spigot
0: flat
1: flat with central screw fixing
2: with diffusion collar
3: with diffusion collar and central screw fixing
R: circular swirl diffuser
S: square swirl diffuser

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 3 060


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

SWIRL DIFFUSER
WR200 • WS200

Selection diagram - supply

Type WR200/WS200 - with ceiling effect Valid for cooling up to ∆ ts = -12 K


- damper completely open Valid for heating up to ∆ ts = +15 K

vT
vk

vR

1,6
LT

3
(m)

3 400
500
600
800
1000

0,2
0,25
m3/h

1600
1400
1200

0,35
0,3
2000

0,4
0,5
Qv
10
9
8
7

5
Vk
m

NR

NR
/s

50

45

40
3
2 0,14
0,16
NR
1,2 300 0,12 4
250 35
1,6 2 200 0,08
0,1
NR
1
0,07 3
30
0,8 1,2 1,6 150
0,06 NR
0,05
2.5
25
NR
1
1,2 0,04
0,6
2
0,8
100 0,035 20
0,5 1 NR
0,03
0,4 0,6 0,8 80
1.5
0,025
0,5
0,3 0,6
60 0,02
0,4
0,5 0,018
50
0,016
0,2 0,3 0,4
40 0,014
0,16
0,3 0,012
0,2
30 0,010
0,12
0,16 0,2
0,1 0,08

VT 0,75 0,50 0,37 m/s


VR 0,25 0,17 0,12 m/s 125 160 200 250 315 400 500

Size
Correction factors: without ceiling effect: LT x 0,80
Noise level: plenum with side entry: NR + 2

Air flow rate measurement-


supply
Ak- values (m2)

Size 125 160 200 250 315 400 500

Ak 0,0046 0,0078 0,0126 0,0197 0,0307 0,0506 0,0712

Velometer jet 2220 A or 6070

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 3 070


INTERNATIONAL

Example

selection data:
qv

tS - Air flow rate qv = 0,045 m3/s


- Throw LT = 0,6 m at vT = 0,5 m/s

solution:
vt
tL - Size 200 mm
- Supply air velocity vk = 3,6 m/s
- Noise level NR 26
tR - Correction noise level for side inlet: NR 26 + 2 = NR 28
- Total pressure loss, diagram 2, with damper 100 %
LT open (= 0°): ∆ pt = 20 Pa

Pressure loss Temperature quotient

Diagram n°1 Diagram n°2

Valid for: Valid for:


- Swirl diffusers in all dimensions - All swirl diffusers with plenum
- Swirl diffusers with transition - Swirl diffusers with transition
piece diam. 125 mm and 160 piece diam. 200, 250, 315, 400
mm: pt x 1,3 mm: read at 90°
D
∆ ∆
°
°
90
45

12 16 20 25 31
5 0 0 0 5
+4
+2
NR
NR

E 3 070 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

VARIABLE SWIRL DIFFUSER


WR300

Installation dimensions

WR300H
h

3
Application
• Swirl diffuser for ceiling or exposed
duct mounting. Specially
designed for spaces where con-
siderable temperature changes
take place and with ceiling
heights of more than 4m, where high
WR300B3 comfort standards are required. It
can be used for commercial (con-
ference rooms, ...) or industrial instal-
lations (industrial halls, airports, the-
atres, bank buildings, ...).

• Heated, cooled or isothermal air can


be supplied by an adapted air pat-
h

tern. Cold air has a tendency to


‘drop’, making it advisable to spread
that air horizontally. Warm air howev-
er, can remain too close to the ceil-
ing, not reaching the occupied
zone.
The variable swirl diffuser WR300,
which can handle supply tempera-
ture differences of -10K up to +15K,
can solve those problems.

• Changing the vertical air pattern


into a horizontal one always guaran-
tees the desired air distribution for
cooling as well as heating. Because
of this, a diffuse movement of the air
is created in the occupied zone, with
low air velocity and a draught-free
ventilation.

• In the heating mode warm air is


passed through the slots in the outer
ring of the swirl diffuser projecting the
air down into the space. The centre
swirl section of the diffuser is not
active. When in the cooling mode
the outerring is closed and air passes
Size ØN ØA h through the swirl vanes resulting in a
horizontal air distribution pattern. The
250 247 363 355
outer ring is not active.
315 312 448 365
A constant pressure loss is always
400 397 600 400
guaranteed, in the highest positions
500 497 700 400 as well as in all the variable interme-
All dimensions in mm. diate positions.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 3 080


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information Specifications description Fixing


Characteristics: Example: With mounting straps attached to
the external diffuser collar (3 moun-
• 2 way air pattern adjustment: Motorised variable swirl diffuser with ting straps at 120°)
- manually fixed swirl vanes.
- motorised (power supply 24 AC/DC External diffuser collar and swirl sheet
operating signal 0-10V DC) in steel sheet. Adjustable core, result- Delivery possibilities
• By positioning the mechanism out- ing in either a horizontal or vertical air
• WR300: without control (mounting
side the diffuser, manual and motorised pattern, in accordance with the inter-
sheet is present)
control are entirely interchangeable nal thermal pressure.
without having to remove the swirl The diffuser is painted white (RAL 9010).
• WR300H: manual control by handle
diffuser.
• Circular entry Type: WR300B3
• WR300B3: motorised control Belimo
• 4m < mounting height < 12m size ... mm
LM24A-SR
Construction:

• Swirl sheet (galvanised steel sheet)


and external diffuser collar (steel
sheet) painted RAL 9010
• Inlet collar in galvanised steel sheet

How to order

WR300, size 400 mm, with motorised control Belimo LM24A-SR

W R 3 0 0 B 3 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0

Size

-- : without control
H- : manual control
B3: motorised control Belimo LM24A-SR

E 3 080 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

VARIABLE SWIRL DIFFUSER


WR300

Diagram n°1

Horizontal throw (LT) at ∆t (-10 K) SIZE 400 mm


v T ( m/s )

15

3
0,

0,

0,
10

4
1 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
9
8

9 8 7 6 5
7
6
5
LT ( m )
4
3,5
3
2,5
2
0,12 0,16 0,2 0,25 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 m3/s
3
qv
400 5 6 7 8 1000 12 14 16 2000 25 30 3500 m3/h

Diagram n°2

Vertical throw (LT) at ∆t (+…K) SIZE 400 mm

15
T+ 0
15
5

1
T+

T+

10
9
8
7
6
5
LT ( m ) 4
v T = 0,25 m/s 3,5
3
2,5
2

1,5

1
0,12 0,16 0,2 0,25 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,8 1 m3/s
qv

400 5 6 7 8 1000 12 14 16 2000 25 30 3500 m3/h

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 3 090


INTERNATIONAL

Diagram n°3

Horizontal throw (LT) at ∆t = -10K SIZE 500 mm

v T ( m/s )

15

4
0,

0,

0,

0,
10

9 8 7 6 5
1 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
9
8
7
6
5
LT ( m )
4
3,5
3
2,5
2
0,16 0,25 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1,4 m3/s
0,2 0,3 0,5 1,2
qv
500 6 7 8 1000 12 14 16 2000 25 30 40 5000 m3/h

Diagram n°4

Vertical throw (LT) at ∆ t = +...K SIZE 500 mm

15
T+ 0
15
1
5
T+
T+

10
9
8
7
6
LT ( m ) 5

v T = 0,25 m/s 4
3,5
3
2,5
2

1,5

1
0,16 0,25 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1,4 m3/s
0,2 0,3 0,5 1,2
qv
500 6 7 8 1000 12 14 16 2000 25 30 40 5000 m3/h

E 3 090 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Diagram n° 5

Pressure loss and noise level (=sound power level without room attenuation)

s.
SIZE 400 mm

s.
os

.
SIZE 500 mm

Po

os
Po
r. P

r. P
rt.

rt.
Ho

Ve

Ho
Ve
NR

NR

NR
NR
250 250
200 200

60
150

60
150

55

55
100
55

90 100
55

90

50
80
80

50
70
50

70
50

60

45
60
∆Pt 50
∆Pt

45
45

50
45

( Pa ) 40

40
35 ( Pa ) 40
40

40
35
40

30
30

35
25
35

35
25
35

20
20
15
15

10
0,12 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 m3/s 10
0,16 0,25 0,5 0,16 0,25 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1,4 m3/s
qv 0,2 0,3 0,5 1,2
qv
400 5 6 7 8 1000 12 14 16 2000 25 30 3500 m3/h
500 6 7 8 1000 12 14 16 2000 25 30 40 5000 m3/h

Diagram n° 6

Temperature quotient - cooling (-10 K) - horizontal pattern

40 500
0

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 3 091


INTERNATIONAL

Selection example

Horizontal throw Vertical throw

qv qv

tS tS

vt
tL
tR

LT

LT
tR

selection data: tL

Airflow rate qv = 1400 m3/h (= 0,4 m3/s)


Size 400 mm

solution:

diagram n° 1:

- qv = 1400 m3/h (= 0,4 m3/s)


- Horizontal throw LT = 4,5m at vT = 0,3 m/s

diagram n° 2:

- qv = 1400 m3/h (= 0,4 m3/s)


- Vertical throw LT = 4 m at heating ∆T + 15 K and vT = 0,25 m/s

diagram n° 5:

- qv = 1400 m3/h (= 0,4m3/s), vertical air pattern


- Pressure loss pt = 55 Pa
- Noise level NR = 47

diagram n° 6:

- Horizontal throw LT = 4,5 m (from diagram n° 1)


∆ tL
- Temperature quotient = 0,09 for nom. Ø 400 and with ∆T -10 K
∆ tS

E 3 091 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Diagram n° 7

Horizontal throw (LT) for ∆t = -10K v T ( m/s )

15

3
0,

0,
10

0,
Size 250 mm
9

4
8

1 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
7

9 8 7 6 5
6
5
LT ( m )
4
3,5
3
2,5
2 3

0,06 0,1 0,16 0,25 0,4 m3/s


m /s
0,08 0,12 0,2 0,3
qv
3
200 300 400 5 6 7 8 1000 1400 m3/h
m /h
12

Diagram n° 8

Vertical throw (LT) for ∆ t = +...K

15
Size 250 mm
10
15
5
T+

T+
T+

10
9
8
7
6
5
LT ( m ) 4
v T = 0,25 m/s 3,5
3
2,5
2

1,5

1
0,06 0,08 0,12 0,2 0,3 0,4 m3/s
m3
/s
0,1 0,16 0,25
qv
m3/h
3
200 300 400 5 6 7 8 1000 1400 m /h
12

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 3 092


INTERNATIONAL

Diagram n° 9

Horizontal throw (LT) for ∆t = -10K


v T ( m/s )

15

3
0,

0,

0,
Size 315 mm 10
9

4
1 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
8

9 8 7 6 5
7
6
5
LT ( m )
4
3,5
3
2,5
2
m3/s
0,1 0,16 0,25 0,4 0,6 m3/s
0,08 0,12 0,2 0,3 0,5
qv
300 400 5 6 7 8 1000 12 14 16 2000 mm3/h
3/h

Diagram n° 10

Vertical throw (LT) for ∆t = +...K

Size 315 mm
15
T+ 0
15
5

1
T+

T+

10
9
8
7
6
5
LT ( m ) 4
v T = 0,25 m/s 3,5
3
2,5
2

1,5

1
m3/s
3
0,06 0,08 0,12 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 m /s
0,1 0,16 0,25
qv
200 300 400 5 6 7 8 1000 14 m3/h
2000 m3/h

12 16

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Diagram n° 11

Pressure loss and noise level (= sound power level without room attenuation)

Size 250 mm Size 315 mm

rt.

r.
r.

Ho
Ho

rt.
Ve

Ve
NR
NR
NR
200

NR
60 200
150
150

60
60

60
55

55
100
100
55

90

55
50

80 90
80

50
70
50

70

50
45

60
60

45
50
45

50

45
40

Pt Pt

40
40
40
40

( Pa )

40
35

( Pa )
30

35
30
35

35
30

25
25
20 30
30

20
30
25

25

15
25

15
25

10 3 10
0,06 0,08 0,12 0,2 0,3 0,4 mm3/s
/s
m3/s
m3
/s
0,1 0,16 0,25 0,08 0,12 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5
0,1 0,16 0,25
qv qv
1400 mm3/h
3
200 300 400 5 6 7 8 1000 /h
300 400 5 6 7 8 1000 14 m3/h
1800 m
3
/h
12 16

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

FIXED SWIRL DIFFUSER


WS400

Installation dimensions

WS400
øW

A
Application

3
The fixed swirl diffuser type WS400 is
used for the supply of cooled or
heated air in facilities such as
offices, shopping centres, schools.
A Diffusers for ceiling or exposed duct
mounting.
WS400T A high induction is obtained by the
exceptional swirl discharge, this
quickly reduces the difference in
temperature and velocity of the
induced air, which makes this dif-
fuser extremely suitable for VAV ter-
minal boxes. This diffuser can also
be used for exhaust.

Technical information
Characteristics:

• Fixed stamp-formed blades


• fixed horizontal air pattern
WS400S • availablle with plenum box with
side or top entry, or with damper in
top or side entry
• Plenum with perforated steel sheet
• For modular ceiling mounting:
overall size 594 x 594 mm

Construction:

• steel, painted white (RAL 9010)


• optional insulated plenum; gal-
vanised steel sheet

Size A B C ØD E ØW
125 294 290 230 123 155 250
200 394 375 305 198 200 350
200 494 375 305 198 200 350
250 594 575 355 248 200 500
315 594 575 420 313 260 500

All dimensions in mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 3 100


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Fixing Delivery possibilities


Example: • provided with mounting eyes (ø 7 • WS400: square swirl diffuser with
mm), mounting straps available central screw fixing
Square steel diffuser with fixed blades. upon request
Complete with a plenum box with side • WS400S: swirl diffuser with plenum
entry and damper. The diffuser is paint- • modular ceiling mounting and side entry
ed white (RAL 9010), plenum box in
galvanised steel sheet. • WS401S: WS400S with damper in
side entry
Type: WS401S
size ... mm • WS400T: swirl diffuser with plenum
and top entry

Fast selection diagram • WS401T: WS400T with damper in


top entry

• S400SG/WS401SG/WS400TG/WS
20

25

30

35

40
Size
(mm) 401TG: insulated plenum
NR

NR

NR

NR

NR
1,2 1,8 2,1 2,5 2,9 • WS400P: swirl diffuser integrated
250 & 315
in a false ceiling plate
(see p. 2 501)

1,1 1,5 1,8 2,1 2,5


200
LT = Throw (m)

3
200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 1200 1400 m / h
700 900

Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone.


See following pages for a detailed selection.

How to order

WS400 size 315 mm with plenum with top entry and damper, non insulated.

W S 4 0 1 T - 0 3 1 5 0 5 9 4

Size Dimension A

- : non insulated plenum


G: insulated plenum

-: without plenum
S: plenum with side entry
T: plenum with top entry

0: without damper
1: with damper in inlet spigot of plenum

E 3 100 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

FIXED CIRCULAR SWIRL DIFFUSER


WR400

Installation dimensions

WR400 Size 200-448 mm

Ø 350

Application

3
The fixed swirl diffuser type WR400 is
used for the supply of cooled or
heated air in facilities such as
offices, shopping centres, schools.
Ø 448 Diffusers for ceiling or exposed duct
mounting.
A high induction is obtained by the
WR400 Size 315-600 mm
exceptional swirl discharge, this
Ø 500 quickly reduces the difference in
temperature and velocity of the
induced air, which makes this dif-
fuser extremely suitable for VAV ter-
minal boxes. This diffuser can also
be used for exhaust.

Technical information
Characteristics:

• Fixed stamp-formed blades


• Fixed horizontal air pattern
Ø 600
• available with plenum box with
WR400S side entry, or with damper in side
50
• plenum with perforated steel
W
sheet

Construction:

• steel, painted white (RAL 9010)


ØD

• optional insulated plenum; gal-


H

vanised steel sheet

ØJ
95

ØA

Size ØA W H ØD ØJ Nom. size

200 448 450 x 476 365 198 354 360

250 600 600 x 626 405 248 504 510

315 600 600 x 626 470 313 504 510

All dimensions in mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 3 101


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Fixing Delivery possibilities


Example: provided with mounting eyes (ø 7 • WR400: circular swirl diffuser with
mm), mounting straps available central screw fixing
Circular steel diffuser with fixed blades. upon request
Complete with a plenum box with side • WR400S: WR400 with plenum and
entry and damper. The diffuser is white side entry
(RAL 9010), plenum box in galvanised
steel sheet. • WR401S: WR400S with damper in
side entry
Type: WR401S
size ... mm • WR400SG/WR401SG: with insulat-
ed plenum

Fast selection diagram


20

25

30

35

40
NR

NR

NR

NR

NR
Size (mm)
1,2 1,8 2,1 2,5 2,9
250 & 315

1,1 1,5 1,8 2,1 2,5


200
Throw LT (m)

3
200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 1200 1400 m / h
700 900

Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone.


See following pages for a detailed selection.

How to order
WR401S size 315 mm with plenum with side entry and damper, non insulated

W R 4 0 1 S - 0 3 1 5 0 6 0 0

Size Dimension A

- : non insulated plenum


G: insulated plenum

- : without plenum
S: plenum with side entry

0: without damper
1: with damper in inlet spigot of plenum

E 3 101 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

SWIRL DIFFUSER
WS400 • WR400
Selection table - supply
Type WS400 • WR400 - with ceiling effect Valid for cooling up to ∆ ts = -12 K
- damper completely open Valid for heating up to ∆ ts = +15 K

3
m /s
q V
0,35 )
/s
(m
0,3 3
m /h
0,25 1200 vk
vk
vT
LT ( m ) 1000
0,2
900 5 0
2 3 4 0,18
800
5,
NR4
0,16
vR 700

3
0,14 5
2,5 0,12
600 4,
5 NR3
500
1,5 3 0,1 0
NR3
4
0,09
400
2 0,08 5
3,
5
NR2
2,5 0,07
1,2 300

0,06 250
1 1,5 2
0,055 5
2,
0
0,05
NR2
0,8 1,2 200
0,045
1,5
180

1 0,04
160
0,6 1,2 0,035
140
0,8
0,5 1 0,03
120

0,025
0,4 0,6 0,8
100

0,35 0,7
0,5 0,02
80
v T 0,75 0,50 0,37 m / s
v 0,25 0,17 0,12 m / s 125 - 294 200 - 394 250 - 594
200 - 494 315 - 594
200 - 448 315 - 600

Correction factors: without ceiling effect: LT x 0,80


Noise level: plenum with side entry: NR + 2

Air flow rate measurement-


supply
Ak- values (m2)

Dimensions 125 200 250/315

Ak 0,011 0,028 0,056

Velometer jet 2220 A or 6070

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 3 110


INTERNATIONAL

Example

- Air flow rate: qv = 0,18 m3/s


- Size 250 .. 594 mm
- Supply air velocity vk = 3,3 m/s
- Throw LT = 1,8 m at vT = 0,50 m/s
- Noise level NR 25
- Total pressure loss with damper 100 % open:
∆ pt = 23Pa

Pressure loss

with damper
D
p (Pa)
t
°
45°
90

100
90
80
70
60
50
+4
+2
NR

40
NR

35
30
25

20

15

10
2 2,5 3 3,5 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

v (m/s)
k

E 3 110 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

PERFORATED SWIRL DIFFUSER


WS360

Installation dimensions
WS360

dia. N

40
M
16

Application

WS360 WS360S
594 x 594
The grille type WS360 can be used
for the supply of cooled or heated
air in facilities such as offices, stores,
schools, ...
The diffuser is equipped with a swirl
diffuser with fixed vanes mounted
in a square perforated frontsheet.
A high induction is obtained by the
3
Size ØN M ØN ØD exceptional swirl effect, which
Size A B E
makes them extremely suitable for
125 123 17 125 123 299 160 98 205 VAV applications.
160 158 17 160 158 349 185 123 217 Ceiling mounting possible.
200 198 17 200 198 399 220 158 235
250 248 17 250 248 494 270 198 265
315 313 27 315 313 524 310 248 290 Technical information
400 398 52 400 398 624 375 313 347 Characteristics:
All dimensions in mm
• swirl diffuser with perforated steel
sheet, horizontal air pattern
• 2,4 m < mounting height < 4 m
WS360S • available with 6 diameters with
A
overall dimensions 594 x 594 mm
• direct fixing on a circular duct pos-
sible

Construction:
dia. D

• perforated steel sheet, painted


B

white (RAL 9010)


• swirl + diffusion collar out of steel
dia. N
sheet, painted black (RAL 9005)
• optional insulated plenum out of
E

galvanised steel sheet


50
100
16

594 x 594

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 3 120


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories Fixing


• provided with mounting eyes (ø 7
Example: DT003: Radial, opposed blade damper.
mm), mounting straps available
Operated through the diffusion core.
upon request
Square steel ceiling diffuser for air sup- Construction out of steel sheet, paint-
ply with circular top entry. The perfo- ed black (RAL 9005).
• lay-in on T-profiles ceiling
rated frontsheet is painted white (RAL
9010). The diffuser is painted black
(RAL 9005).
Delivery possibilities
Type: WS360
size ... mm • WS360: diffuser

• WS360S: diffuser with side entry


Fast selection diagram
• WS360SG: WS360S with insulated
plenum
30 40 50
NR NR NR
Size (mm) • WS361S: WS360S with damper in
400 1,2 1,4 1,7 the inlet collar

315 1,0 1,3 1,6


• WS361SG: WS361S with insulated
plenum

250 0,9 1,2 1,4

200 0,8 1,0 1,3

160 0,7 0,9 1,1

Throw LT (m)

0,6
125 0,7 0,9

80 100 150 200 300 400 600 800 1000 1400 3


500 700 900 1200 m /h
Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone.
See next page for a detailed selection.

How to order
plafondrooster 315 x 594 mm + geïsoleerd plenum met zijdelingse aansluiting en
damper
a) Diffuser

W S 3 6 0 - F 0 3 1 5 0 5 9 4

L H

-: standard RAL 9010


F: other RAL-color
b) Plenum

W P 2 0 1 S G 0 3 1 5 0 0 0 0

size

-: non insulated plenum


G: insulated plenum
- :diffuser
S :diffuser and plenum with side entry
0: without damper in inlet collar
1: with damper in inlet collar

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

PERFORATED SWIRL DIFFUSER


WS360

Selection diagram - supply

Type WS360 - with ceiling effect Valid for cooling up to ∆ ts = -12 K


- damper completely open Valid for heating p to ∆ ts = +15 K

VT
VK
3
m /s

3
qV
VR
0,4
0,35 / s)
(m
3
LT ( m ) 0,3 m /h
1,5 3
0,25 1400 5 5
vk
4,
0,2 1200
4 55
2 0,16
1000 3,
5
NR
0,14 800 50
NR
2,5 3
1,2 0,12 700
0,1 600
2,
5 45
0,09 500 NR
40
NR
1 1,5 0,08 400
2 2
0,07 35
NR
0,06
300
5 30
0,8 1,2 1,
NR
1,5 25
NR
0,05
0,045
1 200
0,04
1
0,6 1,2 0,035
150
0,8 0,03
0,5 1
0,025

100
0,02
0,4 0,6 0,8

0,5
v T 0,75 0,50 0,37 m / s
v R 0,25 0,17 0,12 m / s 125 160 200 250 315 400

Size
Correction factor: without ceiling effect: LT x 0,80
Noise correction: with side entry: NR + 2

Air flow measurement-


supply
Ak- values (m2)

Size 125 160 200 250 315 400

TESTO dia. 100


Ak 0,020 0,029 0,036 0,056 0,083 0,130

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 3 121


INTERNATIONAL

Example

- Air flow rate: qv = 0,07 m3/s


- Size 250 mm
- Exhaust ai velocity vk = 1,4 m/s
- Throw LT = 0,85 m at vT = 0,5 m/s
- Noise level NR 25
- Correction noise level for side inlet:
NR 25 + 2 = NR 27
- Total pressure loss, with damper 100 %
open: ∆ pt = 19 Pa

Pressure loss

with damper
p
t (Pa)
200

150

100
90
80
70
60
50

40
35
30
25

20

15

10
1 1,5 2 2,5 3 4 5

v (m/s)
k

E 3 121 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


4
INTERNATIONAL

ADJUSTABLE SLOT DIFFUSER


SE600

Installation dimensions

Construction with holding clips Construction without holding clips


(screws and holdings delivered with plenum)

D C

Application
SE614 SE614
SE604 SE604 The slot diffuser, type SE600 is used
for the supply of cooled and heat-
ed air in facilities such as offices,
47

47

shops, meeting rooms, ...

4
It is designed for ceiling or sidewall
18.5
B
18.5
B
mounting and is available with 1 to
A A 8 slots. Each slot is individually
adjustable and equipped with 2
deflector vanes of a special design
Number of slots to minimise the internal turbu-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 lences. An ideal air supply pattern
adjustable over 180° can be ob-
A (SE) 68,5 105 141,5 178 214,5 251 287,5 324 tained.
B 48 84 121 157 193 230 266 303 All lengths are available for an
C 32,5 69 105,5 142 178,5 215 251,5 288 ideal fit in every ceiling-system.
D 44 81 117 154 190 227 263 300

L = slot length SE: L1 = L + 50 All dimensions in mm


L2 , B = minimum ceiling opening E = 25 Technical information
Characteristics
Fast selection diagram
• SE600: available with up to 8 slots
• all lengths available (in steps of 1
Number mm): from 300 mm up to 2000
of slots
20 30 40 50 NR
mm in one piece; larger lengths
with intermediate pieces (length
3,5 4,5 6,5 9
4 = 1500 mm) and end pieces
• 25 mm frame
3 4 6 8 • non operational parts or dummy
3
diffusers; slots are blanked off by
black PVC strips (SE650)
• exhaust: without deflectors
2,5 3,5 5 7 • supply: horizontal or vertical air
2
supply pattern possible through
adjustable deflectors

Throw LT (m)

2 3 4 6
1

60 80 100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 m3/h.m

Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone.


See page 4 012 for a detailed selection

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 010


INTERNATIONAL

Adjustment possibilities: • available with plenum: Specifications description


- with or without damper in the inlet
- up to a length of 1600 mm Example:
supplied with one circular inlet
spigot, over 1600 mm: two circular Aluminium linear diffuser with 2 sup-
inlet spigots ply slots and adjustable deflectors.
Complete with fixed mounted
• corner sections: for types SE600 and Construction plenum, internal insulation, with cir-
SE650 of slot diffusers corner sections cular side inlet spigot and damper.
in one piece are available in the • natural tone anodised aluminium, Natural tone anodised diffuser,
dimensions as indicated. No plenum with black or white deflectors black aluminium deflectors.
available for corner sections.
Standard construction with corner of • galvanised steel sheet, optional insu- Type: SE612 + SP132 G
90°, fitting in a ceiling opening of 600 lation L = … mm
mm.
O/all dimension = 614 mm
Accessories
BOBSE: blanking off baffle; steel
How to order sheet painted black RAL 9005

SE600 with 2 slots and black aluminium deflectors, slot length 1000 mm SE mounting brackets for ceiling
application: direct mounting when
no plenum is provided.

Insertpat: for diffuser mounting on


different plenum lenghts.

(see Assembly drawing SP100)


S E 6 1 2 - - 1 0 0 0 - - - -

slot length (mm)


Fixing
- : slot diffuser in one piece with end caps on
both sides • concealed fixing
E: end pieces, with one end cap • either by direct and fixed mount-
M:intermediate piece, without end caps ing of the diffuser on the plenum
C: corner section 90° (600 x 600 mm) (mounting by Grada upon re-
number of slots quest)
• or with mounting brackets so the
0: exhaust, no deflectors
diffuser can be removed from the
1: supply, with black aluminium deflectors
plenum
2: supply, with white aluminium deflectors
• plenum provided with mounting
5: dummy diffuser
eyes (ø 7 mm), mounting straps
E: frame width 25 mm available upon request
8

Slot diffuser in a panel


5 fine line
S E 6 1 4 P F 1 2 0 0 1 3 5 0 L

slot length (mm) panel length * All panels have a width of 300 mm
F: painted in RAL-colors and a flange of 10 mm at all sides.

P:with panell, with rebord of 10 mm on all ** All panels have a width of 300 mm
sides* and a flange of 10 mm at the
Z: with panel, with fine line 5/8 ont het two longest side. The length of the
shortest sides** panel, is the total length, fine line
4: number of slots included

1: black deflectors Remarque: The length of the panel


2: white deflectors must be 55 mm (at the minimum)
longer than the nominal length of
the diffuser.

E 4 010 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

ADJUSTABLE SLOT DIFFUSER


SB600

Installation dimensions

1 L

Application
The slot diffuser, type SB600 is used
for the supply of cooled and heat-
48.5

ed air in facilities such as offices,


4

shops, meeting rooms, ...


It is designed for installation in the

4
18.5 ceiling or sidewall and is available
9.75
with 1 to 5 slots. Each slot is indivi-
A dually adjustable and equipped
with 2 specially designed deflector
vanes to minimise the internal tur-
bulences. An ideal air supply pat-
Number of slots tern adjustable over 180° can be
1 2 3 4 5 obtained.
All lengths are available for an
A 38 74,5 111 147,5 184 ideal fit in every ceilingsystem.
C 34,5 71 107,5 144 180,5

L = slot length
All dimensions in mm
Technical information
Characteristics

Fast selection diagram • available up to 5 slots


• all lengths available (in steps of 1
mm): from 300 mm up to 2000
mm in one piece
Number • non operational parts or dummy
of slots
20 30 40 50 NR diffusers; slots are blanked off by
3,5 4,5 6,5 9
4 black PVC strips (SB650)
• exhaust: without deflectors
3
3 4 6 8 • supply: horizontal or vertical air
supply pattern possible by ad-
justable deflectors
2,5 3,5 5 7
2

Throw LT (m)

2 3 4 6
1

60 80 100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 m3/h.m

Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone.


See page 4 012 for a detailed selection

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 010 bis


INTERNATIONAL

Construction Specifications description


• slot diffusers out of natural tone Example:
anodised aluminium, with deflectors
in black extruded aluminium Aluminium linear diffuser with 2 sup-
ply slots and adjustable deflectors.
Adjustment possibilities: • construction with deflectors in white Complete with fixed mounted
extruded aluminium, diffuser stan- plenum, insulated at the inside,
available with plenum: dard satin anodised with circular side inlet spigot and
- with or without damper in the inlet damper. Diffuser natural tone ano-
- up to a length of 1600 mm supplied • plenum out of galvanised steel dised, black aluminium deflectors.
with one circular inlet spigot, over sheet, optional insulation
1600 mm: two circular inlet spigots Type: SB612 + SP132 G
L = … mm

Accessories
BOBSE: blanking off baffle; made
out of steel sheet, painted black
(RAL 9005)

Fixing
• concealed fixing

• direct and fixed mounting of the


diffuser on the plenum (mounting
Grada upon request)

• provided with mounting eyes (ø 7


mm), mounting straps available
upon request

How to order
SB600 with 2 slots and black aluminium deflectors, slot length 1000 mm.

S B 6 1 2 - - 1 0 0 0 - - - -

slot length (mm)

-: slot diffuser in one piece with end caps on


both sides
E: end pieces, with one end cap
M:intermediate piece, without end caps

number of slots

0: exhaust, no deflectors
1: supply, with black aluminium deflectors
2: supply, with white aluminium deflectors
5: dummy diffuser

E 4 010 bis Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

PLENUM FOR SLOT DIFFUSER


SP100

Installation dimensions
SP100 • SP110
For mounting with holding clips (only for SE600)
L1 W 50

12
7

40
D

H
B
5
L2

Number of slots

ØD

W
B
H

SP100 • SP110:
1
123
125
200
44
2

158
158
250
81

L1 = L + 11
3

198
188
300
117
4

198
238
350
154
5

248
263
400
190

L2 = L + 35
6

248
263
400
227
7

313
280
450
263
8

313
280
450
300

L = slot length
4
SP100L&R • SP110L&R: L1 = L +6 L2 = L + 18
SP100M • SP110M: L1 = L - 22 L2 = L

SP120 • SP130
For direct and fixed mounting (for SE600 and SB600)

L W 50
12

7
40

D
H
B

L-20

Number of slots
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ØD 123 158 198 198 248 248 313 313


B 125 158 188 238 263 263 280 280
H 170 220 270 320 370 370 420 420
W 34 71 107 144 180 217 253 290

* NOTE: L (Left) and R (Right) looking at plenum front


L = slot length
All dimensions in mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 011


INTERNATIONAL

Assembly drawing

INSERT PAT

BOBS

SE-
SE MOUNTING BRACKETS

INSERT PAT

How to order
SP100 for a slot diffuser with 2 slots, insulated, for mounting with holding clips, no damper,
L = 1000 mm; delivered separately.

S P 1 0 2 - G 0 1 6 0 1 0 0 0
spigot diameter slot length (mm)
- : non insulated plenum
G: internally insulated plenum
H: plenum insulated at the top and on the
opposite side of the inlet

- : one piece
R: end piece right*
L: end piece left*
M: intermediate piece

number of slots

0: for mounting with screws**, no damper in the inlet spigot


1: for mounting with screws**, with damper in the inlet spigot
2: for direct fixed mounting, no damper in the inlet spigot
3: for direct fixed mounting, with damper in the inlet spigot
4: for mounting with mounting brackets, without damper and with mounting straps***
5: for mounting with mounting brackets, with damper and with mounting straps***
6: for direct fixed mounting, without damper and with mounting straps***
7: for direct fixed mounting, with damper and with mounting straps***

* L (Left) and R (Right) looking at plenum front


** mounting of grill onto the plenum
*** mounting of the plenum into the ceiling

E 4 011 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

ADJUSTABLE SLOT DIFFUSER


S-600

Selection diagram - supply

Type S-600 - with ceiling effect Valid for cooling up to ∆ ts = –12 K


- damper completely open Valid for heating up to ∆ ts = +20 K

50
NR Ceiling one-way exhaust pattern
45
NR
40
NR
35
NR
30
NR

NR

NR
25

20
Ceiling two-way exhaust pattern 4

1 2 3 4

Air flow rate measurement - supply


Ak- values (m2/m)
Number of slots
1 2 3 4
Ak 0,0071 0,0142 0,0213 0,0285

Velometer jet 2220 A or 6070

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 012


INTERNATIONAL

ADJUSTABLE SLOT DIFFUSER


Selection diagram - exhaust S-600

Exhaust air capacity is


based on slot diffuser
without deflectors.
When a deflector is
used, air flow rate will
be reduced by 65 %
at listed ∆ pt and NR-
values.

Air flow rate measurement-


exhaust
Ak- values (m2/m)
Number of slots
1 2 3 4
Ak 0,012 0,024 0,037 0,049

Velometer jet 2220 A or 6070

E 4 012 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Pressure loss - supply

0
25

50

10
8
+1

+8
NR

NR

Induction and temperature quotient with ceiling effect


Inductie Temperatuursverhouding
1

4
4

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 013


INTERNATIONAL

Example

SUPPLY
Selection data:
- Air flow rate qv = 0,04 m3/s.m
- Throw LT = 2,8m at vT = 0,4 m/s

Solution:
- Number of slots: 2
- Supply air velocity vk = 2,7 m/s
- Noise level NR 23
- Total pressure loss with damper
100 % open: ∆ pt = 6,2 Pa

EXHAUST
Selection data:
- Air flow rate qv = 0,15 m3/s.m

Solution:
- Number of slots: 3; without de-
flectors
- Supply air velocity vk = 4,2 m/s
- Noise level NR 32
- Total pressure loss with damper
100 % open: ∆ pt = 8 Pa

Correction factors

For linear slot diffusers

Slot length Throw Noise rating


(m) correction correction (NR)
Case 1
1 - 1,5 LT x 1,00 +0 NR
1,5 - 2 LT x 1,05 +2 NR
2 - 6,5 LT x 1,1 +5 NR

Correction factors on vertical throw Case 2

Cooling Ventilation Heating

∆ t = -10 K ∆t = 0 K ∆ t = + 15 K
Case 1 LT x 1,0 LT x 0,9 LT x 0,6
Case 2 LT x 0,7 LT x 0,6 LT x 0,4

E 4 013 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

ADJUSTABLE SLOT DIFFUSER


SE800

Installation dimensions
SE800

Construction with holding clips Construction without hanger brackets


(screws and holdings delivered with plenum)
D C

SE804
SE 814
SE804
SE 814
Application
The slot diffuser, type SE800 is used
47

47

for the supply of cooled and heat-


ed air in facilities such as offices,
E 25 E 25
B B shops, meeting rooms, ...

4
A A
It is designed for ceiling or sidewall
mounting and is available with 1 to
Number of slots 8 slots. Each slot is individually
adjustable and equipped with 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 specially desinged deflector vanes
to minimise the internal turbu-
A (SE) 75 118 161 204 247 290 333 376
B 54 97 140 183 226 269 312 355 lences. An ideal air supply pattern
C 41 82 125 168 211 254 297 340 adjustable over 180° can be ob-
D 64 94 137 180 223 266 309 352 tained.
All lengths are available for an
L = slot length SE: L1 = L + 50
ideal fit in every ceiling-system.
L2 , B = minimum ceiling opening E = 25
All dimensions in mm
Technical information
Fast selection diagram
Characteristics

• available up to 8 slots
Number
of slots • all lengths available (in steps of 1
mm): from 300 mm up to 2000 mm
20 30 40 50 NR
4 12,5
in one piece; larger lengths with
4
intermediate pieces (length = 1500
mm) and end pieces
3,5 5,5 7,5 11
3 • 25 mm frame
• none operational parts or dummy
diffusers; slots are blanked off by
3,5 4,5 9,5 black PVC strips (S-850)
2
• exhaust: without deflectors
• supply: horizontal or vertical air
supply pattern possible by adjust-
able deflectors
2,5 4 5,5 8 Throw LT (m)
1

3
60 80 100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 m /h

Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone.


See page 4 020 for a detailed selection

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 014


INTERNATIONAL

Adjustment possibilities: • available with plenum: Fixing


- with or without damper in the inlet
- up to a length of 1600 mm sup- • concealed fixing
plied with one circular inlet spigot, • either by a direct and fixed
over 1600 mm: two circular inlet mounting of the diffuser on the
spigots plenum (mounting by Grada
upon request)
• corner sections: for types S-800 and Construction: • or by mounting brackets so that
S-850 of slot diffusers corner sections the diffuser can be removed
in one piece are available in the • natural tone anodised aluminium, from the plenum
dimensions as indicated. No plenum with deflectors in black extruded • provided with mounting eyes (ø 7
available for corner sections. aluminium mm), mounting straps available
Standard construction with corner of • construction with deflectors in white upon request
90°, fitting in a ceiling opening of 600 extruded aluminium, diffuser stan-
mm. dard satin anodised
O/all dimension = 614 mm • galvanised steel sheet plenum, Specifications description
optional insulation
Example:

Aluminium linear diffuser with 2 sup-


ply slots and adjustable deflectors.
How to order Complete with fixed mounted
plenum, insulated at the inside,
with circular side inlet spigot and
SE800 with 2 slots and black aluminium deflectors, slot length 1000 mm.
damper. Diffuser natural tone ano-
dised, black aluminium deflectors.

Type: SE812 + SP832 G


L = … mm

S E 8 1 2 - - 1 0 0 0 - - - -
Accessories
slot length (mm)
BOBSE: blanking off baffle; made
-: slot diffuser in one piece with end caps on out of steel sheet, painted black
both sides RAL 9005
E: end pieces, with one end cap
M: intermediate piece, without end caps SE mounting brackets for ceiling
C: corner section 90° (600 x 600 mm) application: direct mounting when
number of slots no plenum is provided.

0: exhaust, no deflectors Insertpat: for diffuser mounting on


1: supply, with black aluminium deflectors different plenum lenghts.
2: supply, with white aluminium deflectors
5: dummy diffuser (see Assembly drawing SP800)

E: frame width 25 mm
8

5 fine line
L
Slot diffuser in a panel

S E 8 1 4 P F 1 2 0 0 1 3 5 0 * All panels have a width of 300 mm


and a flange of 10 mm at all sides.
slot length (mm) panel length
** All panels have a width of 300 mm
F: painted in RAL-colors and a flange of 10 mm at the
P:with panell, with rebord of 10 mm on all longest side. The length of the
sides* panel, is the total length, fine line
Z: with panel, with fine line 5/8 ont het two included
shortest sides**
Remarque: The length of the panel
4: number of slots
must be 55 mm (at the minimum)
longer than the nominal length of
1: black deflectors the diffuser.
2: white deflectors

E 4 014 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

ADJUSTABLE SLOT DIFFUSER


SB800

Installation dimensions

1 L

Application
48.5
4

The slot diffuser, type SB800 is used


for the supply of cooled and heat-
ed air in facilities such as offices,
25 9.75

4
shops, meeting rooms, ...
A It is designed for ceiling or sidewall
mounting and is available with 1 to
5 slots. Each slot is individually
adjustable and equipped with 2
Number of slots specially designed deflector vanes
1 2 3 4 5 to minimise the internal turbu-
lences. An ideal air supply pattern
A 44,5 87,5 130,5 173,5 216,5 adjustable over 180° can be ob-
C 41 84 127 170 213
stained.
L = slot length All lengths are available for an
All dimensions in mm ideal fit in every ceilingsystem.

Fast selection diagram


Technical information
Characteristics
Number
of slots
• available up to 5 slots
20 30 40 50 NR • all lengths available (in steps of 1
4 12,5
4 mm): from 300 mm up to 2000
mm in one piece
3
3,5 5,5 7,5 11 • none operational parts or
dummy diffusers; slots are
blanked off by black PVC strips
3,5 4,5 9,5 (SB850)
2
• exhaust: without deflectors
• supply: horizontal or vertical air
supply pattern possible by adjust-
able deflectors
Throw LT (m)
2,5 4 5,5 8
1

3
60 80 100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 m /h

Throw factor is based on a vR of 0,17 m/s in the occupied zone.


See page 4 020 for a detailed selection

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 014 bis


INTERNATIONAL

Adjustment possibilities: Construction Specifications description


• slnatural tone anodised aluminium, Example:
with deflectors in black extruded
aluminium Aluminium linear diffuser with 2 sup-
• construction with deflectors in white ply slots and adjustable deflectors.
extruded aluminium, diffuser stan- Complete with fixed mounted
dard satin anodised plenum, insulated at the inside,
available with plenum: • plenum out of galvanised steel with circular side inlet spigot and
- with or without damper in the inlet sheet, optional insulation damper. Diffuser natural tone ano-
- up to a length of 1600 mm supplied dised, black aluminium deflectors.
with one circular inlet spigot, over
1600 mm: two circular inlet spigots
Fixing Type: SB812 + SP832 G
• concealed fixing L = … mm
• direct and fixed mounting of the
diffuser on the plenum (mountin Accessories
Grada upon request)
• provided with mounting eyes BOBSE: blanking off baffle; made
(ø 7 mm), mounting straps avail- out of steel sheet, painted black
able upon request (RAL 9005)
• only possible with plenum SP
820/830

How to order

SB800 with 2 slots and black aluminium deflectors, slot length 1000 mm

S B 8 1 2 - - 1 0 0 0 - - - -

slot length (mm)

-: slot diffuser in one piece with end caps on


both sides
E: end pieces, with one end cap
M: intermediate piece, without end caps

number of slots

0: exhaust, no deflectors
1: supply, with black aluminium deflectors
2: supply, with white aluminium deflectors
5: dummy diffuser

E 4 014 bis Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

PLENUM FOR SLOT DIFFUSER


SP800
Installation dimensions
SP800 • SP810
For mounting with holding clips (only for SE800)
W
L1 50

12
7 Ø

40
D
Ø

H
B
5
L2

Number of slots

4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ØD 125 158 198 198 248 248 313 313


B 125 158 188 238 263 263 280 280
H 200 250 300 350 400 400 450 450
W 51 94 137 180 223 266 309 352

SP800 • SP810: L1 = L + 11 L2 = L + 35
SP00L&R • SP810L&R: L1 = L + 6 L2 = L + 18
SP800M • SP810M: L1 = L - 22 L2 = L

SP820 • SP830
For direct and fixed mounting (for SE800 and SB800)

L1
W 50
12

7
Ø
40

D
Ø
H
B

5
L2

Number of slots
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ØD 125 158 198 198 248 248 313 313


B 125 158 188 238 263 263 280 280
H 200 250 300 350 400 400 450 450
W 41 84 127 170 213 256 299 342

* NOTE: L (Left) and R (Right) looking at plenum front


L = slot length
All dimensions in mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 015


INTERNATIONAL

Assembly drawing

INSERT PAT

BOBS

SE-
SE MOUNTING BRACKETS

INSERT PAT

How to order
SP800 for a slot diffuser with 2 slots, insulated, for mounting with holding clips, no
damper, L = 1000 mm; delivered separately.

S P 8 0 2 - G 0 1 6 0 1 0 0 0
spigot diameter slot length (mm)
-: non insulated plenum
G: internally insulated plenum
H: plenum insulated at the top and on the opposite side
of the inlet

-: one piece
R: end piece right*
L: end piece left*
M: intermediate piece

number of slots

0: for mounting with screws**, no damper in the inlet spigot


1: for mounting with screws**, with damper in the inlet spigot
2: for direct fixed mounting, no damper in the inlet spigot
3: for direct fixed mounting, with damper in the inlet spigot
4: for mounting with mounting brackets, without damper and with mounting straps***
5: for mounting with mounting brackets, with damper and with mounting straps***
6: for direct fixed mounting, without damper and with mounting straps***
7: for direct fixed mounting, with damper and with mounting straps***

* L (Left) and R (Right) looking at plenum front


** mounting of grill onto the plenum
*** mounting of the plenum into the ceiling

E 4 015 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

ADJUSTABLE SLOT DIFFUSER


S-800

Selection diagram - supply

Type S-800 - with ceiling effect Valid for cooling up to ∆ ts = –12 K


- damper completey open Valid for heating up to ∆ ts = +20 K
)
qV /s
m 3/h.m 3
m /s.m (m
LT ( m ) 1100 vk
1000 0,36 10
900 Ceiling one-way exhaust pattern
16 800 0,3 9 5 0
10
14
20
600
700
0,25 8 NR
18 550 0,2 45
8 12 16
450
500
0,18 7 NR
0,16
7 14 400
6 40
10 350
0,12
0,14
5 NR
300 5,
6 9 12 0,1 35
8 0,09 5 NR
250 5
5 10 4, 30
7 9
0,08
4 NR
0,07 25

4
200 5
4 6 8 3, NR
180 0,06
3,5 7 20
NR
5 160 3 Ceiling two-way exhaust pattern
3 6 0,05
5
140 2,
4
2,5 5 120 0,04
3,5 2
2 3 4 100
0,03
3,5
2,5 80
1,5 3
2
2,5 60 0,02

1 1,5 2
v T 0,60
v R 0,25
0,40
0,17
0,30 m / s
0,12 m / s
1 2 3 4

Air flow rate measurement - supply


Ak- values (m2/m)
Number of slots
1 2 3 4
Ak 0,009 0,018 0,027 0,036

Velometer jet 2220 A or 6070

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 016


INTERNATIONAL

Selection diagram - exhaust

QV
100 200 300 400 500 600 1000 2000 3000 m /h
3 D

0%
3
0,03 0,04 0,06 0,08 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,6 0,8 m /s

10
14

%
13

50
12
11

%
10

25
9
vk 8
NR 50

+8
(m/s) 7

8
+1
NR
NR 45

NR
6
NR 40
5
NR 35

4 NR 30

Exhaust air capacity is based on NR 25


slot diffuser without deflectors.
When a deflector is used, air flow 3
NR 20
rate will be reduced by 65 % at list- 5 8 15 30 60 100
6 10 20 40 80
ed ∆ pt and NR-values. 1 2 3 4

p (Pa)
t

Air flow rate measurement - exhaust Ak- values (m2/m)


Number of slots
1 2 3 4
Ak 0,016 0,032 0,049 0,065

Velometer jet 2220 A or 6070

E 4 016 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Pressure loss - supply


D

0
25

50

10
8
+1

+8
NR

NR

Induction and temperature quotient with ceiling effect


Induction Temperature quotient
1

4
4

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 017


INTERNATIONAL

Example
SUPPLY
Selection data:
- Air flow rate qv = 0,09 m3/s.m
- Throw LT = 5,7m at vT = 0,4 m/s

Solution:
- Number of slots: 2
- Supply air velocity vk = 5 m/s
- Noise level NR 34
- Total pressure loss with damper
100 % open: ∆ pt = 20 Pa

EXHAUST
Selection data:
- Air flow rate qv = 0,2 m3/s.m
- Number of slots: 3; without de-
flectors

Solution:
- Supply air velocity vk = 4,1 m/s
- Noise level NR 29
- Total pressure loss with damper
100 % open: ∆ pt = 8 Pa

Correction factors

For linear slot diffusers

Slot length Throw Noise rating


(m) correction correction (NR)
Case 1
1 - 1,5 LT x 1,00 +0 NR
1,5 - 2 LT x 1,05 +2 NR
2 - 6,5 LT x 1,1 +5 NR

Correction factors on vertical throw Case 2

Cooling Ventilation Heating

∆ t = -10 K ∆t = 0 K ∆ t = + 15 K
Case 1 LT x 1 LT x 0,9 LT x 0,6
Case 2 LT x 0,7 LT x 0,6 LT x 0,4

E 4 017 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

DRUM SLOT DIFFUSER


RT151
Installation dimensions
RT151 + RP101
70 50

ø78

174
Application
The RT151 drum slot diffuser is suit-
able for the supply and exhaust of
cooled and warmed air in offices,
80.5

shops, meeting rooms, etc. The dif-

4
fuser is designed for ceiling mount-
50

ing and is available with 1 slot. The


30

slot is fitted with air direction ele-


ments which can be individually
adjusted. These specially devel-
8 oped air direction elements
(drums) ensure an ideal and stable
15 air diffusion pattern as well as a low
noise level. There is a high level of
induction and air stream penetra-
All dimensions in mm tion in the room without any inter-
nal turbulence.
All lengths are available for an
ideal fit in any ceiling.

Technical Information
Characteristics:

• 15 mm wide front diffuser with 1


air slot
• all lengths available (in 1 mm
steps): from 300 mm to a length
of 2000 mm in 1 piece, larger
lengths in centre-pieces (length =
1500 mm) and end-pieces
• non-working parts or dummy dif-
fusers with a blanked-off back
available (RT111)
• exhaust: without air nozzles
• supply: one-sided horizontal and
alternating exhaust pattern possi-
ble with the adjustable air nozzles
which can be set either in the
factory or on site simply by turn-
ing
- alternating swirl: alternate at
every air nozzle

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 022


INTERNATIONAL

• length of air nozzle = 150 mm


RT151
• 2.6 m < installation height < 4 m
L = Slot length (mm)
• available with plenum
- with or without volume control
valve in the inlet, adjustable at the
front diffuser

15
- up to a length of 1600 mm fitted
with one round inlet, over 1600
1 L 1 mm two round inlets
- optional internal insulation
L1=L+2
Construction:

• extruded aluminium, natural tone


L1 = ceiling opening anodised or painted in a RAL colour
• fitted with black or white ABS plastic
air nozzles
• galvanised steel sheet plenum,
Adjustment possiblilities RT151
optional insulation

Specifications description
Example:

Aluminium line diffuser with 1 outlet slot


with adjustable air nozzles. Suitable for
mounting between ceiling strips.
Delivered complete with fixed insulat-
ed plenum with round side connection
and volume control valve. Diffuser
painted black (RAL 9005) with black
How to order plastic air nozzles.
The plenum is made from galvanised
RT151 with 1 slot, painted in a RAL-colour, slot length =1500 mm steel sheet.

Type: RT151 F (RAL9005) + RP111G


R T 1 5 1 - F 1 5 0 0 - - - - L = ... mm

Fixing
slot length (mm) • diffuser attached directly to the
plenum (monting by Grada upon
request)
• provided with mounting eyes (ø 7
- : anodised aluminium mm), mounting straps available
F: painted in a RAL-colour upon request

- : slot diffuser in one piece with end


caps on both sides
E: end pieces, with one end cap
M: intermediate piece, without end caps

1: one slot

11: dummy diffuser


15: ceiling opening 15 mm

T: supply (black air direction elements)


W: supply (white air direction elements)
A: exhaust (without air direction elements)

E 4 022 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Installation dimensions
RT151 + RP101
L = slot length (mm)

L-3

8
ø7

1 1
L
L1=L+2

L1 = ceiling opening

How to order
RP101 with 1 slot, slot length = 1500 mm, internally insulated

R P 1 0 1 - G 0 0 8 0 1 5 0 0
spigot diameter slot length (mm)
-: non insulated plenum
G: internally insulated plenum
-: one piece
L: end piece left
R: end piece right
M: intermediate piece
1: one slot

0: without damper in the inlet spigot


1: with damper in the inlet spigot

RP1: plenum

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 023


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

DRUM SLOT DIFFUSER


RT151

Selection diagram
Type RT151 - with ceiling effect Valid for cooling up to ∆ ts = –10 K
- damper completely open Valid for heating up to ∆ ts = +20 K

)
m3 / h qV /s
120 (m
100
LT ( m )
3
m /s vk
90 45
10
Ceiling one-way exhaust
80 0,034 NR
2 3 4 70 0,030 pattern
9
60 0,025 40
3,5 8 NR
2,5 50 0,020
1,5 3
0,018 35
0,016 7 NR
2
2,5
40
0,014
6 30
1,2 NR

4
35
0,012 5 25
1 1,5 2 30 NR
0,010 20
0,8 1,2 25 0,009
4 NR
1,5
0,008
1 20 3
0,007
0,6 1,2 18
0,8 5
16 0,006 2,
0,5 1
0,005 2
0,4 0,6 0,8
v T 0,60 0,40 0,30 m / s 0,004
v R 0,25 0,17 0,12 m / s

600 1000
1 900 1200

Ak- values (m2/m.slot)

L (mm) 600 900 1000 1200


Ak 0,0017 0,0025 0,0028 0,0033

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 024


INTERNATIONAL

Pressure loss - supply


With damper completely open
Alternating exhaust pattern

%
00
Alternating swirle Correction factor on selection

D1
diagram: LT x 0,6

60
50

40
pt
( Pa ) 30
25

20

150
15

10
9
8
7
6
5
4
2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

vk ( m/s )

Correction factors
For linear slot diffusers

Slot length Throw Noise rating


(m) correction correction (NR)

1 - 1,5 LT x 1,00 +0 NR
1,5 - 2 LT x 1,05 +2 NR
2 - 6,5 LT x 1,1 +5 NR

E 4 024 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

DRUM SLOT DIFFUSER


RT350

Installation dimensions
RT351 + RP301
98 50

ø123
Application
The RT350 drum slot diffuser is suit-

214
able for the supply and exhaust of
cooled and warmed air in offices,
shops, meeting rooms, etc. The dif-
fuser is designed for ceiling mount-
ing and is available with 1 or 2 slots.
Each slot is fitted with air direction
elements which can be individual-
75.5

4
ly adjusted. These specially devel-
60

37.5

oped air direction elements


(drums) ensure an ideal and stable
air diffusion pattern as well as a low
13.5 noise level. There is a high level of
induction and air stream penetra-
37
tion in the room without any inter-
50 nal turbulence. As a result, the
drum slot diffuser is suitable for
HVAC applications. All lengths are
available for an ideal fit in any ceil-
RT352 + RP302
123 50 ing.

Technical information
Characteristics:

• 35 mm wide front diffuser with 1 or 2


air slots, available with standard pro-
file (total width 50 mm) or with nar-
row profile (total width 35 mm)
ø158

• all lengths available (in 1 mm steps):


from 300 mm up to 2000 mm in 1
piece, larger lengths in centre-
249

pieces (length = 1500 mm) and end-


pieces which are joined together
using connecting pipes
• non-working parts or dummy dif-
fusers with blanked off back: without
air nozzles
• supply: one-sided horizontal, two-
sided horizontal and alternating
75.5

exhaust pattern possible with the


60

adjustable air nozzles which can be


37.5

set either in the factory or on site sim-


ply by turning

64
77

All dimensions in mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 025


INTERNATIONAL

RT351 Adjustment possiblities


L = slot length (mm), L2 and B = ceiling opening
L2=L + 13

B = 35
13 L

L1=L + 26

RT352
L = slot length (mm), L2 and B = ceiling opening
L2=L + 13
- alternating horizontally:
every 2 air nozzles
- alternating swirl:

B = 62
alternates at every air nozzle
• length of air nozzle = 150 mm
• 2.6 m < installation height < 4 m
13 L
• available with plenum:
L1=L + 26 - with or without volume control valve
in the inlet, adjustable at the front
diffuser
- up to a length of 1600 mm fitted
How to order with one round inlet, over 1600 mm
two round inlets
RT351 with one slot, painted in a RAL-colour, slot length =1500 mm - optional internal insulation

R T 3 5 1 - F 1 5 0 0 - - - - Construction:
• extruded aluminium, natural tone
slot length (mm) anodised or painted in a RAL colour
• fitted with black or white ABS plastic
-: anodised aluminium air nozzles
F: painted in a RAL-colour
• galvanised steel sheet plenum, op-
- slot diffuser in one piece with end caps on both tional insulation
sides
E: end pieces, with one end cap
M: intermediate piece, without end caps Specifictations description
351: ceiling opening 35 mm, total width 50 mm, 1 slot Example:
352: ceiling opening 62 mm, total width 77 mm, 2 slots
361: ceiling opening 35 mm, total width 35 mm, end Aluminium line diffuser with 1 outlet slot
cap X, 1 slot with adjustable air nozzles. Suitable for
371: ceiling opening 35 mm, total width 35 mm, end ceiling mounting. Delivered complete
cap Z, 1 slot with fixed plenum with round side con-
451: ceiling opening 35 mm, total width 50 mm, 1 slot, nection and volume control valve.
with concealed fixing
Diffuser natural tone anodised with
452: ceiling opening 62 mm, total width 77 mm, 2
black plastic air nozzles.
slots, with concealed fixing
The plenum is made from galvanised
311: dummy diffuser (for R-351), with brackets
steel sheet.
312: dummy diffuser (for R-352), with brackets
321: dummy diffuser (for R-361), with brackets
Type: RT351 + RP311
331: dummy diffuser (for R-371), with brackets
L = ... mm
411: dummy diffuser (for R-451), with concealed
screw fixing
412: dummy diffuser (for R-452), with concealed Fixing
screw fixing
• either by a diffuser attached direct-
T: supply (black air direction elements) ly to the plenum, either by con-
W:supply (white air direction elements) cealed fixing so that the diffuser
A: exhaust (without air direction elements) can be removed from the plenum
(mounting by Grada upon request)
• provided with mounting eyes (ø 7
mm), mounting straps available
upon request

E 4 025 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

DRUM SLOT DIFFUSER


RT361/371

Installation dimensions
RT361/RT371 + RP301 98 50

ø123

214
75.5
60

37.5

35

RT361/RT371
L = slot length (mm)

4
35

1 L

RT361 - end cap X


40

35 1 L

RT371 - end cap Z


16
11
5
45

34

35 1 L

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 026


INTERNATIONAL

Installation dimensions
RT351 + RP301
L = slot length (mm)
L-2

23
ø1

13 L
L1=L+26

RT361 + RP301 Connection linear grilles


L = slot length (mm)
L-2

23
ø1

1 L 1
L1=L+2

How to order
RP301, insulated plenum, slot length = 1500 mm

R P 3 0 1 - G 0 1 2 5 1 5 0 0
spigot diameter slot length (mm)
-: non insulated plenum
G: internally insulated plenum
- : one piece
L: end piece left
R: end piece right
M:intermediate piece
1: one slot
2: two slots
0: without damper in the inlet spigot
1: with damper in the inlet spigot

RP3: plenum
RP4: plenum (with concealed fixing)

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Installation dimensions
RT451 + RP401

98 50

ø123
214

35

75.5
60
52

37.5

50

Linear execution:
RT451 + RP401
L = slot length (mm) end pieces + 15 mm
intermediate pieces = nominal dimension
Nom. L + 34

23
ø1
214
137

Nom. L + 8

Nom. L
Nom. L + 26

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 026 bis


INTERNATIONAL

Installation dimensions
RT452 + RP402
123 50

ø158
249

62
75.5
60

Linear execution:
52

37.5

end pieces + 15 mm
intermediate pieces = nominal dimension
77

RT452 + RP402
L = slot length (mm)

Nom. L + 34
8
15
ø
249
154.5

Nom. L + 8

Nom. L
Nom. L + 26

E 4 026 bis Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

DRUM SLOT DIFFUSER


RT350

Selection diagram - supply


Type RT350 - with ceiling effect Valid for cooling up to ∆ ts = –10 K
- damper completely open Valid for heating up to ∆ ts = +20 K
RT450

3 qV
m /h )
500
/s
(m
3
400 m /s
350
300 0,14 10 vk
0,12
LT ( m ) 250 0,10
9 50
200 0,09 8 NR
4 6 8 0,08 45
150
0,07
7
NR
3,5 7 0,06 40
5
0,05 6 NR Ceiling one-way exhaust
3 6 35 pattern
100 0,04 NR
4 0,035 5 30
2,5 5 90 NR
3,5
80 0,03 25

4
4 NR
2 3 4 70 20
0,025
NR
3,5
2,5 60 3
1,5 3 0,02
50 0,018 5
2 2,
2,5 0,016
40 2
0,014
1 1,5 2
0,012
v T 0,60 0,40 0,30 m / s
v R 0,25 0,17 0,12 m / s
Ceiling two-way exhaust
pattern

1 600 1000
900 1200

2 600 1000
900 1200

Ak- values (m2/m.slot)

L (mm) 600 900 1000 1200


Ak 0,0034 0,0051 0,0057 0,0068

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 027


INTERNATIONAL

Pressure loss - supply


With damper completely open Alternating exhaust pattern

%
00
D1
Alternating swirl
60
50

40
pt
30

150
( Pa )
25
Correction factor on selection
20 diagram: LT x 0,6

15

Alternating horizontal
10
9
8
7
6
5

300
Correction factor on selection
4 diagram: LT x 0,7
2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

vk ( m/s )

Correction factors
For linear slot diffusers

Slot length Throw Noise rating


(m) correction correction (NR)

1 - 1,5 LT x 1,00 +0 NR
1,5 - 2 LT x 1,05 +2 NR
2 - 6,5 LT x 1,1 +5 NR

E 4 027 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

DRUM SLOT DIFFUSER


RT500

Installation dimensions
RT501 + RP501
98 50

ø158

255
Application
The RT500 drum slot diffuser is suit-
able for the sypply and exhaust of
cooled and warmed air in offices,
shops, meeting rooms, etc. The dif-
82

fuser was designed for ceiling

4
64

mounting and is available with 1 or


43.5

2 slots. Each slot is fitted with air


direction elements which can be
20,3
individually adjusted. These spe-
50 cially developed air direction ele-
68 ments (drums) ensure an ideal and
stable air diffusion pattern as well
as a low noise level. There is a high
level of induction and air stream
RT502 + RP502 penetration in the room without
any internal turbulence. As a result,
137 50 the drum slot diffuser is suitable for
HVAC applications. All lengths are
available for an ideal fit in any ceil-
ing.

Technical information
Characteristics:

• 50 mm wide front diffuser with 1 or


2 air slots
ø198

• all lengths available (in 1 mm


steps): from 300 mm up to 2000
295

mm in 1 piece, larger lengths in


centre-pieces (length = 1500 mm)
and end-pieces which are joined
to-gether using connecting pipes
• non-working parts or dummy dif-
fusers with blanked off back
• exhaust: without air nozzles
• supply: one-sided horizontal, two-
82

sided horizontal and alternating


64

43.5

exhaust pattern possible with the


adjustable air nozzles which can
be set either in the factory or on
89 site simply by turning
107 - alternating horizontally: alter-
nate every 2 air nozzles
- alternating swirl: alternates at
All dimensions in mm every air nozzle

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 028


INTERNATIONAL

RT501 Adjustment possibilities RT501


L = slot length (mm), L2 and B = ceiling opening
L2=L + 13

B = 50
13 L

L1=L + 26

RT502 • length of air nozzle = 150 mm


L = slot length (mm), L2 and B = ceiling opening • 2,6 m < installation height < 4 m
L2=L + 13 • available with plenum:
- with or without volume control valve
in the inlet, adjustable at the front dif-
fuser
- up to a length of 1600 mm fitted with
one round inlet, over 1600 mm two
B = 89

round inlets
- optional internal insulation

Construction:

13 L • extruded aluminium, natural tone


anodised or painted in a RAL colour
L1=L + 26 • fitted with black or white ABS plastic
air nozzles
• galvanised steel sheet plenum,
How to order optional insulation
RT501 with 1 slot, aluminium anodised, slot length =1500 mm
Specifications description
Example:
R T 5 0 1 - F 1 5 0 0 - - - -
Aluminium line diffuser with 2 outlet slots
with adjustable air nozzles. Suitable for
ceiling mounting. Delivered complete
slot length (mm)
with fixed plenum with round side con-
nection and volume control valve. Dif-
fuser natural tone anodised with black
-: anodised aluminium plastic air nozzles.
F: painted in a RAL-colour The plenum is made from galvanised
steel sheet.
- : slot diffuser in one piece with end caps
on both sides Type: RT502 + RP512
E: end pieces, with one end cap L = ... mm
M:intermediate piece, without end caps

501: ceiling opening 50 mm, 1 slot Fixing


502: ceiling opening 89 mm, 2 slots • either by a diffuser attached directly
601: ceiling opening 50 mm with concealed fixing to the plenum, either by concealed
602: ceiling opening 89 mm, 2 slots, with concealed fixing
fixing so that the diffuser can be
511: dummy diffuser (for R-501), with brackets
512: dummy diffuser( for R-502), with brackets removed from the plenum
611: dummy diffuser (for R-601), with concealed screw fixing • provided with mounting eyes (ø 7
612: dummy diffuser (for R-602), with concealed screw fixing mm), mounting straps available upon
request
T: supply (black air direction elements)
W: supply (white air direction elements)
A: exhaust (without air direction elements)

E 4 028 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

How to order
RP501, insulated plenum, slot length = 1500 mm

R P 5 0 1 - G 0 1 6 0 1 5 0 0
spigot diameter slot length (mm)
- : non insulated plenum
G: internally insulated plenum
- : one piece
L: end piece left
R: end piece right
M:intermediate piece
1: one slot
2: two slots
0: without damper in the inlet spigot
1: with damper in the inlet spigot

RP5: plenum
RP6: plenum (with concealed fixing)

Connection linear grilles

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 028 bis


INTERNATIONAL

RT601 + RP601
97 50

ø158
260

50

90
70
57

43.5

68

Linear execution:
RT601 + RP601
Nom. L + 34 end pieces + 15 mm

intermediate pieces = nominal


dimension

8
15
ø
260
165.5

Nom. L + 8

Nom. L
Nom. L + 26

E 4 028 bis Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

RT602 + RP602
136 50

ø198
300

89

90
70
57

Linear execution:
43.5

end pieces + 15 mm
107 intermediate pieces = nominal
dimension

RT602 + RP602
Nom. L + 34

8
19
ø
300
185.5

Nom. L + 8

Nom. L
Nom. L + 26

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 029


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

DRUM SLOT DIFFUSER


RT500

Selection diagram - supply


Type RT501-502 - with ceiling effect Valid for cooling up to ∆ ts = –10 K
RT601-602 - damper completely open Valid for heating up to ∆ ts = +20 K

qV
m3 / h )
800 /s
m /s (m
3
700
600
0,24 10 vk
500
0,20 9
400 55
LT ( m ) 350 0,15 8 NR
300 50
6 9 12 250
7 NR
0,1
0,09 45
8 200
0,08
6
N R
5 10 0,07 40 Ceiling one-way exhaust
7 9 5 N R
0,06 pattern
150 0,055 35
4 6 8 NR 0

4
0,05 3
3,5
5
7
0,045
4 NR
25
3 6 0,04 NR
4 100 20
2,5 5 90
0,035 3
NR
3,5 5
80 0,03 2,
2 3 4
70 0,025 2
3,5
2,5 60
1,5 3 0,02
50 0,018
v T 0,60 0,40 0,30 m / s
v 0,25 0,17 0,12 m / s 0,016 Ceiling two-way exhaust
R
40 pattern
0,014

0,012

600 1000
1 900 1200
600 1000
2 900 1200

Ak- values (m2/m.slot)

L (mm) 600 900 1000 1200

Ak 0,006 0,009 0,01 0,012

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 029


INTERNATIONAL

Pressure loss - supply


With damper completely open Alternating exhaust pattern

%
00
D1
Alternating swirl
60
50

40
pt

150
( Pa ) 30
25 Correction factor on selection
diagram: LT x 0,6
20

15
Alternating horizontal

10
9
8
7
6

300
5 Correction factor on selection
diagram: LT x 0,7
4
2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

vk ( m/s )

Correction factors
For linear slot diffusers

Slot length Throw Noise rating


(m) correction correction (NR)

1 - 1,5 LT x 1,00 +0 NR
1,5 - 2 LT x 1,05 +2 NR
2 - 6,5 LT x 1,1 +5 NR

E 4 029 bis Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

FIXED SLOT DIFFUSER


TE600 • TE700

Installation dimensions
TE633 • TE660
B

25 L 25

50 E 50 E

Application
øD
øD

The slot diffuser, type TE600/700, is


used for the supply of cooled and
H

heated air in facilities such as

H
offices, meeting rooms, shops, ...
T

The especially developed deflec-

4
tors ensure a stable horizontal air
supply pattern and a low noise
16 16 level. The result is a high induction
P P level and an air flow penetration in
B B the space without internal turbu-
lences. By the reduced pressure
1 SLOT 2 SLOTS drop, the diffuser is the ideal solu-
L 600 900 600 900 tion for VAV-applications.
300 1200 300 1200
B 61 61 61 61 93 93 93 93
øD 125 125 160 200 125 160 200 250 Technical information
T 250 250 232 212 250 232 212 187 Characteristics
E (1R) 36 36 36 36 68 68 68 68
E (2R) - - - - 73 73 73 73 • choice of the supply direction of
P 48 48 48 48 80 80 80 80 the fixed not adjustable deflec-
3 SLOTS 4 SLOTS tors in 1 or 2 directions (supply
L 300 600 900 1200 300 600 900 1200 directions provided right air entry)
B 125 125 125 125 157 157 157 157 • available with 1-8 slots, standard
øD 160 200 250 250 200 250 250 250 lengths 300, 600, 900, 1200 mm
T 232 212 187 187 212 187 187 187 • diffuser supplied with plenum,
E (1R) 100 100 100 100 132 132 132 132 optional internal insulation, with
E (2R) 105 105 105 105 137 137 137 137 or without damper; the plenum is
P 112 112 112 112 144 144 144 144 fixed directly on the diffuser
(mounting by Grada upon re-
5 SLOTS 6 SLOTS
quest)
L 300 600 900 1200 300 600 900 1200 • TE600: fixed core
B 189 189 189 189 221 221 221 221 TE700: hinged core, with push-pull
øD 200 250 250 250 200 250 250 250 closing (available from 4 slots)
T 212 187 187 187 212 187 187 187
E (1R) 164 164 164 164 196 196 196 196 Construction
E (2R) 169 169 169 169 201 201 201 201
P 176 176 176 176 208 208 208 208 • aluminium diffuser, painted white
7 SLOTS 8 SLOTS (RAL 9010)
• galvanised steel sheet plenum
L 300 600 900 1200 300 600 900 1200
• plenum provided with mountiing
B 253 253 253 253 285 285 285 285
eyes (ø 7 mm), mounting straps
øD 200 250 250 250 200 250 250 250
available upon request
T 212 187 187 187 212 187 187 187
E (1R) 228 228 228 228 260 260 260 260
E (2R) 233 233 233 233 265 265 265 265
P 240 240 240 240 272 272 272 272
L = nominal length
All dimensions in mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 030


INTERNATIONAL

TE733
B

25 L 25

50 E
øD

H
T

16
P
B

4 SLOTS
L 300 600 900 1200
B 157 157 157 157
øD 200 250 250 250
T 212 187 187 187
E (1R) 132 132 132 132
E (2R) 137 137 137 137
H 325 325 325 365
P 144 144 144 144
F (1R) 159 159 159 159
F (2R) 185 185 185 185
5 SLOTS 6 SLOTS
L 300 600 900 1200 300 600 900 1200
B 189 189 189 189 221 221 221 221
øD 200 250 250 250 200 250 250 250
T 212 187 187 187 212 187 187 187
E (1R) 164 164 164 164 196 196 196 196
E (2R) 169 169 169 169 201 201 201 201
H 325 325 325 365 325 325 325 365
P 176 176 176 176 208 208 208 208
F (1R) 205 205 205 205 250 250 250 250
F (2R) 218 218 218 218 250 250 250 250
7 SLOTS 8 SLOTS
L 300 600 900 1200 300 600 900 1200
B 253 253 253 253 285 285 285 285
øD 200 250 250 250 200 250 250 250
T 212 187 187 187 212 187 187 187
E (1R) 228 228 228 228 260 260 260 260
E (2R) 233 233 233 233 265 265 265 265
H 325 325 325 365 325 325 325 365
P 240 240 240 240 272 272 272 272
F (1R) 295 295 295 295 340 340 340 340
F (2R) 282 282 282 282 315 315 315 315

1R = 1 supply direction P = minimum ceiling opening width


2R = 2 supply directions nominal dimension = length of the filter
L + 13 = minimum ceiling opening length

E 4 030 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Delivery possibilties TE604/640/704/740

Example: 1 SUPPLY DIRECTION


TE601/610
Aluminium slot diffuser with 2 fixed
supply slots in the same direction.
Delivered complete with plenum box 2 SUPPLY DIRECTIONS
both with circular side entry spigot TE611
and damper.
The diffuser is painted white (RAL TE602/620
9010). The plenum is made out of gal-
vanised steel sheet.

Type: TE602 + TP202 G


length ... mm TE612/621

TE603/630

TE613/631/713/731

How to order
TE600 with 1 slot, supply direction at the right, air entry at the right, L = 900 mm.

T E 6 0 1 - - 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 TE622/722

slot length (mm)


1: number of slots, supply direction
AT THE RIGHT, with air entry at the right
0: number of slots, supply direction
AT THE LEFT, with air entry at the right
6: fixed core
7: hinged core, push-pull closing
Note:
- Not available as a linear grille
- TE700 only available from 4 slots
- Anodised execution only available upon request
8

Slot diffuser in a panel


5 fine line
S E 6 1 4 P F 1 2 0 0 1 3 5 0 L

slot length (mm) panel length * All panels have a width of 300 mm
and a flange of 10 mm at all sides.
F: painted in RAL-colors
P:with panell, with rebord of 10 mm on all ** All panels have a width of 300 mm
sides* and a flange of 10 mm at the
Z: with panel, with fine line 5/8 ont het two longest side. The length of the
shortest sides** panel, is the total length, fine line
4: number of slots included

Remarque: The length of the panel


1: black deflectors
must be 55 mm (at the minimum)
2: white deflectors
longer than the nominal length of the
diffuser.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 031


INTERNATIONAL

PLENUM FOR FIXED SLOT DIFFUSER


TP100 • TP700

Installation dimensions
TP100/TP700
L-2

øD

H
L
Q=L+13
L+50

H = 325 mm (if TE600 is mounted with TP100)


H = 365 mm (if TE700 is mounted with TP700)
1 SLOT 2 SLOTS 3 SLOTS

4
L 300 600 900 1200 300 600 900 1200 300 600 900 1200
øD 125 125 160 200 125 160 200 250 160 200 250 250

4 SLOTS 5 SLOTS 6 SLOTS


L 300 600 900 1200 300 600 900 1200 300 600 900 1200
øD 200 250 250 250 200 250 250 250 200 250 250 250

7 SLOTS 8 SLOTS
L 300 600 900 1200 300 600 900 1200
øD 200 250 250 250 200 250 250 250

How to order
TP100, not insulated and without damper for TE601, L = 900 mm.

T P 1 0 1 - - 0 1 2 5 1 2 0 0

spigot diameter Slot length (mm)


- : non insulated plenum
G: internally insulated plenum
H: double sided insulated plenum
1: number of slots, supply direction
AT THE RIGHT, with air entry at the right

0: number of slots, supply direction


AT THE LEFT, with air entry at the right
1: without damper in inlet spigot (for TE600)
2: with damper in inlet spigot (for TE600)
3: without damper in inlet spigot, provided with mounting
straps (for TE600)
4: with damper in inlet spigot, provided with mounting
straps (for TE600)
7: bevelled filterframe without damper in inlet spigot
(for TE700)
8: bevelled filterframe with damper in inlet spigot(for
TE700)
9: bevelled filterframe without damper in inlet spigot, pro-
vided with mounting straps (for TE700)

E 4 031 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

FIXED SLOT DIFFUSER


TE600 • TE700

Selection diagram - supply

Type TE600 • TE700 - with ceiling effect Valid for cooling up to ∆ ts = –8 K


Valid for heating up to ∆ ts = +20

ceiling one-way exhaust pattern

50
NR
45
NR
40
NR
35
NR
30
NR
25
NR
20
NR

ceiling two-way exhaust pattern

4
1 300 600 900 1200
2 300 600 900 1200
3 300 600 900 1200
4 300 600 900 1200

Air flow rate measurement - supply


Ak-values (m2/m)
Number Ak
of slots

1 0,0097
2 0,0195
3 0,0292
4 0,0390

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 040


INTERNATIONAL

Example

Selection data:
- Air flow rate qv = 0,035 m3/s
- Throw LT = 1,9 m at vT = 0,3 m/s

Solution:
- Diffuser with - 1 slot (L = 1200 mm)
- 2 slots (L = 600 mm)
- 4 slots (L = 300 mm)
with 1 supply direction
- Supply air velocity vk = 3 m/s
- Noise level NR 23
- Total pressure loss with damper completely
open: ∆ Pt = 4,7 Pa

Pressure loss TE600 / TE700


with damper completely open

E 4 032 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

DOUBLE-SIDED PULSE SLOT DIFFUSER


WITH CENTRAL EXTRACTION GRILLE
TE370
Installation dimensions

A
594 / 670

B
Application
A
The TE370 slot diffuser is suitable for
25 544 / 620 the supply and exhaust of heated
and cooled air in offices, confe-
594 / 670
rence rooms, etc.
Especially developed fixed blades
ensure a fixed double-sided hori-

4
574 zontal pulse pattern and a low
noise level. High induction and high
penetration of the airflow into the
60

room are obtained without internal


turbulence.
198

The removable core of the diffusers


8 is perforated and is responsible for
Ø

19
350

extracting air.
Ø

The frame of the grille can be


235

adapted according to the type of


ceiling.
48

32 Fi 7,5 Technical information


594 x 594 (670 x 670)
Characteristics:

All dimensions in mm • supply: deliverable with up to 4


slots on both sides of the grille,
Nom 594 Nom 670 fixed double-sided horizontal
pulse pattern
A B XFI (filter) B XFI (filter)
• exhaust: perforation, free pas-
sage ca. 51 %
TE371/381 61 472 535x472x5 548 611x548x5 • diffuser fitted with plenum,
TE372/382 93 408 535x408x5 484 611x484x5 optional insulation, equipped
TE373/383 125 344 535x344x5 420 611x420x5 with a damper in inlet spigot, or
TE374/384 157 280 535x280x5 356 611x356x5 equip-ped with a perforated
damper in inlet spigot
TE370S TE380S Construction:

• combined aluminium-steel ceil-


ing diffuser, white powder-coat-
ed (RAL 9010)
• double plenum (supply and
exhaust sections) made from gal-
vanised steel sheet
• option: filter frame

EXTRACTIE
EXTRACTION PULSIE
PULSION PULSIE
PULSION EXTRACTIE
EXTRACTION

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 045


INTERNATIONAL

Specification description Fixing


Example: mounted on T-bars, provided with
mounting eyes (ø 7 mm), mounting
Combined aluminium-steel ceiling dif- straps available upon request
fuser for supply and exhaust.
The supply section consists of fixed slot
diffusers with 4 slots on the right and 4
slots on the left. The exhaust section is
centrally located and consists of a
removable perforated grille core.
The frame of this ceiling diffuser can be
adapted according to the type of
ceiling.
The unit is delivered with a fixed
plenum consisting with a supply sec-
tion and a central exhaust section. The
plenum is fitted with 1 round connec-
tion for supply and 1 round connection
for exhaust.

Type: TE374S
size ... mm

How to order

TE370 with 4 slots left and right, size 594 mm and robust plenum

T E 3 7 4 S - 0 5 9 4 0 5 9 4

-: non insulated plenum


G: insulated plenum
-: single diffuser
S: fixed plenum

number of slots each side

7: type TE370 (see drawing previous page)


8: type TE380 (see drawing previous page)

X F I 0 0 2 M - - - - - - - -

XFI002M: wire frame filter G2


XFI003M: wire frame filter G3
XFI004M: wire frame filter G4

E 4 045 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

DOUBLE-SIDED PULSE SLOT DIFFUSER


WITH CENTRAL EXTRACTION GRILLE
TE 370
Selection table
EXHAUST

airflow rate noise level air velocity pressure loss

qv (m3/h) LW (NR) vk (m/s) delta pt (Pa)

200 25 0,7 7

240 30 1,1 12

300 35 1,8 18

370 40 2,6 26

460 45 4,1 40

SUPPLY
4 slots each side

airflow rate

qv (m3/h)

300
noise level

LW (NR)

20
air velocity

vk (m/s)

2,2
pressure loss

delta pt (Pa)

3
throw

LT (m)*

1,4
4
360 25 2,6 3 1,7

420 30 3,1 5 2,1

500 35 3,6 7 2,4


580 40 4,4 12 2,8

740 45 5,2 16 3,4

SUPPLY
3 slots each side

airflow rate noise level air velocity pressure loss throw

qv (m3/h) LW (NR) vk (m/s) delta pt (Pa) LT (m)*

240 20 2,3 3 1,3

280 25 2,7 4 1,5

350 30 3,3 6 1,8

400 35 3,6 7 2,3

480 40 4,5 12 2,6

580 45 5,5 18 3,3

* LT at vT = 0,4 m/s and vR = 0,17 m/s

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 046


INTERNATIONAL

SUPPLY
2 slots each side

airflow rate noise level air velocity pressure loss throw

qv (m3/h) LW (NR) vk (m/s) delta pt (Pa) LT (m)*

170 20 2,5 3 1,2

220 25 3 5 1,4

240 30 3,5 7 1,7

270 35 4 9 1,9

330 40 5 14 2,4

400 45 5,7 19 2,7

SUPPLY
1 slot each side

airflow rate noise level air velocity pressure loss throw

qv (m3/h) LW (NR) vk (m/s) delta pt (Pa) LT (m)*

100 20 2,8 4 0,95

120 25 3,4 6 1,1

140 30 4 9 1,4

150 35 4,5 12 1,5

200 40 5,5 18 1,9

220 45 6,5 24 2,2

* LT at vT = 0,4 m/s and vR = 0,17 m/s

E 4 046 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

SQUARE SLOT DIFFUSER


TS600 • TS700

Installation dimensions
TS600 / TS700
A

Application
The TS600/700 slot diffusers is suit-
able for the supply and exhaust of
both heated and chilled air in
offices, conference halls and
shops.
The specially designed baffles en-

4
sure a fixed horizontal diffusion pat-
tern on all four sides without internal
turbulece.
The frame of the diffuser can be
A adjustee to the ceilling.

Technical Information
TS600 + TP600 Characteristics:

C • Delivery: can be supplied with up


to 4 slots on the four sides of the
diffuser, fixed horizontal diffusion
pattern
• The diffuser is provided with a
plenum, with optional insulation,
and can be fitted with a volume
H = ø D + 150
øD

control in the intake

Construction:

• Combined aluminium and steel


ceiling diffuser, painted white
135

(RAL 9010)
38

• TS600: fixed core


TS700: hinged core and push-pull
lock
A
• galvanised steel sheet plenum

Nominal dimension: 594 x 594 mm Nominal dimension: 670 x 670 mm

A B C A B C

TS601 594 488 560 TS601 670 564 636


TS602 594 424 560 TS602 670 500 636
TS603 594 360 560 TS603 670 436 636
TS604 594 296 560 TS604 670 372 636

ø D = diameter 80-100-125-160-200-250-315mm
All dimensions in mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 047


INTERNATIONAL

Installation dimensions TS700


TS700 + TP700
C

øD

H = ø D + 150
F

135
B
38

Nominal dimension: 594 x 594 mm Nominal dimension: 670 x 670 mm

A B C F A B C F

TS701 594 488 580 X 554 535 X 535 TS701 670 564 656 X 630 610 X 610
TS702 594 424 580 X 554 535 X 535 TS702 670 500 656 X 630 610 X 610
TS703 594 360 580 X 554 535 X 535 TS703 670 436 656 X 630 610 X 610
TS704 594 296 580 X 554 535 X 535 TS704 670 372 656 X 630 610 X 610

ø D = diameter 80-100-125-160-200-250-315 mm
All dimensions in mm

E 4 047 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Fixing


Example: Suspended on T-bars, provided
with mounting eyes (ø 7 mm),
Combined aluminium-steel supply ceil- mounting straps available upon
ing grille. The supply section consists of request
fixed slot diffusers.
The frame of this ceiling grille can be
adapted to the ceiling system.
The unit is delivered with a fixed
plenum.
The grille is painted white (RAL 9010).

Type: TS600S
size ... mm

How to order

TS602 with 2 slots on four sides, size 594 mm

T S 6 0 2 - - 0 5 9 4 0 5 9 4

number of slots on each side

0: removable central sheet


1: fixed central sheet
5: perforated central sheet

6: fixed core
7: hinged core with push-pull lock

T P 6 0 2 S - 0 2 5 0 0 5 9 4

-: non-insulated plenum
G: insulated plenum
H: plenum insulated at the top and
on the opposite side of the inlet

number of slots on each side

0: without damper in the inlet spigot


1: with damper in the inlet spigot

6: without filterframe
7: with filterframe

Note: Anodised only available upon request

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 048


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

SQUARE SLOT DIFFUSER


TS600 • TS700

Selection diagram
Type TS600/TS700 - with ceiling effect Valid for cooling up to ∆ ts = –8 K
670 x 670 - damper completely open Valid for heating up to ∆ ts = +20 K

3 qV
m /h )
/s
(m
3000 3
LT ( m ) m /s
2500
2000 0,9 1 vk
6 9 12 0,8
0,7
8 1500
0,6
5 10 0,55
7 1200 0,5
9 1000 0,45
900 0,4
4 6 8 800 0,35
0,3 5
3,5 7 700 5,
5

4
0,25
3 6 600 5
4, NR 45
550 0,2
4
2,5 5 500 0,18 4
3,5 450 3,
5 NR 40
0,16
2 3 4 400
0,14 NR 35
3,5 350
2,5 0,12 5
2, NR 30
1,5 3 300
0,1
2 NR 25
2,5 250 0,09
0,08
1 1,5 2 200
0,07
180
0,8 1,2 1,6 0,06

v T 0,60 0,40 0,30 m / s 0,05


v 0,25 0,17 0,12 m / s

1 2 3 4

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 049


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

SLOT DIFFUSER FOR LIGHT FIXTURES


QA • QT

Installation dimensions
Q....B

Application
The slot diffuser QA/QT, is designed
Q....G
for mounting with light fixtures. The
air is diffused through the slots
which are mounted on the sides of

4
the light fixtures. The air supply pat-
tern is vertically or horizontally
adjustable by means of a deflec-
tor which can be operated
through a slot opening. The dif-
fuser has a very high induction
level and an extremely low noise
level.
The diffuser is especially equipped
for fast, efficient and economical
mounting in system-ceilings de-
Q....E manding a high aesthetic stan-
dard.

Technical information
Characteristics

• adjustable air diffusion pattern:


horizontal-vertica deflection
• adjustable air flow: either by
means of a damper in the inlet
spigot (side entry), a damper in
each plenum (top entry), or a
combination of both.
The dampers can be adjusted
Height A H T through the slot of the diffuser with
the supplied key.
15 63 154 111 • Standard dimensions for oval con-
20 111 203 168 nections (Ø 100, 125, 150 and 160
mm), round connection only pos-
All dimensions in mm sible for Ø 80 mm.
• delivered according to customer
specifications
• exhaust diffuser also available: with-
out deflector (QA)

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 050


INTERNATIONAL

Construction Delivery possibilties QA/QT200

• Galvanised steel sheet, deflector in • basic constructions:


extruded aluminium; - QA…B/QT...B: single plenum with
• painted black (RAL 9005) side inlet
- QA…E/QT...E: double plenum (two
plenums with connection) with top
inlet
Specifications description - QA…G/QT...G: double plenum QA/QT300
with side inlet
Example:
• Following the construction of the light
fixtures, 9 different slot openings are
Slot diffuser for light fixtures in gal-
available
vanised steel sheet in double construc-
tion with top inlet. The diffuser is sup-
plied with an adjustable deflector and
damper. Painted black (RAL 9005).
QA/QT400
Type: QT115E
L = … mm/ Inlet dia. = … mm.

QA/QT500

QA/QT100

QA/QT600

QA/QT700
How to order
QT200, single plenum, height 150, slot length 1000 and inlet spigot 125 mm.

Q T 2 1 5 B - 1 0 0 0 0 1 2 5

slot length inlet spigot


QA/QT800
B: single plenum, side inlet
E: double plenum, top inlet
G: double plenum, side inlet
15
20 } height (cm)

1 à 9: deflection QA/QT900

A: exhaust without deflectors


T: supply with deflectors

E 4 050 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

SLOT DIFFUSER FOR LIGHT FIXTURES WITH SINGLE PLENUM


QT...B

Selection diagram - supply Pressure loss


Type QT … B

Ak = 0,0063 m2/m
m3/h
qqv
LT (m) 0,06 v
0,05 m3/h
2,5 5
0,04 200 109 vk (m/s)
3,5
180
0,03 160 8 NR 40
2 3 4 7
140
120 6 NR 35
0,025
2,5
100 5
1,5 3
0,02 NR 30
2
2,5 80 4
∆ pt (Pa)
NR 25
0,015
1 1,5 2
60 3
NR 20
0,8 50 2,5
1,5
0,01
1
40 2
0,6

4
0,8
0,5 1

vT 0,70 0,50 0,35 (m/s)

0,5 1,5 qv
1
L (m) 0,75 1,25

Correction factors Example


The ∆ pt- and NR-values, shown on diagrams are Selection data:
valid only for inlet collars 150 mm. For smaller - Airflow rate qv = 90 m3/h
diameters those values have to be corrected - slot length: L = 1m
by the factors stated below. - inlet spigot = 100mm

Ø 125 Solution:
Ø 150 Ø 100 Ø 80
- Supply air velocity vk = 4 m/s
pt x 1 pt x 1,16 pt x 1,44 pt x 1,55 - Throw LT = 1,4m at vT = 0,5 m/s
NR + 0 NR + 2 NR + 5 NR + 6 - Noise level NR 27
- Correction factor for inlet spigot
100 mm: NR 27+5 = NR 32
Air flow rate measurement - supply - Total pressure loss ∆ pt = 15 Pa
- Correction factor for inlet spigot
100 mm: 15 Pa x 1,44 = 21,6 Pa

Velometer jet: 2220 A of 6070

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 4 060


INTERNATIONAL

SLOT DIFFUSER FOR LUMINAIRES WITH DOUBLE PLENUM


QT...E • QT....G
Selection diagram - supply

Type QT … E / QT… G

Ak = 0,0126 m2/m qv
qv
m3/h
LT (m) 0,12
0,10 m3/h
2,5 5
3,5 0,08 400 10 vk (m/s)
350 9
0,06 300 8
2 3 4 7 NR 40
250 6
0,05
2,5 NR 35
200
1,5 3 5
0,04 180
2 NR 30
2,5 160 4
140
0,03 NR 25
1 1,5 2
120
0,025 3
NR 20
0,8 100
1,5 2,5
0,02 90
1
80 2
0,6
70
0,8
0,5 1

vT 0,70 0,50 0,35 (m/s)

0,5 1 1,5
L (m)
0,75 1,25

Pressure loss Pressure loss


L (m)
QT... E QT... G

∆ pt (Pa) ∆ pt (Pa)

qv qv

Correction factors
The ∆ pt- and NR-values, shown on diagrams are valid only for inlet collars 200 mm. For smaller diameters those values
have to be corrected by the factors stated below.

Ø 200 Ø 150 Ø 125 Ø 100 Ø 80 Ø 150 Ø 125 Ø 100 Ø 80


pt x 1 pt x 2 pt x 2,5 pt x 3,5 pt x 5 pt x 1 pt x 1,3 pt x 2 pt x 2,3
NR + 0 NR + 2 NR + 4 NR + 8 NR + 11 NR + 5 NR + 7 NR + 11 NR + 12

E 4 060 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


5
INTERNATIONAL

BUILD-IN EXTERNAL LOUVRE


W-331
Installation dimensions
WA331 WB331

126

34
26

26

Application
( H + 38 ) x ( L + 38 )

( H - 14 ) x ( L - 14 )

( H + 38 ) x ( L + 38 )

( H - 14 ) x ( L - 14 )

INSTELBAAR
Adjustable
The external louvre, type W-331, is
HxL

HxL
designed for wall application, for
supply and exhaust of small air vol-
umes in heating, ventilating or air-
33,33

conditioning installations.
33,33

The design and the mounting of the


Z–shaped blades ensure a weather-
proof louvre.
At the back a welded synthetic
Insect screen with 1.6 x 1.4 maze is
standard provided.
4,7

Dogues

4,7
Technical information
Characteristics

• Z-shaped blades under 60°


• blades are clipped into a synthetic
blade holder
5
• blade height 38 mm
• depth 30 mm
• frame and blades 26 mm
33,33

• distance of the blades = 33 mm


12 • total cross-section 1.25/1.50 mm
6

60 • 30 mm surface mounting height


85 • physical passage 43 %
110 • equipped with a welded synthetic
120 insect screen (1.6 x 1.4 maze x
ø 0,24 mm), 69 % free passage
• weatherproof
• available with multiples of 1 mm in
length and 10 mm in height
min. L = 150 mm, max. L = 2000 mm
min. H =100 mm, max. H = 2000 mm

All dimensions in mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 5 021


INTERNATIONAL

Construction Fixation Delivery possibilities


• frame and blades in extruded alu- • the louvres are fixed to the wall by • WA330: without screw holes, with-
minium, natural tone anodised meaning of screws (WA or WF) out dogues, without insect screen
• when natural tone anodised, synthe- • the screw holes are already provid-
tic blade holder is coloured light ed for the execution WF • WB330: without screw holes, with
gray • the louvres are fixed to the wall by dogues, without insect screen
• standard welded synthetic insect dogues (WB)
screen with 1,6 x 1,4 x Ø 0,24 mm • WF330: with screw holes, without
maze, 69 % free passage insect screen
• upon request, painted in RAL colour
• upon request: • WA331: without screw holes, with-
- woven aluminium insect screen out dogues, with synthetic insect
(1,8 x 1,4 x Ø 0,22 mm) screen 1.6 x 1.4 mm
- welded synthetic insect screen
(2,8 x 2,8 x Ø 0,25 mm) • WB331: without screw holes, with
dogues and with synthetic insect
screen 1.6 x 1.4 mm

Specifications description • WF331: with screw holes and with


synthetic insect screen 1.6 x 1.4
Example: mm

Aluminium build-in external louvre, for • WA333: without screw holes, with-
small air volumes with fixed Z-shaped out dogues, with aluminium insect
blades of extruded profiles. screen 1.8 x 1.4 mm
Equipped with a welded synthetic in-
sect screen 1.6 x 1.4 mm maze. • WB333: without screw holes, with
Standard finish: natural tone anodsed. dogues and aluminium insect
Fixation by dogues. screen 1.8 x 1.4 mm

Type: WB331 • WF333: with screw holes and alu-


nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm minium insect screen 1.8 x 1.4mm

• WA334: without screw holes, with-


out dogues and with synthetic
How to order insect screen 2.8 x 2.8 mm

WB331, dimension 500 x 300mm • WB334: without screw holes, with


dogues and synthetic insect
screen 2.8 x 2.8 mm
a) Louvre
• WF334: without screw holes, with-
W B 3 3 1 - - 0 5 0 0 0 3 0 0 out dogues and with synthetic
insect screen 2.8 x 2.8 mm
L H
-: complete piece
L: end piece left
M:middle piece
R: end piece right

0: louvre without insect screen


1: louvre with synthetic insect screen 1,6 x 1,4 mm
3: louvre with aluminium insect screen 1,8 x 1,4 mm
4: louvre with synthetic insect screen 2,8 x 2,8 mm

A: without screw holes, without dogues


B: without screw holes, with dogues
F: with screw holes, without dogues

E 5 021 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

BUILD-IN EXTERNAL LOUVRE


W-331
Selection diagram
W-331

(m/s)
vf
4.5
3.5
2.5

10

12
11
9
8
7
6
4
3

5
2
100
0.014

0,
01
0,
00

0,
5

00
7

0.04
150
0.022

0.05 0.06
200
0.029

0.036

0.08
300
0.044

0.1
400

0.05
500
0.073

0.15
600
Af (m2)

0.095 700

0.2
800
900

0.25 0.3
0.127
1000

0.159 1200

1400
0.4

0.207
1600
0.5

1800
0.232
2000
0.6

0.33
2500

5
0.8

0.415 3000
1

0.556 4000

5000
0.719
1.5

6000
0.881
7000
2

1.043
8000
9000
2.5

1.44 10000
3

1.696
4

15000
5

20000
6

10
25000
7

15
8

30000
20
9 10 11 12 14 16 18 20

35000
30 40000
∆pt (Pa)

40 45000
50 50000
60 55000
60000
80 65000
100 70000
75000
80000
150
qv (m3/s)

qv (m3/s)

200

300
2
1
2

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 5 022


INTERNATIONAL

Af-values (m2)
L (mm)
H (mm) 100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000

100 0,003 0,007 0,011 0,014 0,018 0,022 0,029 0,036 0,044 0,051 0,059 0,066 0,073
200 0,007 0,015 0,023 0,031 0,039 0,047 0,063 0,079 0,095 0,111 0,127 0,143 0,159
300 0,011 0,023 0,035 0,047 0,060 0,072 0,097 0,121 0,146 0,170 0,195 0,220 0,244
400 0,014 0,031 0,047 0,064 0,081 0,097 0,130 0,164 0,197 0,230 0,263 0,296 0,330
500 0,018 0,039 0,060 0,081 0,102 0,122 0,164 0,206 0,248 0,290 0,331 0,373 0,415
600 0,022 0,047 0,072 0,097 0,122 0,148 0,198 0,248 0,299 0,349 0,400 0,450 0,500
800 0,029 0,063 0,097 0,130 0,164 0,198 0,266 0,333 0,401 0,468 0,536 0,604 0,671
1000 0,037 0,079 0,121 0,164 0,206 0,248 0,333 0,418 0,503 0,588 0,672 0,757 0,842
1200 0,044 0,095 0,146 0,197 0,248 0,299 0,401 0,503 0,605 0,707 0,809 0,911 1,013
1400 0,051 0,111 0,170 0,230 0,290 0,349 0,468 0,588 0,707 0,826 0,945 1,064 1,184
1600 0,059 0,127 0,195 0,263 0,331 0,400 0,536 0,672 0,809 0,945 1,082 1,218 1,354
1800 0,066 0,143 0,220 0,296 0,373 0,450 0,604 0,757 0,911 1,064 1,218 1,372 1,525
2000 0,073 0,159 0,244 0,330 0,415 0,500 0,671 0,842 1,013 1,184 1,354 1,525 1,696

E 5 022 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

SURFACE MOUNTED EXTERNAL LOUVRE


WO331

Installation dimensions
WO331

31.2
10
22

35
33.333

( H - 90 ) x ( L - 90 )
Application
The external louvre, type WO331, is
designed for surface mounted wall
HxL

application, for supply and exhaust


of small air volumes in heating, ven-
tilating or airconditioning installa-
tions.
The design and the mounting of the
Z–shaped blades ensure a weather-
proof louvre.
At the back a welded synthetic
Insect screen with 1.6 x 1.4 maze is
43

standard provided.

5
10

Technical information
Characteristics
All dimensions in mm
• Z-shaped blades under 60°
• blades are clipped into a synthet-
ic blade holder
• blade height 38 mm
• distance of the blades = 33 mm
• total cross-section 1.25 mm/1.50
mm
• 30 mm surface mounting height
• physical passage 43 %
• equipped with a welded synthet-
ic insect screen(1.6 x 1.4 maze x ø
0,24 mm), 69 % free passage
• weatherproof
• available with multiples of 1 mm in
length and 10 mm in height
min L = 165 mm, max L = 2000 mm
min H = 165 mm, max H = 2000 mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 5 023


INTERNATIONAL

Construction Montage Delivery possibilities


• frame and blades are made out of the louvres are fixed to the wall by • WO330: with screw holes without
extruded aluminium, natural tone screws insect screen
anodised
• when natural tone anodised, synthe- • WO331: with screw holes with syn-
tic blade holder is coloured light thetic insect screen 1.6 x 1.4 mm
gray
• standard welded synthetic insect • WO333: with screw holes with alu-
screen with 1,6 x 1,4 x Ø 0,24 mm minium insect screen1.8 x 1.4 mm
maze, 69 % free passage
• upon request, painted in RAL colour • WO334: with screw holes with syn-
• upon request: thetic insect screen 2.8 x 2.8 mm
- woven stainless steel insect screen
(1,4 x 1,4 x Ø 0,24 mm)
- woven aluminium insect screen
(1,8 x 1,4 x Ø 0,22 mm)
- welded synthetic insect screen
(2,8 x 2,8 x Ø 0,25 mm)

Specifications description
Example:

Aluminium external louvre for surface


mounting, for small air volumes with
fixed Z-shaped blades in extruded pro-
files. Provided with welded synthetic
insect screen 1,6 x 1,4 mm.
Standard finishing: natural tone
anodised. Fixed to the wall by screws.

Type: WO331
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm

How to order
WO331, dimension 500 x 300 mm

W O 3 3 1 - - 0 5 0 0 0 3 0 0

L H

0: louvre without insect screen


1: louvre with synthetic insect screen 1,6 x 1,4 mm
3: louvre with aluminium insect screen 1,8 x 1,4 mm
4: louvre with synthetic insect screen 2,8 x 2,8 mm

E 5 023 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

SURFACE MOUNTED EXTERNAL LOUVRE


WO331
Selection diagram
WO331

(m/s)
vf
4.5
3.5
2.5

10

12
11
4
3

6
2

8
9
100
0.015
0, 0,
00 0
99 084 0,0

0,
00
07

56
4

0.04
150

0.05 0.06
0.025
200

0.034

0.08
0.043 300

0.05

0.1
400
0.062
Af (m2)

0.071 500

0.15
0.083 600

700

0.2
0.1
800

0.25 0.3
900
0.136 1000

1200
0.172
1400
0.4

0.215 1600
0.5

1800
0.266
2000
0.6

5
0.337 2500
0.8

0.397
3000

0.501
1

4000
0.596

0.708 5000
1.5

6000
0.864
7000
2

1.02
8000
1.175
9000
2.5

1.331 10000
3
4

10 15000

15
5

20000
20
6

30 25000
7
∆pt (Pa)

40 30000
50
9 10 1 12

35000
60
40000
80
45000
100
50000
14 16 18

55000
150
60000
200 65000
qv (m3/s)

qv (m3/s)

300
2
1
2

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 5 024


INTERNATIONAL

Af-values (m2)
L (mm)
H (mm) 150 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000

150 0,002 0,003 0,005 0,008 0,011 0,013 0,016 0,018 0,021 0,024
200 0,003 0,005 0,010 0,015 0,019 0,024 0,029 0,034 0,038 0,043
300 0,005 0,010 0,019 0,028 0,037 0,046 0,055 0,064 0,073 0,082
400 0,008 0,015 0,028 0,041 0,055 0,068 0,081 0,095 0,108 0,121
500 0,011 0,019 0,037 0,055 0,072 0,090 0,108 0,125 0,143 0,160
600 0,013 0,024 0,046 0,068 0,090 0,112 0,134 0,156 0,178 0,200
700 0,016 0,029 0,055 0,081 0,108 0,134 0,160 0,186 0,213 0,239
800 0,018 0,034 0,064 0,095 0,125 0,156 0,186 0,217 0,247 0,278
900 0,021 0,038 0,073 0,108 0,143 0,178 0,213 0,247 0,282 0,317
1000 0,024 0,043 0,082 0,121 0,160 0,200 0,239 0,278 0,317 0,356

E 5 024 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

STEEL EXTERNAL LOUVRE


G-801
Installation dimensions
GA801 + WR001 GB801

Application
The external louvre, type G-801, is
designed for wall application for
the supply and exhaust of large air
volumes in heating, ventilating or
airconditioning installations.
The design and the mounting of
the horizontal blades ensure a
weatherproof louvre.

Technical information

5
Characteristics

• horizontal blades under 45°


• distance blades = 80 mm
All dimensions in mm • can be used as supply, exhaust
and transfer grille
• equipped with a drip cill and a
birdscreen in galvanised or stain-
less steel wirenetting (12,5 x 12,5 x
ø 0,8 mm) or with an insectscreen
in galvanised steel or stainless
steel (1,4 x 1,4 x ø 0,24 mm) at the
back
• weatherproof
• available with multiples of 1 mm
in length and 10mm in height in
L = 200 mm, max L = 2300 mm
min H = 300 mm, max H = 2300 mm
(L x H) > 2300 x 2300 mm: only
available with several parts

Construction

• galvanised steel sheet


• upon request, painted in RAL co-
lour

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 5 030


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories Fixing


Example: WR001: mounting frame out of steel • the louvres are fixed to the wall
profile (30 x 30 x 4 mm), delivered with by screws
Steel external louvre for large air vol- mounting straps • the GA series has factory drilled
umes with fixed horizontal blades in screw holes in the frame
galvanised steel sheet. Weatherproof, • for fixing with a mounting frame
equipped with a bottom drip cill and a (WR001), both frame and louvre
galvanised steel birdscreen at the have to be drilled on site
back.

Type: GB801 Delivery possibilities


nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm
• GA800: grille without birdscreen
but with screw holes in the frame

• GB800: grille without birdscreen


and without screw holes in the
frame

• GA801: grille with galvanised


steel birdscreen and screw holes
in the frame

• GB801: grille with galvanised steel


birdscreen and without screw
holes in the frame

• GA802: grille with galvanised


steel insectscreen and screw
How to order holes in the frame

GA801, dimension 1000 x 1000 mm with mounting frame WR001. • GB802: grille with galvanised steel
insectscreen and without screw
a) Louvre holes in the frame

G A 8 0 1 - - 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 • GA803: grille with stainless steel


birdscreen and with screw holes
L H in the frame
0: grille without birdscreen
1: grille with galvanised steel birdscreen • GB803: grille with stainless steel
2: grille with galvanised steel insectscreen birdscreen and without screw
3: grille with stainless steel birdscreen holes in the frame
4: grille with stainless steel insectscreen
A: frame with screw holes • GA804: grille with stainless steel
B: frame without screw holes insectscreen and with screw
holes in the frame
b) Mounting frame
• GB804: grille with stainless steel
W R 0 0 1 - - 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 insectscreen and without screw
holes in the frame
L H

E 5 030 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

ALUMINIUM EXTERNAL LOUVRE


W-801
Installation dimensions
WA801 + WR001 WB801
30x30x4
(H-15)x(L-20)

Application
(H-15)x(L-20)
0

The external louvre, type W-801, is


HxL

HxL
(H+65)x(L+60)

designed for wall application for the


80
80

(H+65)x(L+60)

supply and exhaust of large air vol-


umes in heating, ventilating or
airconditioning installations. The de-
sign and the mounting of the hori-
zontal blades ensure a weather-
proof louvre.
12,5
ø8

Technical information
10

68

10

5
68

Characteristics

• horizontal blades under 45°


• distance blades = 80 mm
• can be used as supply, exhaust
All dimensions in mm and transfer louvre
• equipped with a drip cill and a
birdscreen in galvanised steel
wirenetting or stainless steel (12,5 x
12,5 x ø 0,8 mm) or with an insect-
screen in galvanised steel or stain-
less steel (1,4 x1,4 x ø 0,24 mm) at
the back
• weatherproof
• available with multiples of 1 mm in
length and 10 mm in height
min L = 200 mm, max L = 3000 mm
min H = 300 mm, max H = 3000 mm
(L x H) > 3000 x 3000 mm: only
available with several parts

Construction

• extruded aluminium, natural tone


anodised upon request
• upon request, painted in RAL
colour

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 5 040


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories Fixing


Example: WR001: mounting frame out of steel • the louvres are fixed to the wall
profile (30 x 30 x 4 mm), delivered with by screws
Aluminium external louvre for large air mounting straps • the WA series has factory drilled
volumes with fixed horizontal blades in screw holes in the frame
extruded profiles. Weatherproof, • for fixing with a mounting frame
equip-ped with a bottom rain drip cill (WR001), both frame and louvre
and a galvanised steel birdscreen at have to be drilled on site
the back.
Standard finishing: natural tone ano-
dised. Delivery possibilities
Type: WB801 A • WA800: grille without birdscreen
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm but with screw holes in the frame

• WB800: grille without birdscreen


and without screw holes in the
frame

• WA801: grille with galvanised


steel birdscreen and screw holes
in the frame

• WB801: grille with galvanised steel


birdscreen and without screw
holes in the frame
How to order • WA802: grille with galvanised
WA801 A, dimension 1000 x 1000 mm with mounting frame WR001. steel insectscreen and screw
holes in the frame
a) Louvre
• WB802: grille with galvanised steel
W A 8 0 1 - A 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 insectscreen and without screw
holes in the frame
L H
- : mill finish • WA803: grille with stainless steel
A: anodised birdscreen and with screw holes
in the frame
0: grille without birdscreen
1: grille with galvanised steel birdscreen • WB803: grille with stainless steel
2: grille with galvanised steel insectscreen birdscreen and without screw
3: grille with stainless steel birdscreen holes in the frame
4: grille with stainless steel insectscreen
• WA804: grille with stainless steel
A: frame with screw holes
B: frame without screw holes insectscreen and with screw
holes in the frame
b) Mounting frame

W R 0 0 1 - - 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 • WB804: grille with stainless steel


insectscreen and without screw
L H holes in the frame

E 5 040 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

EXTERNAL LOUVRE
G-801 • W-801
Selection diagram • pressure loss

G-801 • W-801

Af-values (m2)
5
L (mm)
H (mm) 400 500 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000

400 0,08 0,10 0,12 0,17 0,21 0,25 0,29 0,33 0,38 0,42
500 0,11 0,14 0,16 0,22 0,28 0,33 0,39 0,44 0,50 0,56
600 0,14 0,17 0,21 0,28 0,35 0,42 0,49 0,56 0,63 0,70
800 0,19 0,24 0,29 0,39 0,48 0,58 0,68 0,78 0,88 0,97
1000 0,24 0,31 0,37 0,50 0,62 0,75 0,87 1,00 1,13 1,25
1200 0,30 0,37 0,45 0,61 0,76 0,91 1,07 1,22 1,38 1,53
1400 0,35 0,44 0,53 0,72 0,90 1,08 1,26 1,44 1,63 1,81
1600 0,41 0,51 0,62 0,83 1,04 1,25 1,46 1,67 1,88 2,09
1800 0,46 0,58 0,70 0,94 1,17 1,41 1,65 1,89 2,13 2,36
2000 0,51 0,65 0,78 1,05 1,31 1,58 1,84 2,11 2,38 2,64

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 5 050


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

PENTHOUSE
WBP
Installation dimensions

Application
The penthouse WBP is used for the
supply and/or exhaust of ventilation
air in airconditioning installations.
The aluminium penthouse can be
(L+100) x (B+100) supplied in various dimensions to
(L+142) x (B+142) enable connecting different venti-
lation units to the louvre.
A combined construction is also
All dimensions in mm possible, one has the function of
exhaust louvre and the other has
the function of supply louvre. The
Fast selection diagram horizontal blades are weatherproof.

5
The penthouse construction makes
it suitable for applications deman-
ding high aesthetic standards.

Technical information
Characteristics

• horizontal blades under 45°


• distance blades = 80 mm
• can be used for supply or exhaust
louvre; it is possible to combine
the two functions (supply and ex-
haust penthouse louvre, with a
none active part of 200 mm)
• equipped with a birdscreen in
galvanised steel wirenetting (12,5
x 12,5 x Ø 0,8 mm) at the inside
• weatherproof
The selection diagram is based on a max. exhaust velocity of 2 m/s on the total • removable roof-plate
louvre surface. Up to this velocity, the louvre is weatherproof. Taking into account • available with various dimensions
your air volumes, it is easy to determine the total louvre surface. • (W x H x L) > 2250 x 2150 x 2400 mm:
For detailed selection, see p. 5 070. only available with several parts

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 5 060


INTERNATIONAL

Construction Specifications description Fixing


• blades and mounting frame made Example: • by screws in the mounting frame
out of extruded aluminium
Aluminium penthouse for air exhaust, • other fixing possibilities upon re-
• roof-plate in aluminium sheet equipped with horizontal rainproof quest
blades, closed top and birdscreen.
• birdscreen in galvanised steel wire- RAL colour finishing.
netting (12,5 x 12,5 x Ø 0,8 mm)
Type: WBP
• the whole set in mill finished alumini- nom. dim.(W xH x L) ... x ... x ... mm
um or painted in RAL colour upon
request

How to order
Penthouse WBP, dimension 600 x 500 x 1200 mm (W x H x L) painted RAL 9010.

W B P 0 6 0 0 0 5 0 0 1 2 0 0

width height length

E 5 060 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

PENTHOUSE
WBP
Pressure loss
WBP

Example
5
- suppose qv = 11000 m3/h
- at vf = 3,2m/s (air velocity between the blades) the necessary
surface is: Af = 11000 m3/h = 0,96 m2
3,2 m/s x 3600 s/h
- with table (p. 5 050): nett surface of 1m2 gives a surface of
1,6 m2 or 1600 mm x 1000 mm or 2 x (L + W) x H = 1,6 m2
- suppose H = 0,6 m
L + W = 1,6 = 1,33 m
2 x 0,6
- choice: L = 800 mm and B = 500 mm
- with L and B known, the height is calculated the same way
- ∆ Pt = 23 Pa at vf = 3,2 m/s for exhaust of air (1)

Remark:
- selection to apply with a regular flow
- with combined penthouses, for supply and exhaust, there is a
non-active part with a width of 200 mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 5 070


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

SAND TRAP LOUVRE


GB900 • IB900 • WB900
Installation dimensions
Horizontal section

Application
Vertical section

5
The sand trap louvre, type -B900, is
an external louvre used in dry, dusty
or sandy environments.
Especially designed to remove the
bulk of airborne sand and dust from
inlet air whilst maintaining reason-
able air flow rate characteristics by
means of a special double U-blade
design. Sand and dust are evacu-
ated from the base of the louvre by
a special sand collection/disersion
cill, keeping maintenance to a
mini-mum.
The sand trap louvres can be used
as natural ventilators or to alleviate
the load on the main filtration
stages of air conditioning equip-
ment.

Technical information
Characteristics

• self-cleaning due to the free sand


outlet
All dimensions in mm
• sea-waterproof (IB and WB)
• available with steps of 50 mm in
length and of 1 mm in height
min L x H = 150 x 150 mm
max L x H = 2300 x 2300 mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 5 080


INTERNATIONAL

Construction Specifications description Accessories


• construction in aluminium: Example: Birdscreen: netting in galvanised steel
- U-profile - thickness 1,5 mm wire (12,5 x 12,5 x Ø 0,8 mm) at the
- mounting frame - thickness 2 mm Low maintenance aluminium sand trap back of the louvre.
- not anodised louvre with a double U-profile and a
• construction in galvanised steel: sand outlet at the base of the louvre.
thickness 1,5 mm The louvre is equipped with a bird-
• RAL colour upon request screen in galvanised steel wirenetting
• stainless steel construction-thick- (12,5 x 12,5 x Ø 0,8 mm).
ness 1,2 mm Made out of aluminium sheet.

Type: WB901
nom. dim. (L x H) … x …mm

Pressure loss

Application for a free flow or duct junc- be expected at velocities of 1,5 m/s,
tion. Indicated speeds are the speeds de-pending on sand/dust particle size.
for a nominal flow (L x H). Triple this
speed to know the speed in the slots. Selection example:
• qv = 7500 m3/h
Used in normal conditions, the sand trap • surface for v = 1,5m/s: 1,389 m2
louvres are developed for velocities up • dimensions (L x H): 1400 x 1000 mm
to 2 m/s. Velocities above 2 m/s are usu- • pressure loss at v = 1,5 m/s: 45 Pa
ally undesirable in dusty/sandy atmos-
pheres as the ability of the louvre to
remove airborne particles decreases
efficiency of approximately 40-60 % can

How to order
WB900, aluminium construction with birdscreen, dimension 450 x 400 mm.

W B 9 0 1 - - 0 4 5 0 0 4 0 0

L H

0: without birdscreen
1: with birdscreen

G: galvanised construction
I : stainless steel construction
W: aluminium construction

E 5 080 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


6
INTERNATIONAL

VAV TERMINAL BOXES


BA • BT
Installation dimensions

View inlet side View outlet side


C
øD
E

F
A 65

B 25
ø8

Side view Top view Application


40 150 150 L1
The terminal boxes BA/BT are
designed for single duct high veloci-
ty constant or variable flow rate
øD

applications and can be used both

A
in supply (BT) and exhaust (BA).
150 L The air flow rate control is pressure
independent and achieved by a
precision engineered damper which
modulates in response to a differen-
tial pressure sensor and a motorised
Size q Airflow (m3/h) A B C ØD E electronic velocity control device.
Min. Max. Nom. Direct communication is possible
between the VAV boxes and the
125 75-150 150-500 500 250 200 220 123 255 central control area.
160 89-300 300-1000 1000 300 250 270 158 255 The volume control and the com-
200 125-420 420-1400 1400 450 400 420 198 255 plete shut-off of the VAV box are
250 201-675 675-2250 2250 450 400 420 248 355
obtained by the same damper.
315 321-1080 1080-3600 3600 650 600 620 313 355
Taking into account the reduced
355 401-1350 1350-4500 4500 655 605 625 353 410
400 535-1800 1800-6000 6000 700 650 670 398 455 pressure loss in the damper, the
boxes need a minimum of inlet pres-
sure which results in remarkable sav-

6
Size F G L L1
ings in the total energy require-
125 200 220 1200 1350 ments.
160 200 220 1200 1350
200 200 220 1200 1350
250 300 320 1500 1650
315 300 320 1500 1650
Technical information
355 355 375 1800 1950
400 400 420 1800 1950 Characteristics

All dimensions in mm • designed for flow rates from 75 up


to 6000 m3/h
• available in 7 sizes
• standard equipped with silencer;
secondary silencer available
• optionally, a heat exchanger can
be mounted on the box outlet
• Casing air leakage rate complies
with:
- DIN V 24194 Teil 2 class III
- EN NBN 1751 class A&B
- EN13779 and NBN 12237 class
A&B
- specifications 105 of 1990 class
A&B

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 6 010


INTERNATIONAL

• Control damper leakage complies - In case of constant flow rate con- Specifications description
with: EN NBN 1751 class 1, 2 and 3 trol (CAV), indicate requested con-
stant flow rate Example:
Controls - documentation and wiring dia-
gram available upon simple re- VAV box in galvanised steel sheet,
• each VAV box is equipped with an quest equipped with electronic Belimo
electronic velocity regulator and (LMV-D2 MP) controller, built-in alu-
motor; together with the pressure dif- Construction minium pressure sensor and inte-
ferential sensor it guarantees a pres- grated silencer. Internal insulation is
sure independent variable or con- • casing in galvanised steel sheet standard. The aluminium single
stant air flow • Internal accoustic and thermal blade damper has lubricant-free
• all controls are mounted externally or gassfibre insulation, coated to pre- bearings.
easy access vent erosion
• motor: Belimo Compact LMV-D2 MP • air flow control damper in extruded Type BT . . . B5
power supply: 24 VAC/DC aluminium with keyed shaft; internal Size … mm
- control signal 0-10 VDC/2-10 VDC pivot points have lubricant-free
- integrated regulator bearings
- min.and max. air flow rates (VAV) to • differential pressure sensor in alu-
Accessories
indicate by order; on site adjust- minium; connection sensor-control- Water coils:
ment possible ler by plastic tubes • made out of copper tubes and
aluminium fins - fin pitch = 3,2 mm
• mounted in a galvanised frame,
with flanges, and can be bolted
on the VAV box outlet; this way
the coils are easy to remove with-
out damaging the VAV box
How to order • the coils have standard female
screw-thread.
VAV-box for supply, size 160 mm, left hand side construction, without • coils are available with 2 or 3 rows
reheating coil. and designed for hot water up to
115°C at a working pressure of 16
1) VAV terminal unit: bar and tested to a pressure of 30
bar at 20°C
B T L 0 0 B 5 0 1 6 0 - - - - • coils are always delivered sepa-
rately, not mounted
size
Silencers:
Control Belimo LMV-D2 MP • to reduce the noise on the low
pressure side, a secondary silen-
0: without water coils cer can be added to the VAV
2: 2 rows box
3: 3 rows • this silencer is made out of gal-
0: - vanised steel sheet with internal
W: hot water acoustic insulation. Complete
E: electric with flanges for bolting on to VAV
box and ductwork from the VAV
L: left hand side construction box.
R: right hand side construction
Fixing
T: supply • for easy connection to low veloc-
A: return ity ductwork, rectangular outlets
are fitted with 25 mm flange
• equipped with 4 mounting straps
• controls can be mounted on the
right or left side of the box, posi-
tion to be confirmed at time of
order

Right hand side construction Left hand side construction


2) Secondary silencer :

U F B - - - - 0 1 6 0 - - - -

size VAV unit

E 6 010 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Controls: example: Supply - Return terminal units

The classic VAV-system (Variable Air Volume) belongs to the


so called “air-only” group of design. This means that the
required thermal performance is achieved through the sup-
ply air.
The temperature controller (T) measures the actual tempera-
ture in the room, compares it to the temperature setpoint
and feeds this information (air volume demand) to the VAV
air volume controller (R).
This way the matching to the actual thermal load of the
room is obtained by Luculating (varying) the volume of the
supply air remains constant and the volume of the air deli-
vered by the fan is reduced.
The application of these systems allows individual room pres-
sure as well as zone control, including supply-air and/or
exhaust-air follow-up.
This solution meets the tough demands set by experienced
designers: independency of supply pressure fluctuations,
minimal supply pressure required, accurate room pressure
conditions, possibility for override need-based controls, mas-
ter slave combinations, etc.

Secondary silencers

Nom. E B H b h L
125 255 200 200 220 220 1000
160 255 250 200 270 220 1000 VAV- SILENCER
200 255 400 200 420 220 1000
250 355 400 300 420 320 1500 BOX
315 355 600 300 620 320 1500
355 410 605 355 625 375 1500
400 455 650 400 670 420 1500

dB/Okt.
Size 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz
125
160 -3 -7 -12 -15 -20 -20 -15
200
250
315 -4 -12 -20 -25 -23 -22 -15
355
400

All dimensions in mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 6 011


INTERNATIONAL

Water coils

Ø Nom. 125 160 200 250 315 355 400


B 200 250 400 400 600 605 650
H 200 200 200 300 300 355 400
b 220 270 420 420 620 625 670
h 220 220 220 320 320 375 420
G 2R 1/2” 1/2” 3/4” 3/4” 3/4” 3/4” 3/4”
G 3R 1/2” 3/4” 3/4” 3/4” 3/4” 3/4” 3/4” All dimensions in mm

Selection chart reheating coil - example

3RR : 250.315.355
3RR : 160
3RR : 200

3RR : 125

0,033

Data:
- qv = 600 m3/h in VAV terminal unit size
160 mm
- air temperature in (tLi) 18°C
- average water temperature (twg): 60°C
- requested air temperature differential:
∆ 14°K.

Solution:
- Air velocity through coil: 3,5 m/s
- the intersection of the 2 lines in the
2-rowed coil area (2R)
- Waterflow qv (l/s) x ∆ t (air)
(mass) mw (kg/s) = —————————3
t (water) x 3,5 x 10

167 x 14
= —————— = 0,033
20 x 3,5 x 103

- Pressure drop water side:


∆ pw = 5 kPa

E 6 011 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

VAV TERMINAL BOXES


BA • BT

Air Generated Noise - Supply


SIZE qv ps = 100 Pa (Lw) ps = 200 Pa (Lw)
m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
200 0,056 37 33 24 18 < < < 15 40 35 25 20 16 < < 18
125 300 0,083 40 36 27 22 17 < < 18 42 38 30 24 19 15 < 20
400 0,111 44 39 31 26 20 < < 21 46 41 34 28 22 17 15 23
500 0,139 46 42 35 30 24 < < 24 48 44 38 31 25 18 15 26
m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
200 0,056 37 33 26 18 < < < 15 41 35 27 20 17 16 < 17
160 400 0,111 38 33 29 20 < < < 17 41 35 30 26 17 < < 18
600 0,167 45 39 35 27 18 < < 23 48 41 36 29 21 18 18 24
800 0,222 51 44 40 30 25 17 15 28 53 46 41 32 26 21 20 29
m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
600 0,167 39 33 28 24 16 15 18 17 41 35 28 26 18 16 18 18
200 800 0,222 43 34 31 22 17 15 18 18 44 37 33 27 20 17 20 20
1000 0,278 46 40 35 27 19 16 19 22 48 41 36 29 21 18 20 22
1400 0,389 52 45 41 31 25 18 20 28 54 47 42 33 26 22 22 29

SIZE qv ps = 500 Pa (Lw) ps = 750 Pa (Lw)


m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
200 0,056 43 39 30 25 22 20 17 21 44 43 32 26 22 20 19 26
125 300 0,083 47 41 34 26 23 19 18 24 48 44 35 28 24 20 18 27
400 0,111 50 45 38 32 26 22 20 27 51 47 40 33 27 24 22 30
500 0,139 53 48 42 36 28 23 21 31 54 50 44 37 30 25 22 33
m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
200 0,056 43 40 31 22 22 21 19 22 43 40 32 24 24 22 21 22
160 400 0,111 45 40 33 27 22 23 20 22 46 41 36 29 24 23 24 25
600 0,167 53 45 40 35 29 26 25 28 54 47 42 37 31 27 28 30
800 0,222 58 50 46 38 32 28 30 34 58 52 47 39 34 28 31 35
m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
600 0,167 47 40 36 30 23 20 25 24 49 43 38 32 24 23 27 26
200 800 0,222 49 44 40 33 27 20 23 28 50 46 42 36 29 24 27 30
1000 0,278 55 46 44 35 28 22 24 32 56 49 44 38 30 27 28 32
1400 0,389 59 53 48 39 31 29 31 36 60 55 49 41 34 29 32 38

SIZE qv ps = 100 Pa (Lw) ps = 200 Pa (Lw)


m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
1400 0,389 46 38 31 26 19 16 20 20 50 41 35 29 22 20 25 23
1600 0,440 47 42 35 28 22 18 21 23 50 44 38 32 26 25 25 25
250 1800 0,500 50 44 35 28 22 19 21 26 52 46 39 32 26 25 28 28
2000 0,556 53 46 39 31 25 21 23 27 54 46 40 33 28 26 28 28

m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
1200 0,333 45 37 29 23 16 15 < 18 48 41 32 25 20 20 18 22

6
1800 0,500 45 38 31 25 19 15 18 20 48 42 33 27 23 20 21 24
315 2400 0,667 48 41 34 27 22 20 19 24 51 45 37 30 27 24 23 28
3000 0,833 52 46 36 30 25 18 18 28 54 48 42 34 30 28 29 31
3600 1,000 55 49 40 34 28 21 21 31 57 51 46 37 34 32 31 33
m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
1500 0,417 45 38 29 24 19 17 15 20 48 42 32 26 23 22 20 24
2000 0,556 49 37 28 25 20 17 15 23 52 43 33 27 25 23 21 26
355 2600 0,722 52 40 31 26 22 20 19 27 55 44 33 28 26 25 25 30
3600 1,000 55 43 33 29 25 22 21 30 57 48 36 32 30 27 27 32
4500 1,250 57 50 38 34 29 20 20 33 59 53 40 36 34 30 29 36
m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
2600 0,722 47 36 26 24 20 17 < 21 50 41 32 26 24 23 22 23
400 3600 1,000 53 41 32 26 23 20 20 27 56 46 34 29 26 25 25 31
4500 1,250 54 44 34 30 25 23 22 28 57 48 37 32 29 27 27 32
6000 1,667 57 51 38 35 31 24 23 34 60 54 40 37 35 30 30 37

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 6 020


INTERNATIONAL

SIZE qv ps = 500 Pa (Lw) ps = 750 Pa (Lw)


m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
1400 0,389 55 46 42 37 29 29 31 31 55 48 42 38 34 33 33 31
1600 0,440 55 47 42 37 30 29 33 30 55 49 44 39 35 33 34 32
250 1800 0,500 56 49 43 39 33 31 35 32 57 52 45 40 36 34 38 35
2000 0,556 58 52 44 40 34 33 36 35 59 54 47 42 37 36 39 37

m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
1200 0,333 52 45 35 31 27 26 25 27 54 47 37 34 29 28 27 30
1800 0,500 53 46 38 31 28 28 30 29 56 50 41 36 32 32 34 33
315 2400 0,667 56 50 42 36 33 31 30 33 58 52 45 39 35 34 34 35
3000 0,833 59 54 47 39 36 34 33 37 61 56 49 42 38 37 36 39
3600 1,000 62 57 50 40 39 37 37 40 64 60 51 44 41 39 39 43
m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
1500 0,417 55 48 36 31 29 30 28 30 58 51 38 33 32 31 30 33
2000 0,556 49 37 28 25 20 17 15 23 52 43 33 27 25 23 21 26
355 2600 0,722 61 52 40 34 30 29 28 35 63 54 44 37 32 31 30 38
3600 1,000 62 55 44 38 34 30 29 38 64 58 48 40 36 32 32 41
4500 1,250 66 60 51 43 40 37 38 44 67 61 54 45 42 38 40 45
m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
2600 0,722 57 49 38 31 29 28 27 32 58 52 40 33 30 29 28 33
400 3600 1,000 62 53 40 35 32 28 27 37 63 55 44 37 32 29 28 39
4500 1,250 63 53 44 39 33 29 29 38 64 58 47 40 35 32 32 40
6000 1,667 65 59 50 43 40 36 36 42 67 60 51 44 42 37 37 43

Casing radiated Noise - Supply


SIZE qv ps = 100 Pa (Lw) ps = 200 Pa (Lw)
m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
200 0,056 41 34 23 17 15 < < 15 45 35 25 18 15 15 < 18
125 300 0,083 44 38 27 21 16 15 < 20 47 38 30 22 17 20 18 21
400 0,111 47 40 30 25 18 19 < 22 51 41 34 26 20 23 20 25
500 0,139 51 43 36 29 21 19 16 25 53 44 38 30 23 24 20 27
m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
200 0,056 37 35 26 20 20 16 < 16 41 37 28 23 25 21 15 20
160 400 0,111 39 35 27 21 23 19 15 17 40 35 29 28 24 20 17 20
600 0,167 45 40 34 28 26 21 20 22 48 41 36 31 29 23 22 24
800 0,222 49 44 40 32 30 20 19 27 52 46 42 34 33 26 24 30
m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
600 0,167 43 38 30 29 25 22 21 20 46 40 31 32 28 24 22 23
200 800 0,222 46 40 34 28 25 21 21 22 49 42 35 32 29 24 24 24
1000 0,278 50 44 38 31 28 23 22 25 53 46 39 35 31 26 25 28
1400 0,389 56 49 42 36 35 24 23 31 59 52 44 39 35 28 26 35

SIZE qv ps = 500 Pa (Lw) ps = 750 Pa (Lw)


m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
200 0,056 48 39 34 30 25 26 22 23 49 42 36 31 28 25 25 24
125 300 0,083 52 41 38 31 26 25 23 26 53 45 41 33 30 25 25 29
400 0,111 55 45 42 37 29 28 25 29 56 47 44 41 34 28 27 29
500 0,139 58 48 46 41 31 29 26 34 60 50 47 42 37 30 28 33
m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
200 0,056 44 41 32 29 27 27 23 22 45 42 34 30 30 29 25 23
160 400 0,111 45 40 33 29 30 28 24 22 47 41 36 31 31 30 27 24
600 0,167 53 45 41 37 37 31 29 28 53 46 42 40 38 32 30 32
800 0,222 58 50 47 40 40 33 33 35 58 51 47 43 41 37 34 36
m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
600 0,167 52 45 39 36 33 27 29 28 53 47 41 40 34 30 30 32
200 800 0,222 54 49 43 39 37 28 28 32 54 50 44 42 37 33 32 32
1000 0,278 60 51 47 41 35 30 29 35 61 53 47 43 37 35 34 35
1400 0,389 63 58 51 44 41 36 36 41 64 59 51 46 42 37 35 41

E 6 020 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

SIZE qv ps = 100 Pa (Lw) ps = 200 Pa (Lw)


m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
1400 0,389 45 39 34 29 23 18 16 22 50 42 38 33 26 22 23 26
1600 0,440 47 42 37 32 25 23 20 25 50 45 41 36 30 27 25 28
250 1800 0,500 49 44 39 33 27 25 23 26 52 47 43 36 30 27 27 31
2000 0,556 51 46 41 36 28 26 24 29 53 48 42 38 32 28 28 30

m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
1200 0,333 45 38 31 28 22 19 17 20 48 42 34 30 25 22 28 24
1800 0,500 47 40 33 30 25 22 21 22 48 43 35 32 28 22 21 26
315 2400 0,667 49 45 36 33 29 26 23 26 51 46 39 35 33 26 23 28
3000 0,833 52 48 39 35 31 27 26 30 54 49 44 39 35 30 28 32
3600 1,000 55 50 42 39 34 30 28 32 57 52 48 42 39 34 31 36
m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
1500 0,417 46 37 32 27 22 19 19 20 47 40 33 28 26 22 20 22
2000 0,556 50 39 34 29 24 22 20 23 51 41 35 30 28 24 22 26
355 2600 0,722 53 41 34 30 29 25 22 26 54 43 35 31 29 26 24 28
3600 1,000 54 46 37 34 31 26 24 28 56 47 38 35 33 28 26 31
4500 1,250 57 51 40 38 34 30 27 33 58 52 42 39 36 31 28 35
m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
2600 0,722 48 35 29 27 24 20 18 22 49 39 33 28 27 23 22 23
400 3600 1,000 54 43 35 29 28 25 24 28 55 44 35 31 29 26 24 29
4500 1,250 53 47 37 34 30 27 25 29 56 47 39 35 32 28 26 31
6000 1,667 57 52 42 39 36 32 29 35 59 53 42 40 37 31 28 36

SIZE qv ps = 500 Pa (Lw) ps = 750 Pa (Lw)


m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
1400 0,389 55 47 45 41 33 31 30 33 56 49 46 48 36 33 33 34
1600 0,440 55 48 45 41 34 31 31 33 56 49 47 42 37 34 33 35
250 1800 0,500 56 50 47 44 37 34 34 36 56 52 48 44 38 35 35 36
2000 0,556 58 53 47 43 38 33 33 36 58 54 49 45 40 39 37 37

m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
1200 0,333 52 46 37 36 32 28 25 27 53 47 39 38 35 31 30 30
1800 0,500 43 47 40 36 33 30 30 29 56 50 43 40 38 34 33 33
315 2400 0,667 56 51 44 41 35 33 30 34 60 56 47 46 42 37 35 37
3000 0,833 59 55 49 44 41 35 33 38 62 58 51 47 43 39 37 39
3600 1,000 62 58 52 45 44 39 37 41 64 60 53 48 46 41 39 43
m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
1500 0,417 54 47 37 33 31 29 25 29 56 49 41 35 32 30 27 31
2000 0,556 57 49 40 35 32 30 26 32 59 52 45 37 34 32 28 34
355 2600 0,722 60 52 42 37 33 30 27 36 61 54 49 40 36 32 28 37
3600 1,000 61 55 46 41 34 31 28 38 62 57 52 44 39 34 32 40
4500 1,250 63 58 51 45 42 36 34 41 64 59 54 47 43 37 36 42
m3/h m3/s 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 NR
2600 0,722 57 48 40 33 31 27 24 32 56 50 43 35 32 30 25 33
400 3600 1,000 62 52 42 38 34 27 25 37 61 54 47 40 35 28 26 37
4500 1,250 63 52 46 42 34 30 28 38 62 57 50 44 38 34 34 40
6000 1,667 64 58 52 45 42 35 32 41 64 58 51 46 43 42 38 41

Noise level NR with 8dB room attenuation

Measurement of insertion loss Measurement of radiated noise Measurement of air generated noise

Insertion loss
dB/Okt.
Size 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz
125
160 18 26 37 42 39 32 23
200
250
315 24 30 45 46 43 39 33
355
400

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 6 021


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

VAV CIRCULAR TERMINAL BOXES


BR
Installation dimensions

400

50 50

-+

ØD
NMV-D2 GD
D

Application
88 14 125
The circular terminal boxes BR are
designed for single duct high
velocity constant or variable flow
rate applications and can be used
both in supply (BRT) and exhaust air
(BRA). The air flow rate control is
Regenerated noise = air generated noise + casing pressure independent and achie-
radiated noise ved by a precision engineered
damper which modulates in res-
Pressure loss dPs (Pa) ponse to a differential pressure sen-
Size (mm) Air flow sor and a motorised electronic
velocity control device.
(m3/h) 100 Pa 250 Pa 500 Pa
Direct communication is possible
between the VAV boxes and the
100 150 35 43 49 central control area.
200 38 46 52 The volume control and the com-
300 42 50 56 plete shut-off of the VAV box are
obtained by the same damper.
125 200 34 43 50 Taking into account the reduced
300 40 46 52 pressure loss in the damper, the

6
400 43 51 54 boxes need a minimum of inlet
pressure which results in remarkable
160 300 35 44 49 savings in the total energy require-
500 41 46 53 ments.
700 46 51 56

200 600 37 46 52 Technical information


800 40 48 53
1200 47 52 58
Characteristics
250 900 35 47 54
• designed for flow rates from 50
1200 38 48 56
up to 3600 m3/h
1500 42 50 58
• available in 6 sizes
315 1200 35 46 54
1900 39 48 55
2500 44 52 59

Sound power level Lw in Nr values, with 8 dB room attenuation.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 6 030


INTERNATIONAL

Controls Construction Specifications description


• each VAV box is equipped with an • casing in galvanised steel sheet Example:
electronic velocity regulator and • air flow control damper in extruded
motor; together with the differential aluminium with keyed shaft; internal VAV box in galvanised steel sheet,
pressure sensor it guarantees a pres- pivot points have lubricant-free bear- equipped with electronic Belimo
sure independent variable or con- ings (LMV-D2 MP) controller, and a built-
stant air flow. • differential pressure sensor in alumini- in aluminium differential pressure
• all controls are mounted externally um; connection sensor-controller by sensor. The aluminium single blade
for easy access plastic tubes damper has lubricant-free bear-
• motor: Belimo Compact LMV-D2 MP • insulated casing upon request ings.
- power supply: 24 VAC/DC
- control signal 0-10 VDC Type BR . . . B5
Size … mm
- integrated regulator
- min. or max. air flow rates (VAV) to
indicate by order; adjustment al-
ways possible on site
- in case of constant flow rate con-
trol (CAV), indicate requested con-
stant flow rate
- documentation and wiring diagram
available upon simple request

How to order
VAV-box for supply, size 160 mm

B R T 0 0 B 5 0 1 6 0 - - - -

size

Control Belimo LMV-D2 MP

T: supply
A: exhaust

E 6 030 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


7
INTERNATIONAL

JET DIFFUSERS
JD

Installation dimensions
JD110

Application
The jet diffusers, type JD, are espe-
cially developed for large and high
areas such as concert halls, the-
JD120 aters, galleries, airports, shopping
centres, industrial plants etc.
Through their aerodynamic design
they ensure a reduced noise level
and even a long throw at high out-
let velocities. In all versions, the jet is
adjustable over 360°.
As these jet diffusers handle differ-
ent supply air temperatures, the jet
can be oriented upwards or down-
wards (heating or cooling mode).
Orientation manually or with servo-
motor.

Technical information
Characteristics
JD130
• adjustable over 60°
(cooling - heating)





rotates through 360°
high induction level
low noise level
available with 2 or 3 jet diffusers
7
integrated into one panel
ØN ØA ØB C D E ØF G H J K (JD210 & JD310)
• panel includes type JD110 jet dif-
160 85 248 120 51 225 200 101 110 110 196
200 110 296 150 66 270 245 116 125 140 238 fusers
250 140 363 190 81 320 295 131 140 180 288 • motorised construction available
315 175 448 255 90 390 360 155 165 245 355
400 220 600 290 120 570 450 190 200 280 440
All dimensions in mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 7 010


INTERNATIONAL

Construction Specifications description Fixing


painted white (RAL 9010) Example: • jet diffuser: different models

Jet diffuser for wall or duct mounting - JD110: wall fixing with screws
flat mounting flange and adjustable directly on duct
jet.
Special scaling between sphere and
box. Aerodynamic design for a re-
duced noise level.
The diffuser is painted white (RAL 9010).

Type: JD110
Size … mm

- JD120: wall fixing with screws,


connection with flex ducts

- JD140B3: with Belimo motor LM24A-SR


Ø Nom

60°

ØC
A B

- JD130: direct mounting on


Ø Nom A B ØC fixed circular ducts

160 271 110 196

200 283 140 238

250 293 180 288

315 315 245 355 • panel: to ease the simultaneous


mounting of different jet diffusers
400 340 280 440 side by side on a wall or a duct
possibility there is to get 2 or 3 jet
diffusers pre-mounted on one
panel. The panel is fixed by
How to order screws onto the wall or the
panel.
JD110, size 250 mm

J D 1 1 0 - - 0 2 5 0 - - - -

size
- : without motor
B3: Belimo motor LM24A-SR

1: wall fixing directly on duct


2: wall fixing, connection with flex ducts
3: direct mounting on circular ducts
4: motorised construction (without motor)

1: jet diffuser only


2: panel with 2 diffusers
3: panel with 3 diffuserss

E 7 010 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

JET DIFFUSERS
JD210 • JD310

Installation dimensions
JD210

JD310

Size L1 L2 H A B C D E F G
160 700 1050 350 335 350 320 340 36 134 170
200 800 1200 400 385 400 370 390 51 164 215
250 900 1350 450 435 450 420 440 66 204 270
315 1040 1560 520 510 520 490 510 76 269 345
400 1250 1875 625 610 625 595 615 106 304 410
All dimensions in mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 7 020


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


8
INTERNATIONAL

PLENUM BOX
DP100S • DP100T
Installation dimensions
DP100S DP100T
Ø D2
T

H1

H2
Nom.

Nom. + 26

Nom. + 26

45
Ø D1

Application
The plenum box DP100 is used for instal-
lation with square or rectangular dif-
fusers and grilles. Both fixed mounting
Nom. and central screw fixing possible. For an
even air pattern through the diffuser,
the plenum can be equipped with a
perforated diffusor plate. Flow control is
DP120S DP120T possible because of a perforated
Nom. size
Nom. size
damper in the inlet spigot of the
Ø D2
plenum.
The plenum can be delivered with side
Ø D1

or top entry, insulated plenum boxes


H3 = ØD + 150

can be supplied if required.


H3 = 200

Technical information
Characteristics

All dimensions in mm • square or rectangular


• fixed mounting on the diffuser or
How to order supplied with a mounting support for
central screw fixing (only DP100S)
DP100 with side entry and damper, insulated, for a diffuser with nominal • circular side or top entry
dimensions 300 x 300 mm • perforated damper in inlet spigot
possible
D P 1 0 1 S G 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 • internal perforated air diffusion
sheet available; only DP100S
L H • provided with mounting eyes (ø 7
- : non-insulated plenum mm), mounting straps available up-
G: internally insulated plenum on request
H: plenum insulated at the top and on • plenum can be internally insulated
the opposite side of the inlet • other dimensions available

8
(only side entry)
S: side entry Construction
T: top entry
0: without damper Galvanised steel sheet with PVC
1: with damper in inlet spigot inlet spigot 80, 125, 160, 200 and
0: without perforated diffusor plate 250 mm
1: with perforated sheet (only S)
2: without perforated sheet, with mounting support
for central screw fixing (only S)
3: with perforated sheet, with mounting support for
central screw fixing (only S)

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 8 010


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Delivery possibilities • DP120S: plenum box with mount-


ing support for central screw fixing
Example: • DP100S/DP100T: plenum box for fixed
• DP121S: DP120S with damper in
mounting on diffusers or grilles
Insulated plenum box with side entry, the inlet spigot
supplied with damper and perforated • DP101S/DP101T: DP100S/DP100T with
plate for an optimal air pattern. • DP130S: DP120S with perforated
damper in the inlet spigot
The plenum is supplied with a mounting plate
support for central screw fixing and • DP110S: DP100S with perforated diffu-
can be mounted with mounting straps. • DP131S: DP120S with damper and
sor plate
perforated plate
Type: DP131SG • DP111S: DP100S with damper and
Dim. … x … mm • DP1.SG/DP100TG/DP101TG: inter-
perforated plate
nal insulated plenum box

Square plenum box with side or top entry Rectangular plenum box with side entry

Nom. ØD1 · ØD2 H1 H2 (1) H3 Nom. ØD1 T H1


150 125 225 100 295 200 x 100 80 55 230
200 160 260 130 - 250 x 100 100 65 250
225 200 300 150 370 250 x 150 125 77 275
250 200 300 150 - 300 x 100 100 65 250
300 200 300 150 370 300 x 150 125 77 275
350 250 350 175 - 300 x 200 160 95 300
375 315 415 210 485 400 x 100 125 77 275
400 315 415 210 - 400 x 150 160 95 300
450 315 415 210 485 400 x 200 200 115 350
500 355 455 230 - 500 x 100 160 95 300
525 400 500 250 - 500 x 150 200 115 350
600 400 500 250 - 500 x 200 250 140 400
500 x 300 315 172 450
(1): dimension H2 with damper 600 x 100 160 95 300
without damper, height H2 = 100 mm 600 x 150 200 115 350
600 x 200 250 140 400
All dimensions in mm 600 x 300 355 192 500
800 x 75 160 95 300
800 x 100 200 115 350
800 x 150 250 140 400
800 x 200 315 172 450
800 x 300 400 215 550
1000 x 75 200 115 350
1000 x 100 250 140 400
1000 x 150 315 172 450
1000 x 200 355 192 500
1000 x 300 400 215 550
1000 x 600 500 265 650
1500 x 150 400 215 550
1500 x 200 400 215 550

E 8 010 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

PLENUM BOX FOR CIRCULAR CEILING DIFFUSER


DP150S
Installation dimensions

Application
The plenum DP150S with or without
damper in the inlet spigot is used for
mounting on diffuser CE100/DE100.
The plenum is optional insulation.

Technical information
Size A B ØC ØD E Characteristics
160 349 185 160 123 200
• circular side entry
200 399 220 200 158 218
• perforated damper possible in the
250 474 260 250 198 238 inlet spigot
315 524 310 315 248 263 • plenum can be internally insulated
355 524 310 355 248 263
400 624 375 400 313 296
450 724 415 450 353 316 Construction
500 824 460 500 398 338
630 1024 560 630 498 388 provided with mounting eyes (ø 7
mm), mounting straps available
All dimensions in mm upon request, galvanised steel sheet

8
Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 8 020
INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Delivery possibilities


Example: • DP150S: plenum with side entry

Insulated plenum box for diffuser • DP151S: DP150S with damper


CE100/DE100 with side entry supplied
with damper. • DP150SG: insulated plenum with
Made out of galvanised steel sheet. side entry

Type: DP151SG • DP151SG: DP150SG with damper


Size … mm

How to order
DP150 with side entry and damper, insulated, for DE100 size 250 mm.

D P 1 5 1 S G 0 2 5 0 0 0 0 0

ceiling diffuser size

- : non insulated plenum


G: internally insulated plenum

S: side entry

0: without damper
1: with damper in inlet spigot

5: plenum for CE100/DE100

E 8 020 Specifications subject to change © 2009


INTERNATIONAL

DAMPER
KF100
Installation dimensions
KF100
100

H + 80
H

Application
The damper, type KF100, is used for
airconditioning installations and
units such as damper and/or stop
L
valve. The duct damper can be
L + 80
equipped with a manual or mo-
torised control system to adjust the
120
optimum air flow.

Technical information
KF150
Characteristics

• blade shafts in natural polyamide


bearings
• PVC linkage
• opposed blades - blades on 100
or 150 mm to centre
• available in steps of:
H + 80

100 mm resp. 150 mm for damper


150

with blade distance of 100 mm


resp. 150 mm
min L = 210 mm, max L = 1210 mm
min H = 210 mm, max H = 1210
mm
• t°: - 20°C up to + 75°C
L • all controls mounted out of the
L + 80
airflow
• manual control: regulation quad-
180
rant with operating handle
• motorised control: Belimo motor
All dimensions in mm - 24 V of 220 V
- type dependent on damper
dimensions
- optional spring return

8
Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 8 029
INTERNATIONAL

- open/close or modulating Specifications description Fixing


- optional auxiliary switch
Construction Example: • with factory punched screw holes
• damper can be combined with an
• blade shafts in natural polyamide Duct damper with opposed blades, external louvre (filter optional)
bearings blade pitch = 100 mm. Equipped with nominal dimension external louvre
• blades in galvanised steel sheet a handle for manual control. Con- = nom. dimension damper + 90
• mounted in a galvanised frame struction in galvanised steel sheet. mm.

Type: KF100H
Nom. dim. (L x H) … x … mm

How to order
KF100 with opposed blades; regulation quadrant with operating handle, dimen-
sions 500 x 500 mm.

K F 1 0 0 H - 0 5 0 0 0 5 0 0

L H

- : without control
H: with operating lever
B: motorised control (type depending on size
of damper)

10: blades on 100 mm to centre


15: blades on 150 mm to centre

F: frame with screw holes

E 8 029 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

DAMPER
KO100
Installation dimensions
KO100
100

H + 80
H

Application
The damper, type K0100, is used for air-
conditioning installations and units as
damper and/or stop valve.
L
The duct damper can be equipped
with a manual or motorised control to
L + 80
adjust the optimum air flow.
120
Technical information
Characteristics
KO150
• blade shafts in natural polyamide
bearings
• steel linkage
• opposed and parallel blades; on 100
or 150 mm to centre
• all controls mounted out of the air-
flow
• manual control: regulation
quadrant with operating lever
H + 80

• motorised control: Belimo motor


150

- 24 V of 220 V
- type dependent on damper di-
mensions
- optional spring return
- open/close or modulating
L
- optional auxiliary switch
• not hermetic construction:
L + 80
L ≤ 1250 mm: blades in one piece
180
L > 1250 mm: 1 (or more) mullion
• hermetic construction:
L< 1000 mm: blades in one piece
All dimensions in mm L ≥ 1000 mm: 1 (or more) mullion

8
Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 8 030
INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Accessories Fixing


Construction Example: • version with factory punched
screw holes
• blade shafts in natural polyamide Duct damper with opposed blades, • the damper can be combined
bearings blade pitch = 100 mm. Equipped with with an external louvre (filter op-
• galvanised steel sheet blades a quadrant for manual control. Non- tional).
• mounted in a galvanised frame airtight construction in galvanised steel Nom. dimension external louvre =
sheet. nom. dimension damper + 90
mm.
Type: KO101GS
Nom. dim. (L x H) … x … mm

How to order
KO100 with opposed blades; regulation quadrant with operating lever and
reading, dimensions 800 x 610 mm.

K O 1 0 1 G S 0 8 0 0 0 6 1 0

L H
G: with contraring turning blades
P: with parallel turning blades
0: without control
1: quadrant with operating lever and reading
2: motorised control
4: mounting sheet for motor
10: blades on100 mm to centre
15: blades on150 mm to centre

O: frame without screw holes


M: frame without screw holes + hermetic

E 8 030 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

DAMPER
K-100
Motor torque
KO100 • KF100 KM100

Pressure loss Working area

A: Recommended
working area
B: Accidental wor-
king area

0° = open

Leakage
KM100

Example: H = 900 mm, L = 1000 mm,


∆ P = 500 Pa, leakage = 180 m3/h

8
Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 8 031
INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

ALUMINIUM PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPER


VF045
Installation dimensions

VF045

Nom + 10

36
4,5 x 9
45
Nom + 20
Nom + 40

Nom + 42
Nom.

Application
Damper can be used as exhaust
damper for cooker hood, exhaust
36

ventilators in kitchens and sanitary


installations.
9,4

20 Nom + 42

Technical information
Characteristics

• blades with acoustic closing strap


for backfall
• rotating blades with nylon bearings
• available square nominal sizes:
80, 125, 170, 215, 260, 305 or 350
mm

Construction

• extruded aluminium, standard na-


tural tone anodised 15 micron
• other anodisations: Brown
(1002,5M) and black (1004M)
• upon request painted in RAL co-
lours

8
Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 8 049
INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Fixing


Example: • Damper used for wall mounting
• 4 screw holes in the frame, screws
Aluminium relief damper provided with and plugs included
blades with an acoustic closing strap,
rotating in a nylon bearing.
Standard natural tone anodised.

Type: VF045
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm

How to order
VF045, dimension 170 x 170 mm

V F 0 4 5 - F 0 1 7 0 0 1 7 0

L H

- : natural tone anodised


F: painted in RAL-colour

45: blades in steps of 45 mm

F: screw fixing

E 8 049 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPER


-F750 • -U750
Installation dimensions

VF750 NU750

Application
The positive (V-) and negative (N-)
dampers for mounting in the wall or
between two ducts are used as
automatic operating dampers of
air diffusers in airconditioning instal-
lations to prevent undesirable air
flows.

Technical information
Characteristics
All dimensions in mm
• blades with acoustic joint for re-
turn
Pressure loss • smoothly rotating nylon bushing
blades
• over rotation of blades is prevent-
ed by a stop
• distance blades = 75 mm
• max. deflection of the blades
(completely open) = 70 mm
• available in steps of 25 mm, as
well in length as in height
min L = 200 mm, max L = 1800 mm
= Recommended air min H = 200 mm, max H = 1800
velocities mm
• nom. L ≤ 625: no partition
∆ pt = Total pressure loss in Pa
650 m nom. L ≤ 1225: 1 partition
vf = Air velocity in the duct 1250 m nom. L ≤ 1800: 2 partitions
(m/s)
Construction

• NF750/VF750:
extruded aluminium frame, natur-

8
al tone anodised; blades in alu-
minium sheet
• NU750/VU750: galvanised steel
sheet U-frame; aluminium sheet
blades

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 8 050


INTERNATIONAL

Specifications description Fixing Delivery possibilities


Example: • NF750/VF750: • NF750:
screw fixing in -F750 version, the - negative pressure damper for
Aluminium pressure relief damper, screw holes have already been fac- wall fixing
equipped with blades with acoustic tory drilled - with screw holes in frame
joint and rotating nylon bushings. In
order to prevent the blades from over • NU750/VU750: • VF750:
rotating, a blade stop has been pro- construction for mounting between - positive pressure damper for
vided. two ducts; the frame has to be wall fixing
drilled on site - with screw holes in frame
Type: VF750
nom. dim. (L x H) ... x ... mm • NU750:
- negative pressure damper fixed
Combination of a positive/negative pressure damper with external in U-frame for duct mounting or
on a louvre
louvre - without screw holes in frame
.... + VU750 .... + NU750
• VU750:
- positive pressure damper fixed
in U-frame for mounting on duct
or louvre
- without screw holes in frame

How to order
NF750, dimension 500 x 500 mm

N F 7 5 0 - - 0 5 0 0 0 5 0 0

L H
F: 25 mm frame with screw holes
U: damper mounted in U-frame

V: positive pressure
N: negative pressure

E 8 050 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

VALVES
V-061
Installation dimensions

VA061
øA
46
C

øB

VT061
øA

Application
The V-060 valves are used for air
exhaust and/or supply in ventilation-
systems. They can be mounted in a
wall, a ceiling or beneath exposed air
46

ducts. Their principal field of applica-


tion are offices, hospitals, nursing-
homes and hotels.
The removable interior and the smooth
surface make the valve easy to clean.
C

øB

Size 100 125 160 200


ØA 100 125 160 200
ØB 135 165 200 250

8
C 10 10 10 12

All dimensions in mm

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 8 092


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information Specifications description Fixing


Characteristics Example: • VA/VT: direct fixing into the duct
by means of friction springs or with
• VT: central disc attached to a threa- Circular steel valve for air exhaust the mounting ring. First the mount-
ded rod made out of white polypropylene with ing ring has to be fixed into the
• VA: the disc is placed in a conical adjustable interior for the regulation of duct outlet before the valve is
ring and attached to a threaded rod the air flow. pushed into the ring.
• easy air flow adjustment by continu- The desired position can be locked by
ous regulation means of a counternut. Interior is • Airflow adjustment by turning the
• easy to clean removable from mounting ring. central disc. Once the adjust-
ment is made, lock the disc by
Construction Type: VA061 means of the counternut at the
Size … mm back.
VA/VT: steel sheet, painted white (RAL
9010), mounting ring in galvanised steel Delivery possibilities
sheet
• VA061: steel exhaust valve with
mounting ring

• VT061: steel supply and exhaust


valve with mounting ring

How to order
VA061 with mounting ring, size 200 mm

Valve

V A 0 6 1 - - 0 2 0 0 - - - -

size

1: with mounting ring

A: exhaust: steel
T: exhaust and supply: steel

E 8 092 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

VALVES
VA061
Selection diagram - exhaust

D = opening for air in mm

D-
D+
Size 100 mm Size 125 mm
∆ Pt ∆ Pt
D=-14 (mm) -12 -9 -5 0 5
300 D=-15 (mm) -12 -9 -6 -3 0
300
250 250
5
200 200

150 150
NR4
NR40
100 100
90 90
80 NR35 NR35
80
70 70
60 60 NR30
NR30
50 50 NR25
40 NR25 40
NR20
30 30
NR20 NR15

20 20

15 15

10 10
0.02

0.03
0.003

0.01
0.008
0.006

0.04

0.06

0.08

qv (m3/s)
0.02

0.03
0.003

0.01
0.008
0.006

0.04

0.06

0.08

qv (m3/s)
qv (m3/h) qv (m3/h)
10

20

30

40

50
60
70
80
90
100

150

200
250
300

10

20

30

40

50
60
70
80
90
100

150

200
250
300

Size 160 mm Size 200 mm


∆ Pt ∆ Pt
D=-23 (mm) -20 -15 -10 -5 0
D=-18 (mm) -15 -10 -5 300
300
250 250 NR45

200 200 10
NR4 NR40
0
150 150
NR3 NR35
20
100 100
90 NR30
90 NR3 6
80 80
70 70 NR25
NR25 60
60
50 50 NR20
NR20
40 40

8
30 30

20 20

15 15

10 10
0.02

0.03
0.003

0.01
0.008
0.006

0.04

0.06

0.08

0.1

0.15

0.2

qv (m3/s)
0.02

0.03
0.003

0.01
0.008
0.006

0.04

0.06

0.08

qv (m3/s)
qv (m3/h) qv (m3/h)
10

20

30

40

50
60
70
80
90
100

150

200
250
300

400

500
600
700
10

20

30

40

50
60
70
80
90
100

150

200
250
300

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 8 093


INTERNATIONAL

VALVES
VT061
Selection diagram - supply

D = opening for air in mm

min.D
max.D
Size 100 mm Size 125 mm

∆ Pt ∆ Pt

D=3 (mm) 5 7 9 12 D=3 (mm) 5 7 9 12


300 300
250 250 15

200 200
NR40
150 NR40 150
NR3
NR35
100 100
90 90 NR3
80 80
NR30
70 70
60 NR2
60 NR2
50 50
NR2
40 NR2 40

30 30

20 20

15 15

10 10
0.02

0.03
0.003

0.01
0.008
0.006

0.04

0.06

0.08

0.1
0.02

0.03
0.003

0.01
0.008

qv (m3/s)
0.006

0.04

0.06

0.08

qv (m3/s)
qv (m3/h) qv (m3/h)
10

20

30

40

50
60
70
80
90
100

150

200
250
300

400

500
10

20

30

40

50
60
70
80
90
100

150

200
250
300

Size 160 mm Size 200 mm


∆ Pt ∆ Pt
D=4 (mm) 6 7 9 D=3 (mm) 5 7 9 12
300 300
250 12 250
200 200

150 150

NR4
100 100
90 NR4
NR35 90
80 80
70 NR3
70
60 NR3 60
50 NR3
50
NR2
40 40 NR2
NR20
30 30
NR2

20 20

15 15

10 10
0.02

0.03
0.003

0.01
0.008
0.006

0.04

0.06

0.08

0.1

0.15

0.2

0.02

0.03
0.003

0.01

qv (m3/s)
0.008
0.006

0.04

0.06

0.08

0.1

0.15

0.2

qv (m3/s)
qv (m3/h) qv (m3/h)
10

20

30

40

50
60
70
80
90
100

150

200
250
300

400

500
600
700

10

20

30

40

50
60
70
80
90
100

150

200
250
300

400

500
600
700

E 8 093 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

IRIS
DUCT DAMPER

Installation dimensions

Application
The duct damper IRIS has been
especially designed for easy mea-
suring and adjusting of air flows in
circular ducts. These dampers can
be used both for supply and ex-
haust. Each IRIS damper is equip-
ped with 2 manometer connections
for measuring the pressure loss/air
Size Ød ØD C L
volume.
80 79 125 50 110 With the measured pressure differ-
100 99 163 54 124 ence ∆ p, the desired air flow can
125 124 210 63 124 be read and adjusted using the dia-
150 149 230 54 124 gram. Adjustment by a handle.
160 159 230 60 124 Once adjusted it can be locked.
200 199 285 62 149
250 249 333 62 181 Technical information
300 299 405 65 181
315 314 406 63 181 Characteristics
400 399 560 70 217
500 499 644 60 217 • 2 manometer connections Ø 5
630 629 811 60 217 mm with protecting caps
800 799 1015 70 270 • measuring precision ± 5-8 %
(mounted following instructions)
All dimensions in mm • both ends provided with rubber
sealing gaskets
• synthetic adjustment button with
graduation and locking system
• Available in 13 sizes: 80, 100, 125,
150, 160, 200, 250, 300, 315, 400,
500, 630 and 800 mm

Construction

galvanised steel sheet

8
Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 8 100
INTERNATIONAL

Fixing instructions Specifications description


Example:
Direct mounting between two circular ducts
IRIS duct damper made out of gal-
vanised steel sheet and equipped
with a rubber sealing gasket on
both ends. The damper is provided
with a lockable adjustment button
and 2 manometer connections of Ø
5 mm.

Type: IRIS
Size … mm

L ≥ 4 D; air flow: ±5% L ≥ 1 D; air flow: ±8%

L ≥ 4 D; air flow: ±8% L ≥ 2 D; air flow: ±8%

How to order
IRIS duct damper, size 100 mm

I R I S - - - 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

size

E 8 100 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

IRIS
DUCT DAMPER
Pressure loss

size 100 mm size 125 mm

qv qv

size 160 mm size 200 mm

qv
qv

8
Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 8 110
INTERNATIONAL

size 250 mm size 300 mm

qv qv

size 315 mm size 400 mm

qv qv

E 8 110 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

size 500 mm size 630 mm

qv qv

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 8 111


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

AUTOMATIC FLOW CONTROL VALVE


HNDRD
Installation dimensions

Composition:

(1) body
(2) seal
(3) controller

Application
The RD flow controller is fitted in the
air duct to ensure a constant air
flow at a pressure between 50 and
200 Pa.
The controller is used for ventilation
and air-conditioning, for exhaust
and supply of air.

Fitting flow controllers in an air duct


system has various advantages in
Selection table nr. 1 comparison with other control sys-
tems (regulating valves, diaphrams,
Dimension ø D1 (mm) L1 (mm) ø D2 (mm) L2 (mm)
etc.).
ø 80 76 55 73 50
ø 100 95 60 93 55 • Setting and adjusting the installa-
ø 125 120 60 117 56 tion is not necessary.
ø 160 156 120 152 82 • The air flow remains constant, irre-
ø 200 196 120 192 82 spective of pressure fluctuations
ø 250 244 120 242 82 in the air ducts

Selection table nr. 2


RD Air flow (m3/h)
ø 80 15 30 45 50 60
ø 100 15 30 45 50 60 75 90 100
ø 125 15 30 45 50 60 75 90 100 120 150 180
ø 160 120 150 180 210 240 270 300
ø 200 210 240 270 300 350 400 450 500
ø 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700

8
Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 8 120
INTERNATIONAL

Technical information Fixing


Characteristics: • The flow controller is fitted by simply
inserting it in the air duct. A brush seal
• made of class M1 synthetic material ensures tightness.
• temperature limit = 60°C • When the controller is connected to a
• operating pressure = 50 to 200 Pa for grille, the minimum distance between
an air flow between 15 and 500 m3/h, the grille and the controller must at
and 80 to 200 Pa for larger air flows least be equal to the exhaust diameter
and three times the supply diameter.
• The air direction indicated on the bush-
ing must be respected.
• The controller must remain accessible
so that necessary maintenance can be
carried out.

Flow controller supply Flow controller exhaust

3xD 1xD

How to order
Automatic flow control valve, size 100 mm, for an air flow of 60 m3/h.

H N D R D 0 1 0 0 0 0 6 0
size air flow

E 8 120 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

AUTOMATIC FLOW CONTROL VALVE


HNDRD
Selection diagram
Variations of the air flow depending on the pressure difference Pre-installed airflow is valid for all
diameters within selection table nr. 2

Qv 250

200 180 m3/h


Air flow (m3/h)

150 m3/h

150
120 m3/h
100 m3/h

90 m3/h
100
75 m3/h
60 m3/h
45 m3/h
50
30 m3/h
15 m3/h

40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

Pressure difference (Pa)

- Caution: the values indicated are average values that can vary by ±5%

Airflow Lw (NR)
(m3/h) 50 Pa 100 Pa 150 Pa 200 Pa

15 20 24 27 30
30 21 26 30 33
45 22 28 31 34
60 27 32 34 37
75 27 32 35 37
90 27 33 36 39
100 27 33 36 39

8
120 25 29 34 37
150 28 32 36 40
180 29 35 39 42

Acoustic capacity level Lw, expressed in NR.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 8 130


INTERNATIONAL

Selection diagram

Variations of the air flow depending on the pressure difference Pre-installed airflow is valid for all
diameters within selection table nr. 2
Qv
650 600 m3/h

600 550 m3/h

550

500 m3/h

500

450 m3/h
Air flow (m3/h)

450

400 m3/h

400

350 m3/h

350

300 m3/h

300 270 m3/h

240 m3/h
250

210 m3/h

200

40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

Pressure difference (Pa)

Caution: the values indicated are average values that can vary by ±5%

Air flow Lw (NR)


(m3/h) 50 Pa 100 Pa 150 Pa 200 Pa
210 29 35 37 39
240 30 36 39 42
270 32 38 40 44
300 28 32 37 40
350 30 35 39 42
400 32 37 40 45
450 33 39 41 46
500 34 41 43 48 Acoustic capacity level Lw, expressed in NR

E 8 130 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

ROUND VOLUME FLOW CONTROLLER


RVC
Installation dimensions

70
ø 80 - ø 250
SIZE

Application
L2 L1 L2
The round mechanical constant vol-
L3 ume controller, type RVC, is suitable for
both supply and exhaust of air in both
high and low pressure systems.
The controller keeps the air quantity
constant (CAV) without auxiliary power
and independent of the static initial
pressure.
110

The air flow is set at the factory, with


adjustment possible within the whole
control range by means of graduation.

Technical information
ø 315 - ø 400
SIZE

Characteristics:

- suitable for air quantities of 40 to


4,500 m3/h
- available in 9 sizes
- operating temperature: -0°C to
+100°C
L2 L1 L2 - differential pressure range: minimum
L3 differential pressure (see diagram 1)
to maximum 1000 PA
- air quantity-control precision: +/-
L1= installation length
10 % (if <100 m3/h, variation to 10
m3/h)
- recommended air speed: 4.5 m/s
Selection table (minimum 2.7 m/s)
Size (mm) Airflow m3/h Dimensions in mm - low resistance
min. max. L1 L2 L3 - can be assembled in any position
80 40 125 120 40 200
- short fitting length
- control mechanism is mainte-
100 70 220 170 40 250 nance free

8
125 100 280 170 40 250
140 140 400 170 40 250 Construction:
160 180 500 240 40 320
- T-housing: smooth round tube
200 250 900 240 40 320 made of galvanized steel sheet,
250 500 1500 240 40 320 laser-welded. With a plug and
315 800 3000 220 60 340 socket connection with rolled
400 1000 4500 295 60 415 rubber sealing ring on both
ends.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 8 135


INTERNATIONAL

- valve face, valve spindle and spring Fixing Delivery possibilities


made of stainless steel materials
- synthetic bearings The special plug and socket connec- Possible dimensions: ø 80 mm up to
- provided with 25 or 50 mm of insula- tions do not require screws or rivets ø 400 mm
tion upon request with horizontal assembly. Can also be
- volume control provided with servo fitted in vertical ducts. The functioning
motor: upon request of the controller is not influenced by
the construction and suspension sys-
tem.
Specifications description Regarding the assembly position, any
disruption of the approaching flow
Circular air volume controller for con- due to bends or branches in ducts
stant volume systems, mechanically must be taken into account.
independent operation without auxil- A straight supply flow of at least three
iary power, suitable for inlets and out- times the control diameter is recom-
lets, differential pressure range to mended. If this is not maintained, a
1000 PA. Excellent air quantity accura- slight variation in the set volume is pos-
cy, maintenance-free and can be fit- sible.
ted in any position.
Made of galvanized steel sheet with
plug and socket connections and rub-
ber seals. The air volume is set at the
factory, with the possibility of manually
changing this setting after assembly
over the whole control range by
means of graduation.

Type: RVC
size... mm

How to order
Round Volume flow Controller diameter 200 mm, for an airflow of 500 m3/h

R V C - - - - 0 2 0 0 0 5 0 0
size airflow

E 8 135 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

ROUND VOLUME FLOW CONTROLLER


RVC
Graphic nr. 1: Minimum static pressure difference at the controller

200
Pressure difference in Pa

150

100

50

0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Air velocity (m/s)

Table nr. 1: Air flow noise, generated by the controller


Static Pressure difference (Pa)

100 Pa 250 Pa 500 Pa


Airflow m3/h
Size (mm)

Lw (dB) Lp Lw (dB) Lp Lw (dB) Lp


2000

4000

8000
1000
2000

8000

1000

8000
4000
2000
4000
1000

500

125
250

250

500
250

125
125

500
63

63

63

80 40 37 37 35 33 33 33 28 27 38 39 42 43 44 44 46 41 41 50 46 49 49 50 51 53 48 48 57
82 49 47 44 41 39 39 33 32 45 51 51 50 49 48 49 44 44 54 58 58 56 55 55 56 51 51 61
125 52 51 48 45 44 44 38 37 49 61 60 57 54 53 53 47 46 58 68 66 63 61 59 59 53 52 65
100 70 40 39 38 36 35 36 30 29 41 43 45 46 46 47 49 44 43 53 49 52 52 53 54 55 50 50 60
135 50 48 45 42 41 40 34 33 46 59 57 54 51 50 49 43 42 55 60 60 58 57 57 58 53 52 63
200 54 52 49 47 45 45 39 38 51 63 61 58 55 54 54 48 47 59 70 68 65 62 61 60 54 53 66
125 100 41 40 38 36 35 36 30 29 41 45 47 47 48 48 49 44 43 54 52 54 54 54 55 56 50 49 60
190 51 49 46 42 41 40 34 32 46 55 54 53 51 51 51 46 45 56 61 61 59 58 57 58 52 52 63
280 54 53 50 47 45 45 39 37 50 63 61 58 55 54 53 47 46 59 64 64 62 61 61 62 57 56 67
140 140 43 42 40 38 37 37 31 30 42 47 49 49 49 50 51 46 45 55 53 56 56 56 56 58 52 51 62
270 53 51 47 44 43 42 36 34 48 61 59 56 53 51 51 44 43 57 63 63 61 60 59 60 54 54 65
400 56 55 52 49 47 47 41 39 52 65 63 60 57 56 55 49 48 61 72 70 67 64 62 62 56 55 68
160 180 44 43 41 39 38 38 32 31 43 48 50 50 50 50 51 46 45 56 55 57 57 57 57 58 53 51 63
340 53 51 48 44 43 42 36 34 48 62 60 56 53 51 51 44 43 57 64 64 62 60 60 60 55 54 65
500 57 55 52 49 47 47 40 39 52 66 64 61 58 56 55 49 48 61 72 70 67 64 62 62 56 54 68
200 250 45 43 41 39 38 37 31 30 43 51 52 52 51 51 51 45 44 56 57 59 58 58 57 58 52 50 63
575 55 53 50 46 44 44 37 36 50 64 62 58 55 53 53 46 45 59 66 66 64 62 62 62 56 56 67
900 - - - - - - - - - 68 66 63 60 58 58 52 50 64 75 73 70 67 65 65 58 57 70
250 500 48 47 45 43 41 41 35 34 47 54 56 55 55 54 55 49 48 60 61 62 62 61 61 62 56 54 66
1000 57 55 52 49 47 46 39 38 52 66 64 61 57 55 55 48 47 61 69 68 67 65 64 64 59 58 69
1500 - - - - - - - - - 70 68 65 62 60 60 53 52 65 77 75 72 68 67 66 60 58 72
315 600 48 46 44 41 39 39 32 31 44 55 56 55 54 53 53 46 44 58 62 63 62 61 60 59 53 51 65

8
1400 57 55 52 48 46 45 39 37 51 66 64 60 57 55 54 47 46 60 70 69 67 65 64 64 58 57 69
2200 - - - - - - - - - 71 69 65 62 60 59 53 51 65 77 75 72 69 67 66 60 58 72
400 1000 50 48 45 42 41 40 33 31 46 58 59 57 56 55 54 47 45 59 65 65 64 62 61 61 54 51 66
2200 58 56 52 49 47 46 39 37 52 67 65 61 57 55 54 48 46 61 72 71 68 66 65 65 59 57 70
3800 - - - - - - - - - 73 71 67 64 62 61 55 53 67 79 77 74 70 68 68 61 60 74

Lw = Noise level in dB (ref: 10-12 W)


Lp = Sound pressure level in dB (A) at 8 dB (A) local soundproofing

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 8 136


INTERNATIONAL

Table nr. 2: Correction data for calculation of the radiating noise of a pipe 6 m
length with built-in volume flow controller

Standard exection Execution with 25 mm insulation Execution with 50 mm insulation

Correction values in dB/octave Correction values in dB/octave Correction values in dB/octave


Size (mm)

2000 Hz
4000 Hz

4000 Hz

8000 Hz
1000 Hz
2000 Hz
4000 Hz

8000 Hz
2000 Hz

1000 Hz
1000 Hz

8000 Hz

250 Hz

500 Hz
125 Hz
250 Hz

250 Hz

500 Hz
500 Hz
125 Hz

125 Hz

63 Hz
63 Hz

63 Hz
80 36 33 32 23 17 12 11 11 39 35 39 35 32 33 34 29 42 37 45 46 47 54 56 47
100 34 32 30 22 16 12 11 10 38 35 38 34 31 33 34 28 41 38 46 45 47 54 57 47
125 29 29 31 24 21 19 15 11 35 33 37 36 32 33 36 27 35 36 42 48 51 60 58 45
140 27 28 27 21 18 14 12 10 29 29 32 32 32 33 33 26 31 30 37 42 45 52 54 44
160 23 23 20 18 11 10 9 8 27 26 28 29 27 31 31 25 29 28 35 40 44 51 54 44
200 22 19 16 16 15 11 9 8 23 18 23 26 29 29 29 24 26 22 29 37 42 51 53 43
250 19 16 13 12 12 10 9 8 23 18 20 24 26 30 28 24 25 20 26 35 41 50 52 42
315 18 14 12 13 11 11 8 8 22 17 19 23 27 29 28 24 26 18 26 38 42 51 53 45
400 17 11 10 10 10 9 7 6 19 14 17 22 25 28 27 23 20 16 23 33 39 48 50 40

E 8 136 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

SQUARE VOLUME FLOW CONTROLLER


SVC
Installation dimensions

L B
Application
All dimensions in mm Adjustable self-regulating constant air
volume control damper in galvanized
steel.
B H L B H L To be used to regulate airflows at pres-
mm mm mm mm mm mm sures between 20 and 1000 Pa and
temperature ranges between -30°C
from to from to 200 100 220 and 100°C.
150 200 150 200 220 300 100 220 Big sizes will consist of double valves.
150 200 220 400 100 220 Desired air volume should always be
201 250 400 400 385
201 250 385 mentioned when ordering.
150 200 220 500 400 385
251 300 201 250 385 600 400 385 For air volume regulation in rectanglar
251 300 385 500 500 425 ventilation and air-conditioning sys-
150 200 220 600 500 425 tems
301 350 201 250 385 600 600 470
251 300 385
150 200 220 Material
351 400 201 250 385
251 300 385
• Galvanized steel housing
200 250 385
401 500
251 300 385
• Aluminium regulation blade whith
501 600 200 300 385
piston and spring

Colour
galvanized steel

Composition
• Rectangular housing made out of

galvanized steel in standard duct


sizes with flange 30 mm

• Balanced self-regulating alumini-


um blade with PTFE bearing and
piston to prevent oscillations
8
Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 8 140
INTERNATIONAL

Mounting Text for tender


• The constant volume control
• to be joined at both sides with the
damper shall be of the rectangular
rectangular ductwork
type, made of galvanised steel and
to be joined at both ends with rec-
• horizontal or vertical mounting
tangular ductwork. They shall con-
tain a self-regulating valve, piston an
stainless steel spring. the valves shall
Accessories be used for a pressure range
between 20 and 1000 Pa.
Stainless steel models and insulation
shells available upon request • Grada type SVC

How to order
Square Volume flow Controller, with length 100 mm and height 200 mm,
for an air volume of 500 m3/h.

S V C 0 5 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 2 0 0
Air Volume L H

E 8 140 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

SQUARE VOLUME FLOW CONTROLLER


SVC
Minimum static pressure difference at the controller

Example:
Static pressure difference in Pa

300
Given: width 250 mm
250 height 200 mm
volume flow 810 m3/h
200 (= air velocity 4.5 m/s)

150 Min. static pressure difference ∆p in Pa?

100 Solution:
∆p = 80 Pa
50
0
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Air velocity in m/s

Air flow noise, generated by the controller


Volume flow (m3/h)

Static Pressure difference (Pa)

100 Pa 250 Pa 500 Pa


Velocity (m/s)
Height (mm)
Width (mm)

Lw(dB) Lw(dB) Lw (dB)


Lp Lp Lp
2000 Hz

8000 Hz
1000 Hz

4000 Hz

2000 Hz

8000 Hz
1000 Hz

4000 Hz
2000 Hz

8000 Hz
1000 Hz

4000 Hz
250 Hz
125 Hz

500 Hz

250 Hz
125 Hz

500 Hz
250 Hz
125 Hz

500 Hz
63 Hz

63 Hz
63 Hz

3 243 49 48 47 45 43 41 39 36 49 57 56 55 53 51 49 47 44 57 63 62 61 59 57 55 53 50 63
150 150 6 486 54 54 52 51 49 48 45 43 55 62 61 60 59 57 55 53 51 63 68 67 66 65 63 62 59 57 69
9 729 57 56 56 54 53 51 49 47 58 65 64 63 62 61 59 57 55 66 71 70 69 68 67 65 63 61 72
3 486 52 50 49 47 45 43 40 37 50 60 58 57 55 53 51 48 45 58 66 64 63 61 59 57 54 51 64
300 150 6 972 56 56 54 53 51 49 47 44 57 64 64 62 61 59 57 55 52 65 70 70 68 67 65 63 61 58 71
9 1458 59 59 58 56 55 53 51 48 60 67 66 66 64 63 61 59 56 68 73 73 72 70 69 67 65 62 74
3 432 52 50 49 47 45 43 40 37 50 60 58 57 55 53 51 48 45 58 66 64 63 61 59 59 57 54 64
200 200 6 864 56 56 54 53 51 49 47 44 57 64 64 62 61 59 57 55 52 65 70 70 68 67 65 63 61 58 71
9 1296 59 59 58 56 55 53 51 48 60 67 66 66 64 63 61 59 56 68 73 73 72 70 69 67 65 62 74
3 648 53 52 50 48 46 44 41 38 51 61 60 58 56 54 52 49 46 59 67 66 64 62 60 58 55 52 65
300 200 6 1296 58 57 56 54 52 50 48 45 58 66 65 64 62 60 58 56 53 66 72 71 70 68 66 64 62 59 72
9 1944 61 60 59 57 56 54 52 49 61 69 68 67 65 64 62 59 57 69 75 74 73 71 70 68 65 63 75
3 864 54 52 51 49 47 44 41 38 52 62 60 59 57 55 52 49 46 60 68 66 65 63 61 58 55 52 66
400 200 6 1728 59 58 56 55 53 51 48 45 58 67 66 64 63 61 59 56 53 66 73 72 70 69 67 65 62 59 72
9 2592 61 61 60 58 56 54 52 49 62 69 69 68 66 64 62 60 57 70 75 75 74 72 70 68 66 63 76
3 972 54 53 51 49 47 45 42 39 53 62 61 59 57 55 53 50 47 61 68 67 65 63 61 59 56 53 67
300 300 6 1944 60 58 57 56 54 51 49 46 59 67 66 65 63 62 59 57 54 67 74 72 71 69 68 65 63 60 73
9 2916 62 62 60 59 57 55 53 50 63 70 69 68 67 65 63 61 58 71 76 75 74 73 71 69 67 64 77
3 1458 56 54 53 50 48 46 43 39 54 64 62 60 58 56 53 51 47 62 70 68 67 64 62 59 57 53 68
450 300 6 2916 61 60 58 57 55 52 50 47 60 69 68 66 65 63 60 58 55 68 75 74 72 71 69 66 64 61 74
9 4374 64 63 62 60 58 56 54 51 64 72 71 70 68 66 64 62 59 72 78 77 76 74 72 70 68 65 78
3 1944 56 55 53 51 49 46 43 40 54 64 63 61 59 57 54 51 48 62 70 69 67 65 63 60 57 54 68
600 300 6 3888 62 60 59 57 55 53 50 47 61 70 68 67 65 63 61 58 55 69 76 74 73 71 69 67 64 61 75
9 5832 65 64 62 61 59 57 54 51 64 73 72 70 69 67 65 61 59 72 79 78 76 75 73 71 68 65 78

Lw = Noise level in dB (ref: 10-12 W)


Lp = Sound pressure level in dB (A) at 8 dB (A) local soundproofing

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 8 141


INTERNATIONAL

Volume flow against duct cross-section

7000
Example:
5000 10 m/s Given: width 400 mm
height 200 mm
3000 duct cross section 0.08 m2
Volume flow (m3/h)

2000
Which volume flow is possible?
1000
3 m/s Solution:
V at 3 m/s = 865 m3/h
500 V at 10 m/s = 2880 m3/h
300
Air velocity between 3 m/s and 10 m/s
200

100
0,02 0,03 0,04 0,05 0,08 0,1 0,15 0,2
Duct cross section (m2)

Correction data for calculation of the radiating noise of a pipe 6 m length with
built-in volume flow controller
Duct without insulation Duct with 30 mm insulation shell
Height (mm)
Width (mm)

Correction values in dB/octave Correction values in dB/octave


4000 Hz
2000 Hz
4000 Hz

1000 Hz

8000 Hz
2000 Hz
1000 Hz

8000 Hz

250 Hz

500 Hz
250 Hz

500 Hz

125 Hz
125 Hz

63 Hz
63 Hz

150 150 0 2 2 3 4 6 7 8 0 4 6 11 14 17 17 17
300 150 0 4 5 6 8 9 11 11 0 6 9 14 18 20 21 20
200 200 0 2 2 3 4 6 7 8 0 4 6 11 14 17 17 17
300 200 0 4 5 6 8 9 11 11 0 6 9 14 18 20 21 20
400 200 0 4 5 6 8 9 11 11 0 6 9 14 18 20 21 20
300 300 0 3 4 5 6 8 9 11 0 5 8 13 16 19 19 20
450 300 0 4 4 6 7 9 10 12 0 6 8 14 17 20 20 21
600 300 0 4 4 6 7 9 10 12 0 6 8 14 17 20 20 21

E 8 141 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


9
INTERNATIONAL

CLOSED ACTIVE BEAM


K-30

Introduction
The closed active beam K-30 (300 mm
wide) is designed to provide sensible
cooling, ventilation and also heating if
necessary.
Standard active heat exchangers
lengths of 600, 900, 1200, 1500, 1800,
2100, 2400, 2700 and 2950 mm are of-
fered to suit many applications includ-
ing offices, hotels, retail shops, bank
halls, hospitals,...

The benefits of this beam include:


• free cooling (supply water 14-18°C)
• low noise
• easy set up with static pressure
• minimal primary fresh air
• linear capacity control utilising vari-
able air volume
• dummy sections can be ordered
• choice of perforated face panel
• can be used for either heating or
cooling
• simple installation using integral
hanging rail and mounting brackets
• suitable for all ceilings, T-bar,
recessed or surface mounting

Description
The K-30 closed active beam has a
nominal width of 300 mm and provides
a 2 way opposite horizontal air pat-
tern.
A choice of perforated steel faceplate
is possible, with either a circular Ø 4,1
mm (51 % open) or a square 6 mm
(44 % open) mesh. The standard colour
finish is RAL 9010, other RAL-colours
upon request. The beam is supplied in
standard modular total lengths of 600,
900, 1200, 1500, 1800, 2100, 2400, 2700
and 2950 mm to suit the application.
Other special lengths are also avail-
able upon request. The overall height is
250 mm including the plenum box, al-
though inactive beams are 160 mm
and dummy beams are only 70 mm.
Plenum boxes are normally supplied
without internal lining with a Ø 125 mm
spigot, but can also optionally be sup-
plied with 6 mm melamine internal lin-
ing.

9
Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 010
INTERNATIONAL

When the primary air is > 130 m3/h, the


plenum will be provided with 2 spigots
of Ø 125 mm. A heat exchanger with
aluminium fins and 4 separate Ø 12
mm copper pipes are fitted into the
beam casing. These pipes have plain
tails and are suitable for compression
fittings.

The K-30 has a hinged front panel, pro-


viding easy access to the heat ex-
changer for routine maintenance. The
heat exchanger should be industrially
cleaned once every 1-5 years
depending on the use of area. The
more dust generated during use, the
more often it needs cleaning. The
beam does not have filters or conden-
sation collection drains and pipes
which require cleaning.

T-bar mounting
9

10 10
294 L

Surface mounting

274 L
9

10 25
294 L + 30

Recessed mounting
8

25
7 Min. 294 L + 30

E 9 010 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Operation Optimum minimum plenum pressure of Product specifications


the primary air is 100 Pa.
A closed active beam is used for Minimum primary air plenum pressure Material
coolling and heating room air. Active is 50 Pa.
beams contain a supply air plenum. Steel beam casing with a choice of
Primary fresh air is supplied directly into Dehumidification of the primary air perforated front panel with either cir-
the plenum. from the main air-handling unit is nec- cular Ø 4.1 mm (51 % free area) or
Where it is forced through induction essary to control humidity levels and to square 6 mm (44 % free area) mesh.
nozzles. The air leaves the nozzles and avoid condensation. Heat exchanger coil with aluminium
the induction effect pull the sec- fins and Ø 12 mm copper pipes. Gal-
ondary room air through the heat Due to the aerodynamic design of the vanised steel sheet plenum box.
exchanger from below the beam. The nozzles greater levels of primary air
mixture of the primary supply air and can be introduced into the beam, cre- Construction
induced secondary air enters the ating high secondary cooling. This is
room, through the longitudinal slots at particularly useful for higher air volume Single sheet beam casing with
both sides of the beam, with a horizon- applications. mechanically joined end plates with a
tal air pattern. hinged perforated front panel. The
plenum box section has a Ø 125 mm
The chilled beam system is a dry-cool- Standard sizes: circular spigot with end plates
ing system. To avoid condensation, the mechanically joined and sealed to the
inlet water temperature for the beam 600 mm beam casing.
should always be above the dew 900 mm
point temperature. If windows can be Plenum Box with pressure measuring-
opened, the water flow to the beams 1200 mm point behind front panel (optional).
should be disabled to avoid conden- 1500 mm
sation. Installation
If for some reason the room air has 1800 mm
become too humid, the water circula- 2100 mm Possibility to mount with drop rod or
tion must be stopped and the ventila- wire using preformed lugs with a sliding
tion should be switched on. After the 2400 mm
rail arrangement. Suitable for T-Bar, sur-
area is dehumidified, the water circu- 2700 mm face or recessed ceiling systems.
lation can be restarted. Heat exchanger coil, Ø 12 mm copper
2950 mm
pipes have plain tails suitable for com-
The principle method for individual pression fittings.
room temperature control is by regu-
lating water flow ON/OFF. This method Finish
of continuous air movement and fresh
primary air provide optimum comfort.
RAL 9010 standard finish.
The capacity can also be controlled
by using Variable Air Volume units for
the primary air. By zoning the chilled
beams, the diversity resulting from VAV
control allows a reduction of the pri-
mary supply air.

Standard required water temperatures


are 14-18 ºC for cooling and 35-50 ºC
for heating, which allows free cooling
with the use of a heat pump system or
ground source energy.

Maximum water pressure 6 bar at 90 ºC


and 7 bar at 20 ºC

Primary air: 16-20 ºC (summer) and


18–21 ºC (winter) is standard. The dew
point of the surrounding air should
always be 1-2 ºC below the cold water
supply temperature to allow dehumid-
ification.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 011


INTERNATIONAL

heating
Left type

cooling

cooling

Right type

heating

How to order
Chilled beam unit, KT30BH 1500, 300 mm wide, L = 1494 mm, nominal length of the battery 1200 mm, suited
for T-bar mounting with heating and cooling, nozzle type B.

K T 3 0 B H R 1 4 9 4 1 2 0 0
L nom. length battery
R: cooling water pipes at the right
C: cooling only L: cooling water pipes at the left
H: heating and cooling
nozzle configuration B-C-D
0: perforated front ø 4,1 mm, 51 % open
1: square perforation 6 mm, 44 % open
2: perforated front ø 4,1 mm, 51 % open, plenum pressure measuring point behind face
3: square perforation 6 mm, 44 % open, plenum pressure measuring point behind face

T: T-bar mounting
Z: recessed mounting
S: surface mounting

E 9 011 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

70 250 30

ø123

250
234

160

9
10 175
294

L (mm) L1 (mm) L (mm) L1 (mm)


594 462 2394 2262
894 762 2694 2562
1194 1062 2950 2862
1494 1362
1794 1662 L = total length
2094 1962 L1 = plenum length

T-Bar mounting

66 66

= =

23
ø1
40

4
250
160

175

25

32 32
50
107

107
250

294
80
80

1 1

1
ø123

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 012


INTERNATIONAL

Notities / Notes / Notes


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
CLOSED ACTIVE BEAM
K-30
Cooling tables: length 600 mm
Primary Air Secondary capacity (W)
K-30 Primary capacity (W)
Volume ∆ T = Trm - Twi
Cooling ∆ Ta = Trm - T prim
qw = 120 l/h ∆ Pw = 3 kPa
l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K 6K 7K 8K 9K 10K
4,1 15 130 <23 39 44 49 76 88 101 113 126
4,4 16 150 23 42 47 53 81 95 108 122 135
“B” nozzle 4,7 17 170 24 45 50 56 86 100 114 129 143
600 mm 5,0 18 190 25 47 53 59 91 106 121 136 151
5,2 19 210 27 50 56 62 94 109 125 140 156
5,7 21 250 29 54 61 68 101 118 134 151 168
6,6 24 130 <23 63 71 78 101 118 134 151 168
7,1 26 150 23 67 76 84 107 125 143 161 179
“C” nozzle 7,5 27 170 24 72 81 90 114 133 152 171 190
600 mm 8,0 29 190 25 76 85 95 119 139 158 178 198
8,4 30 210 27 80 90 100 124 145 166 186 207
9,2 33 250 29 87 98 109 135 158 180 203 225
8,2 29 130 <23 77 87 97 100 117 134 150 167
8,8 32 150 23 83 94 104 107 125 143 161 179
“D” nozzle 9,3 34 170 24 89 100 111 114 133 152 171 190
600 mm 9,9 35 190 25 94 105 117 119 139 158 178 198
10,4 37 210 27 98 111 123 124 145 166 186 207
11,3 41 250 29 107 121 134 134 157 179 202 224

Cooling tables: length 900 mm


Primary Air Secondary capacity (W)
K-30 Primary capacity (W)
Cooling Volume ∆ T = Trm - Twi
∆ Ta = Trm - T prim
qw = 130 l/h ∆ Pw = 5 kPa
l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K 6K 7K 8K 9K 10K
7,4 27 130 <23 70 79 87 131 153 174 196 218
7,9 28 150 23 75 85 94 140 163 186 210 233
“B” nozzle 8,4 30 170 24 80 90 100 148 173 198 222 247
900 mm 8,9 32 190 25 85 95 106 154 180 206 231 257
9,4 34 210 27 89 100 111 161 188 215 242 269
10,2 37 250 29 97 109 121 173 202 230 259 288
11,6 42 130 <23 111 125 138 171 200 228 257 285
12,5 45 150 23 119 134 149 182 213 243 274 304
“C” nozzle 13,3 48 170 24 127 142 158 191 223 254 286 318
900 mm 14,1 51 190 25 134 151 167 201 235 268 302 335
14,8 53 210 27 141 158 176 210 245 280 315 350
16,2 58 250 29 154 173 192 224 262 299 337 374
14,4 52 130 <23 137 154 171 170 199 227 256 284
15,4 56 150 23 147 165 183 182 212 242 273 303
“D” nozzle 16,4 59 170 24 156 176 195 190 222 254 285 317
900 mm 17,4 63 190 25 165 186 206 200 233 266 300 333
18,3 66 210 27 174 195 217 209 244 278 313 348

9
19,9 72 250 29 189 213 237 220 257 294 330 367

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 013


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Cooling tables: length 1200 mm

Primary Air Secondary capacity (W)


K-30 Primary capacity (W)
Volume ∆ T = Trm - Twi
Cooling ∆ Ta = Trm - T prim
qw = 120 l/h ∆ Pw = 5 kPa
l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K 6K 7K 8K 9K 10K
10,3 37 130 <23 98 110 122 176 206 235 264 294
11,1 40 150 23 105 118 132 188 220 251 282 314
“B” nozzle 11,8 42 170 24 112 126 140 199 232 266 299 332
1200 mm 12,5 45 190 25 118 133 148 207 242 276 311 345
13,1 47 210 27 124 140 156 216 252 288 324 360
14,3 51 250 29 136 153 170 230 269 307 345 384
15,9 57 130 <23 151 170 189 224 261 298 335 373
17,1 62 150 23 163 183 203 238 278 318 357 397
“C” nozzle 18,2 66 170 24 173 195 216 248 290 331 372 414
1200 mm 19,2 69 190 25 183 206 229 260 304 347 391 434
20,2 73 210 27 192 216 240 272 317 362 408 453
22,1 79 250 29 210 236 262 292 341 390 438 487
20,2 73 130 <23 192 216 240 229 267 305 343 381
21,7 78 150 23 206 232 258 243 284 324 365 405
“D” nozzle 23,1 83 170 24 219 247 274 254 296 338 380 423
1200 mm 24,4 88 190 25 232 261 290 266 310 354 398 443
25,7 92 210 27 244 274 305 277 323 370 416 462
28,0 101 250 29 266 299 333 295 344 394 443 492

Cooling tables: length 1500 mm

Primary Air Secondary capacity (W)


Primary capacity (W)
K-30 Volume ∆ T = Trm - Twi
Cooling ∆ Ta = Trm - T prim
qw = 150 l/h ∆ Pw = 10 kPa
l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K 6K 7K 8K 9K 10K
13,1 47 130 <23 125 140 156 224 262 299 337 374
14,1 51 150 23 134 151 167 239 279 318 358 398
“B” nozzle 15,0 54 170 24 142 160 178 253 295 337 379 421
1500 mm 15,8 57 190 25 151 169 188 262 306 350 393 437
16,7 60 210 27 158 178 198 274 320 366 411 457
18,2 65 250 29 173 194 216 293 342 390 439 488
20,4 73 130 <23 194 218 242 286 333 381 428 476
21,9 79 150 23 208 234 260 304 354 405 455 506
“C” nozzle 23,3 84 170 24 222 249 277 317 370 422 475 528
1500 mm 24,6 89 190 25 234 264 293 332 388 443 499 554
25,9 93 210 27 246 277 308 346 404 462 519 577
28,3 102 250 29 269 302 336 373 435 497 559 621
26,0 94 130 <23 247 278 309 293 342 390 439 488
27,9 101 150 23 266 299 332 311 363 415 467 519
“D” nozzle 29,8 107 170 24 283 318 353 325 379 434 488 542
1500 mm 31,5 113 190 25 299 336 374 341 398 454 511 568
33,1 119 210 27 314 354 393 355 414 474 533 592
36,1 130 250 29 343 386 429 378 441 504 567 630

E 9 013 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Cooling tables: length 1800 mm

Primary Air Primary capacity (W) Secondary capacity (W)


K-30
Cooling Volume ∆ Ta = Trm - T prim ∆ T = Trm - Twi
qw = 140 l/h ∆ Pw = 10 kPa
l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K 6K 7K 8K 9K 10K
16,1 58 130 <23 153 172 191 266 310 354 399 443
17,2 62 150 23 164 184 205 283 330 377 424 471
“B” nozzle 18,4 66 170 24 174 196 218 298 348 398 447 497
1800 mm 19,4 70 190 25 184 207 231 309 361 412 464 515
20,4 73 210 27 194 218 242 323 377 430 484 538
22,3 80 250 29 212 238 264 343 400 458 515 572
25,0 90 130 <23 238 268 298 336 392 448 504 560
26,9 97 150 23 256 288 320 356 416 475 535 594
“C” nozzle 28,6 103 170 24 272 306 340 371 433 495 557 619
1800 mm 30,3 109 190 25 288 324 360 389 454 518 583 648
31,8 115 210 27 303 340 378 404 472 539 607 674
34,7 125 250 29 330 371 413 433 505 578 650 722
31,8 115 130 <23 303 340 378 344 401 458 516 573
34,2 123 150 23 325 366 406 364 425 486 546 607
“D” nozzle 36,4 131 170 24 346 389 433 380 443 506 570 633
1800 mm 38,5 139 190 25 366 412 457 397 463 529 595 661
40,5 146 210 27 385 433 481 413 482 550 619 688
44,2 159 250 29 420 472 525 438 511 584 657 730

Cooling tables: length 2100 mm

Primary Air Secondary capacity (W)


K-30 Primary capacity (W)
Cooling Volume ∆ T = Trm - Twi
∆ Ta = Trm - T prim
qw = 160 l/h ∆ Pw = 15 kPa
l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K 6K 7K 8K 9K 10K
19,0 68 130 <23 181 203 226 313 365 418 470 522
20,4 73 150 23 194 218 242 332 388 443 499 554
“B” nozzle 21,7 78 170 24 206 232 258 351 410 468 527 585
2100 mm 23,0 83 190 25 218 246 273 364 425 486 546 607
24,1 87 210 27 229 258 287 379 442 506 569 632
26,3 95 250 29 250 282 313 404 471 538 606 673
29,5 106 130 <23 280 316 351 394 460 526 591 657
31,7 114 150 23 301 339 377 418 487 557 626 696
“C” nozzle 33,7 121 170 24 321 361 401 435 508 580 653 725
2100 mm 35,7 128 190 25 339 381 424 455 531 606 682 758
37,5 135 210 27 356 401 446 473 552 631 710 789
40,9 147 250 29 389 438 486 507 592 676 761 845
38,2 138 130 <23 364 409 454 409 477 545 614 682
41,1 148 150 23 390 439 488 429 501 572 644 716
“D” nozzle 43,7 157 170 24 416 468 520 452 527 602 677 753
2100 mm 46,2 166 190 25 439 494 549 472 550 629 708 786
48,6 175 210 27 462 520 577 491 572 654 736 818
53,0 191 250 29 504 567 630 520 607 693 780 867

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 014


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Cooling tables: length 2400 mm
Primary Air Primary capacity (W) Secondary capacity (W)
K-30
Cooling Volume ∆ Ta = Trm - T prim ∆ T = Trm - Twi
qw = 150 l/h ∆ Pw = 15 kPa
l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K 6K 7K 8K 9K 10K
22,1 80 130 <23 210 236 262 352 410 469 527 586
23,7 85 150 23 226 254 282 373 435 498 560 622
“B” nozzle 25,3 91 170 24 240 270 300 393 459 524 590 655
2400 mm 26,7 96 190 25 254 286 317 407 475 542 610 678
28,1 101 210 27 267 300 334 424 494 565 635 706
30,6 110 250 29 291 328 364 449 524 599 674 749
34,6 124 130 <23 328 369 411 442 515 589 662 736
37,1 134 150 23 353 397 441 467 545 622 700 778
“C” nozzle 39,5 142 170 24 376 423 469 485 566 647 728 809
2400 mm 41,8 150 190 25 397 447 496 506 591 675 760 844
43,9 158 210 27 417 470 522 526 614 702 789 877
47,9 173 250 29 455 512 569 561 655 748 842 935
43,5 157 130 <23 413 465 517 448 522 597 671 746
46,7 168 150 23 444 499 555 473 552 630 709 788
“D” nozzle 49,7 179 170 24 473 532 591 492 574 656 738 820
2400 mm 52,6 189 190 25 500 562 625 513 599 684 770 855
55,3 199 210 27 525 591 657 533 622 710 799 888
60,3 217 250 29 573 645 716 563 657 750 844 938

Cooling tables: length 2700 mm

Primary Air Secondary capacity (W)


K-30 Primary capacity (W) ∆ T = Trm - Twi
Volume
Cooling ∆ Ta = Trm - T prim qw = 165 l/h ∆ Pw = 20 kPa
l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K 6K 7K 8K 9K 10K
24,6 89 130 <23 234 263 292 391 456 521 587 652
26,4 95 150 23 251 282 314 415 484 553 622 691
“B” nozzle 28,1 101 170 24 267 301 334 437 509 582 655 728
2700 mm 29,7 107 190 25 283 318 353 452 528 603 678 754
31,3 113 210 27 297 334 371 471 549 628 706 785
34,1 123 250 29 324 365 405 500 583 666 749 833
39,2 141 130 <23 373 419 466 498 581 664 747 830
42,1 152 150 23 400 450 500 527 615 702 790 878
“C” nozzle 44,8 161 170 24 426 480 533 548 639 730 822 913
2700 mm 47,4 171 190 25 451 507 563 571 666 762 857 952
49,8 179 210 27 474 533 592 593 692 790 889 988
54,4 196 250 29 517 581 646 632 737 842 948 1053
49,3 178 130 <23 469 527 586 504 588 672 756 840
53,0 191 150 23 503 566 629 533 622 710 799 888
“D” nozzle 56,4 203 170 24 536 603 670 554 646 738 831 923
2700 mm 59,6 215 190 25 567 637 708 578 674 770 867 963
62,7 226 210 27 596 670 745 599 699 799 899 999
68,4 246 250 29 650 731 812 634 739 845 950 1056

E 9 014 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Cooling tables: 2950 mm
Primary Air Secondary capacity (W)
K-30 Primary capacity (W)
Volume ∆ T = Trm - Twi
Cooling ∆ Ta = Trm - T prim
qw = 155 l/h ∆ Pw = 20 kPa
l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K 6K 7K 8K 9K 10K
28,0 101 130 <23 266 299 332 430 501 573 644 716
30,1 108 150 23 286 321 357 455 531 606 682 758
“B” nozzle 32,0 115 170 24 304 342 380 473 552 631 710 789
2950 mm 33,8 122 190 25 322 362 402 494 576 658 741 823
35,6 128 210 27 338 380 423 509 594 678 763 848
38,8 140 250 29 369 415 461 544 634 725 815 906
43,9 158 130 <23 417 469 521 535 624 714 803 892
47,1 170 150 23 448 504 560 565 659 753 847 941
“C” nozzle 50,2 181 170 24 477 536 596 586 683 781 878 976
2950 mm 53,0 191 190 25 504 567 630 610 712 814 915 1017
55,8 201 210 27 530 596 663 632 737 842 948 1053
60,8 219 250 29 578 651 723 666 777 888 999 1110
55,1 198 130 <23 524 590 655 541 631 722 812 902
59,2 213 150 23 563 633 704 566 660 754 849 943
“D” nozzle 63,1 227 170 24 599 674 749 592 691 790 888 987
2950 mm 66,7 240 190 25 634 713 792 616 719 822 924 1027
70,1 252 210 27 666 749 833 639 746 852 959 1065
76,5 275 250 29 727 818 908 673 785 898 1010 1122

qv (l/s and m3/h): Primary air volume supplied into the plenum

Ps (Pa): Static plenum pressure in Pascal


Note: - Due to the low velocity at the 125 mm inlet, the inlet static pressure is
practically equal to the plenum static pressure
- Minimum primary air plenum pressure is 100 Pa

Lw (NR): Noise rate, based on sound power (Lw) without room attenuation or multiple
units
Primary capacity (W): Supply air cooling capacity in Watt (W)

∆ Ta: Temperature difference between the room air temperature and the supply air
temperature (K)

Trm: Room air temperature (°C)

Tprim: Supply air temperature (°C)

Secondary capacity (W): Water cooling capacity in Watt (W)

∆ T: Temperature difference between room air temperature and inlet water


temperature(K)

Twi: Inlet water temperature (°C)

qw: Water flow rate (l/h)

∆ Pw: Water pressure loss (Pa)

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 015


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Heating tables: length 600 mm

Secundair vermogen (W) Trm = 20°C


Primary Air Primary capacity ∆ T = Twi - Trm ∆ a = Ton coil - Toff coil
K-30 (W)
Heating Volume
∆ Ta = Tprim - Trm
qw = 120 l/h, ∆Pw = 1 kPa qw 60 l/h qw 40 l/h
l/s m /h
3
Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K ∆T (10K)∆a ∆T (20K)∆a ∆T (30K) ∆a ∆T (40K)∆a ∆T (50K) ∆a
4,1 15 130 <23 39 44 49 86 6 172 11 258 17 294 19 292 19
4,4 16 150 23 42 47 53 91 6 182 11 273 17 309 19 307 19
“B” nozzle 4,7 17 170 24 45 50 56 95 5 190 11 285 16 323 19 319 18
600 mm 5,0 18 190 25 47 53 59 98 5 196 11 294 16 334 18 330 18
5,2 19 210 27 50 56 62 103 5 206 11 309 16 350 18 346 18
5,7 21 250 29 54 61 68 108 5 216 10 324 15 367 17 361 17
6,6 24 130 <23 63 71 78 108 5 216 10 324 15 367 17 362 17
7,1 26 150 23 67 76 84 114 5 228 10 342 15 385 17 378 17
“C” nozzle 7,5 27 170 24 72 81 90 116 5 232 10 348 14 393 16 387 16
600 mm 8,0 29 190 25 76 85 95 120 5 240 9 360 14 406 16 399 16
8,4 30 210 27 80 90 100 126 5 252 9 378 14 425 16 417 16
9,2 33 250 29 87 98 109 132 5 264 9 396 14 443 15 434 15
8,2 29 130 <23 77 87 97 108 5 216 10 324 15 366 17 361 17
8,8 32 150 23 83 94 104 114 5 228 10 342 15 384 17 378 17
“D” nozzle 9,3 34 170 24 89 100 111 116 5 232 10 348 15 392 16 386 16
600 mm 9,9 35 190 25 94 105 117 120 5 240 9 360 14 405 16 398 16
10,4 37 210 27 98 111 123 126 5 252 9 378 14 424 16 416 16
11,3 41 250 29 107 121 134 132 5 264 9 396 14 442 15 433 15

Heating tables: length 900 mm

Primary Air Primary capacity Secondary heating (W) Troom = 20°C


K-30 (W)
Volume ∆ T = Twi - Trm ∆ a = Ton coil - Toff coil
Heating ∆ Ta = Tprim - Trm
qw = 120 l/h, ∆Pw = 2 kPa qw 60 l/h qw 40 l/h
l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K ∆T (10K)∆a ∆T (20K)∆a ∆T (30K) ∆a ∆T (40K)∆a ∆T (50K) ∆a
7,4 27 130 <23 70 79 87 148 5 296 11 444 16 493 18 480 18
7,9 28 150 23 75 85 94 155 5 310 11 465 16 518 18 503 17
8,4 30 170 24 80 90 100 162 5 324 10 486 16 539 17 522 17
“B” nozzle
900 mm 8,9 32 190 25 85 95 106 168 5 336 10 504 15 557 17 539 16
9,4 34 210 27 89 100 111 173 5 346 10 519 15 573 17 553 16
10,2 37 250 29 97 109 121 184 5 368 10 552 14 608 16 586 16
11,6 42 130 <23 111 125 138 182 5 364 10 546 15 602 16 580 16
12,5 45 150 23 119 134 149 188 5 376 9 564 14 619 16 596 15
13,3 48 170 24 127 142 158 195 5 390 9 585 14 643 15 617 15
“C” nozzle 14,1 51 190 25 134 151 167 206 5 412 9 618 14 674 15 645 14
900 mm
14,8 53 210 27 141 158 176 211 4 422 9 633 13 692 15 661 14
16,2 58 250 29 154 173 192 220 4 440 9 660 13 718 14 685 13
14,4 52 130 <23 137 154 171 182 5 364 10 546 15 600 16 578 16
15,4 56 150 23 147 165 183 187 5 374 9 561 14 617 16 594 15
“D” nozzle 16,4 59 170 24 156 176 195 195 5 390 9 585 14 640 15 615 15
900 mm 17,4 63 190 25 165 186 206 205 5 410 9 615 14 672 15 643 14
18,3 66 210 27 174 195 217 211 4 422 9 633 13 689 15 659 14
19,9 72 50 29 189 213 237 224 4 448 9 672 13 729 14 694 14

E 9 015 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Heating tables: length 1200 mm
Secondary capacity (W) Trm = 20°C
Primary capacity ∆ T = Twi - Trm ∆ a = Ton coil - Toff coil
K-30 (W)
Primary Air
Heating ∆ Ta = Tprim - Trm
Volume
qw = 120 l/h, ∆Pw = 2 kPa qw 60 l/h qw 40 l/h
l/s m3/h Ps (Pa) Lw (NR) 8K 9K 10K ∆T (10K)∆a ∆T (20K)∆a ∆T (30K) ∆a ∆T (40K)∆a ∆T (50K) ∆a
10,3 37 130 <23 98 110 122 202 5 404 11 606 16 664 18 636 17
11,1 40 150 23 105 118 132 213 5 426 10 639 16 696 17 664 16
“B” nozzle 11,8 42 170 24 112 126 140 221 5 442 10 663 15 722 17 688 16
1200 mm 12,5 45 190 25 118 133 148 229 5 458 10 687 15 746 16 709 16
13,1 47 210 27 124 140 156 236 5 472 10 708 15 766 16 726 15
14,3 51 250 29 136 153 170 251 5 502 10 753 14 811 15 766 15
15,9 57 130 <23 151 170 189 243 5 486 10 729 14 786 16 745 15
17,1 62 150 23 163 183 203 255 5 510 9 765 14 822 15 776 14
18,2 66 170 24 173 195 216 260 4 520 9 780 13 838 14 789 14
“C” nozzle
1200 mm 19,2 69 190 25 183 206 229 274 4 548 9 822 13 877 14 823 13
20,2 73 210 27 192 216 240 281 4 562 9 843 13 898 14 841 13
22,1 79 250 29 210 236 262 298 4 596 8 894 13 948 13 884 13
20,2 73 130 <23 192 216 240 249 5 498 10 747 14 803 15 759 15
21,7 78 150 23 206 232 258 256 5 512 9 768 14 825 15 778 14
“D” nozzle 23,1 83 170 24 219 247 274 266 4 532 9 798 13 855 14 804 14
1200 mm 24,4 88 190 25 232 261 290 280 4 560 9 840 13 895 14 838 13
25,7 92 210 27 244 274 305 287 4 574 9 861 13 916 14 857 13
28,0 101 250 29 266 299 333 299 4 598 8 897 12 950 13 886 12

Heating tables: length 1500 mm


Primary capacity Secondary capacity (W) Trm = 20°C
Primary Air (W) ∆ T = Twi - Trm ∆ a = Ton coil - Toff coil
K-30 ∆ Ta = Tprim - Trm
Heating Volume
qw = 120 l/h, ∆Pw = 3 kPa qw 60 l/h qw 40 l/h

l/s m3/h Ps (Pa) Lw (NR) 8K 9K 10K ∆T (10K)∆a ∆T (20K)∆a ∆T (30K) ∆a ∆T (40K)∆a ∆T (50K) ∆a
13,1 47 130 <23 125 140 156 252 5 505 10 757 16 814 17 769 16
14,1 51 150 23 134 151 167 265 5 530 10 795 15 852 16 801 15
“B” nozzle 15,0 54 170 24 142 160 178 276 5 552 10 828 15 883 16 829 15
1500 mm
15,8 57 190 25 151 169 188 286 5 572 10 858 15 911 16 852 15
16,7 60 210 27 158 178 198 293 5 587 10 880 15 934 15 872 14
18,2 65 250 29 173 194 216 312 5 624 9 936 14 987 15 917 14
20,4 73 130 <23 194 218 242 304 5 608 9 912 14 965 15 899 14
21,9 79 150 23 208 234 260 318 5 636 9 954 14 1006 14 933 13
“C” nozzle 23,3 84 170 24 222 249 277 331 4 662 9 993 13 1041 14 962 13
1500 mm 24,7 89 190 25 234 264 293 341 4 682 9 1023 13 1070 14 987 13
25,9 93 210 27 246 277 308 350 4 700 8 1050 13 1094 13 1007 12
28,3 102 250 29 269 302 336 371 4 742 8 1113 12 1152 13 1054 12
26,0 94 130 <23 247 278 309 312 5 624 9 936 14 988 15 918 14
27,9 101 150 23 266 299 332 321 4 642 9 963 13 1014 14 940 13
“D” nozzle 29,8 107 170 24 283 318 353 334 4 668 9 1002 13 1049 14 969 13
1500 mm 31,5 113 190 25 299 336 374 350 4 700 9 1050 13 1095 14 1007 12
33,1 119 210 27 314 354 393 359 4 718 8 1077 13 1120 13 1028 12
36,1 130 250 29 343 386 429 374 4 748 8 1122 12 1159 12 1060 11

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 016


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Heating tables: length 1800 mm

Primary capacity Secondary capacity (W) Trm = 20°C


Primary Air (W) ∆ T = Twi - Trm ∆ a = Ton coil - Toff coil
K-30 Volume ∆ Ta = Tprim - Trm
Heating
qw = 120 l/h, ∆Pw = 3 kPa qw 60 l/h qw 40 l/h

l/s m3/h Ps (Pa) Lw (NR) 8K 9K 10K ∆T (10K)∆a ∆T (20K)∆a ∆T (30K) ∆a ∆T (40K)∆a ∆T (50K) ∆a
16,1 58 130 <23 153 172 191 303 5 606 10 909 15 961 16 895 15
17,2 62 150 23 164 184 205 318 5 636 10 954 15 1004 16 931 15
“B” nozzle 18,4 66 170 24 174 196 218 330 5 660 10 990 15 1040 15 961 14
1800 mm 19,4 70 190 25 184 207 231 341 5 682 10 1023 14 1071 15 987 14
20,4 73 210 27 194 218 242 351 5 702 9 1053 14 1097 15 1009 13
22,3 80 250 29 212 238 264 372 5 744 9 1116 14 1156 14 1058 13
25,1 90 130 <23 238 268 298 365 5 730 9 1095 14 1135 14 1041 13
26,9 97 150 23 256 288 320 381 4 762 9 1143 13 1180 14 1077 13
“C” nozzle 28,6 103 170 24 272 306 340 389 4 778 9 1167 13 1200 13 1094 12
1800 mm 30,3 109 190 25 288 324 360 408 4 816 8 1224 13 1252 13 1135 12
31,8 115 210 27 303 340 378 418 4 836 8 1254 12 1279 13 1157 11
34,7 125 250 29 330 371 413 442 4 884 8 1326 12 1343 12 1208 11
31,8 115 130 <23 302 340 378 372 5 744 9 1116 14 1156 14 1058 13
34,2 123 150 23 325 365 406 383 4 766 9 1149 13 1185 13 1081 12
“D” nozzle 36,4 131 170 24 346 389 433 398 4 796 9 1194 13 1225 13 1113 12
1800 mm 38,5 139 190 25 366 412 457 417 4 834 8 1251 13 1276 13 1155 12
40,5 146 210 27 385 433 481 427 4 854 8 1281 12 1304 13 1177 11
44,2 159 250 29 420 472 525 444 4 888 8 1332 12 1348 12 1212 11

Heating tables: length 2100 mm


Secondary capacity (W) Trm = 20°C
K-30 Primary capacity ∆ T = Twi - Trm ∆ a = Ton coil - Toff coil
Primary Air (W)
Heating Volume ∆ Ta = Tprim - Trm
qw = 120 l/h, ∆Pw = 4 kPa qw 60 l/h qw 40 l/h
l/s m /h
3
Ps (Pa) Lw (NR) 8K 9K 10K ∆T (10K)∆a ∆T (20K)∆a ∆T (30K) ∆a ∆T (40K)∆a ∆T (50K) ∆a
19,0 68 130 <23 181 203 226 351 5 702 10 1053 15 1098 16 1010 14
20,4 73 150 23 194 218 242 368 5 736 10 1104 15 1145 15 1048 14
21,7 78 170 24 206 232 258 383 5 766 10 1149 14 1184 15 1081 14
“B” nozzle
2100 mm 23,0 83 190 25 218 246 273 395 5 790 9 1185 14 1218 14 1108 13
24,1 87 210 27 229 258 287 406 5 812 9 1218 14 1247 14 1132 13
26,3 95 250 29 250 282 313 430 4 860 9 1290 13 1312 14 1183 12
29,5 106 130 <23 281 316 351 420 4 840 9 1260 13 1284 14 1161 12
31,7 114 150 23 301 339 377 438 4 876 9 1314 13 1333 13 1200 12
33,7 121 170 24 321 361 401 454 4 908 8 1362 13 1375 13 1233 11
“C” nozzle
35,7 128 190 25 339 381 424 468 4 936 8 1404 12 1410 12 1261 11
2100 mm
37,5 135 210 27 356 401 446 480 4 960 8 1440 12 1440 12 1284 11
40,9 147 250 29 389 438 486 507 4 1014 8 1521 12 1509 12 1337 10
38,2 138 130 <23 364 409 454 429 4 858 9 1287 13 1308 13 1181 12
41,1 148 150 23 390 439 488 448 4 896 8 1344 13 1359 13 1220 12
“D” nozzle 43,7 157 170 24 416 468 520 464 4 929 8 1393 12 1401 12 1253 11
2100 mm 46,2 166 190 25 439 494 549 478 4 956 8 1434 12 1436 12 1281 11
48,6 175 210 27 462 520 577 490 4 979 8 1469 12 1466 12 1304 10
53,0 191 250 29 504 567 630 517 4 1033 8 1550 11 1534 11 1356 10

E 9 016 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Heating tables: length 2400 mm
Primary capacity Secondary capacity (W) Trm = 20°C
(W) ∆ T = Twi - Trm ∆ a = Ton coil - Toff coil
K-30 Primary Air ∆ Ta = Tprim - Trm
Heating Volume
qw = 120 l/h, ∆Pw = 4 kPa qw 60 l/h qw 40 l/h

l/s m3/h Ps (Pa) Lw (NR) 8K 9K 10K ∆T (10K)∆a ∆T (20K)∆a ∆T (30K) ∆a ∆T (40K)∆a ∆T (50K) ∆a
22,1 80 130 <23 210 236 262 400 5 800 10 1200 15 1232 15 1119 14
23,7 85 150 23 226 254 282 419 5 838 10 1257 14 1283 15 1160 13
“B” nozzle 435 5 870 9 1305 14 1325 14 1194 13
25,3 91 170 24 240 270 300
2400 mm
26,7 96 190 25 254 286 317 449 5 898 9 1347 14 1361 14 1223 12
28,1 101 210 27 267 300 334 461 4 922 9 1383 13 1393 14 1247 12
30,6 110 250 29 291 328 364 488 4 976 9 1464 13 1461 13 1301 12

34,6 124 130 <23 328 369 411 479 4 958 9 1437 13 1438 13 1283 12
37,1 134 150 23 353 397 441 500 4 1000 8 1500 13 1492 13 1324 11
“C” nozzle 39,5 142 170 24 376 423 469 509 4 1018 8 1527 12 1515 12 1342 11
2400 mm 397 447 496 533 4 1066 8 1599 12 1574 12 1387 10
41,8 150 190 25
43,9 158 210 27 417 470 522 546 4 1092 8 1638 12 1606 11 1411 10
47,9 173 250 29 455 512 569 575 4 1150 8 1725 11 1678 11 1465 10
43,5 157 130 <23 413 465 517 485 4 970 9 1455 13 1455 13 1296 12
46,7 168 150 23 444 499 555 499 4 998 8 1497 12 1488 12 1321 11
“D” nozzle 49,7 179 170 24 473 532 591 516 4 1032 8 1548 12 1533 12 1355 11
2400 mm 52,6 189 190 25 500 562 625 531 4 1062 8 1593 12 1570 12 1384 10
55,3 199 210 27 525 591 657 553 4 1106 8 1659 12 1623 11 1424 10
60,3 217 250 29 573 645 716 573 4 1146 7 1719 11 1672 11 1461 9

Heating tables: length 2700 mm

Primary capacity Secondary capacity (W) Trm = 20°C


K-30 Primary Air (W) ∆ T = Twi - Trm ∆ a = Ton coil - Toff coil
Heating Volume ∆ Ta = Tprim - Trm
qw = 120 l/h, ∆Pw = 5 kPa qw 60 l/h qw 40 l/h
l/s m3/h Ps (Pa) Lw (NR) 8K 9K 10K ∆T (10K)∆a ∆T (20K)∆a ∆T (30K) ∆a ∆T (40K)∆a ∆T (50K) ∆a
24,6 89 130 <23 234 263 292 445 5 890 10 1335 15 1351 15 1214 13
251 282 314 459 5 918 9 1377 14 1387 14 1242 13
“B” nozzle 26,4 95 150 23
2700 mm 28,1 101 170 24 267 301 334 476 5 952 9 1429 14 1432 14 1277 12
29,7 107 190 25 283 318 353 499 5 997 9 1496 14 1489 14 1322 12
31,3 113 210 27 297 334 371 512 4 1023 9 1535 13 1522 13 1347 12
34,1 123 250 29 324 365 405 533 4 1065 9 1598 13 1574 13 1387 11
39,2 141 130 <23 373 419 466 531 4 1062 9 1593 13 1570 13 1384 11
42,1 152 150 23 400 450 500 554 4 1108 8 1662 12 1626 12 1427 11
“C” nozzle 564 4 1128 8 1692 12 1651 12 1445 10
44,8 161 170 24 426 480 533
2700 mm
47,4 171 190 25 451 507 563 589 4 1178 8 1767 12 1712 11 1491 10
49,8 179 210 27 474 533 592 603 4 1206 8 1809 11 1745 11 1515 10
54,4 196 250 29 517 581 646 635 4 1270 7 1905 11 1820 11 1570 9
49,3 178 130 <23 469 527 586 538 4 1076 8 1614 13 1587 13 1397 11
“D” nozzle 53,0 191 150 23 503 566 629 552 4 1104 8 1656 12 1622 12 1423 10
2700 mm 56,4 203 170 24 536 603 670 571 4 1142 8 1713 12 1668 12 1458 10
59,6 215 190 25 567 637 708 587 4 1174 8 1761 11 1707 11 1487 10
62,7 226 210 27 596 670 745 611 4 1222 8 1833 11 1763 11 1528 9
68,4 246 50 29 650 731 812 632 4 1264 7 1896 11 1813 10 1565 9

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 017


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Heating tables: length 2950 mm

Primary capacity Secondary capacity (W) Trm = 20°C


K-30 (W) ∆ T = Twi - Trm ∆ a = Ton coil - Toff coil
Primary Air
Heating Volume ∆ Ta = Tprim - Trm
qw = 120 l/h, ∆Pw = 5 kPa qw 60 l/h qw 40 l/h

l/s m3/h Ps (Pa) Lw (NR) 8K 9K 10K ∆T (10K)∆a ∆T (20K)∆a ∆T (30K) ∆a ∆T (40K)∆a ∆T (50K) ∆a
28,0 101 130 <23 266 299 332 488 5 976 9 1464 14 1463 14 1302 13
30,1 108 150 23 286 321 357 511 5 1022 9 1533 14 1519 14 1345 12
“B” nozzle 32,0 115 170 24 529 5 1058 9 1587 14 1566 13 1381 12
304 342 380
2950 mm
33,8 122 190 25 322 362 402 546 4 1092 9 1638 13 1606 13 1411 11
35,6 128 210 27 338 380 423 559 4 1118 9 1677 13 1640 13 1437 11
38,8 140 250 29 369 415 461 581 4 1162 8 1743 12 1693 12 1477 10
43,9 158 130 <23 417 469 521 581 4 1162 8 1743 12 1692 12 1476 11
47,1 170 150 23 448 504 560 596 4 1192 8 1788 12 1728 12 1503 10
“C” nozzle 50,2 181 170 24 477 536 596 616 4 1232 8 1848 12 1776 11 1538 10
2950 mm 53,0 191 190 25 504 567 630 633 4 1266 7 1899 11 1816 11 1567 9
55,8 201 210 27 530 596 663 658 4 1316 7 1974 11 1873 11 1608 9
60,8 219 250 29 578 651 723 681 4 1362 7 2043 11 1925 10 1646 9
55,1 198 130 <23 524 590 655 579 4 1158 8 1737 12 1687 12 1472 10
59,2 213 150 23 563 633 704 603 4 1206 8 1809 12 1745 11 1515 10
“D” nozzle
63,1 227 170 24 599 674 749 623 4 1246 8 1869 12 1793 11 1550 10
2950 mm
66,7 240 190 25 634 713 792 640 4 1280 7 1920 11 1833 11 1579 9
70,1 252 210 27 666 749 833 655 4 1310 7 1965 11 1866 10 1603 9
76,5 275 250 29 727 818 908 688 4 1376 7 2064 11 1943 10 1658 8

qv (l/s and m3/h): Primary air volume supplied into the plenum
Ps(Pa: Static plenum pressure in Pascal
Note: - Due to the low velocity at the 125 mm inlet, the inlet static pressure is
practically equal to the plenum static pressure
- Minimum primary air plenum pressure is 50 Pa
Lw(NR): Noise rate, based on sound power (Lw) without room attenuation or multiple units
Primary capacity (W): Supply air heating capacity in Watt (W)
∆ Ta: Temperature difference between the room air temperature and the supply air
temperature (K)
Trm: Room air temperature (°C)
Tprim: Supply air temperature (°C)
Secondary capacity (W): Water heating capacity in Watt (W)
∆ T: Temperature difference between room air temperature and inlet water
temperature (K)
Twi: Inlet water temperature (°C)
∆ a: Temperature difference between the secondary (induced) air temperature after
coil and the secondary (induced) air temperature on the coil (K)
Toff coil: Secondary (induced) air temperature after coil
Ton coil: Secondary (induced) air temperature on coil (Trm)
qw: Waterflow (l/h)
∆ Pw: Water pressure loss (Pa)

E 9 017 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Example:
Water pressure loss in kPa (Cooling) 2700
3000 2400 Given:
20,00 beam active length 1500 mm
2100
cooling
18,00
1800 Solution:
16,00 - ∆ Pw at 115 l/h is 6 kPa
- ∆ Pw at 135 l/h is 8 kPa
14,00 1500
Water pressure (kPa)

12,00 1200

10,00
900
8,00
600
6,00

4,00

2,00

0,00
50 70 90 110 130 150 170

Waterflow (l/h)
Water flow rate should be turbulent to ensure effective heat transfer.
Minimum recommended flow is 80 l/h.

Example:
Water pressure loss in kPa (Heating)
Given:
beam active length 1500 mm
14,00 heating

Solution:
12,00 - ∆ Pw at 100 l/h is 2 kPa
3000
- ∆ Pw at 160 l/h is 5 kPa
2700
Water pressure (kPa)

10,00
2400
2100
8,00
1800

6,00
1500
1200
900
4,00
600

2,00

0,00
50 70 90 110 130 150 170
Waterflow (l/h)

Water flow rate should be turbulent to ensure effective heat transfer.


Minimum recommended flow is 80 l/h.

NOTE:

• The difference between the NR and the dB(A) value is 1.


This is because the acoustic spectrum contains much high frequency noise and less low frequency noise.
• Sound power for all models is without allowance for room attenuation or multiple units.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 018


INTERNATIONAL

Example:
Sound power without room attenuation
Given:
- beam active length 1500 mm
dB(A) - 65 m3/h
- B-nozzle
32,0 NR

Solution:
- look up the performance
Sound Power Level Lw

30,0
guide (cooling or heating) for
this beam length and type of
nozzle
28,0 - 65 m3/h = 250 Pa
- 250 Pa = 30 dB(A) or NR29

26,0

24,0

22,0
100 150 200 250 300

Static pressure (Pa)

Sound power NR level measurements are determined by values in the


4 kHz octave band.

NOTE:

• The difference between the NR and the dB(A) value is more or less 1.
This is because the acoustic spectrum contains much high frequency noise and less low frequency noise.
• Sound power for all models is without allowance for room attenuation or multiple units.

E 9 018 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Table no 1: conversion factor for primary air volume of different nominal Room air movement diagrams
beam lengths to primary air per meter used in the graphs.
These are average velocities for undis-
Nom. length (mm) 600 900 1200 1500 1800 rupted air flow, cooling.
Actual measured values at ∆ Ta = 8K
K-30B 2,000 1,25 0,909 0,714 0,588 were within the limits shown.
K-30C 1,800 1,125 0,818 0,643 0,529
K-30D 1,550 0,969 0,705 0,554 0,456 Example:

Nom. length (mm) 2100 2400 2700 2950 Given:


K-30B 0,500 0,435 0,385 0,351 - K-30B 1800 mm (nozzle B)
- Primary air volume is 100 m3/h
K-30C 0,450 0,391 0,346 0,316
K-30D 0,388 0,337 0,298 0,272
Required:
- m3/h,m
- volume per (active) meter

Solution:
Factor from table no 1 for K-30B

1800 mm is 0,588 m3/h,m

0,588 x 100 = 58,8 m3/h,m


V1, V2 and V3: room air velocities (the occupied zone is shaded).

X Y

KB KB

V V
1

0,5m 1,8m 2,7m

- V1 = room air movement at 1,8 m height and on 0,5 m from the wall (m/s)
- V2 = room air movement at 0,1 m height and on 0,5 m from the wall (m/s)
- V3 = room air movement at 1,8 m height and in the middle of two beams (m/s)
- H = ceiling height - height occupied zone (1,8 m)
- L1 = X + H where X = is distance to the wall
- L2 = X + ceiling height - 0,1 m
- L3= Y + H where 2 x Y is the distance between similar beams with an equal primary air volume
- occupied zone = marked height 1,8 m (shaded)

Graph v1, v2 and v3 room air velocities (the occupied zone is shaded).

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 019


INTERNATIONAL

Example:
Room air velocity in m/s at point V1
Given:
< 0,05m/s < 0,1m/s < 0,15m/s < 0,2m/s - active length 1800 mm, nozzle C
65 - primary air volume = 120 m3/h or
Primary air volume (m /h.m)

63 m3/h,m (from table n°1)


60
Air movement - ceiling height = 2,7 m or H = 2,7 -
55 1,8 = 0,9 m
3

50
- required air movement V1 < 0,15
m/s
45

40 Solution:
- L1 = 3,45 m and X = 3,45 - 0,9 =
35 2,55 m maximum distance from
30 the wall
- if the ceiling height was 2,9 m
25 then H = 1,1 m and X = 2,35 m
20 distance from the wall
2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5
L1 (m)

Example:
Floor air velocity in m/s at point V2
Given:
- active length 1200 mm, nozzle B
< 0,4m/s < 0,35m/s < 0,3m/s < 0,25m/s - primary air volume = 55 m3/h or
65
50 m3/h,m (from table n°1)
Primary air volume (m /h.m)

60 - ceiling height = 2,7 m


< 0,2m/s
55 - required air movement V2 < 0,25
3

m/s
50

45 Solution:
< 0,15m/s - L2 = 6,9 m and X = 6,9 - 2,6 = 4,3
40
m minimum distance from the
35 wall
30 < 0,1m/s - for air movement V2 < 0,30 m/s
L2 = 5,6 m and X = 5,6 - 2,6 = 3 m
25
minimum distance from the wall
20
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
L2 (m)

Example:
Room air velocity in m/s at point V3. This is midway between two beams with
an equal volume. Given:
- active length 1800 mm, nozzle C
< 0,4m/s < 0,30m/s < 0,25m/s < 0,2m/s <0,15m/s
65 - primary air volume = 120 m3/h or
Primary air volume (m /h.m)

3
< 0,35 m/s 63 m /h.m (from table n°1)
60
- ceiling height = 2,6 m or H = 2,6 -
55
3

1,8 = 0,8 m
50 - required air movement V3 < 0,25
45
m/s
< 0,1m/s
40 Solution:
35 - L3 = 3,80 m and Y = 3,80 - 0,8 =
30 3,00 m
The minimum distance between
25
the beams should be 6 m
20 - if the ceiling height was 2,8 m,
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 then H = 1 m and Y = 2,80 m,
L3 (m) then 5,6 m would be sufficient
distance between similar dif-
The testing for these results was done under strictly controlled laboratory condi- fusers.
tions. A room with furniture and people will obstruct air movement. Air velocities
shown are average values.
Deviations are largest at V3 where two air streams meet.

E 9 019 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

CLOSED ACTIVE BEAM


K-60

Introduction
The closed active beam K-60 (600 mm
wide) is designed to provide sensible
cooling, ventilation and also heating if
necessary. Standard active heat
exchangers lengths of 600, 900, 1200,
1500, 1800, 2100, 2400, 2700 and 2950
mm are offered to suit many applica-
tions including offices, hotels, retail
shops, bank halls, hospitals,...

The benefits of this beam include:


• free cooling (Supply water 14-18°C)
• low noise
• easy set up with static pressure
• minimal primary fresh air
• linear capacity control utilising Vari-
able Air Volume
• dummy sections can be ordered
• choice of perforated face panel
• can be used for either heating or
cooling
• simple installation using integral hang-
ing rail and mounting brackets
• suitable for all ceilings: T-bar, recessed
or surface mounting

Description
The K-60 closed active beam has a
nominal width of 600 mm and provides
a 2 way opposite horizontal air pattern.
A choice of perforated steel faceplate
is possible, with either a circular Ø 4,1
mm (51 % open) or a square 6 mm (44 %
open) mesh. The standard colour finish
is RAL 9010, other RAL-colours upon re-
quest. The beam is supplied in standard
modular total lengths of 600, 900, 1200,
1500, 1800, 2100, 2400, 2700 and 2950
mm to suit the application.
Other special lengths are also available
upon request. The overall height is 250
mm including the plenum box, although
inactive beams are 160 mm and dum-
my beams are only 70 mm.
Plenum boxes are normally supplied
without internal lining with a Ø 125 mm
spigot, but can also optionally be sup-
plied with 6 mm melamine internal li-
ning.

9
Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 025
INTERNATIONAL

When the primary air is > 130 m3/h, the


plenum will be provided with 2 spigots
of Ø 125 mm. A heat exchanger with
aluminium fins and 4 separate Ø 12 mm
copper pipes are pulled into the beam
casing. These pipes have plain tails and
are suitable for compression fittings.

The K-60 has a hinged front panel, pro-


viding easy access to the heat
exchanger for any routine mainte-
nance. The heat exchanger should be
industrially cleaned once every 1-5
years depending on the use of area.
The more dust generated during use,
the more often it needs cleaning. The
beam does not have filters or conden-
sation collection drains and pipes which
require cleaning.

T-bar mounting

10 10
594 L

Recessed mounting

25
8

Min. 594 Min. L + 30

Surface mounting

574

L+4
9

10 25
594 L + 30

E 9 025 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Operation Optimum minimum plenum pressure Product specifications


of the primary air is 100 Pa.
A closed active beam is used for Minimum primary air plenum pres- Material
cooling and heating. Active beams sure is 50 Pa.
contain a supply air plenum. Primary Steel beam casing with a choice of
fresh air is supplied directly into the Dehumidification of the primary air perforated front panel with either cir-
plenum where it is forced through from the main air-handling unit is cular Ø 4.1 mm (51 % free area) or
induction nozzles. The air leaves the necessary to control humidity levels
square 6 mm (44 % free area) mesh.
nozzles and the induction effect pull and to avoid condensation.
Heat exchanger coil with aluminium
the secondary room air through the fins and Ø 12 mm copper pipes. Gal-
heat exchanger from below the Due to the aerodynamic design of
vanised steel sheet plenum box.
beam. The mixture of the primary the nozzles greater levels of primary
supply air and induced secondary air can be introduced into the
Construction
air enters the room, through the lon- beam, creating high secondary
gitudinal slots at both sides of the cooling. This is particularly useful for
Single sheet beam casing with
beam, with a horizontal air pattern. higher air volume applications.
mechanically joined end plates with a
hinged perforated front panel. The
The chilled beam system is a dry-
plenum box section has a Ø 125 mm
cooling system. To avoid condensa- Standard sizes:
circular spigot with end plates
tion, the inlet water temperature for
600 mm mechanically joined and sealed to the
the beam should always be above
the dew point temperature of the beam casing.
900 mm Plenum Box with pressure measuring-
surrounding air. If windows can be
opened, the water flow to the 1200 mm point behind front panel (optional).
beams should be disabled to avoid 1500 mm
condensation. Installation
If for some reason the room air has 1800 mm
become too humid, the water circu- Possibilty to mount with drop rod or
2100 mm
lation must be stopped and the ven- wire using preformed lugs with a sliding
tilation should be switched on. After 2400 mm rail-arrangement. Suitable for T-Bar, sur-
the area is dehumidified, the water 2700 mm face or recessed ceiling systems.
circulation can be restarted. Heat exchanger coil, Ø 12 mm cop-
2950 mm per
The principle method for individual pipes have plain tails suitable for
room temperature control is by regu- compression fittings.
lating water flow ON/OFF. This
method of continuous air movement Finish
and fresh primary air provide opti-
mum comfort. The capacity can RAL 9010 standard finish
also be controlled by using Variable
Air Volume units for the primary air. By
zoning the chilled beams, the diversi-
ty resulting from VAV control allows a
reduction of the primary supply air.

Standard required water tempera-


tures are 14-18 ºC for cooling and 35-
50 ºC for heating, which allows free
cooling using a heat pump system or
ground source energy.

Maximum water pressure is 7 bar.

Primary air: 16-20 ºC (summer) and


18–21 ºC (winter) is standard. The
dew point of the surrounding air
should always be 1-2 ºC below the
cold water supply temperature to
allow dehumidification.

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 026


INTERNATIONAL

red
Left type heating

blue
cooling
red
heating

blue
cooling

blue
Right type cooling

red
heating blue
cooling

red
heating

E 9 026 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

How to order
Chilled beam unit, KT60BH 1500, 600 mm wide, L = 1494 mm, nominal length of the battery 1200 mm, suited for
T-bar mounting with heating and cooling, nozzle type B.

K T 6 0 B H R 1 4 9 4 1 2 0 0
L nom. length battery
R: water pipes at the right
L: water pipes at the left
D: double air inlet, water pipes at the right
G: double air inlet, water pipes at the left
C: cooling only
H: cooling and heating
E: battery on one side, cooling and heating

B: nozzletype A-B-C-D

0: perforated 51 %, round
1: perforated 44 %, square
2: perforated 51 %, round with pressure measuring point
3: perforated 44 %, square with pressure measuring point

T: T-bar mounting
Z: recessed mounting
S: surface mounting

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 027


INTERNATIONAL

30 400 70
ø123

250
235
1
460
594

L (mm) L1 (mm) L (mm) L1 (mm)


594 462 2094 1962
894 762 2394 2262
1194 1062 2694 2562
1494 1362 2950 2862 L = total length
1794 1662 L1 = plenum length

T-Bar mounting

66 L1 66
37 37
75

23
ø1
40
250

160

25
1
1
50

37
ø400
135

343
460
594

ø1
2

ø123

E 9 027 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

CLOSED ACTIVE BEAM


K-60

Technical information
Cooling tables: length 600 mm

Primary capacity (W) Secondary capacity (W)


K-60 Primary Air
Cooling ∆ Ta = Trm - T prim ∆ T = Trm - Twi
Volume
qw = 120 l/h ∆ Pw = 6 kPa
l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K 6K 7K 8K 9K 10K
3,6 13 130 <23 35 39 43 118 137 157 176 196
3,9 14 150 23 37 42 46 125 146 167 188 209
“A” nozzle 4,2 15 170 24 40 44 49 134 157 179 202 224
600 mm 4,4 16 190 25 42 47 52 142 165 189 212 236
4,6 17 210 27 44 49 55 148 173 198 222 247
5,0 18 250 29 48 54 60 160 187 214 240 267
4,1 15 130 <23 39 44 49 110 129 147 166 184
4,4 16 150 23 42 47 53 119 139 159 179 199
“B” nozzle 4,7 17 170 24 45 50 56 128 149 170 192 213
600 mm 5,0 18 190 25 47 53 59 134 157 179 202 224
5,2 19 210 27 50 56 62 141 165 188 212 235
5,7 21 250 29 54 61 68 152 178 203 229 254
6,6 24 130 <23 63 71 78 136 158 181 203 226
7,1 26 150 23 67 76 84 145 169 193 217 241
“C” nozzle 7,5 27 170 24 72 81 90 153 179 204 230 255
600 mm 8,0 29 190 25 76 85 95 161 188 215 242 269
8,4 30 210 27 80 90 100 169 197 225 253 281
9,2 33 250 29 87 98 109 181 211 241 271 301
8,9 32 130 <23 85 95 106 131 153 175 197 219
9,6 35 150 23 91 103 114 140 164 187 211 234
“D” nozzle
600 mm 10,2 37 170 24 97 109 121 149 174 198 223 248
10,8 39 190 25 103 115 128 156 182 208 234 260
11,4 41 210 27 108 121 135 164 191 218 246 273
12,4 45 250 29 118 132 147 175 204 234 263 292

9
Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 028
INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Cooling tables: length 900 mm

Primary capacity (W) Secondary capacity (W)


K-60 Primary Air ∆ Ta = Trm - T prim ∆ T = Trm - Twi
Cooling Volume
qw = 260 l/h ∆ Pw = 5 kPa
l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K 6K 7K 8K 9K 10K
6,2 22 130 <23 59 67 74 204 238 272 306 340
6,7 24 150 23 64 72 80 221 258 294 331 368
“A” nozzle 68 76 85 234 273 312 351 390
7,1 26 170 24
900 mm
7,5 27 190 25 72 81 90 247 288 329 370 411
7,9 29 210 27 75 85 94 259 302 345 388 431
8,6 31 250 29 82 92 103 280 327 374 420 467
7,1 25 130 <23 67 76 84 192 224 256 288 320
7,6 27 150 23 72 81 90 208 242 277 311 346
“B” nozzle 8,1 29 170 24 77 86 96 223 260 298 335 372
900 mm 8,5 31 190 25 81 91 102 235 274 313 352 391
9,0 32 210 27 85 96 107 246 287 328 369 410
9,8 35 250 29 93 105 116 267 312 356 401 445
11,3 41 130 <23 107 120 134 235 274 314 353 392
12,1 44 150 23 115 129 144 251 293 335 377 419
“C” nozzle 12,9 46 170 24 122 138 153 266 311 355 400 444
900 mm 13,6 49 190 25 129 146 162 281 328 374 421 468
14,3 52 210 27 136 153 170 294 343 392 441 490
15,6 56 250 29 148 167 186 315 368 420 473 525
15,9 57 130 <23 151 170 189 238 277 317 356 396
17,1 62 150 23 163 183 203 254 296 338 381 423
“D” nozzle 18,2 66 170 24 173 195 216 269 314 359 404 449
900 mm 19,2 69 190 25 183 206 229 283 330 378 425 472
20,2 73 210 27 192 216 240 296 346 395 445 494
22,1 79 250 29 210 236 262 318 371 424 477 530

E 9 028 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Cooling tables: length 1200 mm

Primary capacity (W) Secondary capacity (W)


Primary Air
K-60 ∆ Ta = Trm - T prim ∆ T = Trm - Twi
Cooling Volume
qw = 240 l/h ∆ Pw = 5 kPa
l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K 6K 7K 8K 9K 10K
8,8 32 130 <23 84 94 105 281 328 374 421 468
9,5 34 150 23 90 101 113 303 354 404 455 505
“A” nozzle 10,1 36 170 24 96 108 120 321 375 428 482 535
1200 mm 10,7 38 190 25 101 114 127 337 393 450 506 562
11,2 40 210 27 107 120 133 353 412 470 529 588
12,2 44 250 29 116 131 145 381 445 508 572 635
10,0 36 130 <23 95 107 119 265 309 353 397 441
10,8 39 150 23 102 115 128 286 333 381 428 476
“B” nozzle 11,5 41 170 24 109 122 136 306 357 408 459 510
1200 mm
12,1 44 190 25 115 129 144 322 375 429 482 536
12,7 46 210 27 121 136 151 337 393 449 505 561
13,9 50 250 29 132 148 165 364 424 485 545 606
15,9 57 130 <23 151 170 189 322 375 429 482 536
17,1 62 150 23 163 183 203 343 400 458 515 572
“C” nozzle 18,2 66 170 24 173 195 216 363 424 484 545 605
1200 mm 19,2 69 190 25 183 206 229 381 445 508 572 635
20,2 73 210 27 192 216 240 398 465 531 598 664
22,1 79 250 29 210 236 262 426 497 568 639 710
22,5 81 130 <23 214 241 268 325 379 433 487 541
24,2 87 150 23 230 259 287 346 404 462 519 577
“D” nozzle 25,8 93 170 24 245 275 306 366 427 488 549 610
1200 mm 27,2 98 190 25 259 291 323 385 449 513 577 641
28,6 103 210 27 272 306 340 398 464 530 597 663
31,2 112 250 29 297 334 371 430 501 573 644 716

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 029


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Cooling tables: length 1500 mm

Primary capacity (W) Secondary capacity (W)


K-60 Primary Air ∆ Ta = Trm - T prim ∆ T = Trm - Twi
Cooling Volume qw = 240 l/h ∆ Pw = 6 kPa
l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K 6K 7K 8K 9K 10K
11,4 41 130 <23 109 122 136 355 414 473 532 591
12,3 44 150 23 117 131 146 382 446 510 573 637
“A” nozzle 13,1 47 170 24 124 140 155 404 471 538 606 673
1500 mm 13,8 50 190 25 131 148 164 424 494 565 635 706
14,5 52 210 27 138 155 173 443 517 590 664 738
15,8 57 250 29 151 169 188 477 557 636 716 795
13,0 47 130 <23 123 139 154 338 395 451 508 564
13,9 50 150 23 132 149 165 361 421 481 541 601
“B” nozzle 14,8 53 170 24 141 159 176 385 449 514 578 642
1500 mm 15,7 56 190 25 149 168 186 404 472 539 607 674
16,5 59 210 27 157 176 196 423 494 564 635 705
18,0 65 250 29 171 192 214 456 532 608 684 760
20,6 74 130 <23 196 220 244 404 472 539 607 674
22,1 80 150 23 210 237 263 431 503 574 646 718
“C” nozzle 23,6 85 170 24 224 252 280 455 531 606 682 758
1500 mm 24,9 90 190 25 236 266 296 477 557 636 716 795
26,2 94 210 27 249 280 311 497 580 663 746 829
28,5 103 250 29 271 305 339 530 619 707 796 884
29,1 105 130 <23 277 311 346 408 476 544 612 680
31,3 113 150 23 297 334 372 434 507 579 652 724
“D” nozzle 33,3 120 170 24 317 356 396 459 536 612 689 765
1500 mm 35,2 127 190 25 335 376 418 481 561 642 722 802
37,0 133 210 27 352 396 440 497 580 663 746 829
40,4 145 250 29 384 432 480 535 624 714 803 892

E 9 029 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Cooling tables: length 1800 mm

Primary capacity (W) Secondary capacity (W)


K-60 Primary Air ∆ Ta = Trm - T prim ∆ T = Trm - Twi
Cooling Volume qw = 240 l/h ∆Pw = 7 kPa
l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K 6K 7K 8K 9K 10K
13,8 50 130 <23 131 147 164 418 488 558 627 697
14,8 53 150 23 141 158 176 449 524 599 674 749
“A” nozzle 15,7 57 170 24 150 168 187 475 554 633 712 791
1800 mm 16,6 60 190 25 158 178 198 497 580 663 746 829
17,5 63 210 27 166 187 208 519 606 692 779 865
19,1 69 250 29 181 204 227 559 652 745 838 931
15,6 56 130 <23 148 167 185 395 461 526 592 658
16,8 60 150 23 159 179 199 425 496 566 637 708
“B” nozzle 17,8 64 170 24 169 191 212 454 529 605 680 756
1800 mm 18,9 68 190 25 179 202 224 476 555 634 714 793
19,8 71 210 27 188 212 236 496 579 662 744 827
21,6 78 250 29 206 231 257 535 624 713 802 891
25,2 91 130 <23 240 270 300 483 564 644 725 805
27,1 98 150 23 258 290 322 513 599 684 770 855
“C” nozzle 28,9 104 170 24 274 309 343 541 631 721 811 901
1800 mm 30,5 110 190 25 290 326 362 566 661 755 850 944
32,1 115 210 27 305 343 381 585 683 780 878 975
35,0 126 250 29 333 374 416 628 733 838 942 1047
36,1 130 130 <23 343 386 429 492 574 656 738 820
38,8 140 150 23 369 415 461 523 610 697 784 871
“D” nozzle 41,3 149 170 24 392 442 491 551 643 734 826 918
1800 mm 43,7 157 190 25 415 467 519 577 673 769 865 961
45,9 165 210 27 436 491 545 595 694 794 893 992
50,1 180 250 29 476 535 595 639 746 852 959 1065

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 030


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Cooling tables: length 2100 mm

Primary Air Primary capacity (W) Secondary capacity (W)


K-60
Cooling Volume ∆ Ta = Trm - T prim ∆ T = Trm - Twi
qw = 240 l/h ∆ Pw = 9 kPa
l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K 6K 7K 8K 9K 10K
16,3 59 130 <23 155 175 194 485 566 647 728 809
17,6 63 150 23 167 188 209 521 608 695 782 869
“A” nozzle 18,7 67 170 24 178 200 222 549 641 732 824 915
2100 mm 19,8 71 190 25 188 212 235 575 671 767 863 959
20,8 75 210 27 198 222 247 599 699 799 899 999
22,7 82 250 29 216 243 270 644 751 858 966 1073
18,5 67 130 <23 176 198 220 460 536 613 689 766
19,9 72 150 23 190 213 237 493 575 658 740 822
“B” nozzle 21,2 76 170 24 202 227 252 526 613 701 788 876
2100 mm 22,5 81 190 25 214 240 267 551 643 734 826 918
23,6 85 210 27 224 252 280 574 670 766 861 957
25,8 93 250 29 245 275 306 617 720 822 925 1028
29,5 106 130 <23 280 316 351 551 643 734 826 918
31,7 114 150 23 301 339 377 584 682 779 877 974
“C” nozzle 33,7 121 170 24 321 361 401 616 718 821 923 1026
2100 mm 35,7 128 190 25 339 381 424 644 751 858 966 1073
37,5 135 210 27 356 401 446 670 782 894 1005 1117
40,9 147 250 29 389 438 486 712 830 949 1067 1186
42,3 152 130 <23 402 453 503 562 656 750 843 937
45,5 164 150 23 432 486 540 596 696 795 895 994
“D” nozzle 48,4 174 170 24 460 517 575 628 732 837 941 1046
2100 mm 486 547 608
51,2 184 190 25 656 766 875 985 1094
53,8 194 210 27 511 575 639 677 790 902 1015 1128
58,7 211 250 29 558 628 697 725 846 967 1088 1209

E 9 030 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Cooling tables: length 2400 mm

K-60 Primary capacity (W) Secondary capacity (W)


Primary Air
Cooling ∆ Ta = Trm - T prim ∆ T = Trm - Twi
Volume
qw = 675 l/h ∆ Pw = 10 kPa
l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K 6K 7K 8K 9K 10K
19,0 68 130 <23 180 203 225 615 718 820 923 1025
20,4 73 150 23 194 218 242 665 776 886 997 1108
“A” nozzle 21,7 78 170 24 206 232 258 704 822 939 1057 1174
2400 mm 22,9 83 190 25 218 245 272 742 865 989 1112 1236
24,1 87 210 27 229 258 286 776 906 1035 1165 1294
26,3 95 250 29 250 281 312 841 981 1122 1262 1402
21,5 77 130 <23 204 230 255 579 676 772 869 965
“B” nozzle 23,1 83 150 23 220 247 274 626 731 835 940 1044
2400 mm 24,6 89 170 24 234 263 292 671 783 894 1006 1118
26,0 94 190 25 247 278 309 706 824 942 1059 1177
27,3 98 210 27 260 292 325 740 863 986 1110 1233
29,8 107 250 29 283 319 354 802 935 1069 1202 1336
34,2 123 130 <23 325 365 406 707 825 942 1060 1178
36,7 132 150 23 349 392 436 755 881 1006 1132 1258
“C” nozzle
39,1 141 170 24 371 418 464 799 932 1066 1199 1332
2400 mm
41,3 149 190 25 393 442 491 841 981 1122 1262 1402
43,4 156 210 27 413 464 516 880 1027 1174 1320 1467
47,4 171 250 29 450 507 563 942 1099 1256 1413 1570
48,9 176 130 <23 465 523 581 721 841 962 1082 1202
“D” nozzle 52,6 189 150 23 499 562 624 770 899 1027 1156 1284
2400 mm 55,9 201 170 24 532 598 665 816 952 1088 1224 1360
59,1 213 190 25 562 632 703 859 1002 1145 1288 1431
62,2 224 210 27 591 665 739 889 1037 1185 1333 1481
67,8 244 250 29 645 725 806 961 1121 1282 1442 1602

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 031


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Cooling tables: length 2700 mm

Primary Air Primary capacity (W) Secondary capacity (W)


K-60 Volume ∆ Ta = Trm - T prim ∆ T = Trm - Twi
Cooling qw = 785 l/h ∆ Pw = 15 kPa
l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K 6K 7K 8K 9K 10K
21,6 78 130 <23 205 230 256 701 818 934 1051 1168
23,2 83 150 23 220 248 275 757 883 1010 1136 1262
“A” nozzle 24,6 89 170 24 234 264 293 802 936 1070 1203 1337
2700 mm 26,1 94 190 25 248 279 310 845 986 1126 1267 1408
27,4 99 210 27 260 293 325 884 1032 1179 1327 1474
29,9 108 250 29 284 320 355 958 1118 1278 1437 1597
24,4 88 130 <23 232 261 290 667 778 889 1000 1111
26,3 95 150 23 250 281 312 713 832 950 1069 1188
“B” nozzle 28,0 101 170 24 266 299 332 764 891 1018 1146 1273
2700 mm 29,6 106 190 25 281 316 351 805 939 1073 1207 1341
31,1 112 210 27 295 332 369 842 983 1123 1264 1404
33,9 122 250 29 322 362 403 913 1065 1218 1370 1522
38,8 140 130 <23 369 415 461 804 938 1072 1206 1340
41,7 150 150 23 396 446 496 859 1002 1146 1289 1432
“C” nozzle 44,4 160 170 24 422 475 528 910 1062 1214 1365 1517
2700 mm 46,9 169 190 25 446 502 558 958 1117 1277 1436 1596
49,4 178 210 27 469 528 586 1002 1169 1336 1503 1670
53,8 194 250 29 512 576 640 1073 1252 1430 1609 1788
55,1 198 130 <23 524 590 655 815 951 1086 1222 1358
59,2 213 150 23 563 633 704 871 1016 1161 1306 1451
“D” nozzle 63,1 227 170 24 599 674 749 922 1076 1230 1383 1537
2700 mm
66,7 240 190 25 634 713 792 970 1132 1294 1455 1617
70,1 252 210 27 666 749 833 1004 1172 1339 1507 1674
76,5 275 250 29 727 818 908 1087 1268 1449 1630 1811

E 9 031 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Cooling tables: length 2950 mm
Secondary capacity (W)
K-60 Primary Air Primary capacity (W)
∆ T = Trm - Twi
Cooling Volume ∆ Ta = Trm - T prim
qw = 865 l/h ∆ Pw = 20 kPa
l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K 6K 7K 8K 9K 10K
23,6 85 130 <23 225 253 281 768 896 1024 1152 1281
25,4 91 150 23 241 271 302 830 969 1107 1246 1384
“A” nozzle 27,0 97 170 24 257 289 321 880 1027 1174 1320 1467
2950 mm 28,6 103 190 25 272 305 339 927 1081 1235 1390 1544
30,0 108 210 27 285 321 357 970 1132 1294 1455 1617
32,8 118 250 29 311 350 389 1051 1226 1402 1577 1752
26,8 96 130 <23 255 287 318 731 853 975 1097 1219
28,8 104 150 23 274 308 342 782 912 1043 1173 1303
“B” nozzle 30,7 110 170 24 291 328 364 838 978 1117 1257 1397
2950 mm 32,4 117 190 25 308 347 385 883 1030 1177 1324 1471
34,1 123 210 27 324 364 405 924 1078 1232 1386 1540
37,2 134 250 29 353 397 442 1001 1168 1335 1502 1669
42,7 154 130 <23 406 457 507 885 1032 1180 1327 1475
“C” nozzle 45,9 165 150 23 436 491 545 945 1103 1260 1418 1576
2950 mm 48,8 176 170 24 464 522 580 1001 1168 1335 1502 1669
51,6 186 190 25 491 552 613 1053 1229 1405 1580 1756
54,3 195 210 27 516 580 645 1103 1286 1470 1654 1838
59,2 213 250 29 563 633 704 1181 1377 1574 1771 1968
61,0 219 130 <23 579 652 724 901 1051 1201 1351 1501
65,5 236 150 23 622 700 778 962 1123 1283 1443 1604
“D” nozzle
69,7 251 170 24 663 745 828 1019 1189 1359 1529 1699
2950 mm
73,7 265 190 25 700 788 876 1072 1251 1430 1608 1787
77,5 279 210 27 736 828 920 1110 1295 1480 1665 1850
84,5 304 250 29 803 904 1004 1201 1401 1602 1802 2002
qv (l/s and m3/h): Primary air volume supplied into the plenum
Ps (Pa): Static plenum pressure in Pascal
Note: - Due to the low velocity at the 125 mm inlet, the inlet static pressure is
practically equal to the plenum static pressure
- Minimum primary air plenum pressure is 100 Pa

Lw (NR): Noise rate, based on sound power (Lw) without room attenuation or multiple
units
Primary capacity (W): Supply air cooling capacity in Watt (W)

∆ Ta: Temperature difference between the room air temperature and the supply air
temperature (K)
Trm: Room air temperature (°C)
Tprim: Supply air temperature (°C)
Secondary capacity (W): Water cooling capacity in Watt (W)

∆ T: Temperature difference between room air temperature and inlet water


temperature(K)
Twi: Inlet water temperature (°C)
qw: Water flow rate (l/h)

∆ Pw: Water pressure loss (Pa)

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 032


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Heating tables: length 600 mm

Primary Air Primary capacity Secondary capacity (W) Trm = 20°C


K-60 Volume (W) ∆ T = Twi - Trm ∆ a = Ton coil - Toff coil
Heating ∆ Ta = Tprim - Trm
qw = 120 l/h, ∆Pw = 3 kPa qw 60 l/h qw 40 l/h

l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K ∆T (10K)∆a ∆T (20K)∆a ∆T (30K) ∆a ∆T (40K)∆a ∆T (50K) ∆a
3,6 13 130 <23 35 39 43 139 6 278 11 417 17 465 19 454 19
3,9 14 150 23 37 42 46 149 6 298 11 447 17 496 19 483 18
“A” nozzle 4,2 15 170 24 40 44 49 158 6 316 11 474 17 525 19 510 18
600 mm 4,4 16 190 25 42 47 52 166 6 332 11 498 17 552 19 534 18
4,6 17 210 27 44 49 55 171 5 342 11 513 16 568 18 549 18
5,0 18 250 29 48 54 60 183 5 366 11 549 16 604 18 582 17
4,1 15 130 <23 39 44 49 132 6 264 11 396 17 444 19 434 19
4,4 16 150 23 42 47 53 141 6 282 11 423 17 473 19 462 19
“B” nozzle 4,7 17 170 24 45 50 56 150 6 300 11 450 17 501 19 487 18
600 mm 5,0 18 190 25 47 53 59 158 6 316 11 474 17 526 19 511 18
5,2 19 210 27 50 56 62 166 6 332 11 498 17 550 19 533 18
5,7 21 250 29 54 61 68 174 5 348 11 522 16 577 18 557 17
6,6 24 130 <23 63 71 78 159 6 318 11 477 17 530 19 514 18
7,1 26 150 23 67 76 84 167 5 334 11 501 16 556 18 538 18
“C” nozzle 7,5 27 170 24 72 81 90 175 5 350 11 525 16 579 18 559 17
600 mm
8,0 29 190 25 76 85 95 181 5 362 11 543 16 598 17 577 17
8,4 30 210 27 80 90 100 190 5 380 11 570 16 625 17 601 17
9,2 33 250 29 87 98 109 199 5 398 10 597 15 653 17 626 16
8,9 32 130 <23 85 95 106 154 6 308 11 462 17 514 19 499 18
9,6 35 150 23 91 103 114 165 6 330 11 495 17 548 19 530 18
“D” nozzle 10,2 37 170 24 97 109 121 172 6 344 11 516 17 570 18 551 18
600 mm 10,8 39 190 25 103 115 128 178 5 356 11 534 16 590 18 569 17
11,4 41 210 27 108 121 135 184 5 368 11 552 16 607 17 584 17
12,4 45 250 29 118 132 147 196 5 392 10 588 16 644 17 618 16

E 9 032 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Heating tables: length 900 mm

Primary capacity Secondary capacity (W) Trm = 20°C


K-60 Primary Air (W) ∆ T = Twi - Trm ∆ a = Ton coil - Toff coil
Heating Volume ∆ Ta = Tprim - Trm

qw = 120 l/h, ∆Pw = 4 kPa qw 60 l/h qw 40 l/h

l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K ∆T (10K)∆a ∆T (20K)∆a ∆T (30K) ∆a ∆T (40K)∆a ∆T (50K) ∆a
6,2 22 130 <23 59 67 74 230 5 460 11 690 16 747 18 710 17
6,7 24 150 23 64 72 80 245 5 490 11 735 16 793 18 751 17
“A” nozzle
7,1 26 170 24 68 76 85 260 5 520 11 780 16 836 17 788 16
900 mm
7,5 27 190 25 72 81 90 269 5 538 11 807 16 863 17 811 16
7,9 29 210 27 75 85 94 277 5 554 10 831 16 886 17 831 16
8,6 31 250 29 82 92 103 295 5 590 10 885 15 938 16 876 15
7,1 25 130 <23 67 76 84 219 6 438 11 657 17 714 18 681 17
7,6 27 150 23 72 81 90 234 5 468 11 702 16 759 18 720 17
“B” nozzle 8,1 29 170 24 77 86 96 247 5 494 11 741 16 800 18 756 17
900 mm 8,5 31 190 25 81 91 102 260 5 520 11 780 16 838 17 789 16
9,0 32 210 27 85 96 107 268 5 536 11 804 16 861 17 809 16
9,8 35 250 29 93 105 116 286 5 572 10 858 16 912 17 853 15
11,3 41 130 <23 107 120 134 261 5 522 11 783 16 840 17 791 16
“C” nozzle 12,1 44 150 23 115 129 144 274 5 548 11 822 16 878 17 824 16
900 mm 12,9 46 170 24 122 138 153 285 5 570 10 855 15 911 17 853 15
13,6 49 190 25 129 146 162 295 5 590 10 885 15 940 16 877 15
14,3 52 210 27 136 153 170 304 5 608 10 912 15 964 16 898 15
15,6 56 250 29 148 167 186 323 5 646 10 969 14 1019 15 944 14
15,9 57 130 <23 151 170 189 263 5 526 11 789 16 847 17 797 16
17,1 62 150 23 163 183 203 276 5 552 11 828 16 885 17 830 16
“D” nozzle 18,2 66 170 24 173 195 216 288 5 576 10 864 16 919 16 859 15
900 mm 19,2 69 190 25 183 206 229 298 5 596 10 894 15 947 16 883 15
20,2 73 210 27 192 216 240 307 5 614 10 921 15 972 16 904 15
22,1 79 250 29 210 236 262 326 5 652 10 978 14 1027 15 950 14

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 033


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Heating tables: length 1200 mm

Primary capacity Secondary capacity (W) Trm = 20°C


K-60 Primary Air
(W) ∆ T = Twi - Trm ∆ a = Ton coil - Toff coil
Heating Volume
∆ Ta = Tprim - Trm

qw = 120 l/h, ∆Pw = 4 kPa qw 60 l/h qw 40 l/h

l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K ∆T (10K)∆a ∆T (20K)∆a ∆T (30K) ∆a ∆T (40K)∆a ∆T (50K) ∆a
8,8 32 130 <23 84 94 105 315 5 630 11 945 16 995 17 924 16
9,5 34 150 23 90 101 113 335 5 670 10 1005 16 1053 16 972 15
“A” nozzle 10,1 36 170 24 96 108 120 354 5 708 10 1062 16 1106 16 1016 15
1200 mm 10,7 38 190 25 101 114 127 366 5 732 10 1098 15 1139 16 1044 15
11,2 40 210 27 107 120 133 377 5 754 10 1131 15 1168 15 1067 14
12,2 44 250 29 116 131 145 400 5 800 10 1200 15 1231 15 1118 14
10,0 36 130 <23 95 107 119 300 5 600 11 900 16 954 17 889 16
10,8 39 150 23 102 115 128 320 5 640 11 960 16 1010 17 936 15
“B” nozzle 11,5 41 170 24 109 122 136 338 5 676 10 1014 16 1061 16 979 15
1200 mm 12,1 44 190 25 115 129 144 355 5 710 10 1065 16 1108 16 1018 15
12,7 46 210 27 121 136 151 365 5 730 10 1095 15 1137 16 1042 15
13,9 50 250 29 132 148 165 388 5 776 10 1164 15 1199 15 1092 14
15,9 57 130 <23 151 170 189 355 5 710 10 1065 16 1109 16 1018 15
17,1 62 150 23 163 183 203 372 5 744 10 1116 15 1156 16 1057 14
“C” nozzle
18,2 66 170 24 173 195 216 387 5 774 10 1161 15 1196 15 1090 14
1200 mm
19,2 69 190 25 183 206 229 400 5 800 10 1200 15 1231 15 1118 14
20,2 73 210 27 192 216 240 411 5 822 9 1233 14 1261 15 1142 13
22,1 79 250 29 210 236 262 436 5 872 9 1308 14 1326 14 1195 13
22,5 81 130 <23 214 241 268 358 5 716 10 1074 16 1118 16 1026 15
24,2 87 150 23 230 259 287 376 5 752 10 1128 15 1165 16 1065 14
“D” nozzle 25,8 93 170 24 245 275 306 391 5 782 10 1173 15 1206 15 1098 14
1200 mm 27,2 98 190 25 259 291 323 403 5 806 10 1209 15 1240 15 1126 14
28,6 103 210 27 272 306 340 415 5 830 9 1245 14 1270 15 1150 13
31,2 112 250 29 297 334 371 433 5 866 9 1299 14 1318 14 1188 12

E 9 033 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Heating tables: length 1500 mm

Primary capacity Secondary capacity (W) Trm = 20°C


K-60 Primary Air (W) ∆ T = Twi - Trm ∆ a = Ton coil - Toff coil
Heating Volume ∆ Ta = Tprim - Trm

qw = 120 l/h, ∆Pw = 5 kPa qw 60 l/h qw 40 l/h


l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K ∆T (10K)∆a ∆T (20K)∆a ∆T (30K) ∆a ∆T (40K)∆a ∆T (50K) ∆a
11,4 41 130 <23 109 122 136 394 5 788 10 1182 15 1214 16 1105 14
12,3 44 150 23 117 131 146 419 5 838 10 1257 15 1282 16 1159 14
“A” nozzle 13,1 47 170 24 124 140 155 442 5 884 10 1326 15 1343 15 1208 14
1500 mm 456 5 912 10 1368 15 1379 15 1236 13
13,8 50 190 25 131 148 164
14,5 52 210 27 138 155 173 469 5 938 10 1407 14 1413 14 1263 13
15,8 57 250 29 151 169 188 496 5 992 9 1488 14 1483 14 1317 12
13,0 47 130 <23 123 139 154 377 5 754 10 1131 15 1168 16 1068 15
13,9 50 150 23 132 149 165 400 5 800 10 1200 15 1232 16 1119 14
“B” nozzle 14,8 53 170 24 141 159 176 422 5 844 10 1266 15 1291 15 1167 14
1500 mm 15,7 56 190 25 149 168 186 443 5 886 10 1329 15 1344 15 1209 14
16,5 59 210 27 157 176 196 455 5 910 10 1365 15 1377 15 1235 13
18,0 65 250 29 171 192 214 482 5 964 10 1446 14 1447 14 1290 13
20,6 74 130 <23 196 220 244 442 5 884 10 1326 15 1344 15 1209 14
22,1 80 150 23 210 237 263 463 5 926 10 1389 15 1399 15 1252 13
“C” nozzle
23,6 85 170 24 224 252 280 481 5 962 10 1443 14 1444 14 1287 13
1500 mm
24,9 90 190 25 236 266 296 496 5 992 9 1488 14 1482 14 1317 12
26,2 94 210 27 249 280 311 509 5 1018 9 1527 14 1516 14 1342 12
28,5 103 250 29 271 305 339 539 4 1078 9 1617 13 1588 13 1398 11
29,1 105 130 <23 277 311 346 446 5 892 10 1338 15 1354 15 1217 14
31,3 113 150 23 297 334 372 467 5 934 10 1401 15 1408 15 1259 13
“D” nozzle 33,3 120 170 24 317 356 396 485 5 970 10 1455 14 1454 14 1295 13
1500 mm 35,2 127 190 25 335 376 418 501 5 1002 9 1503 14 1493 14 1325 12
37,0 133 210 27 352 396 440 514 5 1028 9 1542 14 1527 13 1351 12
40,4 145 250 29 384 432 480 535 4 1070 9 1605 13 1580 13 1392 11

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 034


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Heating tables: length 1800 mm

Primary capacity Secondary capacity (W) Trm = 20°C


K-60 Primary Air (W) ∆ T = Twi - Trm ∆ a = Ton coil - Toff coil
Heating Volume ∆ Ta = Tprim - Trm
qw = 120 l/h, ∆Pw = 6 kPa qw 60 l/h qw 40 l/h

l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K ∆T (10K)∆a ∆T (20K)∆a ∆T (30K) ∆a ∆T (40K)∆a ∆T (50K) ∆a
13,8 50 130 <23 131 147 164 461 5 922 10 1383 15 1393 15 1247 13
14,8 53 150 23 141 158 176 490 5 980 10 1470 15 1465 15 1304 13
“A” nozzle 15,7 57 170 24 150 168 187 515 5 1030 10 1545 15 1531 14 1354 13
1800 mm 16,6 60 190 25 158 178 198 532 5 1064 9 1596 14 1571 14 1385 12
17,5 63 210 27 166 187 208 546 5 1092 9 1638 14 1606 14 1412 12
19,1 69 250 29 181 204 227 577 4 1154 9 1731 13 1682 13 1468 11
15,6 56 130 <23 148 167 185 441 5 882 10 1323 15 1341 15 1206 14
16,8 60 150 23 159 179 199 469 5 938 10 1407 15 1411 15 1261 13
“B” nozzle 17,8 64 170 24 169 191 212 493 5 986 10 1479 15 1474 15 1311 13
1800 mm 18,9 68 190 25 179 202 224 516 5 1032 10 1548 15 1533 14 1356 13
19,8 71 210 27 188 212 236 530 5 1060 9 1590 14 1568 14 1382 12
21,6 78 250 29 206 231 257 561 5 1122 9 1683 14 1643 13 1439 12
25,2 91 130 <23 240 270 300 524 5 1048 10 1572 15 1552 14 1370 13
27,1 98 150 23 258 290 322 547 5 1094 9 1641 14 1610 14 1414 12
“C” nozzle
28,9 104 170 24 274 309 343 568 5 1136 9 1704 14 1659 13 1451 12
1800 mm
30,5 110 190 25 290 326 362 585 4 1170 9 1755 13 1701 13 1483 11
32,1 115 210 27 305 343 381 600 4 1200 9 1800 13 1737 13 1509 11
35,0 126 250 29 333 374 416 624 4 1248 8 1872 12 1794 12 1551 10
36,1 130 130 <23 343 386 429 526 5 1052 10 1578 14 1557 14 1374 12
38,8 140 150 23 369 415 461 549 5 1098 9 1647 14 1615 14 1418 12
“D” nozzle 41,3 149 170 24 392 442 491 569 5 1138 9 1707 14 1664 13 1455 12
1800 mm 43,7 157 190 25 415 467 519 587 4 1174 9 1761 13 1705 13 1486 11
45,9 165 210 27 436 491 545 610 4 1220 9 1830 13 1761 13 1527 11
50,1 180 250 29 476 535 595 634 4 1268 8 1902 12 1818 12 1569 10

E 9 034 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Heating tables: length 2100 mm
Primary capacity Secondary capacity (W) Trm = 20°C
Primary Air (W) ∆ T = Twi - Trm ∆ a = Ton coil - Toff coil
K-60 Volume ∆ Ta = Tprim - Trm
Heating
qw = 120 l/h, ∆Pw = 7 kPa qw 60 l/h qw 40 l/h
3
l/s m /h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K ∆T (10K)∆a ∆T (20K)∆a ∆T (30K) ∆a ∆T (40K)∆a ∆T (50K) ∆a
16,3 59 130 <23 155 175 194 532 5 1064 10 1596 15 1572 14 1385 13
17,6 63 150 23 167 188 209 563 5 1126 10 1689 14 1649 14 1444 12
18,7 67 170 24 178 200 222 592 5 1184 9 1776 14 1718 14 1495 12
“A” nozzle
2100 mm 19,8 71 190 25 188 212 235 610 5 1220 9 1830 14 1761 13 1527 11
20,8 75 210 27 198 222 247 626 4 1252 9 1878 13 1798 13 1554 11
22,7 82 250 29 216 243 270 660 4 1320 9 1980 13 1878 12 1612 11
18,5 67 130 <23 176 198 220 509 5 1018 10 1527 15 1516 15 1343 13
19,9 72 150 23 190 213 237 540 5 1080 10 1620 14 1592 14 1400 12
21,2 76 170 24 202 227 252 568 5 1136 10 1704 14 1660 14 1452 12
“B” nozzle 593 5 1186 9 1779 14 1721 14 1497 12
22,5 81 190 25 214 240 267
2100 mm
23,6 85 210 27 224 252 280 609 5 1218 9 1827 14 1758 13 1525 11
25,8 93 250 29 245 275 306 643 4 1286 9 1929 13 1838 13 1583 11
29,5 106 130 <23 280 316 351 594 5 1188 9 1782 14 1722 14 1498 12
31,7 114 150 23 301 339 377 619 5 1238 9 1857 14 1783 13 1543 11
“C” nozzle 33,7 121 170 24 321 361 401 641 4 1282 9 1923 13 1835 13 1581 11
2100 mm 35,7 128 190 25 339 381 424 660 4 1320 9 1980 13 1879 12 1612 11
37,5 135 210 27 356 401 446 677 4 1354 8 2031 13 1916 12 1639 10
40,9 147 250 29 389 438 486 712 4 1424 8 2136 12 1997 11 1697 10
42,3 152 130 <23 402 453 503 597 5 1194 9 1791 14 1730 13 1504 12
45,5 164 150 23 432 486 540 623 4 1246 9 1869 13 1791 13 1549 11
“D” nozzle 48,4 174 170 24 460 517 575 645 4 1290 9 1935 13 1842 12 1586 11
2100 mm 51,2 184 190 25 486 547 608 673 4 1346 9 2019 13 1907 12 1633 10
53,8 194 210 27 511 575 639 689 4 1378 8 2067 13 1944 12 1659 10
58,7 211 250 29 558 628 697 715 4 1430 8 2145 12 2003 11 1701 9

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 035


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Heating tables: length 2400 mm

Secondary capacity (W) Trm = 20°C


K-60 Primary Air Primary capacity ∆ T = Twi - Trm ∆ a = Ton coil - Toff coil
Heating (W)
Volume
∆ Ta = Tprim - Trm
qw = 120 l/h, ∆Pw = 8 kPa qw 60 l/h qw 40 l/h

l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K ∆T (10K)∆a ∆T (20K)∆a ∆T (30K) ∆a ∆T (40K)∆a ∆T (50K) ∆a
19,0 68 130 <23 180 203 225 598 5 1196 9 1794 14 1733 14 1506 12
20,4 73 150 23 194 218 242 632 5 1264 9 1896 14 1814 13 1565 11
“A” nozzle 21,7 78 170 24 206 232 258 663 5 1326 9 1989 14 1886 13 1617 11
2400 mm 22,9 83 190 25 218 245 272 683 4 1366 9 2049 13 1931 13 1650 11
24,1 87 210 27 229 258 286 700 4 1400 9 2100 13 1969 12 1677 10
26,3 95 250 29 250 281 312 737 4 1474 8 2211 12 2051 12 1735 10
21,5 77 130 <23 204 230 255 574 5 1148 9 1722 14 1674 14 1462 12
23,1 83 150 23 220 247 274 607 5 1214 9 1821 14 1754 13 1521 12
24,6 89 170 24 234 263 292 637 5 1274 9 1911 14 1825 13 1573 11
“B” nozzle
2400 mm 26,0 94 190 25 247 278 309 665 5 1330 9 1995 14 1889 13 1620 11
27,3 98 210 27 260 292 325 682 4 1364 9 2046 13 1927 13 1647 11
29,8 107 250 29 283 319 354 718 4 1436 9 2154 13 2010 12 1706 10
34,2 123 130 <23 325 365 406 665 5 1330 9 1995 14 1889 13 1620 11
36,7 132 150 23 349 392 436 693 4 1386 9 2079 13 1953 12 1665 11
“C” nozzle 39,1 141 170 24 371 418 464 717 4 1434 9 2151 13 2006 12 1703 10
2400 mm 41,3 149 190 25 737 4 1474 8 2211 12 2051 12 1735 10
393 442 491
43,4 156 210 27 413 464 516 754 4 1508 8 2262 12 2090 11 1761 9
47,4 171 250 29 450 507 563 793 4 1586 8 2379 12 2172 11 1819 9
48,9 176 130 <23 465 523 581 668 4 1336 9 2004 13 1896 13 1624 11
52,6 189 150 23 499 562 624 696 4 1392 9 2088 13 1959 12 1670 10
“D” nozzle 55,9 201 170 24 532 598 665 719 4 1438 8 2157 13 2012 12 1707 10
2400 mm 59,1 213 190 25 562 632 703 749 4 1498 8 2247 12 2078 11 1753 10
62,2 224 210 27 591 665 739 767 4 1534 8 2301 12 2117 11 1780 9
67,8 244 250 29 645 725 806 795 4 1590 8 2385 11 2177 10 1822 9

E 9 035 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Heating tables: length 2700 mm

Secondary capacity (W) Trm = 20°C


K-60 Primary Air Primary capacity ∆ T = Twi - Trm ∆ a = Ton coil - Toff coil
Volume (W)
Heating
∆ Ta = Tprim - Trm
qw = 120 l/h, ∆Pw = 9 kPa qw 60 l/h qw 40 l/h

l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K ∆T (10K)∆a ∆T (20K)∆a ∆T (30K) ∆a ∆T (40K)∆a ∆T (50K) ∆a
21,6 78 130 <23 205 230 256 661 5 1322 9 1983 14 1879 13 1613 11
23,2 83 150 23 220 248 275 697 4 1394 9 2091 13 1963 13 1672 11
“A” nozzle 24,6 89 170 24 234 264 293 730 4 1460 9 2190 13 2037 12 1725 10
2700 mm 26,1 94 190 25 248 279 310 751 4 1502 9 2253 13 2083 12 1757 10
27,4 99 210 27 260 293 325 769 4 1538 8 2307 13 2122 12 1784 10
29,9 108 250 29 284 320 355 809 4 1618 8 2427 12 2206 11 1841 9
24,4 88 130 <23 232 261 290 634 5 1268 9 1902 14 1818 13 1569 11
26,3 95 150 23 250 281 312 670 5 1340 9 2010 14 1901 13 1628 11
“B” nozzle 28,0 101 170 24 266 299 332 702 4 1404 9 2106 13 1974 13 1681 11
2700 mm 29,6 106 190 25 281 316 351 732 4 1464 9 2196 13 2040 12 1727 10
31,1 112 210 27 295 332 369 750 4 1500 9 2250 13 2079 12 1754 10
33,9 122 250 29 322 362 403 789 4 1578 8 2367 12 2163 11 1812 9
38,8 140 130 <23 369 415 461 732 4 1464 9 2196 13 2040 12 1727 10
41,7 150 150 23 396 446 496 761 4 1522 9 2283 13 2105 12 1772 10
“C” nozzle
44,4 160 170 24 422 475 528 787 4 1574 8 2361 12 2159 11 1810 10
2700 mm
46,9 169 190 25 446 502 558 808 4 1616 8 2424 12 2205 11 1841 9
49,4 178 210 27 469 528 586 827 4 1654 8 2481 12 2244 11 1867 9
53,8 194 250 29 512 576 640 867 4 1734 8 2601 11 2328 10 1924 8
55,1 198 130 <23 524 590 655 730 4 1460 9 2190 13 2036 12 1724 10
59,2 213 150 23 563 633 704 760 4 1520 8 2280 13 2101 12 1769 10
“D” nozzle 63,1 227 170 24 599 674 749 795 4 1590 8 2385 12 2176 11 1821 9
2700 mm 66,7 240 190 25 634 713 792 816 4 1632 8 2448 12 2222 11 1853 9
70,1 252 210 27 666 749 833 835 4 1670 8 2505 12 2261 11 1879 9
76,5 275 250 29 727 818 908 865 4 1730 7 2595 11 2322 10 1920 8

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 036


INTERNATIONAL

Technical information
Heating tables: length 2950 mm

Primary capacity Secondary capacity (W) Trm = 20°C


K-60 Primary Air (W) ∆ T = Twi - Trm ∆ a = Ton coil - Toff coil
Heating Volume ∆ Ta = Tprim - Trm

qw = 120 l/h, ∆Pw = 10 kPa qw 60 l/h qw 40 l/h

l/s m3/h Ps(Pa) Lw(NR) 8K 9K 10K ∆T (10K)∆a ∆T (20K)∆a ∆T (30K) ∆a ∆T (40K)∆a ∆T (50K) ∆a
23,7 85 130 <23 225 253 281 708 4 1416 9 2124 13 1987 12 1690 11
25,4 91 150 23 241 271 302 746 4 1493 9 2239 13 2072 12 1749 10
“A” nozzle 27,0 97 170 24 257 289 321 781 4 1562 9 2343 13 2147 12 1801 10
2950 mm 28,6 103 190 25 272 305 339 803 4 1606 8 2409 13 2194 11 1833 10
30,0 108 210 27 285 321 357 822 4 1643 8 2465 12 2233 11 1860 9
32,8 118 250 29 311 350 389 863 4 1725 8 2588 12 2318 11 1917 9
26,8 96 130 <23 255 287 318 681 5 1361 9 2042 14 1925 13 1645 11
28,8 104 150 23 274 308 342 718 4 1436 9 2154 13 2009 12 1705 11
“B” nozzle 30,7 110 170 24 291 328 364 752 4 1504 9 2255 13 2084 12 1757 10
2950 mm 32,4 117 190 25 308 347 385 783 4 1565 9 2348 13 2150 12 1804 10
34,1 123 210 27 324 364 405 801 4 1603 8 2404 13 2190 11 1831 10
37,2 134 250 29 353 397 442 842 4 1683 8 2525 12 2275 11 1888 9
42,7 154 130 <23 406 457 507 784 4 1569 9 2353 13 2154 12 1806 10
45,9 165 150 23 436 491 545 815 4 1631 8 2446 12 2220 11 1851 9
“C” nozzle 48,8 176 170 24 464 522 580 842 4 1683 8 2525 12 2275 11 1888 9
2950 mm
51,6 186 190 25 491 552 613 864 4 1728 8 2592 12 2321 10 1919 9
54,3 195 210 27 516 580 645 883 4 1767 8 2650 11 2360 10 1945 8
59,2 213 250 29 563 633 704 914 4 1828 7 2741 11 2422 10 1986 8
61,0 219 130 <23 579 652 724 786 4 1571 8 2357 13 2157 12 1808 10
65,5 236 150 23 622 700 778 816 4 1633 8 2449 12 2222 11 1853 9
“D” nozzle 69,7 251 170 24 663 745 828 843 4 1685 8 2528 12 2277 11 1890 9
2950 mm 73,7 265 190 25 700 788 876 876 4 1751 8 2627 12 2345 10 1935 9
77,5 279 210 27 736 828 920 895 4 1790 8 2685 11 2384 10 1961 8
84,5 304 250 29 803 904 1004 926 4 1851 7 2777 11 2445 9 2001 8

qv (l/s and m3/h): Primary air volume supplied into the plenum
Ps (Pa): Static plenum pressure in Pascal
Note: - Due to the low velocity at the 125 mm inlet, the inlet static pressure is
practically equal to the plenum static pressure
- Minimum primary air plenum pressure is 50 Pa
Lw (NR): Noise rate, based on sound power (Lw) without room attenuation or multiple units
Primary capacity (W): Supply air heating capacity in Watt (W)
∆ Ta: Temperature difference between the room air temperature and the supply air
temperature (K)
Trm: Room air temperature (°C)
Tprim: Supply air temperature (°C)
Secondary capacity (W): Water heating capacity in Watt (W)
∆ T: Temperature difference between room air temperature and inlet water
temperature (K)
Twi: Inlet water temperature (°C)
∆ a: Temperature difference between the secondary (induced) air temperature after
coil and the secondary (induced) air temperature on the coil (K)
Toff coil: Secondary (induced) air temperature after coil
Ton coil: Secondary (induced) air temperature on coil (Trm)
qw: Waterflow (l/h)
∆ Pw: Water pressure loss (Pa)

E 9 036 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Example:
Water pressure loss in kPa (Cooling)
Given:
- beam active length 1500 mm
17,0
cooling this is a dual circuit coil

Solution:
15,0
2100 - ∆ Pw at 210 l/h is 5 kPa
600 - ∆ Pw at 270 l/h is 8 kPa
13,0

1800
Water pressure (kPa)

11,0

1500
3000
9,0
2700
1200
2400
7,0

900
5,0

3,0

1,0
50 150 250 350 450 550

Waterflow (l/h)

Water flow rate should be turbulent to ensure effective heat transfer. Minimum rec-
ommended flow is 80 l/h for single circuit coils and for dual circuit coils 160 l/h.

Example:
Water pressure loss in kPa (Heating)
Given:
- beam active length 1800 mm
3000 heating this is a single circuit coil
21,00
2700
Solution:
2400 - ∆ Pw at 125 l/h is 7 kPa
- ∆ Pw at 95 l/h is 4 kPa
2100
Water pressure (kPa)

16,00

1800

1500 Note: Chilled beams do not use


11,00
control valves. The open/close
1200 valves used have low water pres-
sure loss.
900
6,00
600

1,00
50 70 90 110 130 150 170

Waterflow (l/h)

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 037


INTERNATIONAL

Example:
Sound power without room attenuation
Given:
- beam active length 1500 mm
dB(A) - 50 m3/h
- A-nozzle
32,0 NR

Solution:
30,0 - look up the performance
guide (cooling or heating) for
this beam length and type of
Noise rate Lw

nozzle
28,0
- 50 m3/h = 190 Pa
- 190 Pa = 27 dB(A) or NR26

26,0
NOTE:

24,0 • The difference between the NR


and the dB(A) value is more or
less 1. This is because the
22,0 acoustic spectrum contains
100 150 200 250 300 much high frequency noise
and less low frequency noise.
Static pressure (Pa)
• Sound power for all models is
Sound power NR level measurements are determined by values in the without allowance for room
4 kHz octave band. attenuation or multiple units.

E 9 037 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

Table 1: conversion factor for primary air volume of different nominal beam Room air movement diagrams
lengths to primary air per meter used in the graphs.
These are average velocities for undis-
Nom.length (mm) 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 2950 rupted air flow, cooling.
Actual measured values at ∆ Ta = 8K
K-60 A 2,333 1,458 1,061 0,833 0,686 0,583 0,507 0,449 0,409
were within the limits shown.
K-60 B 2,000 1,250 0,909 0,714 0,588 0,500 0,435 0,385 0,351
K-60 C 1,667 1,042 0,758 0,595 0,490 0,417 0,362 0,321 0,292
K-60 D 1,333 0,833 0,606 0,476 0,392 0,333 0,290 0,256 0,234
Example:

Given:
- K-60B 1800 mm (nozzle B)
- Primary air volume is 100 m3/h

Required:
- m3/h,m
- volume per (active) meter

Solution:
- Factor from table no 1 for K-60B 1800
mm is 0,59
V1, V2 and V3: room air velocities (the occupied zone is shaded).
- m3/h,m = 0,59 x 100 = 59 m3/h,m
X Y

KB KB

V V
1

0,5m 1,8m 2,7m

- V1 = room air movement at 1,8 m height and on 0,5 m from the wall (m/s)
- V2 = room air movement at 0,1 m height and on 0,5 m from the wall (m/s)
- V3 = room air movement at 1,8 m height and in the middle of two beams (m/s)
- H = ceiling height - height occupied zone (1,8 m)
- L1 = X + H where X = is distance to the wall
- L2 = X + ceiling height - 0,1 m
- L3= Y + H where 2 x Y is the distance between similar beams with an equal primary air volume
- occupied zone = marked height 1,8 m (shaded)

Graph v1, v2 and v3 room air velocities (the occupied zone is shaded).

Specifications subject to change © 9-2009 E 9 038


INTERNATIONAL

Example:
Room air velocity in m/s at point V1
Given:
< 0,05m/s < 0,1m/s < 0,15m/s < 0,2m/s - active length 1800 mm, nozzle C
- primary air volume = 126 m3/h or
Primary air volume (m /h.m)

62 m3/h,m (from table n°1)


80
- ceiling height = 2,7 m or H = 2,7 -
1,8 = 0,9 m
3

70
- required air movement V1 < 0,15
60 m/s

50 Solution:
- L1 = 3,3 m and X = 3,3 - 0,9 = 2,4
40 m maximum distance from the
wall
30
- if the ceiling height was 2,9 m
L1 meters
then H = 1,1 m and X = 2,2 m
20
maximum distance from the wall
2 2,5 3 3,5 4 4,5 5

L1 (m)

Example:
Floor air velocity in m/s at point V2
Given:
- active length 1800 mm, nozzle C
< 0,4m/s < 0,35m/s - primary air volume = 95 m3/h or
46 m3/h,m (from table n°1)
Primary air volume (m /h.m)

80 < 0,3m/s - ceiling height = 2,7 m


- required air movement V2 < 0,25
70
3

< 0,25m/s m/s


60
Solution:
< 0,2m/s - L2 = 6 m and X = 6 - 2,6 = 3,4 m
50
minimum distance from the wall
40 < 0,15m/s - for air movement V2 < 0,30 m/s
L2 = 4,1 m and X = 4,1 - 2,6 = 1,5
30 < 0,1m/s m minimum distance from the
wall
20 - for air movement V2 < 0,35 m/s
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 L2 = 3,2 m and X = 3,2 - 2,6 = 0,6
m minimum distance from the
L2 (m) wall

Room air velocity in m/s at point V3. Example:


This is midway between two beams with an equal volume.
Given:
< 0,35m/s < 0,25m/s - active length 1800 mm, nozzle C
< 0,4m/s < 0,3m/s
- primary air volume = 126 m3/h or
Primary air volume (m /h.m)

< 0,2m/s
80 62 m3/h.m (from table n°1)
- ceiling height = 2,6 m or H = 2,6 -
3

70 1,8 = 0,8 m
< 0,15m/s - required air movement V3 < 0,25
60
m/s
50
Solution:
40 - L3 = 4 m and Y = 4 - 0,8 = 3,2 m.
< 0,1m/s
The minimum distance between
30 the beams should be 6,4m
- if the ceiling height was 2,8 m,
20 then H = 1 m and Y = 3 m, then 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 m would be sufficient distance
L3 (m) between similar diffusers.
The testing for these results was done under strictly controlled laboratory condi-
tions. A room with furniture and people will obstruct air movement. Air velocities
shown are average values.
Deviations are largest at V3 where two air streams meet.

E 9 038 Specifications subject to change © 9-2009


INTERNATIONAL

USE OF THE SELECTION DIAGRAMS FOR GRILLES AND SLOT DIFFUSERS

SUPPLY GRILLES Symbols


1. Selection data: qv = Supply air in m3/h
A. Required primary air flow rate qv
B. Required throw LT ∆ pt = Total pressure loss in Pascal (Pa)
C. Permissible room air velocity vR
vk = Supply air velocity in m/s (velometer rea-
D. Permissible noise rating index NR
2. Locate the point of intersection of the line cor- ding)
responding to the required air flow rate qv, and the
= Exhaust air velocity in m/s
line, according to the throw requirement (horizontal
lines), corresponding to the predetermined room air Ak = Area factor in m2 relative to vk
velocity (vR).
3. Following the vertical line nearest to that intersection Ak hor. = Ak for horizontal supply
in downward direction, one can determine the
nominal dimensions of one or more grilles, satisfying Ak vert. = Ak for vertical supply
all initial conditions.
4. Once selection terminated, one can derive :
An = Neck area in m2
1. the real supply air velocity vk LT = Throw in m
2. the real throw value LT of the chosen diffuser
3. the real noise level rating index NR vT = Envelope velocity in m/s (terminal velocity)
5. Total pressure loss (∆pt) is represented in the diagram
(vk, ∆pt). The given values are indicated for a fully vR = Room air velocity in m/s (residual velocity)
open damper, unless stated otherwise.
• pt = pd + ps NR = Noise level index according to ISO, based
• pd = velocity pressure, exerted only in the direction on LW without room attenuation
of air motion
v2 v2
LW = Sound power level index in dB (ref. 10-12 W)
pd (mm H2O) = r —— or pd (Pa = N/m2) = r ——
2g 2 HC = Ceiling height in m
r = specific density of standard air, about 1,2 kg/ m3
g = gravity acceleration constant, about 9,81 m/s2 ∆ tS = Temperature differential between supply
v = duct air velocity in m/s air and room air temperature in °C
So : pd (mm H2O) = 0,061 v2 and pd (N/m2) = 0,6 v2
• ps = static pressure exerted in every direction. The ps ∆ tL = Maximum temperature differential between
value can be calculated, based on pt and v. jet and room air temperature in °C
The pressure pt is also measured in the direction of
air motion tR = Room air temperature in °C
D = Damper throttling ( % open)
Total air stream volume
i = Induction = ——————————————
Supply air volume qv
EXHAUST GRILLES
Af = Calculated free area in m2
1. Selection data:
A. Exhaust air flow (Q) vf = Calculated supply air velocity in m/s
B. Required noise rating ∆ ps = Static pressure loss in Pa
index NR
C. Total pressure loss (∆pt) dB(A) = Sound power level with filter “A”
2. Find the point of intersec-
tion of the lines correspon-
ding to the required air
flow rate (Q) and to the qv = vk x Ak (m3/s)=(m/s)x(m2)
noise rating index NR, or
qv = vk x Ak x 3600 (m3/h)=(m/s)x(m2)x(s/h)
the value ∆pt at a certain
damper opening.
3. Following the dimension
indicator line nearest to
that intersection in down-
ward direction, one can
determine immediately
one or more grilles satis-
fying all initial conditions.
4. Determine the supply air
velocity vk
INTERNATIONAL

USE OF CATALOGUE USE OF SELECTION DIAGRAMS FOR DIFFUSERS


The catalogue consists of two sorts of leaflet per
product.

= A general leaflet with detailed product Selection diagram for diffusers with equal throws in all directions
information and a fast selection diagram. In this dia-
gram, there are only some dimensions and this only
1. Point of intersection of Q-line and the
for one room air velocity.
= A technical leaflet with more details for line corresponding to the nominal
the selection of more dimensions and velocities, dimension, determines vk and NR.
pressure loss, selection example, etc.. 2. Transfer this point to the left of the dia-
gram and read 3 different throws LT for
different envelope velocities (vT).

Page numbering
E 2 010

leaflet n°

chapter

language

Selection diagram for diffusers with 2 unequal throws in different directions

1. Point of intersection of the Q-line cor-


responding to the nominal dimensions
of the diffuser, yields vk and NR.
2. This vk line is transfered to the right side
of the diagram.
3. Point of intersection of vk line and both
lines corresponding to the Ak values of
each supply section horizontally trans-
mitted to the right, allows to determine
throw : Lx and Ly for 3 different envelope
velocities, vT.

You might also like